ã€ŠSun and Moon Blades of Kunlunã€‹


 Chapter 1 - Chase

    The Central Plains had been left behind. Over mountains, across rivers and valleys, and now here. A rocky plain at the foot of an unfamiliar mountain, the final destination of a journey more than six months long.

    The Kunlun sect.

    It was out there somewhere.

    Somewhere on the western slopes of the nearest mountain hides an enclave of Taoist masters. Alone and isolated from the rest of the world for decades.

    Four riders made their way there now, wondering if they would be welcomed by the secluded ascetics.

    --If any of them are still alive.-- Pengfei thought to himself, staring at the landscape ahead, undulating with the steady steps of his horse.

    --They took in new disciples five years ago¡­ But did anyone confirm that?--

    Rumors and speculation. Pengfei had been reviewing what little he knew of Kunlun ever since the mountains had come into view on the northern horizon.

    ¡°You¡¯re not just going to send me up the mountain alone and leave, right? You¡¯re going to wait until we¡¯re sure there¡¯s someone there?¡± Pengfei broke a long silence

    ¡°You really need to relax.¡± Zeng Zihao didn¡¯t bother to answer the question he had heard so many times before.

    ¡°Right, right.¡± Pengfei looked back to the northwest again.

    For the others, the sect was just a waypoint. The escorts from Qingcheng would head home along the Desert Road through Xinjiang, and Pema, their guide, would reunite with her nomadic clan somewhere nearby. But in a day or two, the Kunlun sect would become Pengfei¡¯s new home.

    --Shaolin, Kongtong, Zhongnan, Nangong, Emei--

    Pengfei recited the list for the thousandth, no, the ten thousandth time. Never aloud. It was a secret even from the travelling companions who had become friends. A message from the elders of Qingcheng to those of Kunlun.

    --Shaolin, Kongtong, Zhongnan, Nangong, Emei--

    Saying the mantra eased Pengfei¡¯s nervous mind. His gaze drifted from the distant hills and back to Pema. She was at her customary place at the head of the party, guiding them through the desolate landscape. Her braids mixed in haphazardly with loose hair and bounced on her back in rhythm with her mount¡¯s gait. She hummed an unknown tune.

    ¡°Will you miss me Pema?¡±

    ¡°No.¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s joking question was answered in the same tone. Ma Feng laughed aloud. The boys glanced at each other and then both looked ahead. Feng picked up the tune where Pema had left off and soon she was humming along with him.

    --I¡¯ll miss you both.-- Pengfei thought.

    A bit of a love triangle had developed when Pema had joined them in Nagqu. Pengfei, 14, and the slightly older Ma Feng both seemed infatuated with the Tibetan girl who rode so splendidly. She was effortlessly kind to both but if she preferred one over the other she hid it marvelously well.

    Zeng Zihao shook his head, seemingly amused whenever he noticed the boys¡¯ sidelong glances, perhaps remembering his own teenage infatuations. They weren¡¯t all that long ago, after all.

    The four of them had endured a long and difficult journey, though relatively free of genuine danger. Pengfei had the vague impression some intrigue had taken place before they had departed the Central Plains, that more travelers should have accompanied them. A new generation of disciples to learn at the feet of the Taoist elders and carry on the proud lineage of a once powerful sect.

    Instead, only Pengfei would enter the gates, delivered by a small party to avoid attention. And the trip had indeed passed without incident so far.

    So, Pengfei did not immediately feel worried when he noticed three black specks descending the southern face of the nearest mountain. He was surprised but calm, even when he recognized them for what they were, riders on horseback.

    He noticed Zihao following their movements as well, and asked the man, ¡°Who are they? Kunlun?¡±

    ¡°Could be. We¡¯re close enough to their territory.¡±

    But Pema disagreed. ¡°They¡¯re wearing black. Kunlun wears grey.¡±

    Pengfei couldn¡¯t distinguish between man and mount but Pema¡¯s eyesight had consistently proven to be the best in the group. Her statement went unchallenged.

    The high elevation of the plateau and sparse rainfall prevented the growth of most vegetation, so there was an unobstructed view in every direction. They were able to monitor the strangers as they slowly descended the mountain, growing more alert as it became clear that the distant group had set a course that would intercept the party.

    ¡°Let¡¯s pick up the pace.¡± Zihao commanded.

    The four of them dug their heels into their horses¡¯ sides and urged them forward at a canter, still not quite sure how to feel about the situation but with increasingly nervous glances over their shoulders. When the distant figures reached the bottom of their mountain, they became obscured by the small dips and hills of the plain.

    Pengfei and his companions only became more tense when the strangers disappeared from view. Still, he had faith in his escorts. Every day when they made camp Zeng Zihao would spend at least an hour teaching his junior, Ma Feng, the finer points of the Qingcheng sword. They both displayed incredible technique. Blade, bare hands, the movement skills that defied gravity and logic. Their proficiency was evident in everything Pengfei had seen.Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Two hours passed. They had been keeping a moderate pace, alternating between a brisk canter and a quick walk to conserve their horses¡¯ energy. The strangers had opted for speed over stamina. They appeared on the crest of a hill behind the party. Closer, but still several li away.

    ¡°Zihao¡­¡±. Pengfei began.

    ¡°I see them.¡±

    Ma Feng squinted at the pursuers. ¡°Could they be from the Demonic Cult?¡±

    ¡°Maybe. Their land is not too far to the north¡­ Either way, I don¡¯t want to meet them out in the open.¡±

    --The Demonic Cult!?--

    Pengfei was taken aback at that. He knew little about the great sects and clans that were the sturdy trees of the Wulin, the Martial Forest. But any fool knew that the Demonic Cult was to be avoided.

    A trickle of sweat ran down his neck.

    ¡°Come on!¡± Zihao spurred his horse to a gallop and the others followed suit.

    The pursuers dropped in and out of sight with each crest and valley. The black specks bobbed along on the landscape like motes of pollen on a rippling pond as the party sped through the hills.

    The horses kicked up rocks and tough earth and all other sounds were obscured by the pounding of their hooves. The animals were sweating profusely now despite the cool bite in the air as afternoon became evening.

    A large lake came into view on their left. The mounts were undoubtedly thirsty, but the party did not veer off course. Still, the breathing of the animals was too labored to be ignored. Pengfei glanced behind but could not see any sign of the black-clad strangers. He looked to Pema and motioned to the horses. She nodded.

    Pengfei shouted to the others. Shouted over the sound of wind and hoof. The party slowed.

    ¡°What is it?!¡± Zihao demanded.

    ¡°The horses can¡¯t keep the pace!¡± Pengfei struggled to say. The animals were doing most of the work but staying in the jostling saddle was still taxing in the thin air.

    Zihao looked back, considered. He and Ma Feng had spent most of their lives on Mount Qingcheng and were only middling riders. They had come to rely on the advice of first Pengfei, and later Pema, when it came to riding.

    Zihao nodded in concession.

    ¡°Five minutes walk.¡±

    The four of them drew close together as the horses continued at the slower gait.

    ¡°Do you know where we are? How far to the sect?¡± Ma Feng asked of Pema.

    ¡°That is Kotra Tso.¡± She nodded toward the south and the lake in the distance. ¡°From here, maybe 12 hours hard ride.¡±

    They collectively looked at the sky where the sun hung low in the west. They would lose all light within two hours and there would be no moon that evening.

    ¡°Can you find the way in the dark?¡± Zihao asked.

    Pema hesitated a moment.

    ¡°I think so. Yes.¡±

    ¡°Will the horses make it?¡± Pengfei was still concerned about their breathing. They were of Tibetan stock and he deferred to Pema¡¯s knowledge on the breed.

    ¡°Hard to say. It¡¯ll help to drop some weight.¡±

    With a deftness coming from a life on horseback Pema threw her legs over her mount, turning backwards in her saddle. She took a knife from her waistband and cut free the small saddle bags hanging from her horse¡¯s back. Pengfei completed the same maneuver but without the same grace. Pema kept only a quiver of arrows and a bow, still strung from an attempted hunt earlier in the day and, as her usual hunting partner, Pengfei was similarly equipped.

    The Qingcheng swordsmen kept their swords and nothing else. Ma Feng switched his scabbard from his left to right and back again, nervously.

    ¡°So, we just race them to Kunlun?¡±

    ¡°If we make it to nightfall, we might lose them in the dark.¡± Zihao suggested.

    ¡°I don¡¯t think we have that long.¡± Pengfei pointed back behind them. The strangers in black were coming out of the hills into the basin around the lake. The gap had narrowed considerably. Just a few li away now.

    ¡°Pengfei, you and Pema go, we¡¯ll stay here and ¨C ¡± Ma Feng began, but Zihao interrupted.

    ¡°No, we stay together.¡±

    The older escort set his horse to trot, and the others did the same. It seemed inevitable that the others would catch up before nightfall but the party kept moving. They monitored the strangers¡¯ progress and set to a gallop when the gap had shrunk to less than a li.

    The stamina of the horses gave out before dusk. When Zihao¡¯s mare slowed noticeably, the swordsman pulled back on the reins and turned to face the strangers. Ma Feng pulled up next to him while Pengfei and Pema kept to the rear.

    --Shit, shit, shit!--

    Pengfei kept his fearful cursing to himself.

    The Qingcheng swordsman moved their swords to their laps but made no move to draw them.

    Pengfei was unsure how much help he and Pema would be if the encounter turned violent. They were both good archers. Pengfei¡¯s skill came from an aristocratic upbringing hunting in the Central Plains. Pema¡¯s from the necessity of a life on the Tibetan steppe. However, Zihao had spoken of masters who could swat arrows away like insects.

    They nocked arrows anyway.

    --A person¡­ will it be the same as aiming at a hare?--

    The strangers stopped their horses twenty paces away.

    Silence.

    The two groups appraised each other. Two young men and one middle-aged, swords on their hips. They gave the impression of soldiers. Cold eyes, and when the leader spoke, it was without any pleasantries.

    ¡°No one may approach Kunlun.¡±

    The words hung in the air. Several awkward moments passed before Zihao finally spoke, disregarding the man¡¯s statement.

    ¡°Who are you three? The Demonic Cult?¡±

    The leader¡¯s long, thin, face betrayed no emotion before he spoke again.

    ¡°Kunlun has closed its gates. No one may enter.¡±

    ¡°No outsiders may enter. But this boy will become a disciple of Kunlun.¡± Zihao corrected the man, gesturing toward Pengfei.

    ¡°They received disciples five years ago. They don¡¯t need anymore.¡±

    ¡°But they will have him anyway.¡±

    The verbal exchange came to an end and the strangers looked at each other. No more words were spoken but they drew their swords in a seamless unison.

    ¡°Turn around.¡± It was said with the same cool voice as the rest of his words but there was an unambiguous threat in the man¡¯s words.

    Zihao examined the opponents closely.

    ¡°Pema, Pengfei, the man on the right¡±

    Pengfei didn¡¯t understand what Zihao meant at first, but when Pema lifted her bow and took aim, he realized he was meant to target the stranger. He raised his own bow and looked down the arrow¡¯s shaft at the man.

    --That¡¯s not a hare.-- Pengfei tried not to see the human face in front of him. He focused on the black fabric of clothes instead. The arrowhead danced wildly in front of his hand.

    ¡°Don¡¯t do this.¡± Zihao¡¯s last attempt to avoid conflict.

    The dark-clad men jumped from their horses¡¯ backs and high into the air. Pengfei tried to track his target as the man soared upwards. He loosed his arrow but it went wide. Pema¡¯s shot was more accurate but the man flicked the arrow away with his sword.

    Just like in the stories.

    The three strangers all converged on Zeng Zihao and Ma Feng. The two Qingcheng swordsmen jumped back off their horses and landed on the earth in front of Pema and Pengfei.

    The leader with the thin face and one of his subordinates went for Zihao, the remaining man for Ma Feng.

    Clang! Clang! Clang!

    Eerie metallic sounds could be heard in quick succession as attacks were blocked and parried. The unattended horses startled at the sound and ran a short distance away.

    Pema and Pengfei retreated a bit, looking for clear shots at the assailants but they were moving too quickly and too closely to Zihao and Feng.

    The thin-faced leader hung back and let his fellows do most of the work. Zihao¡¯s opponent seemed to be holding his own while Ma Feng was being pushed backward with almost every attack. Whenever Zihao tried to move and assist him, the enemy leader stepped in to block his path with a slash of his blade.

    ¡°We have to get out of here.¡± Pema appraised the situation quickly. ¡°I¡¯ll get Feng and Zihao¡¯s horses. Kill the other ones so these bastards can¡¯t follow us.¡±

    Pema spurred her horse, lariat already in hand, and headed for Zihao and Ma¡¯s horses while Pengfei made for the others. He looped wide around the melee, glancing nervously to see if his friends were still alive.

    Pengfei looked over just in time to see one of the strangers run Ma Feng through with his sword.

 Chapter 2 - Caught

    --That bastard¡¯s strong.--  Zihao observed the man in the center, the way he seemed perfectly balanced, the way he concealed his qi.  The one with the thin face seemed completely unconcerned at the prospect of combat but his subordinates gave off subtle hints of nervousness.

    --Still, they¡¯re not easy.  Too much for Feng.--  He left his doubts unspoken and instead looked over his shoulder.

    ¡°Pema, Pengfei, the man on the right¡±.

    Thin-face began to release his internal energy and his followers did the same.  Zihao could feel it in the air and in his gut.  His own qi crackled in a sympathetic response, bringing every nerve and muscle to life.

    Readiness began to tip over into anxiety until Zihao made a conscious effort to rein it in.  He kept his breath even and spoke with a voice so flat that no one would suspect such emotions had ever been there.

    ¡°Don¡¯t do this.¡±

    But the men ignored him, leaping into air.  Their arc took them higher than any normal human could hope to jump.

    Feng and Zihao drew their swords and hopped backwards off their horses as arrows flew overhead.  The men in black landed a few paces away, unharmed.  One tried to break off and head for Pema and Pengfei but Zihao dashed to intercept.

    <u>Cloud Step (yun bu - </u><u>ë…</u><u>²½)</u>

    The qinggong of his sect, the movement techniques that allowed swordsmen to make lunges of a dozen paces and walk on snow without leaving tracks, propelled Zihao forward with blinding speed.

    Once their swords crossed it was clear that the man in black could move almost as quickly.  Zihao¡¯s thrust was deflected and the opponent came back with a thrust of his own.

    Meanwhile, the largest of the three strangers was pushing Feng back with powerful strokes that left their swords ringing after each exchange.  Feng¡¯s attempts at offense broke on the stranger¡¯s guard like water splashing on rocks and sent the young warrior backpedaling.

    Zihao tried to make a dash towards his junior.   He used cloud step again and barely outpaced his opponent but then thin-face was there, attacking.

    The man in black gave a seemingly lazy slash with his sword but blocking it knocked Zihao off his feet.  He landed hard on his back, quickly rolled over his shoulder to standing again.

    ¡°Qingcheng swordsmanship¡­,¡± the attacker said with a sneer.

    Zihao and Feng had packed their distinctive blue robes away early in the journey to travel incognito.  But the man had identified their style from a few brief glimpses and one short exchange.

    Zihao made yet another dash but the man moved laterally to block the path once more.

    It was then.  Over the leader¡¯s shoulder, Zihao saw Ma Feng¡¯s opponent thrust his sword through the boy¡¯s midsection.

    ¡°No!!!¡±

    The junior brother he had known for more than ten years spat out blood and fell to his knees.

    Zihao summoned the energy stored in his dantian.  He took the briefest of moments to focus on the circulation of his qi.  He guided the energy from his core to his legs and sword-arm.  He screamed and coiled like a snake before a strike, then exploded forward.  His blade unleashed a dozen thrusts as he moved.

    <u>Rain from the blue sky (lan tian yu ¨C </u><u>Ë{ÌìÓê</u><u>)</u>

    The thrusts were fast, the sword almost invisible as it shuttled forward and back.  Each attack was meant to be as unpredictable and obscure as rain falling from a clear blue sky.

    The beginnings of sword qi were faintly detectable with each attack.  If Zihao trained for a few more years the technique would undoubtedly develop into something as oppressive as the torrent of a monsoon.

    But now was not the time to use this.  It was not meant to be brought forward in isolation like this, without preamble or strategy.  Instead of rain falling from a clear sky, it was as obvious as a downpour coming from blackened storm clouds.

    The thin-faced man effortlessly evaded the strong frontal attack and an arm as he sidestepped.

    Zihao ignored the pain and continued his push toward the man standing above Ma Feng. The stranger was poised to deal a killing blow.

    ¡°Watch out Guoyu!¡± a voice called from behind but the warning came too late to help the stranger.  Zihao sliced through the man¡¯s wrist with a swift stroke.  A powerful spurt of blood erupted from the severed limb as the sword fell together with the hand still holding it.

    The amputee staggered backward clutching his bleeding stump.  Zihao spun to look for the other attackers, his left arm now hanging useless at his side due to the wound incurred in reaching his junior.  Ma Feng was on his knees coughing and whimpering in pain.

    ¡°Hold on Feng.¡±

    --Hold on for what?--

    Zihao wasn¡¯t sure.

    The boy¡¯s attacker had staggered back over to his companions and was being tended to urgently by one of them.  The thin-faced man just stared at Zihao.

    ¡°It would have been better for everyone if you had done as you were told and just turned back.¡±

    Before Zihao could consider the truth of the man¡¯s words, he heard pounding hooves behind him.  He glanced back quickly and saw Pema riding up with two mounts in tow.  The horses skidded to a halt several armlengths away.

    Zihao shouted out to her, ¡°Get Feng on his horse!¡±

    Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.

    ¡°It¡¯s useless.¡±

    Thin-face derided their efforts, taking a step forward only to be halted by an arrow that came whistling in from over Zihao¡¯s shoulder.  The stranger was forced to stop and deflect the projectile away from his heart.  A good shot.

    Pengfei was suddenly there on horseback besides Zihao, bow in hand, and another arrow nocked.  The strangers made no move to press their attack.  Not worried at all but not rushing either.

    Pema had managed to help Ma Feng up to his saddle and the pair were already galloping away from the scene.

    ¡°Give us that one and we¡¯ll let the other children go.¡±

    Thin-face pointed at Pengfei.

    Zihao did not respond to the stranger.  Instead, he spoke to the boy.

    ¡°You go ahead.¡±

    ¡°What?!¡± Pengfei gaped.

    ¡°This will be quick work if I don¡¯t have to babysit you.  Just leave me my horse.¡±

    Pengfei seemed to take in the scene for a few moments.

    ¡°GO!¡±  Zihao commanded.

    One more cautious glance at the opponents, then Pengfei turned and galloped off after the others.

    Zihao shuffled backwards.  He held his horse by the reins but made no move to mount it.

    ¡°Do you mind if I just catch my breath for a moment?¡±

    Thin-face gave a slight nod to Zihao¡¯s strangely casual question.

    ¡°I can spare a few seconds for a man about to die.¡±

    The Qingcheng swordsman took in the scenery.  The sunlight glimmered on the waters of the lake to the south.  A crisp, cool, breeze kicked up the dust off the rocky earth.  He knew if he looked behind him, he would see snowcapped peaks stretching into the east and west.  A few brief seconds passed in silence.

    ¡°Thanks.  I needed the strength for the next part.¡±

    Zihao turned to his horse and slashed deeply into the side of its neck with his blade.  It bayed wildly and reared, spraying a grisly fountain of blood through the air.

    ¡°Sorry for getting you into this.¡±  Zihao spoke to the animal as it fell dead to the ground.

    ¡°A strange way to show your resolve, but I admire it.  It won¡¯t save them though.  You¡¯ll be dead in two minutes, and we¡¯ll run them down.¡±

    ¡°The chase will be a bit more difficult without a horse.¡±

    Thin-face looked around.  Of the horses that the strangers had ridden, one mount lay dead not far away. Another limped in the distance with an arrow protruding from its thigh.  The last animal was nowhere to be seen.

    Zihao saw a look of frustration flit across the man¡¯s face for the first time in their encounter before the bastard¡¯s thin lips parted for a single word.

    ¡°Shit.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    Pema and Ma Feng were not far ahead.  Pengfei came over a small hill and found them barely trotting within five minutes of leaving Zihao¡¯s side.

    ¡°Wake up dammit!¡± Pema shook Feng¡¯s shoulder violently as the Qingcheng disciple slumped in his saddle.

    ¡°Uuugh¡­.¡±

    It was no use.  Feng was unconscious a few moments later and sliding to the ground.  Pema was off her horse and easing him to the ground in the next moment.  She shouted out as her boots touched earth.

    ¡°Help me!¡±

    Pengfei joined her on the ground.

    ¡°Is he¡­?¡± he began.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡±

    Pengfei couldn¡¯t detect any breathing from Feng but now was not the time to conduct a thorough medical examination.

    ¡°Get the saddle off.  We¡¯ll have to tie him on like luggage.¡±  Pema said hurriedly.

    ¡°We¡¯ll have to go slow.¡±

    Pengfei released the belt around the horse¡¯s stomach as Pema looked around for the first time.

    ¡°Where¡¯s Zihao?¡±

    ¡°He said he¡¯d catch up.¡±

    The two shared a worried look but carried on.

    --Was I a coward to leave him or was I just doing what I was told?--

    Pengfei was not sure of his motivations in leaving Zihao but he knew he was thankful to be away from the fight.  He couldn¡¯t rest easy, though; he had seen the speed of a true martial artist¡¯s qinggong.  Even with Zihao delaying them, even on foot over hard terrain, the attackers might still catch up.

    Pema mounted again and took Feng¡¯s horse in tow.  Pengfei kept the rear, his bow in hand and constantly looking behind.  They could not manage much speed but it was still faster than they could do on foot.

    The sun was mostly set now.  Darkness was increasing with every passing moment.  A double-edged sword.  They might lose any pursuers in the night but it would be difficult to rendezvous with Zihao as well.

    --Anyone who does find us is going to take us by surprise.--

    Pengfei gave a last look behind as the sun¡¯s rays disappeared behind the peaks of the western mountains.

    Starlight was the only thing keeping them from stumbling into each other.  The group¡¯s focus shifted from speed to silence.  So, Pema and Pengfei were dismayed when Feng¡¯s horse began chuffing and neighing in annoyance.  The unconscious teenager had slid down and hung awkwardly against the animal¡¯s side and belly.

    Pema shook her head critically.

    ¡°When we find some wood, we¡¯re going to have to make a stretcher.  This isn¡¯t working.¡±

    Before they righted Feng, Pengfei took off his coat and sliced strips out of it.   He tied them together and attempted to wrap the band around Feng to staunch his chest wound.  But fear and anxiety bubbled over in the middle of the task.

    ¡°Shit, I don¡¯t know what I¡¯m doing!¡±

    ¡°Come on, maybe someone at Kunlun can help him.¡±

    Pema¡¯s words were meant to comfort but Pengfei could feel the wet blood soaking Feng¡¯s clothes.  His hands came away sticky with it.   He tried to summon enough bravery to check for a pulse but failed, and insteadbegan crying quietly as they put Feng back on his horse.

    Another hour passed and they were coming to the mouth of a canyon, one side formed by the ridge of the great mountain that cradled the Kunlun sect.

    ¡°Just stop.¡±

    The voice sounded in their ears unnaturally.  Amplified and directed with the use of qi.  Pengfei recognized the voice from the few words it had spoken earlier.  The man with the thin face.

    Pema and Pengfei looked around frantically for their pursuer but could not even discern what direction his voice had come from.

    ¡°Go!¡±  Pengfei urged.  Pema spurred her horse forward and yanked on the lead that tethered her mount to Feng¡¯s.

    Pengfei drew another arrow from his quiver, nocked it, then followed his companions.  But a moment later, there was a flash as something tore through his horse¡¯s neck and out the other side.  The animal went slack and fell headfirst into the ground like a puppet with its strings cut.  If it made a sound of pain, Pengfei did not hear it.  The boy tumbled across the rocky soil then scrambled to his feet.  He immediately sprinted in the direction Pema had ridden before she disappeared in the darkness.

    ¡°What message were you supposed to deliver to the Kunlun sect?¡±  The voice asked from the darkness.  ¡°Who was it in the Qingcheng sect that sent you here?¡±

    No matter how fast he ran the voice sounded the same.  From everywhere at once.

    ¡°Tell me.¡±

    Pengfei didn¡¯t answer; he just kept running.

    PAIN!

    He arched his spine in agony and fell face-first into the dirt again.  Desperate pawing at the flesh of his lower back dislodged a dagger from his flank.

    --Could¡¯ve killed me if he wanted!-- Pengfei¡¯s mind screamed at itself, comparing the horse¡¯s horrible death to his own circumstances.  He didn¡¯t stop to question it further but tried to get back up and run.

    ¡°You¡¯ll tell me in time.¡±  The voice spoke again, this time sounding more natural.  Pengfei looked back and saw the man with the thin face just a few strides away.

    ¡°Of course, it doesn¡¯t really matter what the message is.  All that matters is that it¡¯s not delivered.¡±

    --The message?--

    --Shaolin, Kongtong, Zhongnan, Nangong, Emei.--  The words raced through Pengfei¡¯s mind unbidden.

    He limped pathetically, too scared to look back now.  There was the unmistakable sound of a sword drawn from its sheath.

    The chase had brought them to the mouth of a canyon.  There was a bit more grass here compared to the rocky terrain they had been scrambling over so far.  The vegetation cushioned Pengfei¡¯s fall when he distractedly tripped over a large stone.

    ¡°Tell me and the end won¡¯t hurt.¡±

    --No, no, no, no, no, no.--

    All Pengfei could see was the sword blade glinting in the dim starlight.  He turned and crawled but thin-face kicked him over to his back and stood atop him a moment later.

    ¡°Have you come to join Kunlun, boy?¡± a voice asked.  But Pengfei had not seen the man move his lips.  When his attacker looked around for the source, surprised, Pengfei realized someone else was speaking.

    The voice rang out again with a power that shook the air.

    ¡°Have you come to join Kunlun!?¡±

    The thin-faced man looked panicked.  Instantly, he began moving his sword to deliver a killing blow on Pengfei.

    ¡°Yes!¡±  Pengfei screamed in response as his attacker swung his sword.

    ¡°You are accepted.¡±

    A brilliant flash of white erupted in the dark night and caused Pengfei to wince and shield his eyes.

    CLANG!

    It was more than a sound.  Pengfei felt the reverberations in his bones.  He looked through half-closed eyes and saw the source.  Two swords crossed and ringing with energy.

    One sword was held by his assailant, the other by an old man.  White hair, white beard, grey robes.  A Taoist master of Kunlun.

 Chapter 3 - Awake in Kunlun

    The old man was a little shabby looking to be honest.  His hair was tied back but loose strands stuck out here and there.  Skin wrinkled and tan.  His robes were clean but worn out, and the sleeves and legs were rolled up in a very casual way.

    His arms were thin but age had only stripped away the fat leaving the muscles and sinews pronounced.  He looked more like a blacksmith than a Taoist but the man held a sword, not a hammer.

    Pengfei¡¯s protector was still crossing swords with thin-face.  He gave a gentle flick of his wrist and pushed the attacker back several paces.

    ¡°Don¡¯t interfere, old man.¡± Thin-face said.  An edge to his voice.

    He lunged to the side and then came in for an attack, still targeting Pengfei and seemingly disregarding the old Taoist.  He moved with an intensity he hadn¡¯t shown when facing Zihao.

    Pengfei saw the man leap with a ferocious look in his eye and his sword held aloft for a slash with nothing held back.  Then the old man¡¯s back blocked the view.

    CLANG!

    Sparks flying off metal.

    --Shit!--  the boy screamed to himself as a hot fleck of steel landed on his cheek.  He flinched and swatted at his face, then briefly looked looked at his trembling hand before turning his attention back to the men fighting above him.

    Thin-face was thrown back by the latest clash but unharmed.  The old man let his opponent fall without giving chase, he merely held his ground above Pengfei.

    ¡°You¡¯re violating the oath!¡±  Frustration was evident in thin-face¡¯s voice.

    He darted around so quickly that Pengfei was losing track of his movements.  But every now and then the old man would take a step and there would be the screeching of steel on steel.

    Pengfei could feel each attack in the wind now.

    --Please, please, please!--  The boy wasn¡¯t sure what exactly he was hoping for.  Safety, at the very lease.  His fearful tremors became more pronounced as the encounter dragged on.   The dagger wound in his back throbbed.

    Every time thin-face appeared a torrent of air pressure would accompany his strike, kicking up dust and rocks to sting the boy¡¯s face.  But every time the old Taoist was there to defend.

    Whatever movement techniques he had used to catch them combined with the numerous failed attacks had left the assailant winded.  Thin-face¡¯s exhaustion showed in his panting breaths and ragged speech.

    ¡°You closed your gates.  The boy ¡­ is mine to kill!¡±

    ¡°Didn¡¯t you hear my words?   I accepted him into Kunlun.  He is one of us now.  Mine to protect.¡±

    ¡°He didn¡¯t set foot within your gates.  You¡¯re interfering with another sect of the Wulin!¡±

    ¡°If I say he is accepted to Kunlun, then he is.  But tell me, what sect are you?  What clan?¡±  The conflict paused as the old Taoist questioned thin-face gave no responses.

    The old master continued, ¡°Take me to your sect leader, and we will resolve the issue.  And then Kunlun will know who has been haunting our mountains.¡±

    Thin-face remained silent searching for some argument.  But his physical and verbal attacks were pointless in the face of the old master.

    ¡°Or maybe you belong to the Unorthodox side?  I¡¯d be within my rights to kill you now.¡±

    ¡°If you do, your sect will be razed to the ground.¡±

    ¡°You think you¡¯re that important?   Maybe.  Leave before I decide to find out.¡±

    Pengfei watched from his place at the old master¡¯s feet as the man in black reluctantly turned to walk away.

    The Taoist called out after the retreating figure. ¡°Death can nullify the oath on both sides. The boy is one of ours now.  If he dies, we¡¯ll leave our seclusion to find you.¡±

    Thin-face stopped.

    ¡°On the dagger.  The locals call it Tumdgha.¡±

    The old man abruptly looked down at Pengfei, who was confused by the turn the conversation had taken.  The Taoist master grabbed Pengfei by the shirt and pulled him up to his feet.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡±  Pengfei asked but the old man just spun him around.  He winced at the movement in his waist and reflexively put his hand to where the throwing knife had bitten into him.  His savior followed Pengfei¡¯s movements to the wound and examined it closely.

    ¡°Oh.  That¡¯s not good.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    Poison.

    It was the only thing Pengfei remembered the old man saying.  The next several minutes were a blur.  A full body tremor, which Pengfei had originally attributed to the accumulated terror of the day, developed into painful muscle spasms.

    The Taoist struck the pressure points on Pengfei¡¯s back to stimulate the kidneys and the liver but it would not be enough to detoxify the poison.  It could buy some time at best.

    Pengfei didn¡¯t know if it was from his fear or an effect of the poison but he couldn¡¯t catch his breath.  He gasped for air; his knees gave out.

    The old man caught him as he fell to the ground.

    Consciousness came and went, came and went, like a pendulum swinging back and forth.  Pengfei never really regained his senses, he just experienced the world in a blur of images.

    Carried on someone¡¯s back.

    His face buried in the flank of a horse.

    Shouting.  Falling.  Lanterns.Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    Then blackness.

    *************************************************************************************

    There was no sense of time but at some point the pure black gave way to fever dreams.  Reality mixed with absurdity.

    There were images of the man with the thin face, Ma Feng, Zihao, and Pema.  Strangers stood over him, speaking.  His mother and father.  A grandmother, long since dead.

    He was choking on something poured down his throat.

    ¡°Easy there.¡±  A strange voice spoke before Pengfei slipped back into the dark.

    More time passed.  Sunbeams beat against the back of his eyelids and Pengfei heard a voice.  The boy tried to open his eyes against the light but reflex rebelled against reason and won.  He tried to tell the nearby voice about his traveling companions injured out in the wilderness somewhere but his mouth wouldn¡¯t form the words.

    When Pengfei finally regained awareness in earnest it was mid-conversation.  He didn¡¯t remember waking up or anyone entering the room but suddenly there was another old Taoist sitting next to him, feeling his pulse.

    ¡°And are you feeling any nausea?¡± The old man asked what seemed to be one of a long line of questions.

    ¡°Um¡­no.¡±

    As the boy answered questions, others went unanswered in his own mind.  ¡®Who is this?  Where am I?¡¯

    The elder continued. ¡°Muscle spasms?  Agitation?¡±

    ¡°Agitation, maybe a little.  Is this ¡­ Kunlun?¡±

    ¡°Yes, the Medicine Hall of Kunlun.  I am Chen Lei.¡±

    Suddenly remembering, Pengfei looked around nervously.  They were in a large room with space and beds for several patients but there was no one else to be seen.

    ¡°Elder Chen, I came with friends.  They were hurt!¡±

    Contrary to the old Taoist who had protected Pengfei, Chen Lei presented a very respectable image.  His robes were clean and neat even though they were not of very high quality.  His grey hair was tied back without a strand out of place.

    The discomfort was clear on his dignified features.  He pursed his lips and looked at Pengfei.

    ¡°The girl was fine.  We watched over her for a night, but while our gates are closed that is all that we could allow.   She left a few days ago to rejoin her family.  Two of our elders are escorting her, from a distance.¡±

    ¡®What?  How long was I unconscious?¡¯

    Pengfei was disoriented after learning he had been unconscious longer than he thought.  But more troubling was the unmentioned fate of Zihao and Feng.  Pengfei looked to the elder and saw the weight of the news on the man¡¯s face.  He shook his head, trying to keep his friends alive for a few more moments.  In his mind at least.

    --No, no, no¡­Don¡¯t say it.  Please don¡¯t say it.--

    ¡°The boy from Qingcheng had already passed by the time he was found. We already performed his funeral rites.  The other one¡­ well, some of the sect members saw the strangers take his body along when they left the southern basin.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    Another day was lost in mourning.  Pengfei had known Zihao and Ma Feng for less than a year but for that time they had spent every hour of every day together.  Feng had resented traveling so far away from the Central Plains but his surly attitude had eventually given way to a warmer demeanor.  They had grown comfortable with each other at least.

    As fellow members of the Qingcheng sect, Zihao and Feng had naturally been closer.  In the evenings they would practice the martial arts of their sect together, Zihao correcting the form of his junior.  But he had also been a bit of a mentor to Pengfei.  Zihao had even taught him some basic martial arts here and there.

    And now they were gone.

    --I¡¯ll miss you both.--

    Only Elder Chen Lei came to see him that first day, and they were not very social encounters.

    Medical questions.  Meals of gruel.

    It was just as well.  Pengfei was glad no one else was there to see him in his lowest moments.

    Sleep came unexpectedly.  He should have been up all-night crying or plotting revenge but his eyes shut on their own.

    Pengfei was still morose upon waking but could hold himself together somewhat.  His mind was already turning to more mundane things.

    --Do I need to tell someone I¡¯m awake?  Should I just wait here?--

    His questions were made moot when three old Taoists entered the room.  One was the physician, Chen Lei.  There was another old man dressed similarly to the doctor but his neat clothes covered a slightly sturdier frame.  Combined with his hair, which still had streaks of black, he seemed to have more vitality than the doctor.

    --Still looks pretty old.--

    ¡°This is Sect Leader Chen Hongzhang.¡±  The doctor introduced the man to Pengfei, who immediately tried to get out of bed and greet the patriarch.

    ¡°Sect Leader, sorry for greeting you so informally!¡±

    Elder Chen Lei put his hand out to gently push Pengfei back down into bed.

    ¡°Lie back.  There will be plenty of formalities later.  For now, let¡¯s just have a relaxed conversation. ¡°

    The Sect Leader nodded his agreement and the old men pulled up chairs to sit around Pengfei¡¯s bedside.  The third man, previously blocked from view, stepped around the sect leader and Pengfei quickly recognized him as his savior.

    ¡°You seem to remember Elder Chen Weidao.¡±  The sect leader noted.

    ¡°You saved my life.  Thank you Elder.¡±

    The scruffy looking Taoist said nothing, just nodded at Pengfei¡¯s gratitude.  The sect leader continued.

    ¡°Now that you have recovered, we would like to clear some things up.  Obviously, you came here under strange circumstances.  We would like you to explain as much as you can.¡±

    ¡°Of course.¡±

    Pengfei collected his thoughts for a moment.

    --Where do I begin?  Home?  No, I don¡¯t want to tell them everything.  Qingcheng?--

    Zihao had cautioned Pengfei against revealing too much about his personal background.  Not even the Qingcheng elders had known about his family.

    The sect leader raised his eyebrows at Pengfei¡¯s delay.

    ¡°Oh, sorry sir.¡±

    --Maybe just give them the general idea¡­--

    ¡°I left home against my father¡¯s wishes.  He has influence in the Central Plains and ensured no sects would take me.  But I met Disciple Zihao through my sister.  He was one of the Qingcheng swordsmen escorting me¡±

    ¡°He said I should try Kunlun because it would be outside anyone¡¯s influence.  He told me the Qingcheng sect would escort me here.¡±

    The head of the medicine hall interjected, ¡°But there were supposed to be 150 children.  Why is it just you?¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    ¡°When we were ordered to shut our gates, our allies pledged to send two groups of children here so that the sect could continue.  Orphans who had no other prospects.  The first group arrived five years ago and you should have been accompanied by the second.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, they didn¡¯t tell me anything about that.¡±

    The old men considered Pengfei¡¯s answer for a moment before the sect leader nodded for him to continue his account.

    ¡°Zeng Zihao and Ma Feng were chosen to escort me.  Then, we hired Pema in Nagqu.  She was on her way to rejoin her family somewhere near here and we needed a guide to cross the plateau.¡±

    ¡°Why did you come through Tibet at all?  The Desert Road through Xinjiang would have been easier.¡±

    ¡°I was told that it was so we wouldn¡¯t be noticed.  It worked, for a time...¡±  Pengfei began silently reliving the violence at the end of his journey, the loss of his friends.

    The sect leader turned his attention to recent events and pulled Pengfei out of his reverie.

    ¡°Who attacked first, you or the strangers?¡±

    ¡°They did.  They came from the south slope of the mountain.¡±

    Pengfei squinted against the tears he felt welling up in his eyes.

    ¡°When we refused to turn back, they attacked.  I saw them stab Feng¡­ those Demonic bastards!¡±

    Pengfei spit the last bit out with rage but the old Taoists looked at each other, confused.

    ¡°Did they say they were from the Cult of the Heavenly Demon?¡±

    ¡°No, but Zihao and Feng think ¡­ thought since we were near their territory - ¡±

    ¡°It was not the Demonic Cult¡±.  Chen Weidao spoke for the first time since entering the room.  He spoke directly to Pengfei.

    ¡°Why are you so sure?¡±

    ¡°No sect of the Wulin has more history with the Cult than Kunlun.  The men in black have been loitering near our sect for the last few years.  Common bandits emboldened by the fact our gates are closed.¡±  Sect Leader Hongzhang proclaimed.

    --Common bandits?  That doesn¡¯t make any sense.--

    While Pengfei was lost in doubt the sect leader turned to Chen Weidao and in an aside said,

    ¡°Still, they have never acted this directly before.¡±

    ¡°Perhaps it has something to do with the message.¡±  Chen Weidao said flatly.

    The sect leader and Chen Lei nodded along at his statement before the tattered monk continued.

    ¡°When I reached you, the man in black was saying he would kill you to stop you from delivering a message.¡±

    ¡°Are you carrying such a message?¡± Chen Hongzhang inquired.

    Pengfei thought back to his time at the Qingcheng sect, more than half a year ago.  Another group of Taoist elders had stood around him then.  Words committed to memory, not to be shared with anyone, not even Zeng Zihao and Ma Feng.

    --Shaolin, Kongtong, Zhongnan, Nangong, Emei--

    Words only to be shared with those inside the walls of Kunlun.

    ¡°Yes, I have a message.¡±

 Chapter 4 - First Day

    ¡°The sect leader and three elders from Qingcheng took me aside the night before I left for Kunlun.  They said they wanted me to memorize a message, they said it couldn¡¯t be written down.¡±  Pengfei numbly set the stage for the masters of Kunlun before him.

    ¡°We cannot receive direct messages from any group in the Wulin.  But nothing in our punishment prohibits incoming disciples from telling us what they know.¡±  Chen Hongzhang explained.

    ¡°Well, the elders told me to memorize five names from five groups.

    Luo Nianxin of Shaolin

    Liang Deliang of Kongtong

    Song Weixiong of Zhongnan

    Nangong Zhiqiang of the Nangong Clan

    Xiao Xingchen of Emei.¡±

    Pengfei listed out the names he had repeated to himself every night for the last seven months.   The Kunlun elders listened passively, betraying no emotion at his words.

    The young man spoke the next quietly, ¡°Was it an important message?  Was it something to do with those murderers?¡±

    ¡°It was important, Pengfei, thank you for delivering it.  Important but mundane.  Apart from the complications around delivering the words, it would be considered routine business.  It¡¯s unfortunate, but sometimes bandits try to intercept messages like this, hoping for something they can use as blackmail.¡±

    Pengfei was incredulous.  ¡®Bandits, blackmail?  There¡¯s no way Zihao and Feng would be killed by people like that¡­¡¯.  Outwardly, he cautiously addressed the Taoists.

    ¡°Elders, those men seemed too skilled to be mere bandits.  It couldn¡¯t be as simple as thugs and extortion.¡±

    Chen Lei and Chen Weidao made no reaction but after a moment of awkward silence the Sect Leader spoke authoritatively.

    ¡°Those men WERE bandits.  It would be best if you didn¡¯t spread any rumors to the contrary.¡±  The boy swallow nervously and the patriarch softened his tone.  ¡°You did well to deliver the message despite the difficulties, Pengfei.¡±

    The elders changed topics without addressing the questions further.  With Pengfei¡¯s message delivered and questions stifled, they detailed how the boy would join the current generation of Kunlun disciples. He tried to listen to all the little minutiae but couldn¡¯t help remembering the killers who had taken his friends from him.  Thin-face, standing over him, demanding the message.

    --Just bandits looking for blackmail?  Ridiculous.--

    *************************************************************************************

    Pengfei¡¯s recovery had mostly completed while he was unconscious, so two days after he woke up from his ordeal the leader of the medicine hall deemed him fit to join the other disciples.

    Elder Chen Lei escorted Pengfei through the sect early in the morning and the boy was able to see the grounds with his own eyes for the first time.

    The Medicine Hall was just one of several ancient looking buildings in the compound.  The architecture was a strange blend of the local style and that of the Central Plains.  Halls and pavilions that would normally have been made of wood were instead constructed of stone.  Their age showed in the fading and chipping paint and plaster.

    ¡°Most of these are abandoned now.¡±  The elder explained, pointing to some of the more decrepit structures.  ¡°Our true home is in Qinghai.  This location was used as part of the sect¡¯s escort duties along the Desert Road.  Or for isolation training.¡±

    ¡°But the sect has been here since the gates were closed?¡±

    ¡°Yes, more than forty years now.  This is the dining hall, by the way.  Let¡¯s go inside and sit down for a moment.¡±

    The physician led the way inside the dark hall and sat across from Pengfei at one of the many tables there.  No one else was present.

    ¡°Pengfei¡­I¡¯m tempted to ask why you came all the way out to Kunlun, but it¡¯s moot at this point.  I just hope you know what you¡¯ve gotten yourself into.¡±

    Pengfei was a touch nervous at the elder¡¯s ominous words and couldn¡¯t help but inquire, ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    ¡°Do you know anything about Kunlun?  About the way we live?¡±

    ¡°I know you are ¨C ¡°

    ¡°We are.¡± Chen Lei corrected.

    ¡°I know we are a Taoist sect of the Orthodox faction.  Righteous swordsmen.¡±

    The old man sighed and folded his hands neatly on the table in front of himself.

    ¡°Those words could describe a dozen sects with varying degrees of accuracy.  But if the Kunlun Sect is known for anything, it is not our religious zeal or mysterious asceticism.¡±

    ¡°What are you trying to say?¡±

    ¡°When we return to the Central Plains in a few years, it could be to very mundane lives.  You might remain within our walls as an inner disciple or go off on your own as a lay follower.  Either way, there will work to be done and livings to be made.  Perhaps you¡¯ll start a family.  There may be some violence but no one is going off to slay dragons.  You could be as much a merchant as a martial artist.¡±

    Pengfei relaxed a bit, relief erasing the previous anxiety.  ¡°Elder, I didn¡¯t come here for adventure.  A mundane life is fine for me.¡±

    Pengfei spoke honestly.  While he found tales of heroes and monsters as entertaining as the next person he had never been driven to seek out that kind of excitement.

    ¡°Good.  I just didn¡¯t want you to have any misunderstandings due to the current training regimen.¡±

    Such misunderstandings could be forgiven in light of what the disciples were currently going through. According to what the elder told Pengfei, the standard day¡¯s activities had a heavy focus on physical conditioning and martial arts training.  Just enough academics to ensure the children would not be completely lost when they inevitably encountered polite society.

    It was an education that might suit a young military recruit but from what Pengfei gathered the sect leaders intended to reclaim their historical duties of escorting merchants through Xinjiang and Qinghai.  Traveling with caravans along the roads connecting the West and the Central Plains seemed ideal to Pengfei.  A bit of freedom, less danger than battling barbarians on the northern frontier.

    --And it will be my own choice.--

    Chen Lei led the way out of the Dining Hall and they continued through the grounds while the physician pointed out other points of interest.  When they neared a cluster of dormitory buildings, the elder stopped and turned to Pengfei.

    ¡°You didn¡¯t mention much about your family background yesterday.¡±

    ¡°Right¡­¡± Pengfei nodded.

    --Please don¡¯t ask.--

    ¡°The second-generation disciples are about your age but they all came here as orphans.  It might be easier for you to assimilate if you set your family aside for a while.¡±

    ¡°You mean pretend to be another orphan?¡±

    ¡°No, they¡¯re your brothers now so no need to lie to them.  Just don¡¯t rub their faces in it.  It¡¯s customary at Kunlun to take the same surname as the rest of your generation anyway.  From now on, you are just Jin Pengfei.¡±

    ¡°Thank you, elder.¡±  The solution suited Pengfei perfectly, who was in no rush to disclose personal details.  He would have enough trouble integrating into the group of orphans-turned-disciples.  He didn¡¯t need them holding his privileged background against him.Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.

    ¡°Yes.  Well, I¡¯ll leave you here.  Come see me in a week so I can check on your recovery.¡±

    The old physician turned and left Pengfei holding the few possessions that survived his journey and some of Kunlun¡¯s uniforms in a small sack.

    --New name, new life, new clothes, no idea what the fuck I¡¯m doing.--

    He walked the few remaining steps to the dormitory.

    --There¡¯s just a couple dozen strangers in there who have been living and training together for the past five years¡­ shouldn¡¯t be too hard to fit in.--

    Pushing his sarcastic thoughts to the side, Pengfei stood at the door, took a deep breath, and pulled it open.

    *************************************************************************************

    The scene was not far off from what he had imagined.  A large common room full of young men around his own age, all dressed in the grey robes of Kunlun.  Heads all shaved.  A buzz of activity came to a halt as Pengfei opened the door and all eyes turned to him.

    ¡°I¡¯m ¡­ Jin Pengfei.¡±

    The other boys went back to what they had been doing without a word of greeting.  They stood chatting in small groups, wrapping up their bedrolls, donning their clothes for the day, and all the other normal activities of a morning.

    He found an unoccupied space in the long rectangular room and stood there awkwardly, observing the other disciples.

    --I¡¯m a disciple of Kunlun now¡­--

    ¡°Time to shave it.¡±  Pengfei turned to see a group of three approach.  Their leader pointed to Pengfei¡¯s hair.  One of the other two handed Pengfei a bedroll of his own without comment.

    ¡°I¡¯m Jin Nanxi.  These two are Tianwei and Tianxun.¡±

    Tianwei and Tianxun appeared to be twins judging by the similarity of their features, including eyes so narrow that they seemed closed.  Pengfei immediately lost track of which one was which.

    ¡°I¡¯m Jin Pengfei.  I thought only Buddhists shaved their heads.¡±  Pengfei reached up to touch his own long hair, tied back out of the way.  The other disciples only had about a week¡¯s worth of growth on their heads.

    ¡°It¡¯s not a religious thing.  There was a lice infestation.  Come on.¡±

    Pengfei dropped his belongings in a clump among those of the other disciples and followed the trio outside. Once out in the chill air Jin Nanxi held up a pair of crude shears and a razor.

    ¡°It¡¯s a bit drastic, isn¡¯t it?¡±  Pengfei inquired.  ¡°I mean, the lice are gone now, right?  Do we really need to do this?¡±

    Pengfei had only seen Buddhist monks, the infirm, and criminals keep a shaved head.

    ¡°If you think this is bad you¡¯re going to hate the next part.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    The trio had left Pengfei freshly shaven and with just a few parting words.  He had wanted to ask for more detail about the day¡¯s routine but never got the change.  However, he found out soon enough.

    A herd of disciples migrated to a large dining hall where other dormitories full of boys converged and still more disciples served food.  Pengfei stood in line with the rest then took his bowl to sit at an unoccupied table.  No one joined him.

    --Don¡¯t blame them.  I smell like shit.--

    The paste on his head was foul and he seemed to be the only one using it.  Jin Nanxi had said all the disciples had gone through the same, that it was only necessary for three days.  Still, it was difficult not to gag on the odor.

    --I feel like I can taste the stench¡­--

    Occasional glances up from his food confirmed that the other disciples were sneaking looks at Pengfei.  Some laughed, some grimaced.

    Breakfast ended and the dormitories split up again.  Pengfei followed familiar faces outside and then to the scripture hall.  An elder recited an obscure passage from an equally obscure tome in the Taoist cannon while the children copied each word down.  The paper was yellowed and the ink sticks smelled of lard.

    --They either make their own or buy the cheapest.--

    ¡°Which character is that?¡±

    ¡°Not that one, idiot.¡±

    ¡°Your handwriting is awful.¡±

    The other disciples whispered amongst each other quietly and occasionally drew a rebuke from the elder. Although Pengfei was not familiar with the passage, he had no trouble with the dictation.  He had memorized the Thousand Character Classic by age six, after all.  Still, the more senior disciples would rather copy each other¡¯s illegible scribbles instead of asking the new face for help.

    Where the characters were easy, the underlying philosophy of the Taoist scriptures was more esoteric.  None of the disciples seemed to pay much attention to the deeper meanings hidden in the words.

    Pengfei knew that the sect was, in theory, a home and training ground for Taoist priests but the same could be said for most of the groups of the Wulin.  Zeng Zihao had revealed the truth on their journey from Sichuan.  The sects and clans often espoused various religious beliefs but observed them with varying degrees of earnestness.

    Some, like the millennium Shaolin Temple were truly devout and only entered the martial underworld out of a sense of justice.  Other groups paid lip service to their religion while mobilizing their adherents to work as mercenaries and assassins.

    It was unclear where Kunlun fell on the spectrum.  Chen Lei had downplayed the more martial aspects of the sect, but there was still a significant portion of each day devoted to various types of combat.  Pengfei was unsure whether he was being raised for a life as a virtuous warrior-priest or a cold-hearted killer.  He didn¡¯t worry about it much either way.

    --Unless they throw me directly onto a battlefield, it¡¯s still better than what I was destined for at home.  If I don¡¯t like the way things look in a few years, I¡¯ll just runaway.--

    They left the scripture hall by midmorning.  They did not head for any particular building but for the gates.  They passed underneath the wooden archway that bore the signboard of the Kunlun Sect and cbegan jogging as they crossed some invisible border in the dirt.  Pengfei fell in with the rest and tried to keep up.

    ¡°I thought the sect had closed its gates?¡±  Pengfei huffed to another nearby disciple.

    ¡°So?¡±

    ¡°So¡­ doesn¡¯t that mean we can¡¯t leave?¡±

    ¡°We leave all the time.  We just can¡¯t interact with other sects.  Now get away from me, you smell horrible.¡±

    They jogged down a rough untended path lined by tufts of gnarled weeds.  The muscles in Pengfei¡¯s back ached where he had been wounded and within a few minutes his lungs burned.

    --I thought I was used to the thin air¡­ should have exercised more on the journey through Tibet.--

    Pengfei¡¯s regrets were pushed to the back of his mind as the group crested a hill that revealed a sprawling vista.  The mountains had seemed imposing when approaching on horseback from the south.  Their snowcapped peaks had been visible even within the grounds of the sect.  But out in the open, the mountain range enveloped the whole world.  No greenery to be seen, everything was dyed in tones of grey stone, white snow and blue ice.

    ¡°That¡¯s¡­fucking¡­gorgeous¡± Pengfei felt the need to choke out the words despite his overtaxed lungs.

    They ran downhill looking straight into the sprawling slopes of the next mountain over.  The steep downward grade and the peak ahead combined to disorient and confuse the senses.  The tension in his legs was the only indication of whether they were running uphill or down.

    He felt dizzy.  Pengfei tried to watch his feet and ignore the wider view.

    --Can¡¯t keep up¡­--

    He began to trail behind the others and lost sight of them completely within a few moments.  Gasping breaths became wheezing and his slow jog became a weakened shuffle.

    After half an hour the rest of the disciples came into view again as they rounded a bend in the path.  Pengfei saw them through eyes caked with the putrid substance applied to his scalp earlier that morning.

    --Thank goodness, they¡¯re heading back to the sect!--

    He tried to fall in behind them but Jin Nanxi stepped out of the pack to wave him off.

    ¡°Keep going until you get to the broken statue.  And move your ass.¡±

    ¡®Damn it.¡¯

    *************************************************************************************

    Pengfei was greeted with resentful stares as he shuffled back through the gates of the sect.  The other disciples had long since returned and gone on to their daily chores.  Some swept dust off a large stone courtyard.  Others washed clothes in large wooden troughs and wrung them dry.

    He was near the point of collapsing due to exhaustion but still tried to discern where he was meant to be and what job he was meant to be doing.  A bell rang before he found his place and all the disciples hurriedly concluded their tasks.

    Lunch provided little recovery from the grueling morning exercise.  Pengfei was surprised to find meat in the bowl he had been handed.

    --I thought Taoists didn¡¯t eat meat?  Zihao and Feng didn¡¯t¡­--

    Another pang of sadness for his lost friends but he had no time to mope.  The meal was over too soon.

    More lessons occupied the early afternoon.  A couple hours of more secular subjects.  Classics of history, science, and arts along with their various commentaries.  For the most part, the lessons were all things Pengfei had learned years before.

    Just when boredom and exhaustion threatened the disciples¡¯ consciousness, they gathered with the rest of the Jin generation in the open air of the training ground.  They stood at rough attention as a sect elder, another Taoist of grey hair and beard, stood at the front.

    --Looks like none of the elders had to deal with lice.--  Pengfei had not seen anyone of the older generation with a shaved head or face.

    The master took a stance and the disciples followed suit moving in unison that produced a resounding stomp of feet.  Pengfei mimicked the motions as best he could but was always half a beat out of sync.

    The elder led them through the movements of a form and Pengfei did his best to match his peers.  They shouted forcefully with each pantomimed strike.  It was nerve-racking just being in the middle of that din.

    ¡°Again!¡±

    The elder walked among the disciples and inspected the minute details of their technique.  He made minor adjustments here and there or nodded in satisfaction.

    Eventually, the master made his way to Pengfei.

    ¡°You.¡±

    ¡°Hello elder.¡± Pengfei stood straight and greeted awkwardly.  The old man rolled his eyes.

    ¡°Salute properly boy.¡±

    ¡°Excuse me?¡±

    At Pengfei¡¯s confusion, the elder immediately pointed to one of the nearby disciples.  The boy stepped forward immediately and placed his right fist in his palm.

    ¡°Disciple Jin Jintao greets Elder Chen Rulan!¡±

    Pengfei repeated the greeting that had been demonstrated.

    ¡°Disciple Jin Pengfei greets Elder Chen Rulan!¡±

    ¡°Bow stance.¡±

    Pengfei racked his brain for the appropriate position he had seen demonstrated moments ago.

    Chen Rulan sighed at the ineptitude.  He set about kicking Pengfei¡¯s feet to widen the stance, pulled back on his shoulders to improve posture.  Stepping close to improve some minor detail, the elder caught a whiff from Pengfei¡¯s head.

    ¡°What is that stench boy?¡±

    ¡°The lice remedy, sir!¡±

    ¡°Lice remedy?  What¡­ Jin Nanxi!¡±

    The elder called out and Jin Nanxi ran through the ranks of the gathered disciples to stand in front of him.

    ¡°Yes Elder!¡±

    ¡°Was this your work?¡±

    ¡°Yes Elder!¡±

    ¡°And?  What is it?¡±

    ¡°Goat shit, sir!¡±

    Pengfei forgot the elder in front of him and turned to Nanxi.

    ¡°Goat shit!?  You said it was medicinal herbs?¡±

    The disciples within earshot broke down into laughter.  All discipline in the ranks evaporated.  The other boys turned to gawk.

    ¡°Just go wash yourself off, you gullible fool.¡±

    A chorus of laughter followed Pengfei as he left the training ground.

    --Son of a bitch!--

 Chapter 5 - Completely Average

    ¡°Well, there was a lice infestation. But we certainly didn¡¯t use goat shit to treat it.¡±

    Medicine Hall leader Chen Lei examined the puckered skin on Pengfei¡¯s back that would eventually become a pronounced scar. A reminder of the day he came to Kunlun.

    ¡°I feel like I can still smell it.¡±

    Pengfei remained bitter at the prank several days later. It was impossible to put it behind him when all the Jin disciples referred to him as ¡®shithead¡¯.

    ¡°Any tremors?¡±

    ¡°No.¡±

    The physician had been diligent in his examination but found no lingering symptoms of the poison that had nearly claimed Pengfei¡¯s life. Now, he shifted to a new task.

    ¡°Sit down on the floor and cross your legs.¡±

    Pengfei did as he was bid and felt the doctor sit behind him and place palms to his back.

    ¡°I¡¯m going to inspect your meridians and qi flow. I should have done it earlier but I wanted the poison to clear your system. Breathe deeply.¡±

    --What qi flow? It¡¯s not like I¡¯ve ever learned such a thing¡­ but doctor knows best I suppose.--

    Chen Lei¡¯s hands rested delicately against Pengfei¡¯s robes in the same precise manner the man exuded in all his actions. But the light touch belied a great inner power that surged through Pengfei a moment later.

    ¡°Guuuhhhh!¡± he gasped as fire coursed through his chest and snaked its way down to his belly.

    ¡°Keep breathing!¡± the elder barked.

    Pengfei regained his composure at Chen Lei¡¯s urging. He closed his eyes and focused on his breath.

    In. Out. In. Out.

    The warmth invaded his abdomen and found an intangible cistern. The dantian. The invisible reservoir that held the body¡¯s internal energy, from where it would wind its way through the major and minor channels.

    Pengfei had never seen it before, did not see it now, but he could sense it for the first time. A tiny eddy in a darkened cave became a maelstrom with the addition of the elder¡¯s energy.

    The qi crept outward again from the center. It branched, occasionally encountering obstacles and flowing around them. One near the heart, another behind the eyes, with countless smaller ones here and there. The moving energy mapped out a web of meridians and their subsidiaries and blockages, lighting them up briefly before they faded into darkness again.

    Then the heat retreated and left only numbness.

    ¡°Finished.¡±

    Chen Lei was already standing and after taking a moment to reacclimate, Pengfei worked his way to his feet as well.

    ¡°Your dantian, your meridians¡­¡±

    The elder had an inscrutable look on his face, sending a jolt of anxiety through his patient. A sensation much more jarring than when the qi had coursed through him.

    ¡°My meridians? What is it? Were they damaged by the poison?¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°¡­They¡¯re completely average.¡±

    ¡°Average?¡±

    ¡°Healthy, balanced. Nothing extraordinary but perfectly serviceable.¡±

    ¡°¡­.¡±

    --This old bastard¡­ I nearly pissed myself.--

    But aloud, Pengfei only said, ¡°Thank you for your care, Elder.¡±

    ¡°You shouldn¡¯t have any problems learning the neigong of our sect. It¡¯s a little late to begin cultivating internal energy but do not rush. Impatience will only lead to disaster.¡±

    With a wave, Chen Lei dismissed the boy. Pengfei silently bowed to the master and left the Medicine Hall.

    He walked slowly through the sect buildings.

    The checkup had occurred after another harsh day of training and now the cold of an midsummer¡¯s night in the mountains was upon him. The silhouettes of the peaks were visible in the darkness, outlined by the stars in the sky behind them. White snowcaps could be made out but the rest of the details were lost in shadow.

    Normally he would have been more appreciative of the natural splendor of the scene, but Pengfei¡¯s eyes were on his feet, his mind elsewhere.

    He thought of the other world he had just glimpsed. The hidden side of nature, the dormant powers that were spoken of in religious texts and heroic sagas. The internal alchemy Pengfei had just experienced was a core practice of martial artists and Taoist priest. Even Buddhist monks would make connections to the practice in their own way. Perhaps the sorcerers from childhood nightmares were no longer out of the realm of possibility.

    --I thought it was all metaphor and exaggeration¡­--

    Never mind the farfetched tails of ascetic hermits reaching immortality. Qi and the practice of cultivating it from nature, neigong, was what could supposedly take a third-rate swordsman to a warrior of legend.

    Personal experience had now confirmed what Pengfei had only seen indirectly before. The impossible movements of the the Qingcheng swordsmen, the killers and black, and Elder Weidao now made sense.

    --Is that what I¡¯ll be like in a few years? Could I?--

    He pictured himself jumping across canyons and swinging a sword, burning with qi and cutting down foes.

    --But the foes can use their qi as well. The cutting might not be so one-sided. I wonder if Feng ever really considered the possibility of dying in a swordfight¡­bleeding out on the back of a horse?--

    Pengfei found his flights of fancy tempered by his brushes with cold, hard, reality. His friends¡¯ reserves of internal energy had not been enough to save them against similarly trained opponents.

    --All that power just to wind up on an even playing field in a fight to the death. If I wanted that kind of life, I could have joined the army.--

    His absentminded steps had taken him to the edge of the sect compound. Wilderness stretched out in front of him.

    --No point worrying about it. I have plenty of other problems right in front of me.--

    He¡¯d caught sight of the supernatural and lost the sense of wonder nearly immediately.The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.

    *************************************************************************************

    Pengfei stood at the dormitory¡¯s door. Hesitant. Dreading.

    The past few days with the other disciples had not been much better than the first. Granted, he had not been covered in animal feces again, but he was still just as isolated from the tightly formed cliques.

    And then there was Jin Nanxi. He had laughed mercilessly the next time he saw Pengfei after his little prank. Red faced, gasping for breath, knee-slapping laughter. And he had not been alone.

    --Assholes.--

    Deep breath.

    Pengfei opened the door and entered the raucous dormitory. The couple hours before bed were the only time the disciples had to themselves but they managed to pack a day¡¯s worth of shenanigans into those scant few minutes.

    ¡°Shithead!¡± A chorus greeted him.

    ¡®I¡¯m going to have to do something about that.¡¯ Pengfei sighed to himself.

    He picked his way through the clusters of boys to his small rectangle of personal space. He picked his bedroll off the floor and unfurled it. A ball of goat crap went bouncing across the floor. Someone had rolled it up in his bedding, and it was no great mystery who had done it.

    ¡°He can¡¯t get enough of it!¡± Jin Nanxi called out.

    Peals of laughter.

    --That¡¯s not going to stop unless I stop it.-- Nanxi¡¯s face was superimposed with those of similar figures from Pengfei¡¯s past. People who had pushed until he pushed back. --I guess now is as good a time as any.--

    Pengfei balled his fists and marched up to Nanxi. His tormentor was waving to his cheering friends. Pengfei grabbed the boy¡¯s robes, spun him around, and swung.

    His hand didn¡¯t even complete half of its arc before Nanxi grabbed Pengfei¡¯s throat and slammed him into a wooden column. Fingers coiled around his neck like snakes and squeezed the air out of him. Nanxi looked into his eyes with sneering contempt as the younger disciple clawed at his throat in an effort to breath. The older boy released his grip a moment later and with the same hand smacked Pengfei across the face, hard enough to send him to the floor.

    ¡°Learn to take a joke, shithead.¡±

    Jin Nanxi walked away in the silence left from the scuffle. The conversations and laughter came back to life before he reached the other side of the room. Pengfei crawled back to his bedroll, either laughed at or ignored by the others in the room.

    *************************************************************************************

    Zihao surrounded and bleeding.

    Feng on a funeral pyre.

    Pema riding away alone.

    He hadn¡¯t seen any of these sights in the real world but they invaded his dreams again that night.

    Pengfei woke before the others and laid silently on his bedroll. His contaminated blanket was crumpled up in a ball despite the cold.

    --Shaolin, Kongtong, Zhongnan, Nangong, Emei--

    There was no point repeating the words now that Pengfei had delivered the message to the leader of Kunlun. Still, it calmed him. He raised a hand to touch his bruised cheek. There was a dull ache in the flesh where he prodded it with his fingers.

    --Now what? Am I going to find shit in my blanket every night?--

    Pengfei waited for the other disciples to rouse and then donned a clean uniform for the day. He ate another simple breakfast at his own table while surrounded by a dining hall of chattering teenagers.

    The morning training seemed to alternate between external and internal conditioning. One day there would be a treacherous run up and down the mountain path or calisthenics that would leave Pengfei weak and spasming for hours. The next day the disciples would use that same block of time to gather in a large open hall, then sit in meditation while the statues of the Three Pure Ones looked on.

    Pengfei was thankful for the days without the intense physical training. Sitting quietly in the Veneration Hall, as he did now, was much more comfortable. He had only been to this room a couple times and was still unsure what he was supposed to do.

    It was clear this was connected to qi. Even Pengfei knew that much.

    --But how does sitting in the dark take me from here to there?--

    He mimicked the lotus position that the other disciples had adopted but whatever inner techniques they practiced when they closed their eyes were completely unknown to him. The profundity of their concentration discouraged him from disturbing any of the disciples with questions.

    The statues of Taoist deities were not the only observers today. An elder of the sect entered the hall and walked up and down the rows of seated disciples. Pengfei watched him through half closed eyes. This was one of the more ancient looking masters Pengfei had seen at the sect. His bushy white eyebrows and beard obscured most of his facial features.

    Pengfei closed his eyes and sat up straight as the master approached, trying his best to assume the same attitude as the rest of the disciples.

    Step. Step.

    Stop.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡±

    The master¡¯s quiet voice sounded from above Pengfei. He hesitantly opened his eyes to find the Taoist looking directly at him.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m ¡­ meditating?¡±

    ¡°Humph. Come with me.¡±

    --What was so different that he noticed me?--

    Whatever subtle clues that had led to his discovery went unsaid. The two made their way wordlessly out of the veneration hall and walked through the grounds to the library.

    --Smaller than at Emei and Qingcheng.--

    Pengfei¡¯s limited experience in the Jianghu, the underground society of martial arts heroes and rogues, may have given him an unrealistic expectation of what a sect should be. The ones in Sichuan had been grand, palatial, containing tens of thousands of volumes written on paper or bamboo slips. In contrast, Pengfei now found himself in a moderate sized room with maybe a thousand texts.

    The elder ran his knobby finger along a shelf and stopped on the spine of a particular book. He pulled it from its place and handed it to Pengfei.

    ¡°Thank you Elder¡­¡±

    ¡°Chen Mo.¡±

    ¡°Thank you, Elder Chen Mo.¡±

    The old man turned and left without another word.

    ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯

    Pengfei read the characters written elegantly on the cover and leafed through the pages curiously. Silhouettes of men with the meridians outlined within were accompanied by detailed explanations written in a highly technical verbiage. A manual on neigong.

    --Qi, Jing, Shen¡­ Governing and Conception Meridians, three Dantians¡­ what is all this?--

    There was an overwhelming amount of information. Pengfei walked back to the veneration hall to rejoin the others as he absentmindedly flipped through the pages.

    *************************************************************************************

    The ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ did not yield any answers in the short time Pengfei studied it before the midday meal. He stuffed the book in his bag of personal possessions when he got the opportunity and joined the rest of the Jin disciples in training their martial arts techniques on the stone floor of the training ground.

    Chen Rulan led the practice every day and seemed to delight in the rigorous methods of his instruction.

    ¡°Again!¡±

    The Elder barked out instructions to the entire group of disciples but stood directly beside Pengfei to correct the new disciple¡¯s form. Unfortunately, he did this with the scabbard of his sword, mercilessly slapping any limb that was slightly out of place.

    Crack!

    ¡°Hughhh!¡± Pengfei grimaced as another strike bit into the underside of his arm and raised his fist to the appropriate position.

    ¡°Jin Neng!¡±

    ¡°Yes Elder!¡±

    ¡°Lead this one through the Heaven Shaking Fist again. The rest of you, take up your swords!¡±

    The rest of the disciples moved off to retrieve practice swords from weapons racks on the side of the training ground. Only Pengfei and Jin Neng remained to practice the empty-handed techniques.

    ¡°I¡¯m¡­¡±

    ¡°I know who you are. Come on, go through the postures.¡±

    Neng was a bit below average height and a full head shorter than the lanky Pengfei but had no trouble reaching and slapping the taller boy¡¯s face when an opening presented itself.

    ¡°Ah, shit!¡± Pengfei blurted at the contact.

    ¡°Keep your hand up to guard while the other strikes.¡±

    Pengfei made the adjustment but many more followed.

    ¡°Turn your hips with your punch, you¡¯ll get more power.¡±

    ¡°To the side more.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t cross your feet. Do you want to fall?¡±

    When Neng saw Pengfei in an awkward position, a push-kick sent the new disciple to the ground in a demonstration of his instability. The hands-on lesson continued while wooden swords clattered against each other nearby and shouts of the other boys echoed off the buildings surrounding the great courtyard.

    The physical pain from Jin Neng¡¯s corrections was no less than those from Elder Chen Rulan but they were more informative. Each chastisement came with a justification, even if it was in the form of an insult.

    ¡°Fuck¡­hghhhg¡­that hurt!¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s wheezing came after a punch to the stomach demonstrated the importance of keeping the core tight and exhaling with every attack.

    A distant bell signaled the end of the training and was simultaneously a call to dinner. Pengfei and Neng walked ahead of the others who were replacing the weapons to their racks.

    ¡°Thanks for the instruction.¡±

    Neng looked over and appraised Pengfei.

    ¡°I didn¡¯t think you would last until the end.¡± His words carried a hint of approval.

    ¡°I learned a lot.¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°You were kind of a dick though.¡±

    ¡°Hah!¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    ¡°So, how do you tell the difference between the Conception Meridian and the Kidney Meridian?¡±

    ¡°What are you even talking about right now?¡±

    Jin Neng looked up from his food to stare blankly at Pengfei. Neng had not objected when Pengfei had followed him to the dining hall, through the queue for dinner, and then to a table. Nor had he objected to the stream of questions Pengfei had posed in an attempt to avoid awkward silences. This query was just the latest example of this tactic in action.

    ¡°I was reading a book about -¡±

    ¡°Sounds like something you would have to talk to Elder Chen Lei about. Or one of his students. I don¡¯t know about any of that stuff.¡±

    ¡°Fair enough.¡±

    Pengfei had turned his attention to his dinner when a slap to the back of the head startled him and sent his food flying from his chopsticks

    ¡°Eat up shithead!¡±

    Jin Nanxi and the twins, Tianwei and Tianxun, walked by with laughing glances cast back behind them.

    ¡°Well, do you know what to do about that?¡± Pengfei asked Neng while rubbing his head.

    ¡°Nanxi? He¡¯ll lose interest in you eventually.¡±

    ¡°Oh yeah? How long do you think that will take?¡±

    Neng paused for a moment to do some internal calculation.

    ¡°There¡¯s not much to do out here. Maybe a year or two.¡±

    ¡°Fucking hell.¡± Pengfei cursed under his breath despondently until a sudden idea lifted his spirits.

    ¡°Hey, what about you? Do you think you could take care of him for me?¡±

    ¡°Take care of him?¡±

    ¡°You know¡­take care of him.¡± Pengfei winked conspiratorially.

    ¡°What? Screw him?¡±

    ¡°If you think it¡¯ll help, go for it. But I meant fight him for me.¡±

    ¡°Fight him or fuck him, you¡¯re going to have to take care of it yourself.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m saving myself for someone I love. And I tried fighting him the other night; it didn¡¯t go well.¡±

    ¡°Nanxi? He¡¯s nothing. Just keep training and you¡¯ll beat him in no time.¡±

    ¡°Alright, how long do you think that will take?¡±

    Neng paused for another mental calculation.

    ¡°Maybe a year or two.¡±

 Chapter 6 - Sparring a Giant

    Pebbles crunched and slid out from Pengfei¡¯s feet as he jogged up the mountain path.  The descents had gotten easier but he quickly fell out of pace with the others on the climbs back to the sect.  He had only managed to maintain a position at the back of the cohort but now even the stragglers were pulling away.

    His stamina exhausted, a shambling trot slowed to walk.  The last disciple to pass Pengfei grabbed the robe on his shoulder and tried to drag him back into formation.

    ¡°Fuck ¡­ off¡­¡± Pengfei sputtered, sucking in ragged breaths between words and weakly throwing off the other boy¡¯s grip.  The disciple gave up his efforts and left Pengfei to trudge alone up the mountain.

    Deserted again.

    *************************************************************************************

    Normally, his tardiness in completing the morning exercise would cut into time dedicated to upkeep of the sect and then religious study, but this week Pengfei¡¯s dormitory had kitchen duty.  The middle of the day was especially busy, used for preparation of both the midday and evening meals.  He found the Dining Hall bustling with activity and resentful eyes glared at him with accusations of shirking responsibilities when he finally arrived, made his way to the back rooms.

    ¡°Clean the chopsticks.¡±

    ¡°Glad I didn¡¯t miss anything exciting.¡±

    Pengfei took up his position in front of buckets full of the soiled utensils.  He found a rag and awkwardly began picking up one chopstick at a time to wipe it clean.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡±  a fellow disciple asked incredulously.  Jin Shutian.

    ¡°Cleaning the chopsticks?¡±

    ¡°Have you ever done a dish before?  We¡¯ll be here all night if you do it like that.¡±

    Jin Xiaotong joined in on the ribbing, ¡°What, were you the young master of a merchant family before you came here?¡±

    ¡°Just show me how I¡¯m supposed to do it.¡±

    Shutian, who seemed permanently annoyed, reluctantly instructed on how to fill up buckets of water and wash the chopsticks en masse.  His chipper friend, Xiaotong, continued his insightful prodding of Pengfei.

    ¡°How was it growing up as a young lord, shithead?¡±

    Pengfei bristled at the nickname and the japes that were surprisingly accurate.  He had intended to keep his family background to himself and never imagined something as trivial as housework might give away details so close to the truth.  He fumbled for a way to change topics.  The result was less than graceful.

    ¡°How was it growing up so¡­ ugly?¡±

    Shutian stared at Pengfei, mouth agape, clearly astounded by the pitiful comeback but Xiaotong did not miss a beat.

    ¡°Well, it¡¯s just us and the goats out here, and the goats aren¡¯t very picky.¡±

    This brought a chuckle from the others and Pengfei found himself joining in.  Soon, he was comfortable enough to ask a question that had been nagging at the back of his mind at meals.

    ¡°Speaking of goats, I thought Taoists were supposed to be vegetarians.  What¡¯s with all the meat?¡±

    ¡°If we were vegetarian, we¡¯d all starve to death.  Nothing grows up here.¡± Shutian explained.  ¡°We get some supplies from merchants but they don¡¯t come often enough to keep us fed completely, so we keep goats.  Sheep and yaks, too, but mostly for the wool and milk.¡±

    --Still doesn¡¯t seem like you¡¯re getting enough.  Unlike your friend.--

    Pengfei knew his thoughts were uncharitable but facts were facts.  Shutian looked life if he missed one meal his cheek bones would tear through his skin and Xiaotong seemed to have eaten everything Shutian had missed.

    ¡°If you eat meat, does that mean you drink alcohol too?¡±

    Xiaotong chuckled, ¡°Shame disciple, for shame.  What kind of Taoists do you think we¡¯re raising here?¡±

    ¡°The kind that take alcohol with their meat, I hope.¡±

    Pengfei had indeed grown up in a life of ease, especially compared to the other disciples who he knew had been gathered from orphanages across the Central Plains.  It was true he hadn¡¯t learned to wash a dish or work a farm but that didn¡¯t stop him from carousing with children his own age.  In recent years, he had learned the universal truth that a pauper and a prince were equally happy to steal a nip of wine from time to time.

    ¡°If you find some booze, make sure to share it.  Just don¡¯t let them catch you.¡±  Shutian nodded at the elders of the sect who were entering to take their midday meal.  The grey-haired men sat in small groups and chatted in quiet dignity, contrasting the raucous disciples who would flood the hall once their seniors had left.

    Pengfei observed the masters as he went about his tasks.  Chen Lei sat with the sect head, Chen Hongzhang, and leaned over to communicate something discreetly.  Pengfei¡¯s savior, Master Weidao, tried to sit alone but seemed to be pestered by Chen Rulan, the martial arts instructor.   A few dozen others, the only occupants of the sect besides the Jin disciples.

    --They¡¯re all so old.--

    Their ages were all the more noticeable since there didn¡¯t seem to be anyone in Kunlun between the ages of sixteen and sixty.

    ¡°Why didn¡¯t they take in more disciples over the years?  It must have been hard for them before you all joined the sect.¡±

    ¡°Out of kindness.¡±  Shutian glanced up at the elders as he spoke.  ¡°The gates were closed more than forty years ago.  Any disciples they brought in would have just been trapped until the punishment was over.  Just be thankful you joined at the end.¡±  Shutian mumbled a last few words under his breath, ¡°Just four years left.¡±

    Jin Xiaotong hugged his broom with exaggerated affection, ¡°I can¡¯t wait to get out of here and meet my first couple wives.¡±

    ¡°Are you the young master now?  With your looks you¡¯ll have to buy all your companionship.¡±

    Xiaotong smacked Pengfei with the broom in mock retaliation.

    *************************************************************************************

    Jin Neng stood in front of Pengfei, taking small steps while maintaining a relaxed guard.  It seemed to invite attack, but whether through experience or paranoia, Pengfei sensed  a ferocity in the stance, a cunning that promised a counter for anyone foolish enough to approach.

    ¡°Come on, throw something.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t think I¡¯m ready for this.  Can¡¯t we just go through the forms again?¡±

    ¡°Forms aren¡¯t fighting.  This is how you really learn.¡±

    The two circled each other in the limited space available to them.  The entire generation of Jin disciples were paired up in the training ground for sparring.  Luckily, Pengfei had managed to grab onto a familiar face for the first round.

    ¡°Just focus on one thing at a time.  Practice your straight punches.¡±

    --Straight punch, right.  Step, turn hips, twist the arm and extend it¡­--

    The resulting attack was as stiff and mechanical as the steps recited in Pengfei¡¯s mind.  Neng blocked it with ease, scooping the fist off-line and stepping in for a knee to the midsection that he thankfully held back at the last moment.

    ¡°Keep going.¡±

    Pengfei tried to comply, attempting more of the same, shuffling awkwardly between blows.  Neng threw strikes of his own, slow enough for even a beginner to parry.  A surprising number of the attacks still landed despite the generous exaggeration of each movement. If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    ¡°Switch partners!¡±  Elder Chen Rulan yelled out.

    --Shit.--

    As nerve racking as his first sparring match was, it had at least been with the somewhat familiar Jin Neng.  He may be gruff but at least he seemed to harbor no genuine ill-will.  But now Pengfei saw Jin Nanxi coming his direction with an eager gleam in his eyes.

    ¡°Um¡­ you!  Please teach me, brother.¡±  Pengfei darted from Neng¡¯s side and grabbed the nearest robe, in the belief that a random partner would take it easier on him than Nanxi.

    --Oh, shit.--

    ¡°Then I¡¯ll be in your care.  I¡¯m Jin Qingfang.¡±

    ¡°Jin¡­ Jin Pengfei.¡±   He looked up.  And up.

    --He¡¯s a fucking giant.--

    This particular training partner had been visible across dining halls and training grounds since Pengfei had first joined the sect.  He was hard to miss.  But previous glimpses had not done the behemoth justice.  The sheer size of his fists as he raised his guard was ¡­

    --Ludicrous¡­--

    Still, it was too late now.  The enormous teenager was already testing the distance with a few preliminary attacks.   An overwhelming strength could be felt even when Pengfei parried and blocked the most lackadaisical blows, and the distance seemed insurmountable when he considered throwing a counterattack.

    --Maybe if I extend the first step and pull the back foot along--

    Pengfei saw an opportunity and lunged in behind his fist. Slipping in under his opponent¡¯s guard felt like a small raft entering a great canyon with the larger disciple¡¯s shadow completely enveloping him.

    The strike landed.

    Pengfei was surprised at the small success but besides the dull thudding sound of contact, there was no reaction.  He hadn¡¯t expected much.  His attacks had barely shifted the smaller Neng, but at least he had felt some give in the flesh beneath his knuckles, a subtle tilt of balance to absorb the impact.  On the other hand, Jin Qingfang'' was more like a boulder than a body.

    Pengfei looked up to see Qingfang¡¯s smiling face blocking out the sun.

    --Oooh shit.--

    Qingfang reached out and gave, for him at least, what must have been a gentle push and sent Pengfei stumbling backwards.

    --Wow.  I thought he was going to ¨C --

    <u>Dragon Encircles From the Sky (baowei long tian - </u><u>°ü‡úýˆÌì)</u>

    Qingfang turned his back for a split second and in the next instant his foot was descending from impossibly high overhead at an equally incredible velocity.

    A heavy punch or a brutish headbutt would have been counterattacks that matched Pengfei¡¯s preconceived notions of the enormous disciple.  Instead, it was the most acrobatic kick he had seen in his short time in the sect.  One that numerous disciples made a show of attempting but few could actually execute.  Woefully beyond Pengfei¡¯s current abilities.

    There was perception but no reaction.

    The kick passed directly in front of Pengfei¡¯s face and brushed across the front of his robes , accompanied by a rush of heat that wasn¡¯t really there.  A vague but familiar sensation.  Before Pengfei could process it, Qingfang had landed nimbly atop the same foot he had sliced through the air with, a wide grin on his face.

    ¡°What¡­the fuck was that?  Did you use qi?¡±

    ¡°Yes.  But don¡¯t get distracted now.¡±

    Qingfang stepped away then turned for a sharp back kick to Pengfei¡¯s midsection.

    ¡°Oooof!¡±

    The giant brushed past and left his sparring partner with a conciliatory pat on the shoulder, off to find the next.  Pengfei was left to wonder if the dramatic attack was a violation of the rule against using internal energy in sparring as he coughed up his last meal.

    --Maybe since he didn¡¯t actually make contact with it¡­ --

    More opponents came and went.  With each change, Pengfei kept a sharp eye out for Nanxi.  He kept the distance between them, backing away in between each round, grabbing insistently at other partners.  Most were accommodating and lowered the intensity of the attacks for the beginner.  Still, there were bumps and bruises by the end of it all.

    Elder Rulan called a stop to the empty-handed portion of training and the rest of the disciples went off to fetch wooden swords from the weapons rack to begin that phase of the day¡¯s practice.  But the instructor waved Pengfei off to the side.

    ¡°Clear the way!  Go over there and practice what you¡¯ve learned so far.¡±

    The boy obeyed the instructions called across the training ground.  He first ran through the forms he had been shown, but the movements were little more than a dance to him.  An occasional punch or kick, amid a long choreography of more obscure motions that had yet to be explained.

    After a few repetitions of the sequences, Pengfei moved to a more direct approach.  He took his guard and threw his straight punches again and again.  Left, right, left right.  Parried by Neng.  Landing on Qingfang.  He recalled the sensations from his earlier bouts.  Whether failure or success, there was still something lacking in the strikes.

    In between it all, he stole glances at the disciples practicing with their clattering wooden swords.  A beautiful display of martial prowess.  Then the practice was over and the disciples were making their way to the Dining Hall for dinner.

    Pengfei was pleased when Neng caught his eye and come to join him.  They fell in step together, moving along with the others.

    ¡°You¡¯re doing alright.  Just don¡¯t overthink it too much.  You can¡¯t fix everything right away.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not trying to fix everything; I just want to fix SOMETHING.  I want one thing that I can do right.¡±

    Neng shrugged.  ¡°Then just focus on the basics for now.  Your straights are getting there.  I guess I¡¯d say ¡­ punch through the target more.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    Neng halted his steps and turned to Pengfei.

    ¡°Okay, this is what you¡¯re doing.¡±

    The senior Kunlun disciple performed a punch to the abdomen.  Pengfei thankfully had enough time to brace for the impact but the feeling of knuckles twisting into his skin was still unpleasant.

    ¡°Now, this is what you should be doing.¡±

    The next blow knocked the wind out of him and sent him toppling.

    ¡°See the difference?¡±

    ¡°Huggh¡­ same¡­ exact spot¡­¡±.

    First Qingfang¡¯s kick and now Neng¡¯s fist.  When Pengfei had recovered his breath, he continued.

    ¡°It felt like¡­ you were going to punch a hole straight through me.¡±

    ¡°Exactly.  You should always imagine punching through your target.  But don¡¯t sit there and pose, pull your hand back immediately.¡±

    Neng helped Pengfei back to his feet and the two continued their walk to the dining hall for the evening meal.

    ¡°Still, I don¡¯t think it would have helped against Qingfang.¡±

    ¡°Of course not.  You¡¯d have to use your internal energy for someone as big as him, but that¡¯s ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Right, off limits.  I¡¯m a little scared to start the internal practice anyway.  I still have so many questions about the neigong technique.  The meridian diagrams are so damn complicated.¡±

    ¡°Why do you keep talking about that?¡±

    Pengfei hesitated at Neng¡¯s confused tone.  He thought it natural to stumble with such esoteric techniques, but his companion had him second guessing now.

    ¡°Elder Chen Mo gave me a book, the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯.  It has all these diagrams, and ¨C¡°

    ¡°Yeah, yeah, the book.  That¡¯s our neigong technique, but we didn¡¯t learn it from the manual.  The elders just showed us how to do it.  If you¡¯re going to try and figure it out from reading it, you better talk to Chen Lei to check your understanding.  Unless you want to give yourself qi deviation.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t even know what that is.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s kind of my point.¡±

    ************************************************************************************

    Neng had long gone back to his barracks while Pengfei and his dormitory remained in the dining hall to clean up after the evening meal.  Afterward, he kept his eyes open for Nanxi while walking with his other bunkmates to their building.  With his attention focused on that one particular threat, a new conflict was able to take him by surprise.

    ¡°There he is!¡±

    ¡°Hey shithead!¡±

    Two disciples came jogging over to put their arms around Pengfei.

    ¡°Yeah, hi.¡±

    Pengfei tried not to show his irritation at his nickname but the other two were already continuing their smarmy bit.

    ¡°We noticed you¡¯ve been having trouble fitting in.

    ¡°We thought you could use a friend.¡±

    ¡°We wanted to surprise you with a familiar face.¡±

    The two went back and forth with their little act, building toward a crescendo that Pengfei dreaded.  But the climax just left him confused.

    ¡°Ta da!¡±

    ¡°Surprise!¡±

    A vulture was struggling against a tether next to the door of their dormitory.  A group of puzzled disciples had gathered around it and now looked about for some explanation.

    ¡°It¡¯s your buddy!¡± the stouter disciple said.

    His thinner companion added, ¡°Your dear departed friend!¡±

    ¡°What are you talking about?¡±  Pengfei tried to remember their names.  Hongyu?  And the stout one¡­ Daoping?  Of the three dozen boys in the large open dorm, those names popped out.  Both of them were roughly Pengfei¡¯s height.

    ¡°What was his name again?¡± Daoping asked.

    ¡°Feng!¡± Hongyu supplied.

    Pengfei threw their arms off his shoulders and appraised them with a cold glare.  Whatever their game, the mention of Ma Feng was too much to bear.  Pengfei unwillingly pictured his dead friend as he had first seen him, in the azure robes of the Qingcheng sect.

    ¡°I don¡¯t think he gets it.¡±

    ¡°Well, you see, the ground is too hard for burials out here.¡±

    ¡°And it would take a week to gather the wood for a cremation.¡±

    ¡°Stop.¡±  Pengfei¡¯s fury was rising beneath the surface but Daoping continued.

    ¡°So, the elders ¡®gave your friend to the mountain¡¯.  That¡¯s what the locals call it anyway.¡±

    ¡°It means they cut him up into little chunks and fed him to the birds.¡±

    ¡°Like this one!¡±  Hongyu gestured to the captive carrion bird like he was displaying a golden relic.

    ¡°This little guy was flying around with your friend in its guts.  We thought it might cheer you up to have a little piece of him nearby.  Until he gets shit out, anyway.¡±

    --Feng¡­--

    Hongyu and Daoping laughed uproariously while the other disciples nearby milled about uncomfortably.  Some went inside the dorm to escape the scene.

    --This is a bad idea.--

    Pengfei was rational despite the rage.  He didn¡¯t lose all reason and lash out blindly, as cathartic as that might have been.  In fact, his own internal monologue was more clear than ever.

    --I¡¯m not a match for either of them, let alone both of them.--

    Hongyu and Daoping seemed to laugh in slow motion.

    --But¡­  fuck them.--

    Straight punch.

    Pengfei threw the strike to Hongyu¡¯s abdomen.  The disciple was already doubled over in laughter so had nowhere else to go but backward.

    --Punch through, right through your damn spine.--

    That bit of advice Neng had given him just an hour ago replayed in his mind, but he had forgotten the next bit about pulling the fist back quickly.  Daoping was quick to retaliate on his friend¡¯s behalf and struck Pengfei¡¯s exposed temple.

    He recovered quickly as Hongyu vomited half his dinner onto the ground.  Daoping threw another attack but was parried.

    Left hand, right hand!

    Pengfei threw the only strikes he knew but he threw them with all the ferocity and speed he could muster.  Still, Daoping blocked them easily, then kicked his opponent in the ribs after the last.

    A wince, a sharp inhale, but then another simple combination from Pengfei.  Another counter from Daoping.  The junior disciple attacked relentlessly but it was the senior who was doing all the damage.  A punch to the face, another to the gut, kicks to the inside and outside of the legs.  Two cuts on Pengfei¡¯s face leaked little streams of blood.

    He spit some red phlegm to the ground and squared up to attack Daoping again.  This time he flicked his hand forward just a bit, an imitation of one of his simplistic attacks.

    Daoping blocked a punch that wasn¡¯t there and received a real one to the nose a moment later.

    Pengfei reveled in his success for a moment before Hongyu pushed him to the ground from behind.  The two older disciples set about kicking their victim as he lay curled up on the ground.

    Their assault only lasted a few more moments before other disciples pulled them off.  Pengfei unfurled himself and lay spread out on his back as the two attackers backed away.  He observed Daoping¡¯s bloody nose and the messy remnants of Hongyu¡¯s dinner all over the front of his shirt.

    ¡°Worth it!¡±  Pengfei called out to them as they walked inside, cursing him.

 Chapter 7 - Have a Good Trip

    ¡°You should stop picking fights you can¡¯t win.¡±

    ¡°What about that story makes you think I started the fight?¡±

    Pengfei followed Jin Neng up the mountainside, holding a very frazzled vulture under his arm.  They had covered its head with a sack and bound its feet together to avoid scratches and pecks, but it still tried to break free from time to time.

    ¡°You said you punched Hongyu first, right?¡±

    ¡°Well, yeah, but ¨C ¡°

    ¡°And back with Jin Nanxi?  You attacked him?¡±

    ¡°The fights started before the first punches were thrown.¡±

    Neng shook his head, ¡°That¡¯s not how the elders see it.  We¡¯re not allowed to fight outside of the training ground.¡±

    ¡°They haven¡¯t noticed it yet.¡±

    ¡°They¡¯ve noticed, they¡¯re just cutting you a break.  Don¡¯t expect that to last.¡±

    Conversation lulled as they walked up a particularly steep grade.  They were quite far from the sect now, farther than Pengfei had been since waking up in Kunlun.  Only possible since it was a rest day.  Breakfast was suspended, the disciples expected to fend for themselves or go hungry.  Pengfei had convinced Neng to set out early, in the time that normally would have been spent around a table.

    When the ground leveled out again, the conversation continued.

    ¡°So, I¡¯m supposed to sit back and let every asshole in the sect screw with me?¡±

    ¡°No, I think you have the right idea in fighting them.  Nothing is going to change if you just take it.  But you need to fight them during sparring.  They¡¯re not even allowed to refuse if you challenge them.¡±

    ¡°Alright¡­¡±  Pengfei considered the new information but saw no improvement in his situation.  ¡°So, I fight them during sparring.  But I¡¯m still not a match for anyone in the sect.  I doubt letting them kick the shit out of me is going to discourage them much.¡±

    Neng fell silent and screwed up his brow for a few moments.  He seemed to be putting a great deal of thought into Pengfei¡¯s problems.

    ¡°You don¡¯t have to beat them¡­ just convince them you¡¯re not an easy target.  You could get to that level in a month or two, but you¡¯d need to practice more.  Before breakfast, after dinner.  Any time you have a free moment.¡±

    ¡°A month?  That¡¯s still a long time.  Nanxi is already looking for me during sparring.  From now on, Hongyu and Daoping probably will be too.¡±

    ¡°If you get a couple more people to run interference, we can buy you some time until you¡¯re ready.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯d do that for me?¡± Pengfei asked in surprise, but the other boy just shrugged, as if to say it was not worth mentioning.

    --Put up with all the petty little pranks, train hard for a month¡­fight them.  Put an end to the bullshit.  Maybe?--

    Pengfei reviewed the crude plan in his mind, then asked Neng.  ¡°Do you think it will work?¡±

    ¡°50/50.¡±  The rocky path they followed crested a hill where more vultures circled overhead.  Neng confirmed they had reached their destination.  ¡°This is it.¡±

    A charnel ground, a place of bones.  The human remains were hard to distinguish from the rocks and earth.   They were either buried, broken, or dyed in the colors of the soil but every now and then an irregular shape gave away a rib-bone or a jaw.

    In the middle of the small plateau was a fresh white skeleton.  Not intact, but the constituent parts were grouped closely together for the most part.  A long bone, part of an arm or a leg, had been dragged far out to one side.

    Pengfei made no move to approach nor did he desire to look too closely at the scene.  He removed the sack from the captive vulture¡¯s head and untied its legs before placing it gently on the ground.

    Freed, the bird waddled awkwardly to join its fellows.  It ducked its head to the ground from time to time, hunting for any missed scraps.  But the place had been mostly picked clean by now.  Not nearly as grisly as Pengfei had been imagining.  Sanitary and impersonal.  No blood or viscera to be seen.

    It still felt wrong.

    When Pengfei shivered involuntarily, Neng looked him up and down, then asked, ¡°You really didn¡¯t know this is how we did things?¡±

    ¡°I should have asked more questions about Feng, I just¡­ didn¡¯t want to.  I¡¯m surprised the elders didn¡¯t tell me though.¡±

    ¡°They probably didn¡¯t want to freak you out.¡±

    The two of them stood there in silence for a few moments breathing in the cool air and feeling the wind on their faces.  The only other sound was of the carrion birds.

    Neng seemed content to wait there all day if necessary.  Pengfei¡¯s senior could hold a conversation but still possessed a noticeable penchant for quiet.  It had become clear this was not because of a foul temper, just someone comfortable sharing a silence without a need to fill it.

    Pengfei appreciated someone with a demeanor so similar to his own, though he liked to throw out barbs and quips from time to time.

    ¡°Alright, fuck off and leave me here.¡±

    Neng chuckled and turned to head back down the mountain.  He looked over his shoulder and called out.

    ¡°Practice later?¡±

    ¡°I have some errands.  I¡¯ll find you after lunch.¡±

    Pengfei picked out a large boulder to lay atop.

    He held up his hand and turned it over in the sun, examining his knuckles.

    --Felt good hitting those pricks.  Felt good, hitting in general.  It really seemed like it clicked there.--

    He could still feel a throb in his forearm, where the impact of his punch had reverberated through his flesh.  Foot, waist, and shoulder synchronized to transmit power. Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.

    He let the sunlight filter through his fingertips, and watched the sky as more vultures circled overhead.

    *************************************************************************************

    The disciples of Kunlun had one day to themselves every two weeks.  Most chose to spend their time in relaxation or amusement but Pengfei¡¯s docket was full.

    Coming down the mountain path, he sought out Chen Lei and found the man in the Medicine Hall, just as Pengfei had hoped.  For once, the grey-haired physician was not alone in the infirmary.  He was treating one young patient while another boy looked on studiously.

    ¡°Pengfei, how are you?¡±  The doctor asked distractedly as he examined a weeping sore on his charge¡¯s leg.

    ¡°I¡¯m fine, thank y- ugh!¡±

    Pengfei gagged at the sight of oozing puss and drew the full attention of the three others in the room.

    The elder noticed Pengfei¡¯s scratched and bruised cheeks, ¡°What happened to your face?¡±

    ¡°Oh, nothing important.  I¡¯m here about something else, sir.¡±

    ¡°Alright.¡±   The elder turned to his apprentice.  ¡°Apply the salve we made last week, then a dressing.  Make sure he comes in once a day to change it.¡±

    The physician stepped toward Pengfei as the medical assistant set about the task.

    ¡°Elder, I wanted to ask you some questions about the inner energy methods of the sect.¡±

    Pengfei pulled a book out of his robe, the copy of ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯, and began looking for a particular page of the text.  The physician looked over his shoulder curiously.

    ¡°Where did you get that?¡±

    ¡°The library.  Elder Chen Mo gave it to me but I¡¯ve been a little nervous to try it out until I cleared up a couple questions.¡±

    ¡°Only a couple?¡±

    Pengfei detailed what he had learned about the meridians which formed the internal circuits for the body¡¯s energy, the pathways for qi harnessed from the outside world.  When he raised the same questions he had previously asked of Neng, the doctor just laughed.

    ¡°Hahaha¡­good, good.¡±  The elder nodded his approval, which only confused Pengfei.  ¡°You clearly have a mind for the technical details.  If you had a stronger stomach I might consider taking you on as a student.¡±

    Chen Lei nodded at the other disciples in reference to Pengfei¡¯s earlier aversion, his little outburst.

    --Thank goodness for near misses.--  He shuddered at the thought of examining gushing pustules on a daily basis.

    ¡°Still, there is a proper order to things.  You are too bogged down in theory.  You should learn this with your body first before exploring the technicalities.¡±

    The elder handed the book back to Pengfei and beckoned him to follow.  They left the large patients¡¯ quarters and entered a smaller, more comfortable, room.  The doctor motioned for Pengfei to sit on the floor and took a position behind him.  He placed his hands on Pengfei¡¯s back, similar to when he had explored the young disciple¡¯s meridians a week ago.

    ¡°Breath in and out.  Listen to my voice.¡±

    Once again the doctor circulated his qi through Pengfei¡¯s body.  Gentler than before.  Instruction, not an examination.  Instead of a raging flood that overran every tributary of his inner pathways, the energy seeped through him slowly and calmly.

    ¡°For now, focus only on what you can control.  At this stage, your body will do much of the work unconsciously as you meditate.¡±

    The heat moved imperceptibly until it reached a reservoir in the lower abdomen where the fire grew.

    ¡°Your qi will naturally gather here.  The first step is just to breath until you can feel it.  It will be difficult, a small spark in the night, swaying in the breeze.  Feel it circulate within the dantian.  And once you can feel it, grab it.¡±

    The heat that had been swirling like a whirlpool in a churning sea then flowed downward into an abyss.

    ¡°Conception Vessel, Governing Vessel¡­ the names are not important.  Follow the great pathway down to the base of the spine, then up along it.¡±

    The little embers tickled every nerve and fiber on their way up Pengfei¡¯s body.  They sparked their way around the back of his skull and to the front of his face.

    ¡°Finally, bring your qi down the front of your body and back into your dantian, completing the circuit.¡±

    The Taoist master¡¯s qi followed the path he had described then evaporated into nothingness.  Just like last time, Pengfei felt a cold numbness once the energy had gone from his body.

    ¡°Once you can complete one such revolution, come and find me for the next step.¡±

    Elder Chen Lei stood, his short but profound lesson complete.

    ¡°But I still have so many questions!  I thought the Governing and Conception Meridians took years to unlock, I thought ¨C ¡°

    ¡°As I said, it¡¯s too early for the theory.¡±

    ¡°¡­ Yes, Elder.¡±

    ¡°If you don¡¯t make any progress in a year, come back and see me.¡±

    --A year of grasping at invisible straws?  Kill me.--

    ¡°Thank you for your guidance, sir.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    While most of his day was free, Pengfei¡¯s dormitory was still responsible for lunch and dinner, not to mention all the associated chores that went with the meals.  He tucked his sliver of insight into the folds of his memory and made his way from the Medicine Hall to the Dining Hall to begin preparation for the midday service.

    Andong, the head of the Jin disciples, put Pengfei on dish detail again.  Xiaotong was jabbering into Shutian¡¯s ear at a nearby station.

    ¡°Can you two help me out with something?¡±  Pengfei broached.

    ¡°Ah, the young master.  What do you need?¡±

    ¡°Spar with me for a month.¡±

    Shutian was immediately suspicious, ¡°What are you talking about?¡±

    ¡°Spar with me, run interference, don¡¯t let any of the assholes,¡± Pengfei nodded in Nanxi¡¯s general direction, ¡°take my head off.¡±

    ¡°Fuck that.¡±  Shutian declared sourly.

    ¡°Are you always so miserable Shutian?  What¡¯s the problem?  You¡¯re going to be practicing with someone anyway, might as well be me.  And I¡¯ll owe you.¡±

    The short and stout Xiaotong stepped forward on his friend¡¯s behalf.

    ¡°Deal.  Take Shutian¡¯s herding shift for the next week.¡±  Xiaotong agreed for his companion without hesitation and drew Shutian¡¯s anger.

    ¡°What the hell?¡±  The thin disciple stiffened at his friend but his outrage quickly died down and soon became acquiescence.

    ¡°Yeah, alright.¡±

    ¡°Great.  What¡¯s a ¡®herding shift¡¯?¡±

    ¡°You and a couple other disciples go down into the valley to herd the goats for a week.  Eat stale food, shit outside, sleep in the cold.  That kind of thing.¡±

    ¡°Sounds like a party.¡±

    ¡°Actually, it¡¯s a great deal for you, young master.  You¡¯ll be out of danger of your friends for a whole week,¡± Xiaotong nodded to the crowd of possible assailants among their dormmates, ¡°and when you get back, we¡¯ll be your sparring partners.¡±

    Pengfei smiled in growing appreciation of the arrangement.

    --Can¡¯t be any worse than the trip here from Sichuan¡­--

    ¡°Alright, sounds good.¡±

    ¡°Good.  You leave tomorrow.¡±

    Shutian gave one last bit of advice.

    ¡°Pack a good coat.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    Pengfei loitered behind Neng as he searched through the shelves of the sect¡¯s small library.  The senior disciple had led the way excitedly and with minimal explanation when he heard of the deal Pengfei had struck with Shutian and Xiaotong.

    ¡°Here it is.¡±

    Neng extracted a text and immediately began examining the contents.  Pengfei was able to identify it from the cover as his friend flipped through the pages; ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.

    ¡°Focus on this section for the next week.¡±  Neng pinched a few pages between his fingers, a small section at the very beginning of the book.  Pengfei took the text and leafed through the selected passage.

    ¡°I know all of this already.  Shouldn¡¯t I study the next section?¡±

    ¡°You wouldn¡¯t understand it.¡±

    ¡°Why?  Everything is written down in there, right?¡±

    ¡°You can¡¯t just read a book and become a master.  You don¡¯t know anything about martial arts, no offense ¨C ¡°

    ¡°None taken.¡±

    ¡° ¨C so you have no context to interpret it.  The best you can hope for is to solidify what you¡¯ve already seen.¡±

    Pengfei was a bit taken aback.  Not by Neng¡¯s appraisal of his abilities, but with his sudden change in speech.  He examined his companion over the edge of the tome.

    ¡°This is the first time I¡¯ve heard you speak so¡­ well, you¡¯re normally a bit more reserved.  Seems like you¡¯re a real scholar when it comes to martial arts.¡±

    ¡°Lucky for you.¡±  Neng took the compliment with a touch of embarrassment.  ¡°There¡¯s not actually much to do when you go herding so you should be able to get some good training done.  This could be great if you¡¯re not partnered up with someone completely lazy.¡±

    ¡°Shutian said he didn¡¯t know who my partner would be.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, you usually don¡¯t find out until you meet them at the gates.  And someone else usually comes down a day or two later.¡±

    The pair spent the rest of the afternoon reviewing the first section of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and comparing what Pengfei knew with what was written in the book.  Neng explained a few of the more confusing passages and gave some of his own commentary for Pengfei to keep in mind.

    They worked up until it was time to return to the Dining Hall to work the dinner service.  Pengfei would have continued training after the meal as well but felt it prudent to get a good rest before waking up early for his long journey.

    As the next day dawned, he packed the manuals ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ along with a few spare sets of clothes into a sack of bare essentials.  He donned the only heavy coat he had been provided and made his way out of the dormitory while most of the other disciples were still sound asleep.  The walk to the sect¡¯s front gates was eerily quiet.

    Shutian and Xiaotong said herding was done in shifts of two or three disciples but that did not seem to be the case this time.  After a few minutes, a single person walked down the sect¡¯s main path to join him.

    ¡°This disciple greets Elder Chen Weidao.¡±

    Pengfei held his fist out in salute to the Taoist master who had saved his life.   The old swordsman nodded his head silently and looked down the dusty path leading away from the sect.  He had the same casual demeanor and dress as the first time Pengfei had seen him.  Sleeves and pants legs rolled up like a fisherman, not seeming to feel the early morning cold.

    ¡°You¡¯d better get started.  It¡¯s a long walk.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m just waiting for the rest of my group, Elder.¡±

    Chen Weidao shook his head, ¡°No, it¡¯s just you.  You¡¯re going down alone.¡±

 Chapter 8 - Camping

    Pengfei followed the same path the disciples used for their morning runs but found it unfamiliar this early in the day.  Everything looked different in the dim light of dawn.  It took longer than he expected to reach the broken statue where he would normally turn back to the sect, and after passing it he was in unknown territory.

    Elder Chen Weidao had said the path was straightforward, just straight down the mountain to the grazing lands below.  It would take most of the day to make the journey on foot and this long distance was why the disciples stayed down in the valley for a week at a time.

    ¡°I should¡¯ve brought food.  Starving!¡±

    Pengfei spoke to himself aloud to fill the silence.  The only other sounds were wind and the occasional caw of a bird.  Seeing vultures fly overhead reminded him of the prank Daoping and Hongyu had played on him.

    ¡°Bastards.¡±

    The terrain slowly began to change as the hours passed.  Tufts of grass could be seen here and there.  The mountains straddled the border and now Pengfei was heading to the north, toward Xinjiang.  The contrast with the Tibetan land to the south was subtle but noticeable.  More greenery, even some wildflowers.

    He had at least remembered to bring a flask.   The sun and temperature both rose and his heavy coat came off around midday.  A few minutes rest under the shade of a large boulder, .   taking conservative sips of water, then back on the trail.

    Shortly after what should have been lunch time, two of Kunlun¡¯s disciples came around a bend in the path, headed back up to the sect.  They were soon followed around the turn by a yak pulling a wooden cart.

    ¡°Hey¡±

    ¡°Hi.¡±

    The two other disciples took Penfei¡¯s appearance as an excuse to stop and rest.

    Pengfei examined their beast of burden.  He was more familiar with the water buffalo of the Central Plains but had seen many of these stouter creatures on his way through Tibet.  The yak cart carried maybe a dozen goats and large covered baskets of feed.

    When he saw the disciples munching on food of their own, Pengfei asked, ¡°You have any extra?¡±

    One of them wordlessly handed him some jerky which he ate eagerly.

    ¡°Why are you alone?¡±

    ¡°The disciple who was supposed to come with me has a sore on his leg.  It got infected, so he has to stay at the sect for treatment.  But Elder Weidao said someone else will be down in a few days.¡±

    ¡°Right, someone will bring this cart back down.¡±

    The three disciples chatted for a few more minutes then parted ways again, one downhill and the others up.

    --Looks like it¡¯s a lot harder going back to the sect than in it is coming down.--  Pengfei thought to himself.

    The bleating of the goats could be heard for several minutes as the next week-worth of meat made its way up to the mountain.

    ******************************************************************************

    A couple more hours of trudging and he finally reached his station.  The mountain path faded until it was no longer discernible from the rocks but Pengfei could see his goal clearly by that point.  A large stream trickled down from another side of the mountain and ran downhill to the north, through a green valley.  There were goats, sheep, and a surprising number of yaks dotted around, feeding on the grass or sipping at the stream.

    A two-story stone and mud building stood in center of the valley.  Pengfei knew it was a barn that the goats huddled in at night and that it also served as a smelly shelter for the disciples-turned-herdsmen.

    He made his way along the stream and then up to the building to stash his bag of personal belongings.

    ¡°Shit!¡±  The animal smell was thick inside, enough to give him pause at the entryway.

    Pengfei climbed the ladder to the second floor reserved for humans and took a quick survey.   The only signs of human presence were some bedrolls and barrels of dried food tucked in one cramped corner.  The rest of the landing was taken up with tools and supplies.

    He extracted his martial arts texts from his bag and stuffed them in his robes then set about a bit of housekeeping.  Shooed a few goats outside and swept out the dung that littered the dirt floor.  Finally, he stepped out into the sun to breath clean air.

    A familiar face was there to greet him.

    Neeeigggh.

    A horse, a Tibetan mare, was stomping its hooves on the ground just a few paces away from the front door of the building.  Its black coat glistened in the sun.

    ¡°Whoa, where did you come from?¡±

    Pengfei squinted his eyes in disbelief as recognition dawned on him.

    ¡°Hey, aren¡¯t you¡­?¡±

    It was Ma Feng¡¯s horse, the one he had ridden across the plateau.  The one he had died on.

    ¡°I thought Pema must have taken you.¡±

    Pengfei reached out his hand to soothe the anxious beast as it bucked and brayed.  She seemed to calm as she approached, looked as if she would place her forehead right underneath his outstretched palm.Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.

    But at the last second the mare turned her head and bit down hard on Pengfei¡¯s fingers.

    ¡°FUUU¡­.. Son of a bitch!¡±

    He yanked his hand bank and held it tight in an attempt to ease the pain.  The horse whinnied mischievously and pranced away.

    ¡°What the hell was that about?!¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s group had procured new horses in Nagqu when they met Pema.  According to her, the local breed was more suitable for the journey across the plateau than the animals they had ridden from Sichuan.

    They had quickly decided on personal favorites and ridden them for the duration of their journey through Tibet, though never becoming attached enough to name the animals.  While Pengfei had not interacted with Feng¡¯s mount much, she had never been this hostile towards him.

    ¡°So, I guess you¡¯re not going to help with the herding?¡±  Pengfei shouted at the mare.  He didn¡¯t see a saddle anyway.  That normally would not have been much of an impediment to him but the story was different with an unwilling animal.

    ¡°You know, I hear horse meat tastes pretty good.  Maybe I should find out for myself?¡±

    The mare bayed at him then went back to grazing.  Pengfei clicked his teeth at the animal, then looked around the scattered herd.   He reluctantly trudged off to the north end of the valley to take stock of the situation in the pastures.

    ******************************************************************************

    In the brief instructions he had given, Jin Shutian said to focus on the north end of the valley to prevent animals from following the river downstream.  So, Pengfei headed in that direction.

    It was a leisurely stroll once he relaxed, and in the end there was not much work to be done.  The well-behaved herd naturally kept close to the barn.  He journeyed to the nearest bend in the valley, and when Pengfei was satisfied that no animals had gone further, he sat to rest.

    The Kunlun disciple perched on a rock and pulled the martial arts tomes from his robe.  He flipped through the pages of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and quickly reviewed the postures and techniques he was already familiar with.

    The crude drawings depicted human figures executing attacks and holding stances.  There were footwork diagrams and lines indicating movement, all relatively simple.  This fist style was little more than the basic strikes, a few tactics, meant for swordsmen who found themselves suddenly unarmed.  But even with its rudimentary nature the written material was difficult to interpret.

    Neng was right, Pengfei could only understand the first section because he had seen it in real life.  The large movements were mostly glossed over, more focus given to minute details.  There was a suggestion to imagine a pulley connecting the arms behind the back, to guarantee retraction of the opposite hand when striking.  An argument on whether to step with heel or toe.  If he hadn¡¯t heard some of the same before, he would be completely lost.

    --I can¡¯t imagine trying to learn the techniques from scratch with this.  Stories about kids finding manuals in secluded caves and mastering martial arts¡­ they¡¯re all bullshit.--

    Interpreting the texts seemed to be a matter of skill and experience in and of itself.

    The images drawn on the paper could never capture the thousand little components that made up even a single strike.  The turning of hips, spinning of the arm, tucking of chin, step of the foot, and so on.  Pengfei imagined that only when a person already understood these general principles could they pick up such a manual and understand it fully.

    --I¡¯m still a long way off from that.--

    But the section that Neng had suggested he focus on held few difficulties.  Pengfei digested the words and images and tried to fix them in his memory.  Subsequent pages detailed more sequences of attacks and counters, full of verbose metaphor and subtlety.  He skimmed past until something different caught Pengfei¡¯s eye.

    ¡°What¡¯s this?  Looks familiar.¡±

    Instead of a martial arts posture or a footwork diagram there was a map of the body¡¯s meridians identical to what was in the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ manual.  But the accompanying passage did not explore how to cultivate or purify the body¡¯s qi.  Instead, it detailed the method of channeling the energy through the hand for a strike.  Another image showed a familiar attack.

    ¡°Thundering Sky Strike?  It just looks like a normal punch.¡±

    Pengfei thought of the amazing feats of martial arts he had seen demonstrated.  Lunges across impossible distances, stone shattering strength, sword strokes that could cleave people in two.

    ¡°Are they just normal techniques infused with internal energy?  It seems too simple.  But maybe that¡¯s the point behind circulating qi¡­¡±

    He was incredulous but set his disbelief aside for another day.  Instead, he returned to the familiar and basic techniques, standing to practice what little he knew.  Stances held statically for several minutes until the legs ached and burned.  One such posture involved balancing on a single leg and Pengfei had to catch himself several times as he teetered from side to side with every gentle breeze.

    Then he began the forms which contained the core techniques and footwork of the martial art within their movements.  He went back to reread the text after completing each section to check if he remembered all the hidden implications in each wave of the arm.

    --This could be a block or an attack depending on whether or not it was accompanied by this step?--

    Even after Neng¡¯s helpful explanations there was too much to recall.

    When Pengfei reached the limit of what he could imitate in the forms he transitioned to practicing the strikes he had learned in isolation.  One hundred punches with this arm and then another hundred with that arm.  His fingers throbbed in his clenched fist where Feng¡¯s former horse had bitten him but the skin was unbroken.

    He tried to forget the pain and focus on the synchronization he had felt in his fight against Hongyu and Daoping.  That first punch he had landed.  But something wasn¡¯t quite right in his technique.

    --Can¡¯t quite get it again¡­--

    It had been mid-afternoon when he rode out from the barn and now the sun was sinking into early evening. Pengfei jogged back to the south end of the valley to tend the herd before nightfall.

    Once back, he carried out several instructions as he recalled them from his memory.  He filled several wooden troughs with oats to supplement the herd¡¯s diet of grass.  The animals that were not already at the barn trotted back when they heard the familiar sounds of food hitting the planks.

    Pengfei avoided Feng¡¯s horse as it trotted up for its share of feed.

    The Kunlun disciple was not as excited about his own dinner.  The only things for him to eat were mealy grain balls and tough jerky.

    He ate outside with the animals to avoid the smell of the barn.  The sun was blocked out by the mountains before it truly set, leaving the valley in an eerie false night while the peaks were still illuminated by the last rays of the day.

    ¡°Shit, I should start a fire.¡±

    He looked around for kindling, but there was nothing.  No trees for a hundred li.  Nothing to use as fuel nearby.

    His nights were normally occupied with hours more activity than this.  Between dinner and avoiding abuse from his fellow disciples in the dormitory before sleep, his evenings were usually full.  But now there was nothing.  Not even a light to read by.

    Pengfei donned his coat and sat in the chill night air amongst the animals as they milled about.

    The stars were not yet out and it was too dark for anything more than the most basic physical activity.

    --Can¡¯t go to sleep yet¡­--

    Pengfei assumed the lotus position and attempted to practice what Elder Chen Lei had shown him of the sect¡¯s neigong technique.

    --Breathe in and out.--

    In.  Out.  In.  Out.

    Pengfei tried to sense a spark inside his dantian, the repository for internal energy within his body¡¯s core.  After the doctor¡¯s first examination, he knew he should be physically capable of cultivating the natural energy, but he still couldn¡¯t sense it.

    He kept trying but frustration cracked Pengfei¡¯s facade of calm and led the way for more intrusive thoughts.

    --I wonder if those killers in black are still out there somewhere?  Elder Chen Lei said they had left the area¡­ but maybe they came back?--

    --No, no.  I¡¯m just letting the dark get to me.  The isolation.  I haven¡¯t been this alone in¡­. ever.--

    He forced his eyes closed against the night.  Looked for his qi again.  Only to stand bolt upright a moment later.

    --Nope, can¡¯t do it!  Too creepy out here!--

    The vaulting sky and towering mountains were suddenly overwhelming.  Pengfei went inside the foul-smelling barn to close himself off from the enormous world.  The goats rushed in with him to take their customary nighttime place away from the cold outdoors.  He climbed the ladder to the cramped second story and put his back up against the wall.

    The factors against sleep were too numerous.  The smell and sound of the animals.  The normal anxiety of a lonely youth in the dark and the trauma of someone who had survived a brush with death.  Cold.  It all combined to rob Pengfei of every second of rest.  He sat there with his back against the wall shivering and waiting for dawn.

    ******************************************************************************

    ¡°I hate you smelly little bastards!¡±

    Pengfei burst from the barn with the first rays of morning sun and unleashed a stampede of goats, all clambering to escape the barn and run free.

    He staggered a few steps, taking in his surroundings and startling the larger animals that had been sleeping nearby.  Ma Feng¡¯s horse lifted its head from where it lay side-by-side with a yak.

    ¡°That¡¯s unnatural.  Have some respect for yourself.¡±

    The mount sniffed the air as Pengfei walked by, then stood and trotted away with an offended whinny.  Pengfei held his robe to his nose and sniffed.

    ¡°Uggh!  Alright, I get it.  It¡¯s bad.¡±  A night spent in the barn had soaked his clothes in the odor of the goats.

    In the light of day, all-consuming terror seemed like a silly irrational fear.  Pengfei walked north again and set up a sort of camp at the far end of the valley.

    He made a sluggish practice of his martial arts but the fatigue of a sleepless night made his efforts mediocre at best.

    Near the bank of the river there was a boulder that provided enough shade for Pengfei to lie down and nap. The morning passed easily that way.

    He did not wake up until someone kicked his foot.

 Chapter 9 - Reunion

    ¡°You cut your hair.¡±

    ¡°Pema!¡±

    The Tibetan girl who had been his traveling companion across the plateau stood over him now.  Her hair, with its many small braids, swayed in the breeze and filtered the sunlight as he looked up.  Pengfei stood and took the sight of her in, her dark woolen clothes characteristic of the nomadic herdsman of the region.

    When she did not disappear, Pengfei realized he was not dreaming and stood to embrace the very real young woman.

    ¡°What are you doing here?!¡±  He squeezed her tight, forgetting any sense of propriety.

    ¡°You smell like goat shit.  It doesn¡¯t suit you.¡±

    Pema hugged him back briefly then pushed him away.

    ¡°Sorry, I spent the night in the barn.¡± he chuckled.

    Pengfei heard calls from all around.  Upstream, he could see a dozen men and women mounted on horseback, guiding a mixed herd of animals.  Pema¡¯s family members were working hard to keep their beasts separate from Kunlun¡¯s.  Some drove wagons packed to the brim with their belongings.

    ¡°We¡¯re crossing into Xinjiang for the rest of the year.¡± Pema explained.  ¡°We¡¯ll sell some of our herd when winter comes, then come south in the spring with horses.¡±

    Pengfei, who was still amazed at Pema¡¯s presence, said, ¡°I thought I would never see you again.¡±

    ¡°I know.  When I left, you were still¡­ well, the physician said you would be fine.  But I insisted my family come this way so I could get some news.¡±

    The two stood there smiling at each other but soon the weight of the ones who had not survived dampened the mood.

    Pema cut the tension with a command.  ¡°Go get a pot, fill it with water.  I¡¯ll make you something to eat.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know where it ¨C¡°

    ¡°There¡¯s got to be one in your barn somewhere.  You don¡¯t have servants to fetch everything for you now, young lord.¡±

    Bits of Pengfei¡¯s past had inevitably come out on the journey through Tibet.  Pema did not know the whole story but she knew enough to see where his privileged upbringing poked through his facade, and she invariably pounced on it.

    She climbed onto her horse and circled around Pengfei as he walked back toward the barn to find the cookware.  She hummed the same familiar tune that had accompanied them across the Tibetan plateau and steered her horse to purposefully bump into Pengfei.  It was a game she had played with him and Feng throughout their journey.  Whenever she found her companions on foot.

    ¡°You¡¯re still a bully, I see.¡± he playfully complained.

    ¡°You make it so easy.¡±

    She guided her mount through an improbable circling gait to bring its behind colliding with Pengfei¡¯s shoulder.  A silly but impressive feat of horsemanship.

    ¡°Keep your horse¡¯s ass out of my face!¡±

    ¡°Keep your face out of my horse¡¯s ass!¡±

    When their laughter died away, Pengfei turned his attention to their surroundings, genuinely curious about the people moving around the valley.

    ¡°So, this is your family?  I should greet your father and give him my thanks for your help.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t bother, he wouldn¡¯t understand you anyway.  That¡¯s him.¡±

    Pema pointed out a middle-aged man on horseback who seemed to be managing the migration of the clan. Pengfei bowed when their eyes met and the man gave a gruff nod before shouting to another rider about something or other.  The Tibetan girl pointed out brothers and sisters and even some of their problematic livestock on the walk back.

    Reaching the structure at the end of the valley, Pengfei pointed out Ma Feng¡¯s horse grazing nearby.  ¡°Look who I found.  She bit the shit out of me yesterday and I still haven¡¯t found her saddle.¡±

    Pema recognized the horse immediately and said to Pengfei regarding the saddle, ¡°We left it on the ground when we were running from those killers.  Don¡¯t you remember?¡±

    ¡°No, I guess I forgot.  A lot of it blurs together.¡±

    Pema left him there and trotted off to the carts to fetch something.  Pengfei ducked inside and darted up the ladder to the second-floor landing.  He rummaged through the cluttered sacks of items in the dim light that made it to the barn¡¯s interior and eventually found an iron pot. Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Out at the river, he balanced on a smooth rock and dipped the pot into the water.  He stood, with it sloshing onto his boots, until Pema came galloping a second later, splashing him with icy water.

    ¡°Shhhit that¡¯s cold!¡± he yelled, dropping the pot in surprise.

    He was still mumbling curses when he joined Pema back at the barn.  She was hard at work with the beginnings of a meal.

    ¡°Thank goodness.  I¡¯m starving for some real food.  But I don¡¯t think we¡¯ll be able to find any firewood.¡±

    Pema just laughed.  She walked around the pasture and gathered up chunks of material she found on the ground then stacked them together and lit them using a flint and some grass.

    ¡°What is that?  It burns so well.¡±

    ¡°Dried yak dung.¡±

    ¡°Dried¡­?  Right.¡±

    They ate while the Tibetan nomads made their way down the valley around them. Pema asked about his life in Kunlun, the everyday details of his new home.  The last of Pema¡¯s clan were disappearing around the distant bend by the time they finished their meal and the girl had still not finished her questioning.  While they were chatting, Feng¡¯s horse came and rested its head over Pema¡¯s shoulder.

    ¡°No, this is my food.¡±  Pema pushed animal¡¯s inquisitive face away from her bowl but rubbed its cheek kindly at the same time.  ¡°Have you named her yet?¡±

    ¡°She¡¯s not mine to name, she¡¯s Feng¡¯s horse.¡±

    ¡°Feng isn¡¯t using her anymore.  She¡¯s yours.¡±

    ¡°Tell her that.¡±

    ¡°She¡¯s been through a lot.  She lost Feng too, just like us.¡±

    Pengfei nodded his head in acceptance, ¡°Yeah, I guess that¡¯s true.¡±, then stared off into space.

    Pema left him to his reverie for a few minutes before addressing the cause.

    ¡°Did you mourn him properly?¡±

    ¡°Not really.  By the time I recovered from the poison the elders had already¡­ seen to him.  No one else knew him.  There was no one to talk to.¡±

    ¡°Then let¡¯s mourn them now.  Feng and Zihao.¡±

    Pema took a long drink from a water skin and handed it to Pengfei.  He took a sip, winced and coughed, discovering it was not water but some sort of alcohol.  She smirked at his reaction but he ignored her and raised the skin to toast the memory of their lost friends.

    ¡°To the Qingcheng swordsmen.¡±

    They shared memories of the time they had spent with their guardians.  Zihao, the easygoing senior and mentor to the braggadocious Feng.  The remembrances were warm and cheerful with just a touch of melancholy.  But Pema and Pengfei buoyed each other up and kept their tears at bay.

    Eventually, a horn trumpeted from down the valley in the direction of Pema¡¯s clan.  She capped her drinking skin placed it back in a saddle bag.

    ¡°Time to go.  Do you want anything from the city?  I can leave it here for you when we come back through, but it might not be until late spring.¡±

    ¡°Better late than never.  Some booze would earn me some good will with the other disciples.  I still have some gold, I can pay for it.¡±

    Pema chuckled and nodded her head.  ¡°Sure.  In the meantime, take this.¡±  She unbuckled the saddle from her own horse and slid it down to the ground along with the blanket underneath, then took the bit and bridle from the animal¡¯s head.

    ¡°Pema, that¡¯s too much ¨C¡°

    She held up her hand to stifle his objections.  ¡°It¡¯s for her sake, not yours.  Besides, I have a spare in one of the carts.¡±

    ¡°Alright.¡±

    Pema hopped up on her horse¡¯s back and started riding away without another word.  Her braids bounced on her back just the way Pengfei had seen so many times before.

    ¡°I¡¯ll miss you Pema!¡±

    She waved back over her shoulder without turning.  ¡°I know!¡±

    He watched her trot off.

    --What are the odds?--

    Pengfei found the entire encounter surreal.  Pema coincidentally crossing through the valley when he just happened to be there.  Threads of fate, karma¡­ he didn¡¯t usually go in for that sort of thing.  Whatever had brought about the encounter, it was just what he needed.  It gave him a sense of resolution he had been craving.  A simple but cathartic sendoff for Zihao and Feng, and a hope to see Pema again.

    After a few moments he looked to the saddle and then to Feng¡¯s, no, his mare.

    ¡°Would you want to¡­?¡±

    The horse turned and clomped away.

    ¡°No, I didn¡¯t think so.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei had stowed the saddle in the barn and spent an hour or so on small chores.  When next he looked up, he saw a yak-drawn cart coming down the valley from the south with someone walking next to it.  At first, Pengfei thought it was a straggler of the Tibetan clan and planned to walk out to meet them.

    When they got a bit closer Pengfei recognized the person¡¯s grey robes as those of a Kunlun disciple, come to bring back the sect¡¯s cart and help tend the herd.  And soon the newcomer was close enough to be recognized.

    ¡°Hey there, shithead.¡±

    Jin Nanxi smirked from beside the cart.

    ¡°You¡¯ve gotta be fucking kidding me.¡±

    Nanxi hopped up into the cart for a better view and looked into the distance.  A distinct trail had been left in the valley by the passage of the Tibetans and there was still a haze of dust in the distant end of the valley, kicked up by hooves.

    ¡°Who was that?¡±

    ¡°Tibetan herders passing through.¡±  Pengfei answered coldly.

    ¡°Any pretty girls?¡±

    ¡°Yes.¡±  Pengfei turned and walked off on his self-assigned rounds.  The truest sense of calm he had obtained since waking up in Kunlun¡¯s Medicine Hall was shattered with Nanxi¡¯s arrival.

    --I was trying to get away from this bastard and he follows me to the middle of nowhere.--

    Aimless, he found himself crossing the stream and heading to the western side of the valley where another contingent of yaks and sheep were grazing.  Pengfei circled to the far side of the animals before deciding to practice his martial arts.  An attempt to burn off his nervous energy.   He unfolded the forms of the Heaven Shaking Fist with more vigor than normal.

    ¡°Hap!¡±

    ¡°Hup!¡±

    With each movement and strike Pengfei envisioned Jin Nanxi as his opponent.

    --Is he going to try to fight me when I get back to the barn?  There¡¯s no one here to stop him.--

    Pengfei spent the next few hours practicing but evening came and he could no longer delay his return.   He trudged back to the barn accompanied by a rush of animals eager for their serving of oats.  Jin Nanxi was filling the troughs surrounded by sheep, goats, and yaks.

    ¡°I was wondering when you¡¯d come back.¡±

    ¡°Here I am.¡±  Pengfei said surlily as Nanxi walked toward him.

    ¡°Are you ready for your beating?¡±

    Pengfei steeled himself for the encounter.   ¡°Let¡¯s go. But I¡¯m going to make you work for it, asshole.¡±

    Nanxi smirked arrogantly, ¡°It¡¯ll be worth it to get payback for what you did.¡±

    --Right, payback for what I did to him.--

    ¡°Wait, what?!¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Jin Neng rested his wooden practice sword on his shoulder and waited for a new sparring partner to approach.  Shutian shuffled over, breathing heavy from his last bout, and stood before Neng with a grunt as Xiaotong chose a partner nearby.

    ¡°I think we¡¯re gonna be working together to sort out some sparring issues for Pengfei.¡±

    Neng nodded at Shutian¡¯s words.  ¡°Right, until those idiots get bored or figure out he isn¡¯t a pushover.¡±

    Neng didn¡¯t know Shutian and Xiaotong well.  He kept to his own dorm mates usually and kept to himself even more than that.

    Xiaotong came to join them, having heard the topic of conversation.

    ¡°So, who do we need to look out for specifically?¡±

    Neng looked around for the disciples who had been giving his new friend such a hard time.

    ¡°Probably Daoping and Hongyu, and definitely¡­ where¡¯s Nanxi?¡±

    Xiaotong¡¯s sparring partner caught the last question and spoke up as he twirled his practice sword deftly.

    ¡°He took the yak-cart down to the valley today.¡±

    The color drained from the Neng¡¯s face.  He spoke hesitantly to Shutian and Xiaotong.

    ¡°So, Pengfei is alone with one of the people who wants to beat the shit out of him for the next week?¡±

    Shutian seemed realistic but unconcerned by the situation.  ¡°Oh damn.  Yeah, he¡¯s dead.¡±

    Xiaotong clicked his tongue with a modicum of remorse, ¡°Poor little guy.¡±

 Chapter 10 - Misunderstanding

    ¡°What the fuck are you talking about?¡±  Pengfei demanded.

    ¡°I¡¯m going to pay you back for what you did!¡±

    Jin Nanxi presented a genuinely aggrieved expression.  Pengfei ran through their short history, searching his mind for some forgotten incident.  But he could not recall any interaction where he might have offended the other disciple.

    ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m lost.¡±

    ¡°You tried to sucker punch me, you little shit.¡±

    Pengfei looked at Nanxi, confused.  ¡°Are you talking about the night you put goat shit in my bed?¡±

    ¡°Yeah.¡±

    ¡°I tried to punch you because YOU PUT GOAT SHIT IN MY BED!¡±

    ¡°That was a prank.  And you tried to take my head off for it.¡±

    Pengfei shook his head incredulously, then aloud said, ¡°Yeah, and then you beat my ass, remember?  And do I need to say it again?  You put goat shit in my bed roll!  You, Hongyu, Daoping, all of you assholes have been making my life hell, and you¡¯re pissed off at me?¡±

    ¡°Whoa, whoa, whoa, I don¡¯t have anything to do with those two.  Those guys are dicks.  They¡­they went too far with that vulture thing.   I¡¯m sorry about that.¡±

    ¡°¡­Thanks, I guess.  But you¡¯re not that much better in my opinion.¡±

    Nanxi seemed taken aback when Pengfei lumped him into the same category as Hongyu and Daoping.

    ¡°I didn¡¯t think ¡­ I mean, they were just some pranks.  Playing around with the new guy.  I was trying to make you feel welcome.¡±

    The two disciples stood there looking at each other, unsure how to proceed.  Nanxi finally broke the silence.

    ¡°So¡­ do you still want to fight?¡±

    Pengfei considered for a moment, ¡°Kind of?  It feels a little anticlimactic to just drop it.¡±

    ¡°Just one fight to clear the air?  Then we forget about everything.  Move on, no matter what the outcome.¡±

    Nanxi finished Pengfei¡¯s thought, both of them nodding in unison.

    The two of them squared off.  Instead of having a mind wiped clean by fear, his usual experience in a scuffle, his thoughts seemed louder than ever.

    --Is this weird?  This is kind of weird.--

    Nanxi struck first.  Just a slight jab, more to signal the beginning of their bout than to do damage.

    Pengfei jerked back awkwardly.  But even that was a victory.

    --I saw it coming.  Managed to get out of the way.--

    The conversation with Nanxi had centered Pengfei¡¯s thoughts.  Brought him down from the terror of a fight, to the mild anxiety of a sparring match.  He could think clearly and his body obeyed his commands with just a slight tremor of nerves.  He raised his hands in a guard and considered an attack.

    The two circled each other, moving in and out.  Nanxi¡¯s next attack landed hard in the gut, but Pengfei took it with a grunt.

    Pengfei alternated between his left and right fists in the most basic combinations.  The movements were sharper than they had been just a few days ago but Nanxi still parried the blows.

    They each threw their strikes with full weight behind them.  Scratches and the first hints of bruises were soon visible on both disciples where they made contact with one another, but despite the full force attacks there was no sense of malice between the two.

    Perhaps it was that subtle shift in attitude that allowed Pengfei to remain so calm throughout.  He kept his cool despite punches landing on his face and cutting into his skin.  It was almost like working with Jin Neng back at the sect¡¯s training ground.

    Maintaining his even state of mind and seeing Nanxi¡¯s strikes for a prolonged period allowed Pengfei to become accustomed to his opponent.  He was still the inferior fighter but was able to block more and more of the incoming attacks while landing a larger share of his own.

    Minute after minute elapsed with neither combatant able to put down the other.  Pengfei was the first to tire but soon even Nanxi was dropping his hands and circling away from the engagement.

    At the beginning they had both been tentative and used one attack at a time.  As their tension eased, the techniques unfolded in flurries and combinations.  And now at the end, they had reverted to single strikes again, thrown between panting breaths.

    Pengfei came forward for one more attack.  He threw a punch to Nanxi¡¯s body but stumbled with it and fell into his opponent.  Nanxi caught and held him in a violent sort of hug.

    They threw short, slapping, punches from time to time but mostly leaned against each other for support.

    ¡°Alright¡­alright¡­I¡¯m done.¡±  Nanxi gasped and backed away.

    Pengfei fell to hands and knees without the support of the other disciple then quickly laid on his back.  Nanxi joined him on the ground and they both breathed heavily.

    --He stopped first.  I¡¯m counting that as a win.--

    Instead of gloating, Pengfei turned to his side and vomited.

    ******************************************************************************

    Neng, Shutian, and Xiaotong stumbled down the mountain path in the dark of night.  Dawn would break soon and they were on pace to reach the valley with the first light of day.  Neng had wanted to depart the sect as soon as he learned Pengfei would be alone with Nanxi but had forced himself to wait until the other disciples fell asleep.

    The other two had joined Neng somewhat unwillingly.  The jolly Xiaotong had been easier to convince than the surly Shutian, whose complaints continued even now.

    ¡°Why is this my problem again?¡±

    ¡°You knew Nanxi was out for Pengfei¡¯s head and you still gave him your herding shift.¡±

    ¡°I didn¡¯t know it was Nanxi¡¯s turn to go down! Besides, it was Xiaotong¡¯s idea for him to take my shift.¡±

    Neng remained silent but Xiaotong spoke up and tried to play peacemaker.  ¡°Both of you calm down.  We go down, check on them, and IF there¡¯s trouble, the three of us will be enough to handle it.  No problem¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not worried about Pengfei, I¡¯m worried about getting caught.  This place is miserable enough, I don¡¯t need any trouble with the Discipline Hall on top of it.¡±  Shutian¡¯s grumblings could not be assuaged but he kept walking downhill nonetheless.

    Neng recognized the terrain around them, knew they were close.  There was a bright haze in the east but the sun was still hidden by the mountains.  After another few minutes the first rays creeped over the peaks and suddenly the valley below was dimly visible.Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.

    Xiaotong squinted at the silhouettes below, ¡°Do you see that?¡±

    ¡°What are they doing?¡±  Shutian asked.

    Neng tried to see what they were talking about.  His eyes found the barn down on the valley floor and then panned around the structure.  Plenty of slow-moving animals were treading back and forth already.  A flicker of something caught his attention, a frenetic movement.  Neng focused on it and eventually understood what he was seeing.

    Two people locked in combat.

    ¡°Shit, they¡¯re killing each other!  Come on!¡±

    Neng took off sprinting and the others followed suit.

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei had fallen asleep immediately.  Nanxi¡¯s presence, at first disconcerting, had become reassuring after their heated sparring session.  The accumulated fatigue from his previous sleepless night and the beating he had taken allowed Pengfei to fall unconscious as soon as he rested his head on his bedroll.  The smell, the noise, the cold, none of it could keep him awake.

    Nanxi was a different story.  Pengfei woke early to find his companion sitting upright against the near wall, shivering and cursing the animals below.

    They opened the door of the barn and unleashed the daily flood of goats as they stepped outside.  Pengfei washed his face in the stream and sipped the ice-cold water before returning to the barn where he found Nanxi stroking the horse¡¯s dark coat.

    ¡°What¡¯s its name?¡±

    ¡°Doesn¡¯t have one.¡±

    ¡°She was your friend¡¯s?¡±

    ¡°Yeah.  And be careful, she - ¡±

    ¡°Yeooow!¡±

    ¡°-bites.¡±

    Nanxi skipped away from the braying horse, holding his arm where the mare¡¯s large teeth had nipped at his flesh.  He composed himself and walked over to Pengfei.

    ¡°Sorry again about what Daoping and Hongyu did with that vulture.  Going after your dead friend like that was messed up.¡±

    ¡°Yeah.  I don¡¯t think I¡¯m going to be able to solve things with them as easily as I did with you.   Even if I could, I wouldn¡¯t.¡±

    ¡°No danger of that.  Last I checked, they were out for your blood.¡±

    ¡°You think I can give them a good fight?  I did alright against them the other day, but they still had the upper hand.¡±  Pengfei was bolstered by his recent performance against Nanxi but was still unsure if he could face Hongyu and Daoping back-to-back.  Nanxi proceeded to shatter what little confidence he had.

    ¡°Ummm¡­ it¡¯s going to be rough, honestly.  You got Hongyu with a lucky shot last time, but he¡¯s the one you actually need to look out for.  And he¡¯s eager to pay you back after you made him puke his guts out.¡±

    When Pengfei blanched, Nanxi hurried to add on some encouraging words.  ¡°But you seemed to do pretty good in a dog fight!  Maybe you¡¯ll be alright if you stay in close and make him go blow for blow with you.  But you¡¯ll have to learn how to get to the inside.¡±

    Nanxi beckoned him closer.  He took a guard and began coaching Pengfei on how to close the distance with an opponent.

    ¡°Come in behind your punches.¡±

    Pengfei followed his senior¡¯s instructions and threw some strikes to mask his entry but froze once he had covered the distance.  Nanxi instantly rebuked him.

    ¡°No!  Once you¡¯re in, you have to keep attacking!¡±

    ¡°Alright, alright!¡±

    Pengfei threw punches to Nanxi¡¯s body and head.  He kept the speed of the attacks high but held back on the power for the sake of his partner.

    ¡°Good!¡±  Nanxi pushed Pengfei away and made him work to close the gap again.  The pair practiced for several minutes with Nanxi beginning to throw strikes of his own for Pengfei to defend against.

    It was just after they had separated again.  Nanxi was attacking while Pengfei strategized another entry.  Suddenly, there was a shout from behind them.

    ¡°Basssstaaarrrrdddd!¡±

    Pengfei and Nanxi both looked around for the source of the sound.  Nanxi turned just in time to take the full brunt of Neng¡¯s tackle head on.

    ¡°What the hell!¡±  Pengfei cried.  He jumped forward and caught Neng¡¯s arm as he cocked it back to punch at Nanxi beneath him.  ¡°Neng, what are you doing?!  Stop, stop, stop!¡±

    Pengfei managed to pull Neng up off the ground and suddenly Shutian and Xiaotong were there restraining Nanxi.

    The next few minutes were a confusing muddle of shouts and curses as the misunderstanding slowly resolved itself.  Finally, as tempers cooled the truth came out.

    ¡°So, you two weren¡¯t fighting?¡±  Neng queried.

    Pengfei shook his head.  ¡°No, we were just training.  We¡¯re ¡­ kind of good now.¡±

    ¡°Well, you look like you¡¯ve had your ass beat.¡±  Xiaotong noted cheerfully.

    Pengfei smirked, ¡°I won actually.¡±

    ¡°It was a draw, you little shit.¡±

    ¡°What are you guys doing here anyway?¡± Pengfei asked, changing the subject and drawing a sarcastic barb from Shutian.

    ¡°Yeah, Neng, what are we doing here?¡±

    Neng shifted uncomfortably.  After the fervent outburst in his attack of Nanxi the normally quiet disciple had returned to his usual attitude, but Pengfei could recognize the subtle hints of embarrassment on his face.

    ¡°We thought¡­or, I thought that Nanxi might be giving you a hard time.¡±

    Pengfei was stunned, unaware Neng valued him highly enough to go to such trouble.  He coughed awkwardly.

    ¡°Th, thanks, all of you.  I really appreciate the effort.¡±

    An awkward pause, and then Nanxi asked, ¡°So ¡­ you guys thought I was the problem too?  Does anyone get my sense of humor?¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    The disciples spent the rest of the morning and early afternoon together with the recent arrivals planning to hike back up to the sect in the night.  They should have slept throughout the day but could not contain their excitement at the presence of the mare.

    The entire Jin generation had been plucked from impoverished orphanages across the Central Plains.  Then five years isolated in the Kunlun sect, unable to leave the area except to occasionally gather supplies.  As such, there had never been a need or opportunity to learn horsemanship.

    Naturally, everyone had turned to Pengfei who was known to have arrived at the sect by horse.

    ¡°I¡¯m telling you, you don¡¯t want to mess with her.¡±  He had warned them, accompanied by Nanxi¡¯s enthusiastic agreement.  Still, the other three were not deterred.  When they had not given up, Pengfei coached them on how they might approach the horse and first put the bridle over its head.

    Shutian was out in the pasture now trying his luck where the others had failed.

    The rest of the group was gathered at the barn. Neng had agreed that Pengfei should aim to fight his opponents in close.  The senior disciple now watched as his friend sparred with Nanxi and attempted to implement the strategy.  Neng called out suggestions as the fighters circled each other.

    ¡°Don¡¯t let him back away!  Stay close!¡±

    Nanxi had begun using his full repertoire of techniques to resist his partner and so single strikes were no longer sufficient.  Pengfei used a flurry of attacks to bridge the gap and grab Nanxi by the neck but the other disciple continued to struggle and fight.

    --Need to cut off his movement with attacks.--

    Pengfei threw knees to the midsection.  It was not a strike he had practiced much before and Nanxi was able to slip away without much difficulty.  Pengfei pursued, punching as he followed.  Suddenly, Nanxi stopped his backward momentum and came forward with a powerful blow of his own aimed at Pengfei¡¯s right side.

    ¡°Huuuggggghhhhh!¡±

    A nauseating constriction he had never felt before gripped his flank and Pengfei involuntarily dropped to his knees.  He curled into a fetal position and writhed on the ground.  The other disciples seemed unconcerned and within a minute the pain had lessened to the point he could speak again.

    ¡°What the fuck was that?   Did you use your internal energy?¡±

    Nanxi chuckled, ¡°No, it¡¯s just the liver.¡±

    There was still a toxic cramping sensation similar to what he remembered of being poisoned by the man-in-black, but Pengfei stood again.  Slowly.

    ¡°Show me.  Show me how to do that.¡±

    ¡°Take a rest.  I¡¯m getting tired just watching you two!¡±  Xiaotong shouted.

    Nanxi waved Pengfei off and led him back to stand with the others, both of them still breathing heavy from the exercise.

    Neng observed his friend with a quizzical look.  ¡°You¡¯re ¡­ a weird one, Pengfei.¡±

    ¡°What did I do?¡±

    ¡°I mean, you come from money right?  It¡¯s obvious you don¡¯t belong to a martial arts family but you¡¯re still a little bit ¡­¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s surprised you¡¯re not a complete pussy.¡±  Nanxi completed the thought and Neng nodded in agreement.

    ¡°Yeah.  That.¡±

    Xiaotong picked up the line of questioning.  ¡°What¡¯s the deal, young master?  You curse like a bandit but don¡¯t know how to wash a dish.  Did you grow up rough or not?¡±

    ¡°My family has money but it wasn¡¯t just hunting boar with noblemen and private tutors.  All different types of people worked under my father.   Most of the children I hung out with were¡­¡±

    ¡°Poor?¡±

    ¡°Your words.¡±

    ¡°I knew you were rich!¡± Nanxi said smugly, then continued, ¡°So why did you enter the Wulin?  And why did you come out here of all places?¡±

    Shutian walked up, defeated and dragging the bridle behind him, while Pengfei considered what to say.

    --These are the guys who snuck out to protect me¡­and Nanxi.  I guess a little truth wouldn¡¯t hurt.--

    He took a deep breath and searched for the words to begin.

    ¡°My mother was¡­ my dad married a second woman after her.  Things got tense after that.  We got into a fight, an actual fight.¡±

    ¡°Not very filial of you.¡±  Xiaotong chimed in.

    ¡°Right¡­ He said he¡¯d get rid of me.  The next day my mother found a letter he was writing, telling his second wife about everything.  Said he was going to have me shipped off to the northern frontier.  He bragged that I wouldn¡¯t survive six months.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s pretty messed up.¡±  Nanxi observed, and the others nodded.

    ¡°Anyway, I didn¡¯t want to stick around for that.  My mom had to stay to look after my grandfather, so I left by myself.  And since my dad is a member of the government, the Wulin is the safest place for me.¡±

    Shutian looked confused.  ¡°Why is that?¡±

    The others laughed at his ignorance.  It was Xiaotong who explained for his friend.

    ¡°The non-interference between the government and the Jianghu.  The government won¡¯t step foot in the underworld unless someone abuses civilians, commits treason, or something like that.¡±

    Pengfei nodded.  ¡°But my father still has enough influence to ensure no group would accept me.  My sister suggested Kunlun; she said it was out of his reach.¡±

    ¡°Out of his reach?  More like ¡®banished to the middle of nowhere¡¯¡­¡± Shutian grumbled.

    The disciples digested Pengfei¡¯s story for a few moments before Xiaotong broke the silence.

    ¡°That¡¯s a pretty messed up family you have there.  You could have told us a bit sooner.¡±

    ¡°It felt wrong complaining to anyone in Kunlun since¡­¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re all a bunch of dirty little orphans?¡±

    ¡°Your words.  Enough about me.  How are you three getting back into the sect without being seen?  Just sneak back in at night?¡±

    Neng had already thought of the answer and revealed it now to his two coconspirators.

    ¡°We hike up the mountain in the night, then fall in with the other disciples on the morning run.  No one will rat us out, we just need to get in the gates unnoticed by the elders.  But we should get some rest, we¡¯ll need to leave here by midnight I think.¡±

    Shutian and Xiaotong nodded and accompanied Neng to the shady side of the barn, preferring to sleep in the outdoors and avoid the smell of goats for as long as possible.  Meanwhile, Pengfei pestered Nanxi for the particulars on how to attack the liver.

    ******************************************************************************

    The three travelers slept in fits and spurts.  Pengfei saw them get up every now and then as he trained throughout the rest of the late evening.  Their sleep did not seem very restful but he tried not to disturb it regardless.

    He and Nanxi went inside the barn at sunset and were asleep within an hour of nightfall.  There was little to hold their interest in the secluded valley.  Neng and Xiaotong came in not long after to take shelter from the cold and biting wind.

    The four disciples tossed and turned in the cramped portion of the second story not occupied by bags of feed and tools.  That is, until Xiaotong ran back in and shouted at them after a trip outside to relieve himself.

    ¡°Shutian is gone!¡±

 Chapter 11 - Chasing a Runaway

    The disciples roused groggily and looked at the panicked Xiaotong.

    Pengfei rubbed the sleep from his eyes and said, ¡°What do you mean ¡®Shutian is gone¡¯?  Gone where?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know, he¡¯s run off!  Come on, we need to find him.¡±

    The disciples followed Xiaotong outside reluctantly, still not convinced there was any urgency to the situation.

    ¡°He¡¯s probably just off taking a shit somewhere.¡±

    ¡°Or he got a head start on the walk back up to the sect.¡±

    But Xiaotong could not be convinced.

    ¡°You guys don¡¯t understand.  Shutian hates it here.  He¡¯s been talking about running off to the Central Plains for months.  That¡¯s why I wanted Pengfei to take his herding shift in the first place! I was afraid of what he would do if he got an opportunity to run.¡±

    ¡°Why didn¡¯t you say anything sooner?!¡±  Neng demanded.

    ¡°I didn¡¯t want to get him in trouble and I didn¡¯t think he¡¯d run with all of us down here!  We need to go and find him before anyone finds out, or the elders will-¡°

    ¡°Excommunicate him, destroy his dantian, and leave him crippled for the rest of his life.¡±  Nanxi completed.

    Pengfei turned to the other disciple in shock.  ¡°Seriously?¡±

    Nanxi nodded solemnly.  ¡°No one is allowed to leave with their martial arts intact while the gates are closed.  Otherwise, the entire sect could be accused of violating the punishment of the Wulin Alliance.¡±

    Neng took charge as the gravity of the situation set in to the rest of the disciples.

    ¡°There¡¯s just one way he could have gone.  On foot, the only option that makes sense is to head to the Desert Road in Xinjiang.  He should be pretty easy to find.¡±

    ¡°Just one problem.  His qinggong is excellent, he¡¯s fast as hell.  The fastest in our dormitory.¡±

    Xiaotong nodded at Nanxi¡¯s appraisal.  ¡°Maybe in the whole sect.¡±

    ¡°There¡¯s nothing we can do about that.  We just have to try.  Come on.¡±

    Neng began jogging to the north along the stream, the same path the Tibetan nomads had taken just a couple days ago.  Nanxi and Xiaotong jogged after him and Pengfei began falling in behind them when something caught his eye.  He called out to the other disciples.

    ¡°You guys go ahead.  I¡¯m going to try something.¡±

    They cast looks back in his direction but did not stop.

    Pengfei ran back to the barn and grabbed the bridle and reins Pema had gifted him, then made his way back outside.  He walked slowly over to the horse laying on the ground.

    ¡°Hey girl.  I could use your help.¡±

    The animal woke and stood as he approached, backed away when she saw the reins in his hand.

    ¡°Whoa, whoa there.  I know you don¡¯t like me but this is serious.  I really need your help here.¡±

    The mare bucked a few times and trotted several lengths away from him.

    ¡°Come on!¡±  Pengfei screamed in frustration.  He looked to the north where his friends had already disappeared into darkness.  There was no telling how far ahead Shutian was by now.  He could have a lead of thirty minutes or three hours.

    Anxiety crept into Pengfei¡¯s mind and he let it flow from his mouth.

    ¡°This is happening because they came down here to help me!¡±

    He paced back and forth wondering if he should just drop the reins and run after the others.

    ¡°Even Nanxi is out there trying to help!  And what am I doing?  I¡¯m useless.  Just like with Feng.¡±

    The mare whinnied and drew a few steps closer.

    ¡°Is that what you want to hear?  That I should have done more?  Fine, yes, I should have!  I was scared and¡­ I¡¯m sorry.  And if I could go back I don¡¯t know what I would do differently but I still wish I could try.  But I¡¯m here now.  And I don¡¯t want to have any regrets likes that again.¡±

    The horse stopped moving and stared at Pengfei.  The young disciple sensed a measure of calm from the animal and tried to approach again slowly, speaking softly.

    ¡°Do you think you can help me live without regrets this time?¡±

    She took another short step backwards but then held her ground.  A tense pause and then the mare bowed her head.  Pengfei approached and gently slid the bridle on.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.

    ¡°Thank you.¡±  He rubbed her neck gently.  ¡°No time for a saddle though.  This will have to do for now. ¡°

    Pengfei jumped and pushed himself up onto the horse.

    ¡°I know I was a little bit melodramatic but ¨C whoa!¡±

    The horse darted as soon as Pengfei was atop her.  He pulled the reins in his hands and steered her to the north.

    ******************************************************************************

    ¡°My mother told me stories about Mongols riding bareback across the steppe.  I thought it was so cool I didn¡¯t use a saddle for a year!¡±  Pengfei shouted behind the ear of the galloping mare.  ¡°But it¡¯s harder than I remember!¡±

    He jostled and bounced on the horse¡¯s back.  Riding without a saddle required more balance and the darkness of the night did not help.  But soon Pengfei found his rhythm.

    ¡°Do you think we missed them?¡±  Pengfei asked, half to himself.  He had been riding for several minutes now at a full gallop but still hadn¡¯t come across Nanxi, Xiaotong, and Neng.

    --But I¡¯m trying to find Shutian, not them.--

    His worries of somehow missing his companions were misplaced though.  He spotted the trio a few minutes later, much further along than he had expected to find them.

    --I have to stop underestimating the power of qinggong.--

    Even now, the other disciples were not just running.  They had begun to use their lightness and movement techniques.  Their internal energy allowed them to lightly touch the ground and propel themselves in great strides at incredible speeds.

    The old nag struggled to overtake them but eventually the runners exhausted their qi, slowing to a more human pace.  It was not a technique that could be used indefinitely.  When they reduced their speed to a jog, Pengfei finally sped past on horseback.  He whistled and raised a hand to them as he rode by.

    --But if it took this long to catch up to them, how long is it going to take to catch up to Shutian?--

    It was hard to tell how much time was passing but Pengfei made rough estimates.  One hour.  Two.  Three.  The chase had begun shortly before midnight but now he was sure dawn was just behind the eastern horizon.

    The long valley snaked left and right, narrowed and widened, but was a single unambiguous path.  But that couldn¡¯t last forever.  Pengfei knew that eventually the terrain would open up and there would be a myriad of possible routes to choose from.  He might lose Shutian¡¯s trail completely at that point.

    The horse had held up well despite its age.  Pengfei had ridden her hard but she still found the energy to gallop after every short rest they took.  But that couldn¡¯t last forever either.

    So Pengfei was ecstatic when he came around a bend and spotted a figure walking in the darkness ahead.

    ¡°Shhh, shhh.¡±  He whispered into the mare¡¯s ear and let her creep ahead at a walk.  The figure was moving slowly and Pengfei wanted to get as close as possible before being discovered.

    --Shit, I wish I had brought a rope or something.  What do I do once I catch up with him?--

    A few more seconds and he could make out the grey robes of Kunlun.

    --Closer¡­closer¡­--

    Hoof met rock, and a pebble went bouncing across the ground.  Shutian startled, looking back and meeting eyes with Pengfei for a moment.  Then, the last leg of the chase began.

    Shutian sped forward and Pengfei set his horse to gallop.  Amazingly, the disciple on foot managed to pull away as he sped down the valley.

    Pengfei leaned forward over his mount¡¯s shoulder and urged her to run faster.  Minutes passed and fatigue began to show in both parties.  But the poorly rested Shutian slowly lost ground.

    In another few moments Pengfei was right over the boy¡¯s shoulder.  The mounted disciple leaned down from his horse and when he could just barely touch Shutian¡¯s robes with his fingertips, he jumped.

    Pengfei missed the shoulder he had been reaching for, but managed to tangle himself in Shutian¡¯s legs as he fell and brought them both to the ground.  They skidded in the grass and rocks, tumbling over each other.

    --I can¡¯t let him get to his feet again or I¡¯ll lose him!--

    Shutian tried to pull himself free of Pengfei, who was meanwhile trying to claw his way up the disciple¡¯s body.  The two tripped and fell multiple times but Shutian managed to make it to his feet.  Pengfei made a desperate lunge and grabbed some cloth at the last possible moment, feeling a jerk as his quarry took a bounding stride.

    Shutian turned and punched but Pengfei ducked into it and grabbed more cloth.

    ¡°Let go of me you bastard!¡±

    Shutian pushed and ripped at Pengfei¡¯s hands but couldn¡¯t loosen the hold.

    ¡°Shutian, don¡¯t do this.  Let¡¯s go back!¡±

    ¡°Let me go!¡±

    ¡°I know it sucks right now, but we¡¯ll be back in the Central Plains in a few years.  It¡¯ll get better.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t know what the hell you¡¯re talking about!¡±

    Shutian began attacking in earnest.  Punching, kneeing, even pulling Pengfei¡¯s hair.  Pengfei tried to wrap his arms around Shutian in a bear hug but was shaken off, just barely managing to grab his opponent¡¯s robe again with one hand.

    Shutian stepped back hard and dragged Pengfei off his feet.  But the runner lost his balance and fell.  The match quickly devolved into an ugly wrestling match.  The two panted, Pengfei dripping blood onto the robes of Shutian.

    ¡°Why¡­ why do you want to leave so bad?  You have no money, no protection.  There¡¯s nothing out there for you.¡±

    --All the reasons I came to Kunlun instead of trying to make it on my own.--

    Shutian bucked wildly trying to escape but Pengfei kept his position.

    ¡°I¡¯m not like all the others, you idiot!  They¡¯re all content to sit here and wait on these old bastards hand and foot because they have nothing else.  But my family is still out there, dammit!¡±

    ¡°I, I thought you were all orphans?¡±  Pengfei had heard that the Jin disciples were gathered from orphanages across the Central Plains, but now wondered if there had been exceptions besides himself.

    ¡°My mother couldn¡¯t afford to feed me so she gave me up.  But she¡¯s still out there in Hebei, waiting for me to come back.  I have to get back!¡±

    --That¡¯s¡­ should I let him go?--

    The implications ran through Pengfei¡¯s mind as Shutian squirmed beneath him.  He couldn¡¯t find an argument that made sense to himself, let alone the other disciple.  Not knowing what else to say, he said something he knew was inappropriate.

    ¡°I get it.¡±

    Shutian paused his struggle.  He looked at Pengfei, both incredulous and contemptuous.

    ¡°You don¡¯t understand anything, rich boy!¡±

    ¡°I left my mom ¨C¡° Shutian¡¯s struggles interrupted Pengfei¡¯s words.  He grabbed his prisoner by the collar and slammed him to the ground.  ¡°I LEFT MY MOM TOO!  When I left home, I begged my mom to come with me, but she insisted on staying to take care of my grandfather.  I was so scared to go alone¡­ but she made me.¡±

    Shutian screamed up at him, ¡°You shouldn¡¯t have left her!¡±

    ¡°But she told me ¨C she said ¡®Come back for me when we can live together without worry.¡¯  So, that¡¯s what I¡¯ll do.  Don¡¯t you want to take care of your mom too?¡±

    Pengfei dragged Shutian to his feet and waited for his reply.

    ¡°Yes, I want to take care of her.  And ¨C¡°

    Pengfei interrupted.  ¡°And do you have the money to take care of her now?  Any way to make money?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll figure something out.¡±

    ¡°In the meantime, you¡¯ll just make life harder for the both of you.  Until the elders here track you down and cripple you.  I¡¯m sure she would love to see that!  And if someone else figures out who you are first?  Then what will happen to you and your mother?  To the rest of the Kunlun sect?¡±

    ¡°No one is going to care about one runaway disciple!¡±

    Shutian gave a halfhearted yank at his robes but Pengfei pulled him into a tight clinch and spoke quietly over the boy¡¯s shoulder.

    ¡°I don¡¯t really understand the situation with Kunlun¡¯s punishment but I¡¯ve seen it first hand.  There are people, inside and outside the sect, paying attention.   People who will kill you to change things or keep them the way they are.¡°

    ¡°I just want to go home!¡±  Shutian sobbed.

    Pengfei¡¯s ironclad grip softened as the other disciple began to weep and a desperate clinch turned into a more comforting embrace.

    ¡°I know.  But your mother is taking care of herself for now.  If you wait a couple more years, you can go back to her as a Kunlun swordsman and give her a better life.¡±

    Shutian gently pushed Pengfei away and wiped his eyes but made no move to escape.  After a few seconds, Pengfei put a hand to his shoulder.

    ¡°I know I¡¯m the new guy.  I don¡¯t really know the whole story.  You do.  So, if you still want to run, I¡¯ll tell the others I couldn¡¯t find you.  But I think you should stay.¡±

    Shutian said nothing.  He just shirked off Pengfei¡¯s hand and began walking back the way they had come.

    --I guess that worked.--

    Pengfei shrugged and walked over to his horse.  He wiped his bloody face on his robes as he went and flinched at the bruised and cut skin.  Even more painful, when he reached the mare she adamantly refused to let Pengfei ride her.  Every time he tried, she would circle away from him and bray loudly.

    ¡°Are you serious!?  I thought we made a connection there?¡±

    The horse did not seem to agree.  He took her by the reins and led her on foot behind Shutian, back towards Kunlun.

 Chapter 12 - Found You

    ¡°Flower?¡±

    The horse shook its head and brayed.

    ¡°Moonbeam?¡±

    Another head shake.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­Horse?¡±

    The mare whinnied happily.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡±  Shutian asked, looking askance at him.

    ¡°Trying to name this thing.¡±

    ¡°And you think Horse is a good choice?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t, but she seems to like it.¡±  The mare was prancing merrily next to Pengfei.

    ¡°I think you¡¯re reading too much into things.¡±

    Pengfei shrugged but had already taken the horse¡¯s movements for agreement, whether it was true or not.  So, from now on, the horse was¡­ Horse.

    ¡°Any chance you¡¯d let me¡­¡± Pengfei moved to jump up on Horse¡¯s back again but despite her apparent happiness at her simple name, she shied away from her would-be rider.

    ¡°Right.  Just thought I¡¯d check.¡±

    Dawn had come just a little while ago and they still had not rendezvoused with the other disciples.  They had walked in awkward silence for the majority of the time since Pengfei had tackled the runaway.

    ¡°Did you bring any food with you?¡±

    ¡°Yeah, you didn¡¯t?¡±  Shutian reached into the small bag over his shoulder and handed Pengfei some jerky.

    ¡°No, we all left pretty quickly when we noticed you were gone.¡±

    Shutian shook his head in embarrassment but didn¡¯t say anything further.  They took a break and Pengfei gnawed the tough jerky while Horse drank from the stream that ran the length of the valley.

    The two disciples sat on rocks or milled about boredly while the animal plunged its head into the water again and again.  Shutian looked nervously to the south and the bend in the valley, clearly dreading the coming reunion with the others.  But something else grabbed his attention.

    ¡°Do you see that?¡±

    Pengfei followed Shutian¡¯s finger up to the ridgeline.  It was hard to make out since the morning sun was still rising from that direction but there appeared to be a person.

    He shielded his eyes and looked again.  The figure descended the ridge slightly, stepping out of the blinding light.

    It was a man dressed in black.

    ¡°Shit, shit, shit!  We have to go.  Now!¡±

    Pengfei pulled Shutian to his feet.

    ¡°Oww, what are you doing?!¡±

    The man in black was ahead of them.  Between the boys and Kunlun.  It looked as if the stranger would be able to make it to the valley and block their way before they could pass.  Pengfei considered heading back to the north but when he looked back, another dark figure was distantly visible in that direction as well.

    Shutian noticed the fear in Pengfei¡¯s frantic gaze.  ¡°Who is that?  Are those¡­ are those the bandits who killed your friends?¡±

    ¡°They aren¡¯t bandits, but yeah, it looks like them.¡±

    ¡°Shit!  What do we do?¡±

    Pengfei considered the same question as he looked up and down the valley.  There were really no other routes to take, north or south.  They¡¯d be caught before they could scale the ridge in any other directions.

    ¡°What do we do?!¡± Shutian demanded again.

    ¡°Come on.¡±

    Pengfei took Horse by the reins and continued on their original course towards the sect.  He tried to walk casually, not look at the man in black descending the hillside ahead.

    --What do we do¡­ that¡¯s a great fucking question.--

    He knew running was pointless.  Shutian was tired, Horse was tired, and even when Pengfei was fully rested, his top speed was no match for a martial artist¡¯s qinggong.  Beyond the futility of fleeing, he didn¡¯t have any other thoughts.

    ¡°So, you just want to walk right past them!?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m hoping they don¡¯t want to start trouble with Kunlun.  But I¡¯d love to hear a better idea.  You have one?¡±

    Shutian cursed but offered no alternatives, he just followed Pengfei along the path upstream.  They both tried to walk casually.

    There was nothing else to do except worry for several minutes.  In front of them, the man in black reached the valley floor and walked towards them.  He was still several minutes away but Pengfei could already see a sword on his hip.  Shutian looked behind at the other stranger closing in from the rear.

    --Did they notice Shutian running away?  Does that violate Kunlun¡¯s punishment?  An excuse to kill us?--

    A chill ran up Pengfei¡¯s spine at the thought.  He whispered to his companion, ¡°We¡¯re just two disciples of Kunlun looking for runaway goats.¡±

    Shutian nodded his head in agreement. ¡°Right¡­ but you do the talking though.¡± Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    ¡°Why me?  You¡¯re the senior here.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ve dealt with these guys before.  Just do it!¡±

    Shutian hissed the last as the man in front of them drew nearer and nearer.  There was no telling how acute the stranger¡¯s hearing was.  Some masters had greatly heightened senses.  The disciples erred on the side of caution and walked in anxious silence.

    Finally, the man in black came to a stop several paces in front of them.  Pengfei flinched when the stranger put his hand lazily on the hilt of his sword.

    --At least he¡¯s not one of the bastards who attacked before.--

    Horse was not as easily mollified as Pengfei.  The mare stomped her hooves nervously into the earth.

    The silence was broken by footsteps approaching from behind.  The boys turned to see the other man in black had caught up with them.  He looked the same as the first.  Somewhere in his twenties, thin, with long hair tied back.  The newcomer spoke to the man in front.

    ¡°Who are they?¡±

    ¡°They haven¡¯t said yet.¡±

    The disciples stood between the two men.  Pengfei looked back and forth between them then addressed the one blocking their path.

    ¡°We¡¯re disciples of Kunlun.¡±

    ¡°Ah, they say their disciples of Kunlun.¡±  The man in front said to his friend.

    ¡°What are disciples of Kunlun doing all the way out here?¡±

    The two men addressed each other, not the scared teens.  They didn¡¯t even look at the boys.  Pengfei took hold of Shutian¡¯s arm and tried to lead him around the man in front, but the stranger side-stepped to block their path again.

    ¡°Where are the disciples of Kunlun going now?¡±

    ¡°They seem like they¡¯re in a hurry to leave.¡±

    ¡°They should stay and talk.¡±

    Their indirect way of speaking was unsettling.  Pengfei could feel Shutian¡¯s arm trembling beneath his hand and was just as scared himself.  But he managed to get his next words out with a steady voice.

    ¡°Kunlun has closed its gates.  We cannot interact with you.  Please let us pass.¡±

    ¡°Kunlun has closed its gates¡­ they can¡¯t speak with us.¡±

    ¡°They could speak to themselves.  And we could listen.¡±

    ¡°They could list the names of every master still alive in the Kunlun sect.  I think if we heard that, we would probably turn around and walk away.¡±

    The men nodded at each other and looked expectantly at the disciples.

    ¡°You want to know the names of our masters?¡±  Shutian asked the strangers, but they said nothing else.  ¡°What do you think Pengfei?¡±

    Horse pulled against her reins and drew Pengfei¡¯s attention.  When the mare met his eye, the boy got the impression she was willing to help.  He said nothing to the strangers or his fellow disciple and instead jumped up on Horse¡¯s back.  Thankfully, the mare tolerated him.

    Pengfei reached out a hand to his companion.

    ¡°Come on Shutian.¡±

    The boy looked at the men in black and then grabbed Pengfei¡¯s outstretched arm.  Working together, they got him up on Horse¡¯s back as well.  The man in black that had blocked their path now stepped in front of Horse and began to draw his blade.

    ¡°If you touch us, Kunlun will leave its confinement to hunt you down.¡±  Pengfei paraphrased the words he had heard Elder Weidao speak the night they had met.  He was unsure if it was true or not, but it had seemed to work then.

    A tense moment of uncertainty.  The blade moved further out of its sheath.

    ¡°¡­.¡±

    ¡°Let the invaders go.¡±  The man from behind conceded finally.

    --Invaders?  Is that us?--

    The man in front held his ground and gave no sign he had heard his friend.

    Pengfei breathed deeply and braced himself for his next gambit.  He dug his heels into Horse¡¯s flanks and flicked the reins.  She darted forward a few step and pushed the man in black out of her path.  Pengfei¡¯s leg brushed the man¡¯s shoulder as they passed.

    --Please don¡¯t kill me, please don¡¯t kill me, please don¡¯t kill me¡­--

    He waited for a sword stroke to slice through him and Shutian, but the attack did not come.  He looked back over his shoulder and saw the strangers standing side by side, watching as they trotted away.

    ******************************************************************************

    As soon as they rounded the nearest bend and left the sight of the men in black, Horse reared on her hind legs, sending Pengfei and Shutian falling unceremoniously to the ground.

    ¡°What the fuck?¡±

    Pengfei stood, rubbing his back.

    --Whatever.  At least she helped out when it mattered.--

    The old mare had barged past the stranger in a way he never would have had the physical or mental strength to have managed.  If it had not been for her, they might still be there squirming under the thumbs of those mysterious bastards.

    He helped Shutian up and the disciples continued their trek back towards the Kunlun sect.

    Only a few more minutes passed before the other disciples came into view ahead.  Nanxi, Xiaotong, and Neng were bounding across the ground utilizing their qinggong again.  And there was a fourth figure with them as well, wearing the same grey robes as the rest.

    Elder Chen Weidao.

    ¡°Fuuucccckkk!¡±  Shutian moaned.

    Once they saw that Pengfei and Shutian were safe, they ceased using their movement techniques and slowed to a walk.  Still, everyone had reunited within a few minutes.

    Pengfei and Shutian greeted Chen Weidao in unison, ¡°I greet the Elder.¡±

    He looked at them sternly, his appearance slightly more wild than usual. ¡°What the hell is going on?¡±

    Neng subtly held a finger up to his lips and Pengfei took that to mean no one had yet said anything.

    --I guess we¡¯re free to improvise.--

    ¡°We¡­were looking for a lost goat.¡±

    ¡°Bullshit.¡±

    Shutian added quietly, ¡°Sorry Elder, we couldn¡¯t find it.¡±

    The Taoist master looked beyond the children and down the valley, searching for something in the distance.  But he just turned and headed back towards the sect.  The disciples fell in behind him and walked in silence.

    ******************************************************************************

    The herd was where they had left it in the south end of the valley.  Just slightly more dispersed than usual but still unacceptable to Elder Chen Weidao.

    ¡°Nanxi, go round up the beasts.  You three,¡± he indicated Neng, Shutian, and Xiaotong, ¡°back up to the sect.  Find the head of the Discipline Hall and tell him you need two months in the cliffs.  Pengfei, come with me.¡±

    The disciples dispersed with mumbled words to the elder.  The ones headed back up to the sect looked grim.  Pengfei didn¡¯t know what happened at the ¡®cliffs¡¯ but judging from the expressions on his friends¡¯ faces, it was not pleasant.  He gave them a quick wave and then trotted after the elder who was headed to the barn.

    When the man reached the structure, he opened the door but recoiled from the smell halfway through the opening.

    ¡°Ugh.  Go get me some food.¡±

    Pengfei did as he was bid.  When he returned, the elder took the provided jerky and bit into it.  He turned to the disciple again after swallowing several bites.

    ¡°Did you see the strangers?¡±

    ¡°Ye- yes, sir.  How did you know?¡±

    ¡°I was tracking them when I came across your idiot friends chasing after you and Shutian.¡±  The elder examined the disciple, seemingly reluctant to discuss these matters with the boy.

    --I wonder if he was tracking them the night he saved me?  Why else would he have been out there¡­huh.--

    An expectant look from the elder and Pengfei continued, ¡°There were two of them.  I didn¡¯t recognize either. They weren¡¯t the same men who attacked me before.¡±

    ¡°Did they say anything?¡±

    ¡°They seemed interested in what masters were still living at Kunlun.  They wanted your names.  But we didn¡¯t say anything, sir.¡±

    ¡°Good.¡±  Chen Weidao nodded.  ¡°Anything else?¡±

    ¡°¡­They called us ¡®invaders¡¯.  I don¡¯t know why, it didn¡¯t make sense.¡±

    The elder squinted in confusion but just took another bite of jerky.  Pengfei followed him as he walked towards the stream.

    ¡°Sir, those men aren¡¯t bandits, are they?  Bandits don¡¯t want to intercept messages or know the names of sect elders.¡±

    ¡°No, they don¡¯t.¡±

    ¡°So¡­ who are they?¡±  Pengfei asked as the elder knelt to drink handfuls of water from the stream.

    The man flicked his hands dry and said, ¡°We¡¯re not sure.¡±

    ¡°They¡¯re just¡­ strangers?  Why would strangers be so hostile?¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re in the Jianghu now, boy.  If two groups aren¡¯t hostile towards each other, it¡¯s because they¡¯ve moved past hostility and into outright war.  Do you know why Kunlun closed its gates?¡±

    Pengfei blinked at the sudden pivot in conversation.  ¡°Oh¡­not really.  Something about a feud with another sect.  I¡¯ve been meaning to ask more about it.¡±

    ¡°One day, this is back when we were still in Qinghai, we encountered a group from the Kongtong sect.  Thirty of them.  They were ¡®hostile¡¯.  Attacked us in broad daylight.¡±

    Pengfei fit the little nugget of information into the narrative he had pieced together so far.

    --Kongtong attacks, a feud starts between the sects¡­ The Wulin Alliance orders Kunln to close its gates for 50 years¡­--

    ¡°Could these stangers be from Kongtong then?  Out for revenge?¡±

    Elder Weidao didn¡¯t answer directly, just shrugged.

    Nanxi was walking back up the barn followed by several sheep.  Chen Weidao saw the boy coming and ended the conversation abruptly.

    ¡°Don¡¯t mention the strangers to any of the other disciples.  I¡¯ll see to it that Shutian doesn¡¯t either.¡±

    When Nanxi had joined them, the elder addressed both disciples.

    ¡°I¡¯ll stay here for a little while but I need to head back to the sect this afternoon.  You two finish the week down here then return like normal.  I don¡¯t think you¡¯ll have anymore ¡­ problems.¡±

    The rest of the morning and early afternoon passed awkwardly as the disciples worked under their elder¡¯s supervision.  But eventually Chen Weidao walked serenely up the path to the sect compound.  The disciples watched him go and as soon as the elder was out of sight Nanxi turned to Pengfei.

    ¡°What was up with him?  He seemed more cagey than usual.¡±

    Pengfei considered heeding the elder¡¯s request for discretion.  But not for very long.  He immediately divulged every detail of the morning¡¯s encounter with the strangers.

 Chapter 13 - Surprise Defenders

    Pengfei spent the remainder of his time in the valley looking for black-clad figures on ridgelines but never saw them again.  His constant vigilance and the stories he had told managed to freak out Nanxi as well.  But over the course of the next few days, they convinced each other nothing would happen that close to the sect proper.

    On his seventh day outside the walls, Pengfei corralled a dozen goats into the sect¡¯s rickety cart, hitched it to a particularly docile yak, and gathered some food for the long trudge back up the mountain.  Nanxi stood ready to leave while his companion walked over to Horse.

    ¡°I guess this is goodbye for now.  I¡¯ll probably be back down soon though.¡± Pengfei patted her neck gently but the mare just whinnied and trotted off.  ¡°Yeah, yeah.¡±

    He had owned several horses in his time, all of them with more pleasant demeanors, but he couldn¡¯t help but feel a connection with the ornery nag that had once belonged to his friend.  He¡¯d only managed to ride her two short times but felt a claim to her.

    He turned to join Nanxi and reached for his bag of belongings on the ground.

    ¡°Are you serious?¡±  Pengfei paused when he saw little spheres of goat shit placed on top of his things.  He gave his companion an accusatory look.

    ¡°Never gets old!¡±

    ¡°You have a problem man.  You really need to work on your sense of humor.¡±

    Nanxi sulked for the first part of the journey but both disciples were breathing a little easier now that they were on their way back up the trail.  In an hour, Pengfei was relaxed and humming a tune he had learned from Pema so many months ago on their journey together through Tibet.

    --I wonder how the others are doing with their punishment?  Two months in the cliffs, whatever that is¡­seems like a long time.--

    --  ¡­  --

    --Two months¡­--

    ¡°Shit!¡±  Pengfei cursed aloud.

    ¡°What?¡±

    ¡°Neng, Shutian, and Xiaotong were supposed to watch my back during sparring.  But now they¡¯re in the cliffs for two months, whatever that means.  I guess they¡¯re not going to be able to help.¡±

    Nanxi waved his concerns away.  ¡°Relax.  I¡¯m not going to hassle you.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, but Hongyu and Daoping still might.¡±

    ¡°Oh¡­yeah.  That sucks.¡±

    Nanxi shrugged and let Pengfei stew in his anxiety for the rest of the journey.  They passed two disciples sent to replace them around midday, and reached the sect an hour before the evening meal.  They rested in the empty dormitory while the other Jin disciples finished the night¡¯s training, then joined them for dinner.

    A warm meal was a welcome change from the grain balls and jerky that had been his fare for the past week but it was not enough to dispel the worry that had gripped Pengfei.

    --I was hoping for a few more weeks of training before I had to battle it out with those assholes.--

    Pengfei could see Daoping and Hongyu eyeing him from across the Dining Hall and speaking to each other.

    --There should still be a few days before the next sparring session.  Guess I¡¯ll just have to see what happens¡­ fuck.--

    Dinner ended and the disciples filed back into their respective dormitories.  Pengfei slipped out in another direction though.  He headed to the training yard to fight his own anxiety.

    The forms of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ unfolded more fluidly now.  He at least remembered the correct sequence of movements, though he did not yet execute them as gracefully as the other disciples.  He paid special attention to the sections that Neng had previously highlighted for him and tried to recall the applications hidden in each subtle stance.

    But what he really wanted to practice was the technique that Nanxi had struck him with during their bout in the valley below, the punch to the liver.

    In the days after Neng and the others had returned to the sect, Nanxi had given him more instruction on the attack.  It was a strangely angled punch, awkward for Pengfei who was only used to straight on blows.  He coiled his body and struck the air now in imitation of what he had seen before.

    Again.

    And again.

    And again.

    The repetition helped to drive the worry from his mind.  He found himself focusing on the movements, the technique.

    --No, the wrist needs to be straight.--

    He smiled as each subsequent attempt yielded some measure of improvement, cursed when the progress wasn¡¯t as fast as he hoped.

    The chill night threated to freeze his sweaty robe to his back before Pengfei finally went to seek his bedroll.

    This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.

    ******************************************************************************

    For the next several days Pengfei kept sneaking off to train on his own whenever he spotted the opportunity. The meditation sessions in the Veneration Hall were all but pointless; he had still yet to feel a spark of internal energy.  And so the physical dominated his attention.

    The running and conditioning was even more difficult after neglecting it for a week in the valley.  The afternoon training sessions were nearly as bad.  Chen Rulan certainly pushed them but the real test came from keeping pace with the rest of the Jin disciples.  Matching their tempo with each movement in a form, or every strike in a drill pushed him nearly as much as a sprint up hill.

    --More fun that staying up late to study the Thirteen Classics anyway.--

    Pengfei shook off memories of the Confucian tomes as Chen Rulan led them through their exercises.  The elder moved through the ranks as the disciples shouted and struck air.  When he sent the others to work with the sword, he held Pengfei back to continue barehanded practice.

    Pengfei ran through what he knew of the forms again.  The elder stood nearby, occasionally glancing with nods of approval for the efforts, but more often than not he watched the sword practice.  He shouted at the others from time to time.

    ¡°Quit messing around!¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t drop your guard!  I don¡¯t care how tired you are!¡±

    ¡°Again!¡±

    During such a shouting fit, Pengfei finished one section and having nothing else to do, began practicing what he had learned from Nanxi.  Closing the distance for a strike to the midsection.  The liver.

    ¡°You¡¯re off balance.¡±  Chen Rulan critiqued from the side.  The disciple looked up, shocked at the powerful man¡¯s quiet voice.  Clearly not meant for the distant pairs in their fencing practice, though that was where the elder was still looking.

    Pengfei looked for the target of the elder¡¯s correction and belatedly realized it must have been directed at him.  He spoke in acknowledgement to Chen Rulan¡¯s back.

    "Oh...yes, Elder.  It¡¯s a difficult punch.  I¡¯m not used to the angle yet.¡±

    ¡°Angle doesn¡¯t matter.   All that matters is that you strike with the correct knuckles and keep the wrist straight.  If you do those two things, any punch you throw will land correctly.¡±

    The elder unclasped the hands behind his back and demonstrated several punches from all different angles.  Straight, hooking, looping, rising, falling.  They cut sharply through the air.

    ¡°Now you.  Again.¡±

    Pengfei threw the strike to his imaginary opponent¡¯s torso at Elder Rulan¡¯s command.  He concentrated on the alignment of the wrist as he had been instructed, aiming with the first two knuckles of his left hand.  Once, twice, thrice.

    One detail improved upon, the elder placed his scabbard on the boy¡¯s shoulder and guided his torso through the correct rotation as he practiced.

    ¡°Twist the hips as you punch, your weight should shift from your left leg to your right.  Trying to stay square is why you¡¯re off balance.¡±

    A moment later, ¡°Better.  But dig in more with the punch.  It¡¯s a penetrating strike, not a snap.¡±

    When Pengfei made the adjustments, the man grunted and wandered off to look after the other disciples.

    --Penetrating, not snapping.  Turn the hips more.--

    He tried to remember the technique with his body and felt the improvement in his subsequent strikes.

    The bell sounded for dinner but Pengfei remained behind to solidify what he had learned.

    ******************************************************************************

    Three days later Pengfei stood at the edge of the training ground once again.  Preliminary warmups had been completed but instead of leading the disciples through more training, Chen Rulan ordered them to find partners.

    Sparring.

    He grabbed the nearest grey robe and surveyed the others around him as they shuffled about.  Hongyu and Daoping pushed their way through the crowd and toward him.  They partnered with each other close by.

    Pengfei¡¯s bout with his first partner was unremarkable.  The disciple, whose name he did not know, had not been interest in brutalizing him.  They worked easily on their technique and took care not to injure each other.  Pengfei¡¯s performance was not as good as it could have been; he was distractedly keeping track of the threats around him as the pairs of disciples swirled and circled across the training ground.

    Chen Rulan bellowed the end of the first bout.  ¡°Stop!  Change partners!¡±

    Hongyu came first with a smile on his face.

    ¡°Where are your friends, shithead?¡±

    He reached out to grab Pengfei¡¯s robe.

    --Shit¡­Alright, let¡¯s do this.--

    Someone yanked him backwards, out of Hongyu¡¯s reach.

    ¡°I¡¯ll be in your care, junior brother.¡±

    Pengfei turned at the unfamiliar voice.  He looked down to see Jin Tianwei holding his wrist.  One of the narrow-eyed twins who was friends with Nanxi.  His brother, Jin TIanxun, had stepped forward to intercept Hongyu.

    ¡°What are you two doing?  Get out of the way!¡±  Hongyu demanded.

    Nanxi was there as well, placing a hand on Daoping¡¯s shoulder.   ¡°Please teach me brother.¡±

    ¡°Begin!¡±

    The second bout started at Chen Rulan¡¯s signal.

    Tianwei pulled the confused Pengfei around and led him through the next round of training.   The quiet friend of Nanxi took it seriously, throwing sharp punches and kicks that forced Pengfei to actually pay attention to the match, but the attacks lacked the intention to injure.  It was a hard bout, but he came out no worse for wear in the end.

    The next several rounds were the same.  The twins and Nanxi passed Pengfei back and forth amongst each other or shoved him into the path of other disciples while running interference with Hongyu and Daoping.  The two aggressors did not give up until the end but were ultimately unsuccessful in challenging Pengfei.

    ¡°Enough!  Grab your weapons!¡±

    Elder Rulan transitioned the disciples into weapons sparring but Pengfei was ordered to stand aside and continue working on his barehanded techniques, as usual.  Nanxi nodded as he made his way to the sword racks and Pengfei gave a grateful salute to him and the twins as they passed.

    ¡°Thanks.¡±

    ¡°No problem, shithead.¡±

    --¡­ Still not loving that nickname.--

    *****************************************************************************

    The protection Nanxi and the twins had given him did not extend outside the training ground, however. Pengfei had kept to his extra practice regimen and exercised after the evening meal but Hongyu and Daoping were still waiting for him outside the dormitory when he returned.   They blocked the door as he approached.

    Hongyu leaned forward and taunted, ¡°How many more people are you going to beg to wipe your ass for you?¡±

    ¡°¡­I can¡¯t help it, seems like shit just sticks to me.¡±

    When Pengfei gestured towards Hongyu and Daoping, his aggressors bristled.

    ¡°You¡¯re just making things worse for yourself, you little bastard.¡±

    ¡°Can I ask you two¡­ what¡¯s your goal here?  You screw with me, you want to beat my ass, then what?  You move on?¡±

    ¡°Move on?  No¡­we¡¯re going to have so much fun together, shithead.  We just need to teach you a little respect first.¡±

    ¡°Thanks for the heads up.  You know, if you had said it was just going to be a one-off, take a beating and move on, I would¡¯ve just gotten it over with.  But I guess I¡¯ll just have to stick with the current plan.¡±

    ¡°Oh yeah?  And what is this great plan of yours?¡±

    Pengfei shouldered his way through the pair as they snickered and spoke to them over his shoulder, ¡°I¡¯m going to beat you both senseless.¡±

    --That¡­ that sounded good right?  Not too corny?--

    For all his bravado, he didn¡¯t rate his chances of victory very high.  Pengfei lay underneath his blanket and visualized combat with Hongyu and Daoping.  It wasn¡¯t a voluntary exercise; the images came unwanted into his mind.  His head twitched and fists clenched as he pictured throwing and parrying strikes but even in his imagination he was outmatched.

    An hour later and Pengfei still had not been able to calm himself.  He began doing mental arithmetic.  He had always enjoyed mathematics lessons and often used it as a distraction or calming mechanism in his life before leaving home.

    --2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768¡­ugh.  Not working.--

    All candles and lamps were extinguished now, all disciples asleep.  Except Pengfei.  He moved on to mentally tracing the meridians through his body as he recalled them from the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinte Skill¡¯ manual.  Then imagined each movement of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ forms in sequence.

    The next unbidden thoughts to invade his mind were memories of the men in black robes.  The raw emotion of Feng¡¯s and Zihao¡¯s deaths had subsided, especially helped by the impromptu wake he had held with Pema.  He was not over the incident, would never forget it, but he would no longer burst into tears or panic either.

    Instead, he recalled the strange interactions with the men.

    --Obsessed with Kunlun but unwilling to act against the sect directly¡­for now anyway.  I wonder if that will change when the gates are open again?--

    ¡­list the names of every master alive in the Kunlun sect.

    What message were you supposed to deliver to the Kunlun sect¡­

    He still easily remembered the words he had recited every night on the journey through Sichuan and Tibet.

    --Luo Nianxin of Shaolin

    Liang Deliang of Kongtong

    Song Weixiong of Zhongnan

    Nangong Zhiqiang of the Nangong Clan

    Xiao Xingchen of Emei.--

    A few repetitions and he drifted off to sleep.

 Chapter 14 - Scripture Hall

    ¡°I¡¯m ready to give it a try.¡±  Pengfei told Nanxi.  He had come to find the disciple during morning chores.  The twins Tianwei and Tianxun worked nearby.

    Nanxi didn¡¯t stop sweeping.  ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    ¡°Fighting Daoping and Hongyu in the next sparring session.  I want to try it.¡±

    ¡°Good.  I¡¯m already tired of watching your ass anyway.¡±

    Pengfei chuckled internally at Nanxi playing it cool.  They had not spoken much since coming up from the valley but in their few interactions there had been an awkward familiarity between them.  Bonded, but not yet friends.

    ¡°Thanks for your help.  If I could ask one more favor, I have a plan.¡±

    Hearing this, Nanxi beckoned for the twins to come over and listen as well.

    ¡°I still need every edge I can get.  Sparring is usually ten rounds.  I was thinking, you three protect me until round eight, then I go after them when they¡¯re tired.¡±

    Nanxi nodded and the twins offered their advice.

    ¡°Go after Daoping first.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s weaker than Hongyu.¡±

    Pengfei saluted the trio in thanks and left them to their chores, going to complete his own.  Jin Andong, the head of the Jin disciples, had assigned him the task of cleaning the library.  He fetched a bucket of water and a rag, then made his way there.

    The placard above the door actually read ¡¯Scripture Hall¡¯, not ¡®Library¡¯, but all the disciples agreed that the small building did not deserve such a grand name.

    ¡°Stop there.¡±  A voice called out as Pengfei reached for the door to the building.  He froze in place, confused.  Elder Chen Weidao opened the door from inside a moment later.

    ¡°I¡¯m here to clean the lib ¨C uh, Scripture Hall, Elder.¡±

    ¡°Clean it or destroy it?¡±

    ¡°What?¡±

    ¡°There are two things you must never allow to touch a book.  Fire and water.¡±

    ¡°So, how am I supposed to clean without water?¡±

    The elder made Pengfei put down the bucket and follow him inside.  He indicated a bookshelf.

    ¡°Take all the books off, rub each one gently with a dry rag to remove dust.  When the shelf is empty you can wipe it down with a damp rag.  Go outside to rinse.  Wipe the shelf dry and wait an hour just to be sure.  Then put the books back.  Don¡¯t do more than one shelf at a time, I don¡¯t want you getting everything mixed up.¡±

    Pengfei was stunned.  For one, this was the most he had heard Elder Weidao speak and with the most intensity.  He had not talked so forcefully when confronting the thin-faced man and saving Pengfei¡¯s life.  Nor when he had questioned the runaway disciples in the valley below.

    But he was also surprised at the scope of his task.  It was not a large library, but with the elder¡¯s restrictive demands¡­

    ¡°This will take days.¡±  Pengfei concluded.

    ¡°I give you permission to adjust your schedule as necessary.¡±

    ¡°You mean like skipping morning veneration or afternoon lessons?¡±

    ¡°If you like.  Just get it done.¡±

    An unexpected upside.  Carte blanche to dip out of whatever he disliked and come work in the library.  For a few days, at least.

    --I can live with that.--

    Chen Weidao returned to a small table at the back of the room and resumed some task as Pengfei began his own work.

    ******************************************************************************

    Originally, Pengfei had come up with a plan in order to skip as much of the morning religious practice as possible.

    The time directly after breakfast was typically used to educate and train the Jin disciples in Taoist practices.  Reading scriptures to themselves or reciting them aloud, meditation, veneration, learning various rituals.  The training one would expect in becoming an ordained Taoist.

    All the masters of the Chen generation had been inducted into the higher levels of the sect¡¯s religious hierarchy, reserved for monks and priests, but apparently that had not always been the norm.  Pengfei had learned from the other boys that before Kunlun had closed its gates, it had been made up of both religious and lay members.  Those focused on the Dao would become ascetics while others would live more secular lives.  But when the gates closed, none of the lay brothers had remained.

    It seemed the Jin generation would have their choice between pursuing religious esoterica or living more mundanely, but until that time, all disciples would learn the basic practices.

    For his part, Pengfei looked forward to that portion of his education ending.  He had no interest in it and struggled to stay awake during those tedious morning sessions. Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.

    So, the library project provided a welcome opportunity to escape the drudgery.  The day after receiving the assignment, during what should have been time dedicated to reading scriptures, he tried to calculate how long he could stretch out the job.

    --With the number of bookshelves, and the time it takes for each one¡­ at least four days, I think.--

    He revised his estimate just a couple hours later.  He had left the Scripture Hall to join the other disciples in their morning exercise, which today was running the mountain path.  Pengfei still had difficulty with his stamina and was late to resume work at the library.  He expected Chen Weidao to hurry him back to his work but on the contrary the elder practically dragged him out of the building.

    ¡°You¡¯re dripping in sweat.  What did I tell you about getting the books wet?¡±

    ¡°Sorry, Elder.¡±

    Pengfei waited outside while he cooled down from the morning¡¯s exertion and mentally adjusted his timeline.

    --If I work up a good sweat every morning, I can stretch this out another two or three days.--

    It was half an hour before the elder was convinced no errant drops of moisture would fall from Pengfei¡¯s brow and dimple the paper of some scared tome or another.  Even then, the disciple worked slowly.  He read the title of each volume as he carefully wiped it clean.

    Chen Weidao called out to him from his desk, ¡°If any of the texts look damaged, bring them to me.¡±

    Pengfei glanced back at the elder.  The man seemed to be copying the contents of an old and yellowed book onto the clean white pages of a blank one.  He had two more to copy by the time Pengfei left for the midday meal.

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei had resolved to face Hongyu and Daoping in the next sparring session but, as if to mock this resolve, the session did not come.  Every day he waited for Chen Rulan to call out for partners, but it had still yet to happen.

    Instead, the elder began instructing the disciples on how to incorporate their internal energy in the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.  Those who could control the flow of their qi were taught how to summon it up from their dantian and guide it to their extremities as they performed their attacks.

    Only one person stood apart.  Since Pengfei hadn¡¯t been able to sense the energy, let alone cultivate it, he was shuffled off to the side to practice the strictly physical techniques.

    The other disciples moved on to their sword work after more than an hour of barehanded practice.

    Elder Rulan saw Pengfei still the practicing the barehanded forms and walked over to the boy.

    ¡°I think you¡¯ve spent enough time on the basics.   Come join the other disciples for sword practice.¡±

    ¡°Thank you Elder but, respectfully, I would like to spend another week on the fist techniques if I may.¡±

    ¡°Why?¡±  The large man asked with a quizzical look.  ¡°Normally, disciples can¡¯t wait to pick up their wooden swords and swing them about.¡±

    ¡°I still feel like I¡¯m lacking.  Besides, since we don¡¯t carry swords outside of the training ground it seems the empty-handed techniques are more useful.¡±

    ¡°Useful?  Against your fellow disciples?¡±  Chen Rulan gave a hearty laugh that shook his muscular frame. ¡°Hahaha, I suppose that would be the case for now.  But don¡¯t neglect your weapon training for long or the first bandit you come across will cut you to pieces.¡±

    Pengfei conceded the elder¡¯s point but didn¡¯t want to add anything to his plate until he had taken something off it.

    --I¡¯ll worry about that once I¡¯ve dealt with Hongyu and Daoping.--

    ******************************************************************************

    Another day, another run down the mountain.  It was Pengfei¡¯s best performance yet.  But that was not saying much.

    While the disciples stayed together on the relatively easy descent, they often spread out significantly on the more arduous climb back up to the sect.  What was one cohesive pack splintered into several smaller groups which then completed the climb at different paces.  Pengfei usually trailed behind even the slowest of these groups but today he had managed to stay among its ranks.

    --It only cost me a lung!--

    He crossed the invisible threshold back into the sect¡¯s main compound and the last dregs of strength evaporated.  His gait, barely more than a walk, degraded to a shamble and his ragged breaths became a hacking cough.

    --Still, it¡¯s an improvement.--

    His pride in his performance was soon dampened by a niggling sensation in his guts. Pengfei recognized one of the disciples who had been working in the Dining Hall during the morning meal service.

    ¡°What did you guys do to the food?  I feel like I¡¯m gonna shit myself.¡±

    ¡°Screw you.¡±

    Pengfei waved the disciple off and made his way to the Scripture Hall to continue his assignment there.  This time he did not need Chen Weidao¡¯s admonishment; he took a seat outside the building and waited for his sweat to dry and his body to cool.  He even went to wash his hands of their accumulated grime.

    Of course, his fastidiousness also had the added benefited of eating up more time and thus stretching the assignment even further.  Pengfei¡¯s delay tactics were no longer just for the sake of avoiding the morning Taoist practices either.  He had come to find the time he spent in the library genuinely interesting.

    The first shelves he cleaned had been devoted to religious texts of Taoist, Buddhist, and more exotic canons.  No doubt enlightening, but the young man only wiped them clean and carefully set them aside.

    Subsequent shelves contained much more engaging items.  The martial arts tomes had occupied him for hours.  Like the religious texts, there were manuals from diverse sources in addition to the ones detailing the techniques of Kunlun.

    Chen Weidao said nothing in reproach as Pengfei leafed through the pages of a single book for an hour before the disciple gently wiped its covers and set it with the others.  However, the elder had refused all requests to borrow anything from the library.

    --Neng probably wouldn¡¯t approve anyway.--

    He thought of the displeased scowl his friend would give for studying something other than the most basic sections of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.

    The next bookcase held material of a more secular nature and Pengfei¡¯s perusal of it finally drew a response from the normally reserved elder.

    ¡°Are you interested in arithmetic?¡±

    Pengfei glanced back to Chen Weidao, still hard at work at his desk.

    ¡°I worked through it a couple years ago.  It was fun.¡±  He placed the classic mathematical treatise, ¡®Suan Shu Shu¡¯ to the side and continued his cleaning.  ¡°But my tutors wouldn¡¯t let me focus on math.  They said I needed to develop a ¡®breadth of knowledge¡¯ first.¡±

    Master Weidao carefully traced out another character and a few seconds later distractedly mumbled, ¡°Uh huh¡­rightly so¡­¡±

    Pengfei picked up another book in surprise. ¡°Oh, the library has the ¡®Ten Computational Canons¡¯?  I¡¯ve always wanted to study them.¡±

    The elder very deliberately set his brush to the side. ¡°Which volume do you have there?¡±

    ¡°The ¡®Zhou Shadow Mathematical Classic¡¯ .¡±

    Chen Weidao stood and approached Pengfei, then reached out a hand to the bookshelf behind him.  He selected another volume, doublechecked the title on the cover, and pushed it into Pengfei¡¯s chest.

    ¡°You should start with the ¡®Nine Chapters of the Mathematical Art¡¯ instead.  You can borrow another once you are done with that one.¡±

    The man returned to his desk and resumed his transcriptions as Pengfei inspected the volume that had been thrust into his arms.  He meekly leafed through its pages as the elder went about his work.

    He was tempted to ask if he really had permission to take the book from the Scripture Hall but didn¡¯t want to risk hearing a ¡®no¡¯.  Pengfei carefully slid the text into his robe and quietly continued cleaning.

    ******************************************************************************

    ¡°Find a partner!¡±  Chen Rulan called out in his booming voice.

    The time had finally come.  The crowd of disciples began pairing up for the first round of sparring.  Pengfei partnered with the nearest warm body and surveyed the situation as he waited for the round to begin.

    Nanxi and the twins had been staying nearby during the afternoon training sessions, waiting for the day when their help would be needed.  Now, they brought their partners closer and formed a protective ring around Pengfei while Hongyu and Daoping hovered nearby.

    The unwritten rule was that if someone touched you on the soldier, it was an irrefusable challenge.  Not accepting the bout, besides being a mark of cowardice, could be met with official punishment from the elders.

    Pengfei tried to keep a cool head through the rounds with various partners.  He observed Daoping, his first target, out of the corner of his eye during each match.

    --I can do this, I can do this.--

    Nanxi grabbed Pengfei for the seventh round, the last before the decided confrontation.  The disciples moved around each other slowly.

    ¡°Catch your breath.¡±  Nanxi whispered, throwing lazy strikes to keep up the appearance of an actual bout.  ¡°I¡¯ll take Hongyu in the next round, the twins will watch your back, you go for the chubby bastard.¡±

    ¡°Right.¡±

    --I can do this, I can do this.--

    The blood pumped in Pengfei¡¯s ears and his vision narrowed as the round drew to a close.  He barely noticed when Elder Rulan called out the end of the match.  He was looking down a tunnel with Daoping at the end, all other noise and sight fading into the background.

    He didn¡¯t remember reaching out his hand, but there it was, resting on Daoping¡¯s shoulder.

    ¡°I challenge you.¡±

 Chapter 15 - Confrontations

    Daoping was saying something but Pengfei didn¡¯t hear it.  He just held the other disciple¡¯s shoulder mutely, frozen, his mind blank.

    A hand grabbed his robe and jerked Pengfei around.  Nanxi¡¯s palm bit into his cheek.  The sharp pain of the slap brought Pengfei out of his nervous trance.

    ¡°Thanks, I guess.¡±

    Nanxi grinned, ¡°My pleasure.¡±

    --Bastard is a little too sincere.--

    He rubbed his face to alleviate the stinging pain as Daoping smirked, ¡°You¡¯re an idiot.¡±

    Pengfei stepped closer, nose to nose with the other disciple.

    Daoping was not to be intimidated.  He pressed his forehead into Pengfei¡¯s forcefully.  But it was a misunderstanding on Daoping¡¯s part; Pengfei was not moving forward to show his bravado.  He just wanted to be close to his opponent at the start of the match.

    ¡°Begin!¡±

    Pengfei unleashed his onslaught at the first syllable from Chen Rulan.  Daoping didn¡¯t seem prepared for the flurry of blows he received, backpedaling immediately, but Pengfei did not allow him to break away.

    The attacks were simple but continuous.  Straight punches to the body and face, kicks to the legs.  Daoping absorbed them all, but did little more than that.  When he opened his guard to attempt an offense, Pengfei attacked his face.

    The senior tripped over himself in an attempt to back away.  Another unwritten rule, Pengfei had to wait for Daoping to stand before the bout could continue.  It was just a moment.  The disciple stood, clearly embarrassed and ready to change the flow of the fight.  He threw a tentative punch but Pengfei was already coming in with another flurry of his own, bridging the distance.

    In their first encounter outside the dormitory, the two boys had gone back and forth.  Exchange for exchange.  But not today.  Daoping still had better technique, he moved with finesse, each strike executed correctly.  But Pengfei smothered him in a barrage of simple blows.

    They were tied up again.  Daoping grabbed Pengfei¡¯s robes and pulled him in close, trying to stem the tide but to no avail.  When Daoping encircled his arms, Pengfei thrust his knees into his opponent¡¯s belly.  When Daoping backed his hips away, Pengfei wrestled his arms free.

    Others were beginning to take notice of the ferocity of the fight.  Many of the nearby disciples stopped their own bouts to watch.  Even Chen Rulan was observing from the side.  But no rules had been broken and no one intervened.

    Daoping was showing more fatigue than pain.  He had not thrown many strikes but the clinching and jostling for position had sapped his strength.  He managed to disengage and back away now, acting as if he would drop to a knee.

    ¡°Don¡¯t let him go down!  Hold him up!¡± Nanxi hissed from behind.

    Pengfei surged forward and bearhugged Daoping under the arms, squeezing the disciple¡¯s spine straight. More knees to the belly until a coughing grunt was heard from Daoping.

    ¡°Huggghhhh!¡±

    The opponent became deadweight and at that point Pengfei could no longer hold the boy up.  He let Daoping fall to the ground and stumbled over him, barely staying upright himself.

    The round had not ended but no one nearby was fighting anymore.  Everyone watched as Pengfei stood triumphantly over Daoping.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough sparring for today.  Everyone, grab your swords.¡±  Chen Rulan¡¯s normally booming voice was quiet, not needing to compete with the clamor of clashing disciples.

    --Thank goodness¡­another few seconds and I would be puking my guts out.--

    Pengfei hunched over, hand on knees, and wheezed.  The fatigue he had not felt during the bout now manifested all at once.  He wasn¡¯t sure he had even taken a breath during the fight but now his chest heaved at a furious pace.

    Hongyu helped his friend up, glaring at Pengfei all the while.  Any insults the boy had were stemmed by the presence of Elder Rulan, but the animosity in the boy¡¯s eyes was unmistakable.

    --I¡¯d be screwed if I had to fight him now.  Guess I¡¯ll just have to get him next time.--

    Pengfei held his hands over his head to relieve a sudden stitch in his side and shuffled off to practice alone again.

    ******************************************************************************

    Nanxi, Tianwei, and Tianxun were the first to join Pengfei at his table during the evening meal but they were not the only ones.  Other disciples from his dorm sat and congratulated him for standing up to Daoping.  He could barely get his food down in between jolting claps on the back.

    It seemed that the prank with the vulture had been a step too far for many of the disciples and they collectively relished in the payback Pengfei had doled out.

    ¡°That¡¯s showing him!¡±Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    ¡°About time!¡±

    ¡°Just need to stick it to Hongyu now!¡±

    Other tables craned their necks to watch the boisterous huddle of disciples but they did not need to ask what was happening.  The word quickly spread through the Jin generation.

    When the initial fervor died down, Nanxi offered his own mild praise.

    ¡°Not bad.  Just do the same thing again with Hongyu.¡±

    ¡°Thanks.  I couldn¡¯t have done it without you three.¡±

    The twins grunted in acceptance but any other meaningful discussion was drowned out as the amassed disciples began retelling the events for the third time.  Everyone loved imitating the sucking noise Daoping had made when that last strike had forced all the air from his lungs.

    The good cheer followed Pengfei out of the Dining Hall and back to the dormitory.  He had originally planned to slip away and continue his recent routine of extra training but the wave of mirth carried him along with the others.

    As the well-wishers made their ways to bed, they gave him final words of encouragement and parting claps on the back.  Mixed in with those, a hand gently rested on his shoulder.  Words, at first lost in the laughter of the others, were repeated when the voices died away.

    ¡°I challenge you, Jin Pengfei.¡±

    Hongyu had walked up behind him, mixed into the crowd of disciples.  Pengfei turned and met the boy¡¯s eyes.

    Nanxi spoke first.  ¡°Wait until the next sparring matches Hongyu.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t want to wait.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ll get in trouble. Just ¨C¡± Another disciple tried to reason with Hongyu but the boy waved away the words.

    Pengfei met his opponent¡¯s resolve, ¡°Fine.  Let¡¯s get it over with.¡±

    A ring of bodies formed around the pair.  The other disciples whispered to each other, waiting for the fight to begin.

    Nanxi was the last to move out of their way.  ¡°Do you want another slap across the face?¡±

    ¡°No, my head is clear.¡±

    ¡°Alright.  Give him a hard time.¡±

    Pengfei nodded and looked to his opponent for the start of the bout.  Hongyu took a guard and gave a last taunt.

    ¡°No elders to pull me off you.  You¡¯ll have to bow to me if you want it to stop.¡±

    Pengfei did not respond.  He dug his feet into the floor in preparation for his first charge but Hongyu beat him to it.  The older disciple lunged with his punch.  Pengfei parried the blow and tried to close in but a push kick to the midsection kept him at bay.

    Their first conflict had not shown Hongyu¡¯s true abilities.  Pengfei had been able to take him off guard and felled him with a single punch to the stomach.  But there was no element of surprise now and it was becoming clear that Hongyu¡¯s skills exceeded Daoping¡¯s by quite a bit.  Every time Pengfei stepped in with a flurry of attacks, his opponent counterattacked or pivoted away.

    Hongyu began by using the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.  The techniques were executed with greater proficiency than Pengfei could manage but at least they were recognizable.  He was able to defend against many of them.

    The two of them seemed to be evenly matched for a short time.  But as the pace of the fight increased, defense was all Pengfei could manage.  There were no longer any gaps to attack or close in.

    And then the difference in their educations became apparent.  When the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ was repelled by Pengfe, Hongyu switched to techniques that his junior had no answer for.

    What should have been a fist became a palm strike.  Instead of coming from the left, it was the right.  Blows targeted the muscles, joints, and acupressure points.

    --Is it the Swan Falling Palm?  Or the Three Yin Hand?--

    Pengfei had never seen these martial arts before but remembered the names he had seen on manuals in the library.  The names did not matter though.  Without experience, Pengfei had no way to counter the attacks.

    The unfamiliar blows snaked their way around blocks and parries to strike unexpected targets.

    The scratches and bruises that Pengfei had accumulated during his training with Nanxi in the valley had only just healed but now new wounds began to appear on his face.  A busted lip and¨C

    ¡°My fucking nose!¡±  Pengfei staggered back, clutching his face.  Blood filled his hands and dripped between his fingers onto the ground.

    Hongyu sneered at him. ¡°Are you ready to bow down and beg for mercy?¡±

    ¡°Screw you!¡±

    Pengfei flung his blood at his opponent but it splattered harmlessly against the boy¡¯s robes.  Hongyu reached up and wiped a single drop off his cheek, flicked it to the floor, and made his way toward Pengfei again.

    He had tried what strikes he knew.

    He had tried closing in for a dog fight.

    The few tricks and tactics Pengfei had learned in his short martial arts education were now all spent.  There was nothing else to do except take his beating.

    --But I never wanted to win¡­ I just wanted to make him think twice before coming after me again.--

    How much would it take to plant a seed of hesitation into Hongyu¡¯s mind?  Was one good hit enough?

    --I can land one¡­ I can do that much.  But which one?--

    He had taken down Hongyu with a single punch to the stomach before¡­ but a thousand of the same blow on a dozen different opponents since then had shown no effect.  Without the element of surprise, Pengfei simply lacked the power.

    --But there¡¯s that.--

    A target less protected by the thick muscles on the front of the midsection.  Something painful enough to leave a lasting memory with just one punch.

    Hongyu was on him again, an arm¡¯s reach away.  Just outside the necessary range.  Pengfei tried to sneak inside between his blows but for every step he took, Hongyu retreated a step.  It didn¡¯t matter if it was a subtle creep or a sudden lunge.

    --I need just half a pace.--

    Another blow to the nose sent him reeling backwards and fresh spurt of blood flowed.  Hongyu didn¡¯t let him back away though.

    An idea sparked as a fresh wave of blows pummeled him.

    --He¡¯ll follow me backwards.--

    Pengfei took a step back in retreat and Hongyu stepped in.  Just when his opponent planted his foot, Pengfei hopped half a step forward.  He threw his strangely looping punch to the side of Hongyu¡¯s torso, just below the sweep of the ribs.  Digging in, driving through.

    The liver.  The target Nanxi had struck three weeks ago that had caused Pengfei so much pain.

    ¡°Hunfff!¡±  Hongyu breathed out and tightened up his guard.  His striking stopped but the senior disciple was still standing.

    --Fuck¡­It didn¡¯t work¡­--

    Pengfei waited for his opponent to attack again but for some reason it did not come.  He peeked out around his fists and saw something unfamiliar on Hongyu¡¯s face.

    Pain.

    ¡°Hit him again!¡±  Nanxi¡¯s voice pierced the fog.  ¡°Same spot!  Fucking hit him!¡±

    --It¡¯s working.  I got you now, asshole!--

    Pengfei curled in and whipped his left hand out again.  It found its mark.  Hongyu¡¯s knees gave out and he collapsed in on himself with a groan.  But Pengfei grabbed Hongyu¡¯s robes and drove the disciple to one of the nearby columns, pinning him there with one hand.  With the other, Pengfei threw blow after blow.

    The hastily thrown punches skidded off Hongyu¡¯s shoulders or thumped against his chest but did little damage.  They were more an expression of Pengfei¡¯s bottled-up anger.  When the last of Pengfei¡¯s stamina was spent and the strikes became pathetic slaps, Hongyu was able to wrench himself free of the boy¡¯s grasp.

    The senior disciple was still doubled over, motionless, but stayed on his feet.  With no further attacks coming from his opponent, and with no energy for his own, Pengfei considered the match over.  He stumbled towards the ring of cheering disciples that formed the boundary for the impromptu match.  But before he could push his way through them Hongyu called out from behind.

    ¡°I didn¡¯t go down, you little shit!¡±

    ¡°Then I forfeit.  You win.¡± Pengfei was happy to walk away with his one good hit.  He had accomplished what he needed to.

    But Hongyu boiled over at the dismissal.  He screamed and lurched forward, bringing his hand to his side.  It extended in what looked to be a normal side-punch but even Pengfei could tell there was something different about it.

    Thundering Sky Strike ( lei tian ji - À×Ìì“ô )

    Pengfei stood there mute, too tired and shocked to react.  The attack would surely connect and do some tremendous damage to its target.

    Just before the blow connected, another disciple lashed out.  Someone in the crowd kicked Hongyu in the side and sent him sprawling to the floor at Pengfei¡¯s feet.  Apparently, many of the disciples were indignant at Hongyu¡¯s underhanded tactics.  Using internal energy, and in a surprise attack no less, was a taboo that even Pengfei knew better than to transgress.

    The crowd jeered at Hongyu as the boy climbed tiredly to his hands and knees.

    ¡°You asshole.¡±  Pengfei panted.  He slapped his opponent tiredly across the face.

    And that was when the door of the dormitory burst open.

    ¡°Enough!¡±

    The word was deafening.  It did not just cut through the noise of the crowded disciples; it completely obliterated their screaming voices.

    Everyone in the hall turned to see Elder Chen Rulan standing in the entryway.

 Chapter 16 - The Cliffs (1)

    Elder Chen Lei prodded Pengfei¡¯s face with his fingertips, drawing winces from the disciple.

    ¡°The eyes are fine, the jaw is intact¡­¡±

    The doctor spoke distractedly as he conducted his examination.  Chen Rulan nodded along with the man¡¯s words, looking over his shoulder.  Hongyu had been brought to the Medicine Hall as well but Pengfei had not managed to inflict and visible damage on his opponent, and so the boy had been dismissed back to the dormitory.

    The doctor held Pengfei¡¯s face between his hands, examining thoughtfully.  ¡°The nose is the problem.¡±

    ¡°The nose?   What¡¯s wrong with my nose?¡±

    Instead of answering, the doctor handed Pengfei a small round mirror.  A grotesque face looked back out at him.  Two black and swollen eyes, a busted lip, and a crooked nose, not to mention several scrapes and cuts.

    ¡°Fuck!  My nose!  Can you fix it?¡±  Pengfei tentatively touched the warped shape on his face but the doctor shooed his hands away.

    ¡°Yes, yes, I can fix it.  Are you ready?¡±

    ¡°Ready for what?¡±

    CRACK!

    Chen Lei gripped Pengfei¡¯s broken nose between thumb and forefinger and snapped it back into place with a crunch.

    ¡°Fuuuckkk!¡±

    Chen Rulan slapped the back of the cursing patient¡¯s head and stated curtly, ¡°That¡¯s another week of punishment.¡±  The martial arts instructor then turned to the doctor, ¡°Can I leave him here for tonight?  I don¡¯t want any more trouble in the dormitory.¡±

    Chen Lei nodded his permission and the two elders turned to leave Pengfei alone in the infirmary.  The boy held a rag to his freshly gushing nostrils and leaned his head backwards to slow the torrent.

    A month in the cliffs ¡­ that was the punishment Chen Rulan had proclaimed when he found Pengfei standing over Hongyu.  Five weeks now.

    --I didn¡¯t know the elders took cursing so seriously.--

    The ¡®cliffs¡¯ were still a mystery to Pengfei.  His friends were already three weeks into their own two-month sentence.

    --Wonder if I¡¯ll be able to see Neng and the others.--

    For better or worse, there was no danger of being locked up with Hongyu.  The other disciple hadn¡¯t received any admonishment at all.  Perhaps because Chen Rulan had walked in the dormitory just in time to see Pengfei standing over and slapping the other boy.  If you just went by that, and completely ignored Pengfei¡¯s battered face, you could be forgiven for mistaking who the real aggressor was.

    --Maybe Neng was right.  Maybe the elders know about my other fights and want to teach me a lesson¡­ whatever.  It was worth it.--

    He had accomplished his goal.  By almost any measure, he had lost the fight with Hongyu but no one could deny that he had made an impression.

    --Senior brother will think twice before he screws with me again.  That¡¯s worth five weeks.--

    ******************************************************************************

    In many ways Chen Ji was just like all the other elders of Kunlun.  Grey hair and beard, an air of wisdom, perhaps an edge that could belie a martial mastery.

    Visibly, he was set apart by his height.  Shorter than the rest of the Chen generation and most of the Jin as well.  Pengfei was already a head taller than the man, looking clear over the elder as he led the way down a rocky path.

    But what really made Chen Ji stand out was his effusive kindness.  One might expect the head of the Discipline Hall to be stern and overbearing but Pengfei saw no trace of such things in the small man¡¯s demeanor.

    Like all the other groups within Kunlun, the Discipline Hall was a shadow of its former self.  In a great sect like Shaolin or Wudang, Chen Ji would have led a staff of dozens to oversee hundreds of disciples, levying punishments against internal and external parties alike.  But there could not be much work for the elder considering the greatly reduced population of the current Kunlun sect.

    --Maybe he¡¯s just happy to have something to do?--

    Pengfei¡¯s attention drifted in and out as the elder spoke of the Discipline Hall¡¯s¡­ accommodations.

    ¡°-are really quite beautiful.  The cells, though they¡¯re not really cells, have some of the best views in the region, although I¡¯m afraid it can be a little cold.  But it shouldn¡¯t be a problem for a strong young disciple such as -¡±

    Pengfei had gotten the gist of the situation within five minutes of meeting Elder Chen Ji.  The little man had fetched him from the Medicine Hall first thing in the morning, to escort Pengfei to his temporary home.  Cells cut into a nearby cliffside, reserved for isolation training.  Or in occasional cases like this, punishment.

    The journey from the sect¡¯s main compound was not long.  Perhaps half an hour in the early morning darkrness.  It was along a path Pengfei had never taken before, so he could only follow the elder and try not to lose his footing.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.

    Suddenly, the small man stopped in his tracks, mid-sentence, to announce, ¡°Here we are!¡±

    Pengfei nearly walked over the man but caught himself at the last moment.  He looked about, confused.

    ¡°But Elder, I don¡¯t see anything.¡±

    Chen Ji chuckled and ushered Pengfei around him on the path.  The disciple took a step forward on the rocky ground then jerked back with a jolt of fear, finding himself at the very edge of a sheer cliff face.

    ¡°Shit!¡±

    Pengfei peered over the precipice.  It was an enormous drop, a full li maybe.  A deadly fall ten times over.

    ¡°Elder, where are the cells?¡± Pengfei asked nervously

    Chen Ji laughed boisterously, ¡°Haha, don¡¯t worry boy.  They¡¯re still down there.¡±

    ¡°No, I mean, how do I get down there, sir?  Where is the path?  Or are there stairs?  A ladder?¡±  Pengfei stepped back from the ledge and turned to find the elder retrieving a weathered and frayed rope from behind a nearby rock.  He looped one end of it around a boulder a few times, did not bother with any knots, and held the other end out to Pengfei.

    ¡°What¡¯s that rope for, sir?¡±

    Chen Ji looked at the pathetic piece of cordage and said candidly, ¡°For the climb down.  Well, to be honest, it is mostly just to make you feel better.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not working, elder.¡±

    ¡°I understand.  Start climbing.¡±

    Pengfei reluctantly tied the free end of the rope around his waist and stepped up to the edge of the cliff.

    --There is no way this is going to hold me up!--

    Pengfei was sure that the safety line would disintegrate in his hands if he tugged on it too forcefully.  He looked over the side of the cliff and looked for the cell he was supposed to climb down to, could not find it, and turned back to the kindly old man.

    ¡°Elder Chen Ji, I don¡¯t think I can do this.  Please forgive me.¡±

    ¡°Disciple¡­¡±

    ¡°Yes sir?¡±

    ¡°Get the hell out of my sight.¡±  The elder¡¯s eyes, once soft and caring, suddenly glinted like a wolf¡¯s on the hunt.  His teeth even seemed sharper when he sneered at the trembling disciple.  But as eerie as the sudden change in the elder¡¯s personality was, the prospect of a long fall with a sudden stop was even more terrifying.

    ¡°Sorry, elder, I can¡¯t d-  huuhfff!¡°

    A forceful kick from the head of the Discipline Hall sent Pengfei over the edge of the cliff.  He could feel his stomach drop, he swung his arms wildly as if he was a bird trying to take flight but plummeted toward the earth nonetheless.

    Just when Pengfei was managing to put together a scream of terror, the rope around his waist went taut.  The sudden tension sent him toward the rock wall, but instead of bashing his skull against hard stone the disciple encountered more empty air.  A cave, hidden in the cliff.

    The rope was released from its anchor above.  Pengfei¡¯s momentum carried him further into the cave, bouncing and sliding across the rough stone floor.

    ¡°What¡­THE FUCK!¡±

    The volume of the scream that he had not managed to eke out found its way into his curses now.  He stood and inched his way to the cave opening, a large hole in the cliffside the size of ten men standing shoulder to shoulder.  Pengfei fist looked downward to the ground, so far below, and then craned his neck upward.

    He had not fallen far.  Perhaps thirty paces.  Elder Chen Ji, his chipper personality seemingly restored, smiled kindly down at Pengfei.

    ¡°What the hell old man!?¡±

    If the elder could hear the words, he did not acknowledge them.  He shouted something down to the disciple but his words were similarly lost in the wind.

    Chen Ji¡¯s face disappeared and Pengfei nervously stepped back from the ledge.

    He made a quick survey of his current living arrangements.  From the opening in the cliff, the cave widened greatly.  It was perhaps the size of his dormitory building but with higher ceilings.

    A person could easily swing a sword overhead here.

    And indeed, the cave seemed manmade and intended for training.  In the interior, the rough natural rock floor was replaced with the same smooth stones that were used in the sect¡¯s training yard.  There was even a weapons rack with dusty but sound wooden training swords.

    Large urns were filled with the same bland fare that had been at the barn in the valley.  Another was filled with water, a wooden ladle resting on top of the lid.  Bedrolls and blankets were piled in one corner.

    Pengfei¡¯s gaze fell on an old wooden bucket tucked in a corner.  Guessing it¡¯s intended purpose, he let out a groan.

    ¡°Shit.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    The true nature of the punishment revealed itself within a few hours.  Boredom.  Unrelenting, unending boredom.

    Exploring the cave was the work of a few minutes but Pengfei stretched it out to two hours.  He carefully inspected every nook and facet of the rock walls, every crack in the stone floors.  He sorted through the bedrolls, finding the least threadbare and most comfortable option.  Picking the ideal location to place the bedding took another hour.

    Pengfei even overcame his fear and stood in the cave¡¯s opening to take in the view.  It was a clear day and he could see into the distance for dozens of li.  The grey and rocky foothills dropped away to the north and gave way to greenery.  Grassy valleys and even some patches of forest.

    He tried to look right and left out of the cave but could not see any other entrances cut into the rock.  He knew his friends were nearby in similar alcoves but he couldn¡¯t hope to spot them.  They could be ten paces to the side and still be hidden by the ridges in the cliff face.

    It seemed that the month would hold nothing except what little surrounded him now.

    Life in the sect could be routine and monotonous but Pengfei found a new appreciation for it within a day.  His time in the valley had also been more pleasant, even when he had been alone.  Now, he just had a dull stone room and a window out to a world he couldn¡¯t touch.

    The hours passed slowly for him.  He practiced the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.  He even did the calisthenics that he normally dreaded.  Pushups, lunges, frog jumps, and so on.  He would occasionally attempt the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯, but the finer points of the internal energy method still eluded him.

    In theory, a disciple undergoing punishment would spend a significant portion of each day reflecting on their transgressions and a similar amount of time should be spent on contemplating the dao.  But Pengfei felt no guilt at the actions that brought him here and still had no interest in the metaphysical.

    He chose to spend that time sleeping instead.

    ******************************************************************************

    Chen Rulan announced himself at the Sect Leader¡¯s residence and was quickly beckoned inside.  Chen Huanzhong poured two cups of tea and wordlessly held one out to his martial brother.

    Elder Rulan accepted the cup and held it to his lips, pausing to say, ¡°I was making some preparations for next year.¡±

    The sect leader nodded, understanding perfectly. ¡°Do you think there will be any problems?¡±

    ¡°Most of them are ready.¡±

    ¡°And the ones who aren¡¯t?¡±

    ¡°I paid some visits today.  Suggested to some of the disciples that they may want to increase their training.  I don¡¯t think I gave anything away.  But the new boy, Pengfei¡­ he¡¯s in the cliffs now.¡±

    The sect leader considered for a moment, sipping his tea.  Then he asked, ¡°How long is he there for?¡±

    ¡°Five weeks.¡±

    ¡°We could be a bit more direct with him without the other disciples finding anything out.  Then, announce things when he returns from his punishment.¡±

    ¡°I was thinking the same.¡±  Chen Rulan nodded.  ¡°I could see to it, but maybe Chen Weidao should show him some swordsmanship.¡±

    ¡°No, he¡¯s not a practical man.  Weidao would spend a month just teaching him how to hold a sword properly and the child would be in the same place he is now.   Just do what you can in the time you have.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sect leader.¡±

    Elder Rulan drank the last of the tea from his cup, set it down, and turned to leave.  He got as far as the doorway before he paused with one hand reaching out, then turned back to the sect leader.

    ¡°There was one other thing.  Chen Ji took the boy to the cliffs.  On his way back, he saw signs of the Mountain King.¡±

    ¡°The Mountain King¡­it¡¯s been years.¡±

    ¡°Maybe we should just bring the children back from the cliffs early?¡±

    The sect leader considered Rulan¡¯s proposal but eventually shook his head.  ¡°No, he¡¯s never bothered one of us before.¡±

    Master Rulan bowed and moved to leave.  He took a step out into the night but was stopped again, this time by another word from Chen Huanzhong.

    ¡°Brother Rulan, make sure the boys have a way out.  Just in case.¡±

 Chapter 17 - The Cliffs (2)

    Pengfei looked north, out of the opening in his cell.  The world lay below him, grey and brown.  A hint of tan at the very edge.

    --The horizon must be a hundred li away, at least.--

    His eyes went down, to the steep cliff below him, hundreds of paces to the level ground below.

    --Guess I don¡¯t have to worry about getting murdered in the middle of the night.  No one is sneaking up here.--

    He backed away from the edge slowly, not turning his back to the precipice until he was well inside.

    Another day drawn to a close.  A little training to pass the time but¡­

    ¡°Bored, bored BORED!!!!¡±

    No pleasure to be had in bland food, the quiet vista, or silent stone walls.  The only indulgence left to him was sleep.

    The first night of his punishment, Pengfei moved the bedroll to the back of the cave as far as possible.  He even considered tying himself to something with the length of rope Chen Ji had used to ¡®lower¡¯ him into the cell.  He had never been one to sleepwalk nor toss-and-turn, but he couldn¡¯t help imagining himself rolling over the ledge as he slumbered.

    But against his own expectations, he fell asleep easily, stayed asleep, and always woke in the same position.  Well away from danger.  By the third day, he was able to lay down in the middle of the day after a long practice session and doze away the afternoon.

    Pengfei lay down now, another early evening.  Half asleep when something roused him.

    There was a sound and a large shape was blocking the remaining light in the mouth of the cave.  Pengfei jumped to his feet and instinctively backed away from whatever it was, but quickly encountered a stone wall.  The details were obscured but he could make out four legs and large curved horns.  Then, the creature just¡­ walked away.  Disappeared from the cave.

    --What the hell was that?--

    Pengfei remained frozen in a stunned silence, looking for any flicker of motion that might suggest the creature¡¯s return.  After a few minutes seeing nothing, he cautiously looked around to make sure no other creatures had snuck in while he slept.  He found himself truly alone.

    Pengfei crept towards the opening, grabbing a wooden practice sword as he passed the weapons rack.  He paused a few strides from the ledge and strained his ears but heard nothing.  He slowly slid along the wall, closer and closer to the ledge, straining to see around the rock and out into the afternoon sun.

    He slowly extended his head out of the cave¡­

    And found himself face to face with a great horned beast, munching lazily on some small clump of vegetation.

    Pengfei froze.  The animal seemed aware of him; it was looking him in the face, meeting his gaze with its own strange rectangular pupils.  But it made no movements other than its calm and rhythmic chewing.

    --A mountain goat?--

    This particular goat was as large as Pengfei and impossibly perched on the cliff face.  Its immense horns circled around from the animal¡¯s forehead until they almost touched the dark brown coat of fur on its back.

    A bleating nearby drew Pengfei¡¯s attention.  He turned his head slowly, not wanting to startle the massive creature in front of him.  More of the mountain goats were standing on the rock wall below him and still more on the other side of his ledge.  None were as large as the great beast directly next to Pengfei.

    With the goats present to lend a sense of perspective, the cliff no longer appeared to be the sheer vertical wall he had first thought it was.  There was indeed some angle to it, though it was so slight one could be forgiven for missing it.  Regardless, it was enough for the goats to find purchase with their sharp hooves.

    ¡°How do you do that?  Did you climb down from the cliff above, or up from the ground below?¡±  Pengfei asked the great Ibex in front of him.  The patriarch of the herd took a step and hopped downward to some miniscule outcropping underneath the cell¡¯s opening.  Pengfei laid on his belly, reached down his hand, and ran his fingers along the knobby horns curving back out of the beast¡¯s head.

    He observed the mountain goats for a long while as they climbed and jumped along the cliffs.  He could soon discern the small indentations the goats might stand on but doubted whether a human could replicate the feat.

    The animals wandered off along the mountainside but Pengfei saw them occasionally over the next few days.  They seemed to roam the area regularly.  He would peer out over the ledge in between forms of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.  He would meditate near the overlook as he attempted the neigong of the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯.  And when he chewed his dry food he would look for them.

    So Chen Rulan found him on the fifth day of his punishment.  The old Taoist master suddenly landed on a small foothold a few paces away, standing against the cliff wall, gracefully balanced on a miniscule piece of rock.  Just like one of the goats might do. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.

    He took the disciple by surprise and sent Pengfei stumbling backward, dropping a tasteless grain ball.

    With the way clear, Chen Rulan made one short hop to the cave¡¯s entrance.  He looked at Pengfei expectantly.

    ¡°Oh¡­ uh, this disciple greets Elder Chen Rulan.¡±

    ¡°Yes, there we are.¡±  The old Taoist gave a curt nod and took a bag from his shoulder, handing it to the boy.  ¡°Here.  Some of your belongings.  Changes of clothes, and so on.¡±

    The elder surveyed the cave as Pengfei slowly came to grips with the man¡¯s abrupt appearance.

    ¡°Elder, how did you get down here?¡±  Pengfei stuck his head out of the cave to look upward for some sign of rope, or perhaps a ladder.  ¡°Did you climb down the cliff!?¡±

    The elder waved off Pengfei¡¯s question and looked around the cave.

    --What does he want?--

    Chen Rulan walked deeper into the cell.  He examined the weapons rack and the swords resting on it, shuffled his feet across the smooth stones of the training area to check for cracks, and even inspected the stores of food and water.

    ¡°How have you been keeping yourself busy?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve been practicing my martial arts a bit.¡±  Pengfei said hesitantly, then rushed to add, ¡°And of course I¡¯ve also been reflecting on my mistakes sir, contemplating the Dao ¨C ¡°

    Rulan waved shook his head vigorously at the canned response from the disciple.  ¡°No, no, nevermind with that bit.¡±

    ¡°Sir?¡±

    ¡°Just¡­ come and show me your progress with the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.¡±

    Confused but obedient, the disciple walked over and stood in the middle of the cavernous room.  Pengfei gave a quick bow to his elder, then began the.  His body glided through the movements fairly easily with only the occasional minor hiccup or tremble under the older man¡¯s watchful gaze.

    But soon Pengfei forgot anyone else was there. He breathed out with every blow, imagining his fist and foot striking some faceless opponent.  His recent experiences had given his envisioned opponents a tinge of realism.  Pengfei thought he could feel an adversary¡¯s flesh beneath his knuckles with each blow.

    The elder held up a hand to stop the forms and walked to Pengfei.  He held up his palm and demanded the disciple strike it.

    The first probing blow was not satisfactory.

    ¡°A real punch!  Come on now!¡±

    The next several strikes were thrown with more vigor.  The elder held up his other palm to receive a different attack, then both, ordering Pengfei to punch, kick, elbow, and knee from various stances.

    The burly man relaxed his arms and sighed.  He moved to Pengfei and squeezed the disciple¡¯s shoulders and arms, prodded the muscles of his chest and back.

    ¡°How is your neigong training going?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m still trying to feel the qi in my dantian, Elder.¡±

    ¡°So not even third rate yet¡­¡±

    ¡°Sir?¡±

    Chen Rulan took a step back, appraised the disciple¡¯s confusion.  Deeming it genuine, the elder explained.  ¡°A rough way to rank martial artists.  Third, Second, First Rate, Peak, Transcendent, and so on.  It¡¯s fairly arbitrary, but standards for the lower levels are mostly agreed upon.  When you can sense your internal energy, you¡¯ll be a Third Rate.¡±

    --Third Rate¡­ that feels about right.--

    The elder interrupted Pengfei¡¯s self-deprecating thoughts.  ¡°If you can¡¯t even use qi, I don¡¯t  suppose anyone has taught you any qinggong¡­  And, you still haven¡¯t started learning the sword, not to mention your general lack of fitness¡­¡±

    Chen Rulan seemed lost in thought.  He ignored the disciple in front of him and tapped his chin pensively for several moments, weighing unspoken factors for an unknown purpose.  Then he glanced up and decided to enlighten Pengfei as to the inner workings of his mind.

    ¡°Pengfei, you¡¯re aware that our isolation is only temporary, yes?  You know Kunlun will return to the Central Plains soon?¡±

    ¡°Yes, elder.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ll hear more about this later, but the Sect Leader and the Elders feel that the Jin disciples are not prepared.  Training is going to become much more rigorous soon and I¡¯m afraid you¡¯re not ready for it.¡±

    ¡°I thought I was catching up to the others.  I did alright against Hongyu and ¨C¡°

    ¡°No.  I¡¯ve seen you in the training grounds.  Regardless of winning or losing fights, you¡¯re still far behind the other disciples.  As the training becomes more difficult that will only become more apparent.¡±

    Pengfei deflated.  His recent performance against Hongyu and Daoping had given him a sliver of hope that the next several years would not be constant harassment and torture at the hands of more capable disciples.  He thought he had done enough to convince any would-be adversaries that he was not an easy target.

    --If he¡¯s right, and the gap widens again¡­no, I¡¯m not going back to that.--

    ¡°Is there something I can do, Elder?¡±

    Chen Rulan nodded his head, ¡°Normally, during a punishment like this you would spend your days in isolated reflection¡­but I think it best we use this time to make up for some of your shortcomings.  We can¡¯t fix them all so we¡¯ll have to focus on one or two.¡±

    ¡°Thank you for your guidance, elder.¡±

    ¡°I need to return for evening training now.  Meet me on top of the cliff at dawn tomorrow to begin.¡±

    ¡°Yes sir.¡±

    Chen Rulan gave a nod, walked to the edge of the cave.

    --Oh shit!--

    With a sudden realization, Pengfei followed after the elder.

    ¡°Excuse me, Elder, but how do I get up to the top of the cliff?¡±

    Chen Rulan didn¡¯t even slow his walk, he just spoke as if it was obvious.  ¡°You climb up, of course.¡±

    ¡°No, but sir, it¡¯s too high up.¡±

    The older man reached the edge of the cave and bounded up to an outcropping without even a pause or a glance back at the disciple.  Pengfei called after him.

    ¡°Sir?¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°These old bastards are trying to kill me!¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Jin Neng thrust his practice weapon along the paths and arcs set out in the ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯.  Sweat dripped off his brow and went flying from his arms with every swing and stroke.

    The isolation of the cliffs had been a hardship at first.  It was only natural to miss what meager comforts that the main compound of the sect provided.  He longed for hot food and an open sky.  But he had quickly noticed the advantages of the seclusion.

    After stagnating for more than a year, Neng had begun advancing in the straight sword once again.  Without the distractions of academics, prayers, meals, and the intrusion of other disciples, he had been able to swing his sword all day.   Every day.  For nearly a month.

    It was not a long time in the grand scheme of things but it was enough to take him from one level to the next.

    He smiled at the thought of returning to the main compound and testing his progress against the sparring partners there.  He wondered if anyone would be a match for him when he returned in another month¡¯s time.

    The night sky was a black void held back by the light of a single lamp.  His body and sword were long shadows dancing across the walls.  The froze in place as a sound, barely audible, distracted the disciple.

    ¡°What was that?¡±

    Normally, all sound was lost in the winds blowing along the cliff face.  But it came again.  A scream, a howl?  Barely audible.

    Neng extinguished his lamp and let his eyes adjust to the darkness, standing at the edge of his cell and looking out into the night.  After a few moments he could make out the stars and the shape of the cliff surrounding him.

    He searched the shadows for the source of the sounds but saw nothing.  It came again, from somewhere to the east but far out of sight.  Neng thought it sounds like something dying.

 Chapter 18 - The Cliffs (3)

    --Fuck, fuck, fuck¡­ don¡¯t make me do this¡­--

    Pengfei had been awake for hours.  He alternated between panicking and planning but there was not much that could be done.  He had rigged up a safety line with the old rope he had used on his ¡®descent¡¯ but there was no suitable anchor for it.  He tried making one using the weapons rack and several of the heavy urns containing the foodstuffs.

    He evaluated his handywork.

    ¡°¡­ There¡¯s no way this will work.¡±

    He sat cross-legged at the cave entrance and looked up the cliff.  The sky was still a dark grey but lightening every minute as dawn approached.  Each day he had spent in the cell made the cliff face less intimidating, in theory at least.  It didn¡¯t seem as harshly vertical as when he had first looked over the ledge.  Getting back up to the path above could be done with a half climb, half scramble.  But the stakes were still far too high for Pengfei¡¯s liking.

    He waited anxiously at the ledge, dreading what he would have to do.

    The stars had all faded as the dim light of morning intruded on the sky.  The moon was setting in the west.

    Pengfei turned away from the sky and paced nervously.  He sought a distraction.

    The bag that Chen Rulan had delivered yesterday was Pengfei¡¯s, brought straight from the dormitory.  It contained not only his clothes and small personal effects, but also the books he had borrowed from the sect¡¯s library.  He set aside the martial arts manuals to reach for ¡®The Nine Chapter of the Mathematical Arts¡¯.

    He leafed through the pages, not reading deeply.  The third chapter sparked a bit of interest.  Arithmetic sums.  A memory from his tutor back in Sichuan, not from this book, but similar material.  He stared at the page, not taking in its contents, as he remembered.

    ¡°The sum of the whole numbers, a string of arbitrary length, the average of first and last terms, multiplied by the length of the string¡­¡±

    It was a formula his tutor had taught him.  First, Pengfei was forced to find the sum of one to a hundred, by hand.  Then, his teacher had taught him the short cut.  The lesson had made an impression.  Pengfei still puzzled over it from time to time.

    ¡°But what if the sum of the first and last terms is not divisible by two?  Oh¡­ but the when the average is odd, the length of the string is even¡­ cool.¡±

    ¡°Yes, fascinating.¡±

    ¡°Oh shit!¡±  Pengfei flinched away from the voice over his shoulder, looked up to see Chen Rulan standing above him.  ¡°Elder, I¡¯m sorry!  I lost track of time.¡±

    The man grunted, nodded for the disciple to follow.  The master¡¯s steps were loud enough to make Pengfei wonder why he hadn¡¯t heard the man approach in the first place.  When they reached the cave entrance, Chen Rulan looked at Pengfei expectantly.  The boy gazed up the daunting rock face.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Elder Rulan, I can¡¯t do it.  Isn¡¯t there a ladder you can lower down to me?¡±  Pengfei repeated the same question he had asked Chen Ji on arrival at the cliffs and unfortunately received the same answer.

    ¡°Of course not.  Now get going.¡±

    Another look up the cliff¡­.and down it.  ¡°I¡¯m sorry sir.¡±

    The elder gave an exasperated sigh.   ¡°Ugh¡­ no disciple has ever died falling from the cliffs.  Even if you fell, I would catch you.  Now take the ridiculous rope off your waist and get moving.¡±

    Pengfei was unmoved by the elder¡¯s reassurance.  He said nothing.  Grasping for any argument to avoid the climb.  He pawed nervously at his tattered safety line.

    The pause quickly exhausted Chen Rulan¡¯s patience.  He left the sword in its sheath on his hip and instead pulled a small knife from the folds of his robe to roughly cut the rope from around Pengfei¡¯s waist.  Before the disciple could protest, Rulan had picked him up by the back of his robes like how one might pick up a pup by the scruff of its neck.

    ¡°Whoa, what are you doing!?¡±

    An instant later there was empty air beneath the boy¡¯s feet.  The elder had picked him up with a single strong arm, swung him outside the cave, and held him to the cliff face.  Pengfei¡¯s flailing arms and legs instinctively reached out for purchase on the rock and as soon as he seemed to find a grip, Chen Rulan let go of his robes.

    ¡°Pull me back in!  Please!¡±

    Chen Rulan ignored the cries and instead smacked Pengfei¡¯s backside with his scabbard.

    ¡°What would you do if this was an emergency?  Now, quit making a fuss and get moving.¡±

    The two went back and forth for several minutes but the elder remained steadfast, forcing Pengfei to gradually begin to climb upward.  The progress was slow and halting at first with the disciple constantly looking below or nervously wiping one sweaty palm at a time.

    --Fucking¡­high!--

    The thoughts raced nonsensically through his mind as he climbed up, one hand over the other.Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    ¡°Keep your weight up against the wall.  Put your manhood right on the rock.¡±  Chen Rulan instructed from the side.  He had bounded to a position near Pengfei as the disciple finally made his way above the cave entrance.  The master stood effortlessly on some small protuberance and clasped his sword behind his back, not even needing to use his hands to climb.

    Despite the snail¡¯s pace, time seemed to race in a frenzied blur for Pengfei and soon the climb was done.  He pushed himself up with his feet and scrambled his body up over the ledge, collapsing on the footpath above the caves.  He laid on his back panting and shaking with anxiety.

    Chen Rulan hopped up to the ledge and stood over Pengfei.

    ¡°It¡¯ll get easier.¡±

    That was as far as the elder¡¯s sympathy extended.  He promptly pulled the disciple to his feet and pointed down the trail leading away from the sect.

    ¡°If you follow this path you will eventually come to a stream.  Run down and back, try to return before lunchtime.  I¡¯ll meet you back here then.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei stumbled to the ground on the bank of the small mountain stream.  He cupped his hands in the little river and brought some of the icy cool water to his lips, then looked back up the path.

    --It¡¯ll take me ages to get back up.--

    It had already been more than an hour since he set out and the trip back uphill would undoubtedly take longer.  Pengfei cursed under his breath at the pace he would have to strive for.

    --It¡¯s farther than the usual morning runs and three times as steep!--

    Pushing the unhelpful observations to the side, he took a deep breath and set out.  The trip down the path had been slow, long, and treacherous.  He had constantly needed to catch himself from sliding or running out of control on the steep grades.

    But unreasonable velocities were no longer a problem.  The same declines he had sped down so dangerously were now crawling slogs against gravity.  Places where he had needed to hang by his fingertips and drop down now required him to climb, just like the cliff face earlier in the morning.

    Even with Pengfei jogging on the flatter sections, the ascent took twice as long as the way down.  He was sweating profusely and stumbling with fatigue by the time Chen Rulan came into view over a rise.  The disciple slowed to a walk and bent over to brace himself on his knees as he reached the elder.

    When the boy¡¯s breathing returned to a normal cadence, Chen Rulan brought forward some cloth-covered dishes.  He revealed a lunch of meat and vegetables.

    ¡°I can¡¯t.¡±  Pengfei protested.  ¡°My guts feel like they¡¯re on fire.¡±  He held his hand to his stomach at what was becoming a frequent complaint.  Rigorous exercise had been playing havoc with him recently, always felt as a burning in his belly.

    ¡°Eat.  You¡¯ll need the energy.¡±

    Pengfei reluctantly took proffered chopsticks and silently began eating.

    The fresh food was a welcome change from the rations he had been surviving on the last several days.  Once he began, Pengfei consumed the meal more enthusiastically, taking long sips from a water skin in between bites.  He laid back on the ground after finishing and closed his eyes against the sun.

    ¡°Thank you for the food elder.¡±

    A few minutes passed where Chen Rulan allowed Pengfei to rest and relax.  The disciple laid on the ground in his damp robes and tiredly hummed a tune he had picked up from Pema.

    Chen Rulan stood up from his rock.  ¡°All right, that¡¯s enough lazing around.¡± He motioned for Pengfei to stand as well.

    Pengfei stripped off his shirt and began performing the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ at Chen Rulan¡¯s command.  The sweat, which had only just stopped, began pouring down his body almost immediately.

    The basic fist art of the Kunlun Sect was contained in three forms, each with several distinct sections.  While Pengfei had learned the first, he was still working through the sections of the second and had not even begun to learn the third.

    But Chen Rulan seemed unconcerned with Pengfei¡¯s understanding of the choreographed movements.

    ¡°The forms are just a reminder of the techniques.  The techniques must come first.¡±

    So, after a cursory review of the first form, Chen Rulan focused his instruction on the basic stances and footwork of the Heaven Shaking Fist.

    Pengfei¡¯s tired legs quaked and quivered with each step and every second of stance practice.  He was tripping and collapsing after an hour of what would normally be a fairly relaxed training session.

    After Pengfei stumbled to the ground once again, Elder Rulan called a halt to the exercise.  He brought out more food and commanded Pengfei to eat again.

    ¡°Elder, thank you, but I¡¯m still full from lunch.¡±

    ¡°If you train more you need to eat more.¡±

    The elder would not be dissuaded and so Pengfei ate slowly.  His body felt loose and weak.  All his limbs were wet noodles, still fatigued from the exercise earlier in the day.

    ¡°Can¡¯t you teach me some qinggong?  Something to make going up and down the mountain a little bit easier?¡±

    ¡°I am.¡±

    ¡°You are?¡±

    ¡°A strong body is a good basis for all martial arts.  So, making you run the mountain is the first step to teach you everything.  Including qinggong.¡±

    ¡°Sir, I think I¡¯m ready for the next step.¡±

    ¡°You are?¡±

    ¡°I am.¡±

    ¡°Excellent.  Then I¡¯ll teach you the appropriate channels to circulate your qi.¡±

    ¡°Shit.¡±  Pengfei still could not even feel the qi inside his body, let alone cultivate or circulate it.  He was beginning to notice the limitation more and more as he slowly advanced in his martial arts.  First, the advanced techniques of the Heaven Shaking Fist, and now the sect¡¯s qinggong techniques were behind a barrier that couldn¡¯t be overcome without qi.

    Chen Rulan seemed to know the disciple¡¯s difficulties.  He chuckled to himself at the boy¡¯s sudden reticence.  The training concluded, another meal eaten, the elder nodded toward the cliff¡¯s edge.  Time to return to the punishment cells were just below.

    Pengfei delayed, ¡°When I learn qinggong, will I be able to hop up and down a cliff like you do?¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t need to learn how to clomp around like a billy goat.  One of the other elders will teach you ¡®Three Twists of the Dragon in the Clouds¡¯ and you¡¯ll be leaping through the air waving a sword around with the rest of the disciples.  Now, down you go.¡±

    The pair walked to the precipice.  Pengfei looked over the edge and shuddered.

    ¡°Can I at least have a rope for the climb down?¡±

    ¡°No.¡±

    Pengfei knew he needed to return to his cell but thought it would be a little later in the day.  It was still just mid-afternoon.  But the elder seemed impatient to get back to the main compound.

    ¡°Get climbing.  I¡¯ll keep an eye on you from below.¡±   Chen Rulan bounded down the cliff, hopping between two or three little nooks before landing in the large cave opening.   Pengfei looked at the rock between them and tried to plan his route.

    Climbing down was immeasurably more difficult than climbing up.  He was able to get started on his own, slowly sliding over the edge and onto a first foothold, but after that it was extremely slow going.  The view was blocked by Pengfei¡¯s own body.  He had to search nervously with his feet for each new perch on the descent with increasingly frustrated advice shouted from Elder Rulan below.

    Pengfei reached out when he was finally even with the cave and Chen Rulan dragged him in by the arm.

    ¡°Make sure you eat again.  You¡¯ll need the energy for tomorrow.¡±

    ¡°Please, let me pretend tomorrow doesn¡¯t exist for a little while.¡±  Pengfei complained, but the elder was already gone, back up the mountain.  He took a few steps and laid down on the cold stone floor, not even bothering to go as far as his bedroll, then fell instantly asleep.

    ******************************************************************************

    The sun had set when Pengfei woke up again.  He did not bother to light a lamp; he found the urn full of grain balls by what little light there was and promptly washed the taste from his mouth with a ladle of water.

    He sat for several minutes on the ledge, even letting his legs hang over the side.  He still dreaded the next climb he would have to make but his recent experiences scaling the mountain face had at least relieved this much fear.

    The moon was rising in the east.  He observed its slow arc through the sky and remembered the section of the Zhoubi Suanjing he had read that morning.  While man toiled on the earth below there were still mysteries in the heavens above.

    Pengfei considered the strange movements of the moon; how the length of its circuits varied, how it rose and set at constantly staggering times, sometimes disappearing altogether.  The sun was no less confusing with its variable noon-time shadows.

    He shrugged off the oddities of nature for now, stood, and moved slowly through the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.

    In the solitude of the cell, in the darkness, there were no killers or bullies.  He punched the air, not opponents.  The practice was divorced from need.  He didn¡¯t need to fight for his life, or his pride.  Not even for the expectations of the sect¡¯s elders.  He punched nothingness.  The only metric for failure or success was the martial art itself, how it flowed from his hands in its purity.

    His arms and legs flicked through the air as the stars shone.

 Chapter 19 - The Cliffs (4)

    ¡°Fuck this!¡± Pengfei yelled to the sky. He ran up the steep mountain path once again, complaining to the heavens. He reached out and felt a twinge in his forearm. A step up and he felt an ache in his hamstring. When he jogged over open ground, his shins screamed in pain.

    Four days of training under Chen Rulan and Pengfei¡¯s performance had suffered as much as his body. The short climb up from the cave had improved as he grew more comfortable scaling the rock but that was only a small portion of each day. The long hike down and up the mountain path took longer and longer each time as his aching body slowed him down. Each day the pain and soreness increased. Every new morning there was a new body part to add to the list.

    Today it was his backside.

    ¡°My ass hasn¡¯t been this sore since I learned to sit a saddle.¡± Pengfei groaned to Elder Rulan as he crested the hill.

    ¡°Haha, good. Power comes from the buttocks!¡±

    The man laughed. Already one of the kinder elders, Chen Rulan had only become more affable as the days of Pengfei¡¯s training passed. He gave no rebukes at the disciple¡¯s abysmal pace but instead pushed forward a bowl of food.

    Pengfei grimaced as he ate. Once again the exercise had triggered a fire in his belly. But like pouring water on flames, the meal seemed to alleviate the symptoms.

    ¡°Elder, do you think you can ask the Master Chen Lei for some medicine? My stomach is still bothering me.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll mention it to him tonight. Do you need anything else?¡±

    ¡°Maybe another blanket? The nights are getting colder.¡±

    Chen Rulan nodded. ¡°Autumn is starting in earnest now. I¡¯ll bring some for you and the others tomorrow.¡±

    Pengfei recalled his friends in the other cliffside punishment cells. Shutian, Xiaotong, and Neng. They were already a month into their own isolation and did not have the elder¡¯s training sessions to break up the monotony of it.

    --Actually, maybe they¡¯re better off than I am? I bet they don¡¯t have sore ass cheeks.--

    He placed his chopsticks gingerly to the side and pushed his bowl forward as he finished his meal. Chen Rulan retreated a few paces and brought forth a wooden sword.

    ¡°You can¡¯t put off the jian any longer,¡± the elder said, holding the weapon out to Pengfei.

    ¡°I haven¡¯t been putting it off¡­ just seemed there was always something else to do.¡±

    ¡°Hmmpf.¡±

    Pengfei took up the sword, holding it awkwardly in his right hand. The jian, the canonical weapon of Kunlun, like so many other sects in the Wulin. Mount Hua, Wudang, Southern Edge, Emei, the Nangong Family¡­ they all used the double-edged straight sword. And for the Taoists, it wasn¡¯t just a weapon, it was also a spiritual implement for all manner of ritual.

    ¡°Chen Weidao would be a better instructor for the sword, but we¡¯ll do what we can. Keep the grip a bit looser. Keep the tip up. Stance more bladed, bend the knees¡­ good.¡±

    The disciple assumed the posture, bounced in it slightly, feeling the balance.

    --This feels awful¡­--

    The elder gave Pengfei an overview of the basic cuts. Splitting, drawing, pushing, rising cuts. But after a quick glimpse of the techniques, Chen Rulan chose to focus the day¡¯s practice on the thrust.

    Stomp. Stomp. Stomp.

    The footfalls landed heavily on the ground, each one drawing a wince from Chen Rulan.

    ¡°Enough! You¡¯re not trying to crack the stone beneath your feet!¡±

    ¡°You said to lunge with power, sir.¡±

    ¡°Lunge forward. You want your weight, your sword, moving forward. Not up and down. You¡¯re raising your knee too high, like you¡¯re trying to crack a nut with your boot. It should glide just over the earth.¡±

    The elder demonstrated again, and his foot indeed stayed close to the earth, skimming along the rock with barely a hint of daylight in between. But the end of his thrust was punctuated by a powerful clap of boot on dirt that Pengfei couldn¡¯t understand.

    ¡°Now you try.¡± The elder reached a hand for his scabbard and made to draw his sword.

    Only it wasn¡¯t a sword.

    Pengfei thought it was a trick of shadow at first. A dark black blade seemed to be attached to the elder¡¯s hilt. The Taoist master swung the black iron once, then took a stance with the weapon held before him.

    ¡°Elder, what is that thing?¡±

    Chen Rulan held it up his arm so Pengfei could examine the thing. A length of plain iron with a square cross section, attached to a sword¡¯s handle. ¡°It¡¯s a swordbreaker. A bar mace. I never had the grace for a proper jian. A simple iron rod suits a simple man like me.¡±

    Pengfei inspected the strange weapon for a moment, but when the elder took his stance again and the boy mirrored him hurriedly. A tentative thrust, and the wooden jian was batted away easily by the swordbreaker.

    ¡°The power comes from the back leg. Again!¡±

    Pengfei tried again and again, never quite meeting his instructor¡¯s expectations.

    ¡°You¡¯ll just have to practice on your own, in your cell. Three hundred thrusts before tomorrow¡­no, make it five hundred.¡±If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    ******************************************************************************

    The next day, it was the short chopping cuts with the flick of the wrist that strained his grip on the wooden sword¡¯s hilt. Then the awkward drawing cut meant to slice the inside of an opponent¡¯s wrist.

    Each new technique felt strange and awkward to the would-be swordsman. Even after completing the repetitions in the solitude of his cell, he could not find any dexterity or comfort in the movements.

    --But it¡¯s still early.--

    He told himself with the first strike, the end of the first day, the first week. But even knowing intellectually that he could not hope to master such subtle movements in such a short span of time, his mind rebelled and began looking for reasons.

    --The stance? Using a wooden sword instead of a real one? Practicing alone instead of with a partner?--

    But he had to discount each excuse as time pressed on. And soon only the truth was left.

    Pengfei contemplated the problem on another lonely run up the mountain path. Chen Rulan waited at the top, near the entrance of the punishment cells, ready to instruct on the next lesson of swordsmanship. But Pengfei dragged his feet, stretching the morning exercise to avoid the practice. Voicing to himself what he had come to realize in the few short days of training.

    --I just don¡¯t like the sword.--

    He heaved a sigh and paused his run for a short rest. He was at a point on the path where it it wrapped around the eastern side of the cliff. Pengfei could look up and see several of the other punishment cells carved into the rock, higher up above him, the mouths of their openings filled with shadow. He tried to spot a sign of his friends, imprisoned inside, but couldn¡¯t tell which caves were occupied and which were empty.

    He kicked at pebbles as sweat dripped from his brow.

    --It¡¯s¡­ just so boring. Why does everyone have such a hard-on for the jian? Pfft.--

    Pengfei threw a few punches. In recent days he had found himself neglecting the assigned weapon practice in favor of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.

    The feeling in his fists, forearms, and shoulders as he twisted and hooked each punch¡­ He couldn¡¯t quite put his finger on it. Certainly, the fist techniques were more useful inside the sect where none of the disciples carried steel. But in the back of his mind, he knew that the wider world was filled with sharp edges waiting to bite into flesh. He had seen it first hand. Still, he couldn¡¯t find any enthusiasm for the jian.

    --It¡¯s just no fun.--

    A deep breath, the front toe slid forward and gripped the earth, his waist turned as it came forward, turning the torso, extending the arm, turning over the hand.

    ¡°Hah!¡± he exhaled forcefully with the punch. A satisfying execution. He bounced on his toes for a moment then looked back to the path before him.

    --I guess I better get moving.--

    He continued on his way and soon came to a more difficult section of the route. One of the many vertical rock walls that made the trip up so arduous. He could sit on the ledge and drop down for the descent but the return required wedging his hands and feet into a thin fissure and shimmying up.

    As he prepared his hands for the abrasive maneuver, something caught his eye.

    --What is that?--

    A nearby cave he had noticed several times before. Not one of the cells carved by man into the cliff face. A natural cave, hidden at the back of a crevasse. Only visible on the way back up the path.

    In front of the familiar opening was a strange, curved, shape, more noticeable against the dark backdrop. It reminded Pengfei of something but he couldn¡¯t place it. He stepped away from the rock wall and walked toward the dark slit in the mountainside, the odd lump in front of it.

    He could tell it was a large animal from several strides away but didn¡¯t recognize it until he saw the corpse in its entirety. One of the great Ibex that roamed the cliffs. This one was just as large as the individual that had invaded Pengfei¡¯s cell more than two weeks ago.

    --Might even be the same one.--

    The circular shape Pengfei had noticed turned out to be one of the beast¡¯s horns, the other pinned awkwardly to the ground.

    The body was mostly intact with only the neck showing any signs of trauma. The head was turned to an unnatural angle and a large puddle of blood was still pooling. No smell, no flies, no carrion birds.

    ¡°Where did you come from?¡±

    The dead mountain goat did not respond so Pengfei surveyed the area.

    ¡°No sign of a herd, and these slopes aren¡¯t very treacherous. I don¡¯t think you fell.¡±

    The large cave mouth was just a few strides away now.

    ¡°Did you come out of there?¡±

    Pengfei took a few hesitant strides toward the opening. The rock twisted away from him, blocked his vision past a half dozen paces.

    After a few minutes letting his eyes adjust, Pengfei stepped inside. The only sounds were the echoes of his own footsteps. Another bend and the entrance was out of sight, only a faint haze of sun indicating its direction. Shivers ran up his spine in the darkness.

    --Maybe this wasn¡¯t such a good idea ¡­ --

    He turned to leave and stepped on something soft. He reached down to feel at his feet and found something wrapped in cloth. Long, heavy. He hesitated a second, snatched the foreign object up, then hurried back towards the light with increasing anxiety.

    Back in the daylight, he put his back to the mountain. Even flat against the stone, he couldn¡¯t help but feel like something would snatch at him from behind.

    He calmed his breathing and looked to the object in his hand. Dark material, wet, and tattered, wrapped around something squishy. He unwrapped the cloth, and found¡­

    ¡°Is this pork?¡±

    His eyes darted back and forth between the pale flesh and the dark material, and as he pulled the objects apart, noticed the red blood on his hands. The recognition of one thing led to the horrifying realization of the other. The shred of cloth was a pant leg, ripped from a set of black robes.

    The lump of meat Pengfei held in his other hand was a human leg, severed below the knee and missing everything below the ankle.

    ¡°Fuck!¡±

    Pengfei dropped both items and ran.

    ******************************************************************************

    Guoyu stepped into the camp, his younger brother at his side. They were both weary. Like everyone else, but bloodier. Tattered clothes and leaking wounds picked up during a desperate escape.

    The others drifted forward, drawn in by the late arrivals, gathered in a loose ring around a hint of light. A cooking fire was hidden there, a cylinder dug in the earth with a ventilation shaft providing the necessary airflow to maintain the flame.

    The orange that flickered up out of the ground was like a glimpse into hell. The Captain¡¯s thin face, lit from below, seemed even fiercer.

    Guoyu saluted, clasping right fist in left palm. At least, he tried. The fist was gone, the stump at the end of his arm was still puffy. The Qingcheng swordsman had made a clean job of it, but the healing was going slow.

    ¡°Where¡¯s Jichao?¡± the Captain asked.

    ¡°He ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Jufeng, stop.¡± Guoyu held out his forearm to silence his brother, then spoke to the Captain. ¡°He¡¯s dead.¡±

    Murmurs from the others, standing at the edge of the light and listening to the report. The Captain took his scabbard and poked at the burning embers in the fire pit.

    ¡°Explain.¡±

    ¡°There was a beast. I don¡¯t know why¡­ maybe we disturbed its lair.¡±

    The Captain looked up from the fire, his cold eyes penetrating.

    ¡°Where¡¯s his body?¡±

    ¡°It ¨C the thing took him. Most of him.¡±

    ¡°Jichao was a First Rate. He would have reached the Peak in time. A treasure for our people. And you¡¯re telling me he was killed by a beast? Carried off like a lamb?¡± The words weren¡¯t angry on the surface. Maybe there was no emotion there. But Guoyu knew behind the cool tone of voice was a scale where his life hung in the balance.

    ¡°It wasn¡¯t like anything I¡¯ve ever heard of. We ¨C it hunted us, tracked us over impossible terrain. I never got a good look at it, but it was enormous. The biggest thing I¡¯ve ever seen.¡±

    ¡°It was a tiger!¡± Jufeng insisted. The voices from the periphery scoffed at the young man.

    ¡°No, it wasn¡¯t a tiger. I don¡¯t know what it was, just¡­ it wasn¡¯t normal.¡±

    The Captain sat silently for long seconds, stoking the subterranean fire. Little motes of the blaze drifted up and caught the wind, swirling away into the night.

    Jufeng fidgeted nervously. Next to him, Guoyu clamped down on his body with all his will. His life as a swordsman was effectively over after his amputation, but he still had the discipline that the training had instilled in him. He met the Captain¡¯s gaze without blinking, waiting for some clue to his fate.

    The thin-faced man sighed tiredly. ¡°We¡¯ll have to hope the beast disposes of the body sufficiently. We don¡¯t have time to recover it, and Kunlun could learn much if they find it.¡±

    Questioning whispers came in from the others. Guoyu gave voice to them. ¡°Sir, are we leaving?¡±

    ¡°Yes.¡± The Captain nodded. ¡°We¡¯ve received word from Sichuan. It¡¯s unlikely anyone else will come to Kunlun before their punishment ends. There¡¯s nothing left to do here. I expect orders to return before winter.¡±

    ¡°But the message ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Has already been delivered. We got the gist of it from the Qingcheng swordsman before he died. That will have to be enough.¡± The Captain stood to address the rest of the unit. They were already listening, but now he spoke to them directly. ¡°Two months. Give me two more months of your best, then we¡¯ll leave this forsaken land behind. You¡¯ll be back in the Central Plains by the new year.¡±

    A cheer went up, a rare explosion of sound from the men who tried so hard to observe from the shadows. The Captain turned back to the fire pit, placed a cooking pot over the opening, and plunged the camp back into darkness. The small crowd dispersed with that.

    Guoyu and Jufeng bowed to the Captain, then made to find a place for the night. No one came to check on the brothers or offer condolences for their lost comrade. It wasn¡¯t that kind of unit.

    ¡°You didn¡¯t tell him about the ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Shhh!¡± Guoyu hissed, silencing his brother. He looked around furtively, then spoke quietly to Jufeng. ¡°Don¡¯t tell anyone about it. We wait a few weeks, then go back for it before we head east.¡±

    ¡°What about that¡­ thing!? It¡¯ll tear us to pieces!¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll figure something out.¡± He reached his one good hand out for his brother¡¯s shoulder. ¡°That Ginseng is your future. We¡¯re not leaving this hell hole without it. And we¡¯re not sharing it with any of these bastards.¡±

    Jufeng nodded, pursing his lips. ¡°Thank you, brother.¡±

 Chapter 20 - Fire Run Wild

    Shutian, Xiaotong, Neng, and Pengfei sat together in a small room of the Sect Leader¡¯s residence.  It had been hours since Chen Rulan had delivered them here and left again with the patriarch.

    ¡°I think they forgot about us.¡±  Shutian complained.  ¡°I didn¡¯t even get to eat lunch before we got rounded up.¡±

    ¡°Why don¡¯t you go stuff your face at the dining hall?  Dinner should be starting soon.  Might be your only chance to get a fresh meal.  Once they find out Pengfei is full of shit, they¡¯ll put us all back in the cliffs.¡±

    ¡°I didn¡¯t make it up, asshole.¡± Pengfei protested to Xiaotong¡¯s remark.

    ¡°Of course not, young master.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m still unclear on why you were on that side of the mountain.  You were in a cliff cell, but Elder Rulan was making you run?¡±

    Neng¡¯s question went unanswered as Chen Ji entered the room.  The small man had returned to his strangely cheerful self since showing his more menacing side to Pengfei a few weeks ago.

    ¡°Come along boys.  We¡¯re going to find somewhere to put you up while we sort all this out.¡±

    The four disciples gave each other questioning glances as they followed the head of the discipline hall out of the building but only Pengfei spoke up.

    ¡°Have the other elders returned, sir?  Did they find anything?¡±

    ¡°The elders are back and everything is fine.  No cause for alarm.  You¡¯ll hear all about it when you rejoin the other disciples.  Until then, we need to find somewhere for you boys to sleep.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean, sir?  Can¡¯t we just go back to our dormitories?¡±

    ¡°Haha¡­no.  You¡¯re all still under punishment.¡±

    The disciples groaned collectively as Chen Ji led on.

    Like his friends, Pengfei looked longingly at the Dining Hall as they passed.  The other Jin disciples were crowding into the building for the evening meal.  Some called out to the four of them or waved but none approached while they were escorted by Elder Chen Ji.

    --I guess we¡¯re still on grain balls and dried meat.  It ¡®d be easier to accept if Elder Rulan hadn¡¯t been bringing me fresh lunch every day¡­ bastard kept reminding me of what I was missing out on¡­ am I being ungrateful?  Probably.--

    They weaved through the familiar buildings of the sect, past the Scripture Hall and training ground, to another group of dormitory buildings.

    ¡°These were supposed to be for the new generation of disciples.  The renovations were never finished, but it should be livable.  Even though you¡¯re back at the main sect, you¡¯re not to leave the building or interact with the other disciples until your punishment is over.¡±

    Chen Ji left them at the door to one of the abandoned living quarters.  Inside, they found bedrolls and the same rations they had been ¡®enjoying¡¯ at the cliffs.  Once they were sure they were alone, Neng continued his questioning.

    ¡°So, start from the beginning.  Why were you out there?¡±

    ¡°I got sent to the cliffs for fighting Hongyu.  After a week, Elder Rulan came by and said training was going to get more difficult soon, that I needed to catch up before then.  So, he¡¯s been making me run the mountain, trying to catch me up on some other stuff.¡±

    ¡°And that¡¯s where you found that ¡­?¡±

    ¡°It was a leg.  And yeah, in a cave off the path.  The cloth looked like the robes those black-clad assholes wear, but I¡¯m not sure.  And there was a dead mountain goat out front.  It was all weird as fuck.¡±

    ¡°Whatever.  At least it got us out of those cells.  Maybe we¡¯ll be able to stay warm at night.¡±  Shutian grumbled then walked off to pick some food out of one of the large urns.  Xiaotong followed his dour friend.

    Pengfei turned back to Neng.  ¡°I feel like they¡¯re not showing the proper amount of concern.¡±  The two picked up their bedrolls, moved them away from the drafty area near the door.  ¡°Have you ever heard of someone called the ¡®Mountain King¡¯?  I thought I heard one of the elders say it when Master Rulan brought us here.¡±

    ¡°Mountain King?  Huhh¡­ I read about a leader of the Green Forest Bandits who called himself the King of the Black Mountains, but that was fifty years ago.¡±

    ¡°Well, probably not him then.¡±

    Neng chuckled and redirected the conversation.  ¡°So, did you kick Hongyu¡¯s ass?¡±

    ¡°He beat me like a stray dog, but I got him with a couple good hits at the end.¡±

    ¡°Feel good?¡±

    ¡°Sooo fucking good.¡±

    They laughed and walked over to the others, looking for their own portions of dinner.

    ******************************************************************************

    If Pengfei had any hopes that leaving the cliffs would provide a reprieve from his grueling training schedule, they were quickly dashed.  Chen Rulan came to find him at the usual time of morning and even insisted on keeping to a similar regimen.  The most notable difference was the inclusion of the three other disciples.

    The boys wondered if it was just a way to keep an eye on them.  Make sure word of Pengfei¡¯s morbid discovery did not leak out before the elders deemed fit.

    Whatever the reasoning, Elder Rulan worked them hard.  He introduced them to a new and even more arduous path along the mountainside.

    In truth, there was no path, just a vague point of the finger downhill.  While the rest of the Jin disciples made their way through the beginning of an ordinary day, Shutian, Xiaotong, Neng, and Pengfei ran and scrambled over wild terrain.

    By the third day of their morning runs, they had picked out a route of their own.  The disciples had stayed together the first couple days but annoyance had gotten to them now.  Shutian was the one who finally said it aloud.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.

    ¡°Screw this.  The elder never said we couldn¡¯t use qinggong.¡±  He bounded up the slope with unnaturally long and easy strides.   Xiaotong sped after him a moment later without a word.

    Pengfei could feel Neng giving him sidelong glances and eventually conceded.

    ¡°Just go.¡±

    ¡°¡­Thanks.  See you at the top!¡±

    Neng burst after the others and quickly disappeared around a large slab of rock.

    ¡°Assholes¡­¡±

    Pengfei cursed his companions but really lamented his own lack of movement techniques.  Of course, the underlying problem was actually his inability to sense and use his qi.  His attempts using the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ cultivation method were still fruitless.  He had been meditating less frequently during his punishment but still tested himself at least once a week, to no avail.

    --At least I can breath a little easier now

    While he couldn¡¯t match his friends¡¯ speed when they used their internal energy, it was not due to a lack of physical stamina.  Boredom was more of an issue than fatigue now.  He glanced around, able to appreciate the stark beauty of the scene since he didn¡¯t have to gasp for every bit of air.

    The four disciples had jogged downhill on the Tibetan side of the mountain, with the lake of Kotra Tso visible on the horizon.  On the ascent, the snowcapped peaks of Mount Liushi and the rest of the Kunlun range towered overhead.

    The looming giants threatened Pengfei with vertigo so he cast his eyes downward again, only to notice something odd.  A line on his forearm he had never seen before.

    ¡°Is that¡­ a muscle?¡±

    He turned his arm over to examine it as he trekked upward.  The veins beneath the skin were more pronounced, the wrist slightly thicker.

    --Nice!--

    The boy marveled at the slight change to his physique and wondered at the cause.

    The answer came to him as he rounded a large boulder.  Neng stood at a vertical rockface, the most direct way up the mountain, trying but failing to get past a first foothold.  It was maybe six or seven times the height of the boys but still nothing compared to the cliff that had been their home until recently.

    Pengfei ran straight to the rock and quickly climbed past his friend.

    ¡°See you at the top!¡±  He called back and received a dismissive snort from Neng.

    They had discovered this climb on the first day of their communal training.  Pengfei had tried to guide his friends up it but only Neng had the patience to stick it out.   The others preferred to work their way up on an easier but longer route.

    Pengfei¡¯s newly calloused palms locked on to minute bumps or slid into tight crevices of rock.  Pulling himself upward was difficult but the burgeoning muscle in his arms and back answered the call.  His toes instinctively found their place and pushed him upward.

    Near the top of the short climb he paused to take a breath while balanced on a particularly secure outcropping.  He hugged the rock to keep his weight over his feet, as Chen Rulan had previously told him.  While his cheek touched the cold stone Pengfei caught sight of Shutian and, further back, Xiaotong.  They had diverted around the climb once again.

    Pengfei was gripped with a sudden competitive urge and darted upward.  The detour Shutian had chosen would add several minutes and Neng didn¡¯t seem to be making any progress on his climb.

    --I can beat them to the top.  I¡¯m gonna beat them!--

    He was up over the ledge a minute later.  The rest of the way was still a treacherous slog uphill

    --But I can run in.--

    He sprinted flat out and put his improved stamina to the test.

    A look over his shoulder to where Shutian¡¯s detour would join the slope.  Still nothing.  Pengfei pumped his legs and felt the already tired thighs begin to burn.  Another look downward and Shutian was there and bounding upward.

    --Just one more rise!--

    The finish line of Pengfei¡¯s secret race was just ahead.  He ran for all his worth, sensing Shutian right behind him.  The fire he had been feeling in his belly with every workout rose to greet him again but he persisted.

    Pengfei crouched and jumped to the top of a large rock, then bounced off it to land on the little plateau where Chen Rulan was waiting.  Barely a second later, Shutian landed next to him.

    ¡°Oh¡­ didn¡¯t realize you were ¡­ behind me.¡±  Pengfei panted and hunched over his knees, then slapped Shutian on the back.

    ¡°Whatever.¡±  Shutian pushed past and reached for the food that the elder had brought for them.

    Pengfei drank from a water skin and grimaced at the burning in his abdomen.

    Chen Rulan didn¡¯t say anything to either disciple.  Instead, he walked a short distance away and looked downhill to check on the progress of the other disciples.

    Pengfei took the opportunity to turn to Shutian and ask quietly, ¡°So¡­ how have you been?¡±  When he was met with a blank stare, he continued.  ¡°Last time I saw you, you were trying to run away from the sect.  I dragged you back against your will and saved your life from hardened killers.  It was a whole thing.  Remember?¡±

    ¡°Doesn¡¯t ring a bell.¡±

    Shutian brushed him off but seemed uncomfortable at the mention of the incident in the valley.  The midnight escape, the chase, the dramatic confrontation when Pengfei had finally caught him.

    ¡°Seriously, though.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m fine.¡±

    ¡°Really?¡±

    ¡°Yes, really!¡±  Shutian sighed at Pengfei¡¯s prodding but elaborated, ¡°Elder Chen Ji came to talk to me a couple times while I was at the cliffs.  He said some things that made a lot of sense.¡±

    ¡°Oh!  Good, glad to hear it.¡±  Pengfei dropped the matter, and let the other disciple continue his meal.  ¡°That old psycho never came to visit me¡­¡±

    ¡°Sounds like you had a good time with Chen Rulan though.¡±  Shutian gave a barely perceptible grin as he stuffed food in his mouth.

    ¡°It was ¨C ¡°

    ¡°He was a lazy shit.¡±  Chen Rulan called over his shoulder.  ¡°Completely disregarded his training the moment I was out of sight.¡±

    ¡°No, sir!  I didn¡¯t, I mean ¨C¡° Pengfei stammered out his lame excuses.  ¡° ¨C well, I suppose I neglected the sword a bit.  I just preferred to practice the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist.¡¯¡±

    ¡°Oh, so you¡¯re not lazy.  Just disobedient.  Haha¡­well, let¡¯s see how fruitful your misspent training time was.¡±

    Xiaontong appeared on the little plateau, followed a few moments later by Neng.  Xiaotong was still panting heavily, but the elder was already rushing them into the next phase of the day¡¯s exercise.

    ¡°Pair up, practice the empty-hand.¡±

    Chen Rulan seemed to genuinely enjoy training disciples.  As the fatigued disciples moved, he called out corrections or affirmations as appropriate.

    Pengfei had felt the man¡¯s enthusiasm for teaching within the first week at the Kunlun sect, and that fervor was evident now in his gruff words.  The tone was harsh, but each comment was meant to improve the recipient.

    The small group allowed Chen Rulan to devote personal attention to each disciple, and the boys still had training partners of the appropriate size and skill level.  The elder¡¯s attention came to rest on Pengfei during his latest round of sparring with Neng.

    ¡°No, keep your distance!  Use your footwork.¡±

    ¡°But I¡¯ve had good luck with fighting in close¡± Pengfei protested, referencing the tactic he had used in his most recent brawls with friends and foes alike.

    ¡°You need to learn new things.  Start with ¡®range¡¯.  You need to know when you¡¯re in your opponent¡¯s range and when he¡¯s in yours.  How big a step do you need to take in order to reach him?¡±

    Pengfei circled around, trying to gauge the distance.  He threw a few probing strikes but they were all short.  Neng didn¡¯t even flinch.  When the boy attacked in return, Pengfei made short hops backward to stay just out of reach.

    ¡°Good¡± Chen Rulan appraised.  ¡°But you can make the steps even smaller.  Stay just barely out of his range.  And if he¡¯s not going to make contact, you don¡¯t need to parry the punch.  Keep your guard tighter.¡±

    Neng generously fed Pengfei several more basic strikes in order for him to feel the distance.  Chen Rulan moved over to watch Shutian and Xiaotong practicing together and similarly coached them on their bare-handed techniques.

    The sun moved on its arc through the sky.  The temperature was comfortable but Pengfei could still feel his skin suffering under the intense rays as the hours passed.

    --I¡¯ll be dark as everyone else soon¡­if all my skin doesn¡¯t peel off.--

    They were practicing just outside the sect¡¯s main compound, so Chen Rulan only needed a few minutes to make his way back for the afternoon training session.  But he left his four special projects with an assignment before he made his way to the rest of the Jin disciples.

    ¡°Pair up.  You, carry him on you back from this rock to that one.  Then switch on the way back.  One hundred laps.¡±

    It took three laps for the elder to disappear completely.  When he did, Shutian and Xiaotong immediately ceased their exercise, sitting in the shade of a large boulder.

    ¡°Alright, hop off.¡±  Pengfei said to Neng, pausing his motion.  Instead, heels kicked at Pengfei¡¯s butt and Neng clicked, like he would a lazy donkey.

    ¡°Yah, boy, yah!¡±

    ¡°Come on, man, I¡¯m tired!¡±

    ¡°Yah!¡±

    ¡°Fuck!¡±

    Neng didn¡¯t rest when it was his turn either, clearly taking the honor system more seriously than the other pair.  He doggedly forced Pengfei through the laps without rest, while Xiaotong and Shutian laughed and jeered from the side.

    --Ten.--

    --Twenty.--

    --Thirty.--

    --Forty-two?  Forty-three?--

    ¡°How many is this?¡±

    ¡°Yah!¡±

    --Mother fucker¡­--

    His breath was still there but the muscles in his legs were shaking, and worse, the fire had begun to rise in his belly again.  Pengfei winced and slowed at the burning sensation.

    --Fifty--

    --Sixty.--

    --Seventy.--

    Night was encroaching.  No more jokes or encouragement.  Neng was struggling visibl.  The fire had spread through Pengfei to his chest and arms.  He poured sweat, and not just from the exercise.

    He was unable to bear it any longer.  Pengfei fell to the ground and writhed in pain.

    The others watched, dumbstruck, as he screamed.

    ¡°IT BURNS!¡±

 Chapter 21 - 3rd Rate

    --IT BURNS!!!--

    Pengfei didn¡¯t lose consciousness.  It would have been a welcome escape from the inferno raging within him.

    He was marginally aware of his friends panicking around him.  Shutian sped back toward the sect while Neng and Xiaotong tried impotently to help.  There was debate about whether to carry Pengfei to the Medicine Hall or not, but in the end both the disciples were too scared to touch him.

    Whether it was a minute or an hour, Pengfei did not know, but Shutian returned with Chen Lei.  The physician grabbed the writhing disciple and shouted questions at him, but they went unanswered.

    A slap across the face brought Pengfei¡¯s attention into focus.

    ¡°Doctor!  Help me ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Shut up!  Cross your legs and circulate your qi!¡±

    ¡°I ca ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Do it!¡±

    The other disciples helped him assume the correct position, forcibly propping him up and crossing his legs. Pengfei squeezed his eyes shut and breathed in raggedly.  He searched for his dantian, searched for the energy that should be there, but could not find it.

    ¡°It¡¯s not there!  I¡¯m on fucking fire!¡±

    ¡°It IS the fire!  Grab it!¡±

    --That¡¯s ¡­ no it¡­--

    The burning in his belly felt so different from the energy that the physician had previously guided through his meridians.  That had been ¨C no, it was similar, actually.  A heat.  Flames licking at his nerves.

    --Why is it so painful now?--

    A lick of fire erased all other questions.  The disciple reached down into his abdomen with his will and searched for the source of the heat.  Underneath layers of perception, he could feel something moving.  A miniscule but powerful storm beneath his navel.  There, in the center, a spark was tumbling erratically, chaotically.

    He reached out for it, latched onto it.  But instead of guiding the particle, his will was wrenched violently along the random path.

    ¡°Guide it!¡±  Chen Lei yelled somewhere, far away.

    Pengfei pulled and dragged against the force.  He steered it away from one imaginary wall, only for it to collide with another and bounce haphazardly.

    --Come on!-- Pengfei screamed to himself as he strained against the force.

    Gradually, the sharp turns and jagged angles of the circulating qi smoothed out under Pengfei¡¯s struggling guidance.  The roiling chaos slowly transformed into a whirlpool of heat, spinning forcefully but contained and orderly.

    He watched it revolve around an unseen center for a long time, not daring to touch it again.

    ¡°Come back now¡­¡± Chen Lei called out to him from somewhere.

    Pengfei¡¯s focus expanded, leaving the pinprick of flame where it was.  He opened his eyes to see Shutian, Neng, and Xiaotong watching him worriedly.  A hand lifted from his back and Chen Lei stepped in front of him.

    ¡°Come with me, let¡¯s head to the Medicine Hall.  The rest of you, go back to¡­wherever.¡±

    The doctor made his way back down to the sect in one direction, Pengfei¡¯s murmuring friends headed in the other.

    Chen Lei stepped smoothly over the craggy earth, incredibly spry for his advanced age.  He even held out a hand to the weakened Pengfei, aiding the boy¡¯s trembling steps in a strange reversal of the natural order.  A frail, aged, body assisting the young, strong one.

    Pengfei thought of climbing Mount Emei with his grandfather.  Wondered if his mother was still caring for the man, her father-in-law.  Then dismissed their images from his mind.

    The pain and fire had left his body and exhaustion filled the void, but when they reached the level ground of the sect proper, Pengfei had to ask in sluggish words.

    ¡°What ... was that, sir?¡±

    ¡°Nothing serious.  Turbulent qi.  Turbulent and slightly turbid.  You sensed your own energy for the first time.  Starting neigong at a late age can be a little bumpy.  Incidents like this aren¡¯t unheard of.  Dramatic, but not particularly dangerous.¡±

    ¡°Neigong?  But I still haven¡¯t been successful with it.  Every time I try, I felt¡­nothing.  And suddenly my qi is burning me alive?¡±

    Chen Lei nodded along, knowingly.  ¡°But I think you were successful.  To some extent.  Successful in cultivating, circulating your energy, just not in perceiving it.  So, you were unwittingly sending it bouncing around haphazardly through your body.  More than your unconditioned channels were ready for.¡±

    ¡°Is that why it felt so hot?  It was so much worse than when you guided your qi through my meridians.¡±  Pengfei ached at the thought of the heat, his entire being felt singed from the inside out.

    ¡°More to do with the context I suspect¡­ the exercise.  Promotes the Yang qi.¡±

    ¡°That¡­¡±

    --That makes sense!--

    Pengfei thought back over the last couple months, the burning in his gut that had gotten worse with every passing week.  Always at its worst when he had strained himself physically.

    Now it was at an end, and a new milestone reached in his study of martial arts.  The exhaustion that he had been filled with just a moment ago disappeared.  He was invigorated by the step he had inadvertently taken.

    Something Chen Rulan had said came to his mind.  The rough divisions in the skills of martial artists.  3<sup>rd</sup>, 2<sup>nd</sup>, 1<sup>st</sup> rate, Peak, Transcendent.

    ¡°Elder, if I can sense my own qi now does that mean ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Yes, congratulations on becoming a 3<sup>rd</sup> rate.  It¡¯s not much, but you can truly call yourself a martial artist now.¡±  The physician smiled as he reached the Medicine Hall, opened the door, and beckoned Pengfei inside.

    The doctor¡¯s assistants, all of them Jin disciples, were at the evening training session.  Or perhaps dinner by now.  The clinic was quiet, the soft beds inside beckoned Pengfei to sleep.  But the disciple found himself suddenly invigorated.

    --¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯¡­ first was circulating the qi in the dantian then ¡­--

    ¡°Elder, can you guide me?  What comes next?¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei yawned and blinked the sleep from his eyes as he stumbled along the uneven ground with the others.  Chen Ji led them from their isolated dormitory toward the center of the sect, only turning to explain once they were within sight of the training ground.

    ¡°The Sect Leader will be addressing everyone soon.  Once he is finished, you may rejoin the rest of the Jin disciples.  Your punishment is over.¡±  The little man spoke sweetly, but as he turned to leave, he paused and spoke with a sudden hard edge to his voice.  ¡°I trust I won¡¯t be seeing you in an official capacity for quite some time.¡±Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!

    The head of the Discipline Hall left them and shuffled over to a group of elders standing on the edge of the training ground.

    ¡°That guy is so damn weird.¡±  Pengfei whispered to his friends.

    Neng shrugged, ¡°Not all of the elders handled the sect¡¯s isolation well.¡±

    There were already sixty or so disciples milling around the area and soon the rest of the dormitories came to join them.  And it wasn¡¯t just the Jin generation; it seemed every elder of the Chen line would be attending as well.

    The four of them weren¡¯t about to ask any questions, just happy to be out from under the restrictions placed on them.  The last ten days under Chen Rulan had been mixed blessing and curse.  They had all appreciated having each other for company after the solitude of the cliffs but the training regimen had been excruciating.

    Pengfei yawned again, drawing a rebuke from Shutian.

    ¡°Would you stop that?  We¡¯re all tired.¡±

    ¡°I can¡¯t help it.¡±

    ¡°You need to stop staying up so late abusing yourself.¡±

    ¡°I was practicing my neigong, asshole.¡±

    ¡°Whatever.¡±

    Their bickering was cut short by the arrival of the Sect Leader.  Chen Hongzhang stood in front of the Jin disciples who arranged themselves into neat rows on the stone practice area.  Pengfei and his companions joined the back row unnoticed by the others as the patriarch began to speak without preamble.

    ¡°First, an announcement.  Unfortunately, a wandering herb gatherer was killed near the sect recently.  It looks like it was the result of a rockslide.  As a precaution, all disciples are to avoid the north side of the mountain until further notice.¡±

    --Herb gatherer?--

    Neng was apparently thinking along the same lines as Pengfei, because the boy leanded over and whispered, ¡°Is he talking about the leg you found?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t ¨C ¡°

    Pengfei¡¯s words were silenced as the Sect Leader continued speaking, and an abrupt shift in topic drove the doubts from his mind.

    ¡°At the beginning of this winter, the Kunlun Sect will have been in isolation for forty-six years.  The time for us to return to the Central Plains is quickly approaching, even sooner than you may realize.  Our ancestral home is in Qinghai, at the terminus of our mountain range.  We will begin the journey back in three years ¨C not four.¡±

    The disciples tittered at the news.  Rejoining society an entire year earlier than expected had drastic ramifications on the daydreams and plans of everyone present.  Chen Hongzhang raised his hands to silence the murmuring crowd.

    ¡°You will not be spending much time in Qinghai though.  After a short while in our new home, we will travel across the provinces to visit the great sects, clans, and families of the Wulin.  On the first day of the fiftieth year since our seclusion began, we will knock on the gates of Shaolin and Wudang and Mount Hua AND ANNOUNCE OUR RETURN!¡±

    Cheers went up at the Sect Leader¡¯s sudden crescendo.

    ¡°But we need to show our allies a good face.  After fifty years, our friends may have forgotten our strength.  They may believe we have wasted away in our mountains, that the new generation is a shadow of the old.  IS THAT TRUE?¡±

    ¡°NO!!!¡±  The disciples screamed back.

    ¡°The elders will make sure of it.  From now on things will be different.  A new schedule and new methods.  More training than you have done before.  We will make you into warriors worthy of standing side-by-side with anyone in the Jianghu.  Are you ready for it?¡±

    ¡°YES!¡±

    ¡°Good.¡±  The Sect Leader paused and walked back and forth in front of the disciples, pondering.  ¡°But¡­ this life is not for everyone.  We don¡¯t expect all of you to remain with Kunlun for the rest of your lives.  Some of you may be impatient to leave already.¡±

    Pengfei felt Shutian bristle next to him as Chen Hongzhang surveyed the crowd.

    ¡°It is nothing to be ashamed of!  And in truth, not all of us are destined to be heroes.  Whether you remain within our walls or leave for the outside world, it would benefit you all to develop skills besides combat.  So, in addition to your martial arts training, you will also learn more mundane skills.  Some of you have already begun studying medicine with Elder Chen Lei.  Some of you will learn to keep accounts, or blacksmithing, and so on.  If the time comes when you leave us, you will do so prepared to make your way in the world.

    And, if you DO leave, it will be with more than the clothes on your backs.  On New Years Day in four years, each of you will receive three hundred liang of silver to use as you see fit.¡±

    Another loud cheer went up, speaking to the avarice of the Jin disciples, but Pengfei was dumbstruck.

    --Three hundred liang?!--

    There was more to the assembly.  Details, half heard.  By the time it was over and the patriarch had finished speaking, Pengfei had crunched the numbers.  Walking with his friends, he shared the results.

    ¡°Three hundred liang each, one hundred fifty-one disciples, that¡¯s ¡­ forty five thousand three hundred liang total.¡±

    ¡°Is that a lot?¡±  When Pengfei blanched at the question, Neng felt the need to explain himself.  ¡°What?  We¡¯ve lived here since we were ten.  I don¡¯t know how much stuff costs.¡±

    ¡°How long will it last if we¡¯re thrifty?¡±  Shutian demanded.

    ¡°Economizing has never been a strength of mine.¡±

    Xiaotong draped an arm around Pengfei, ¡°Of course not, young master.  Just explain it as best you can to us dirty urchins.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s a year¡¯s salary for a high ranking official.  Each.  Where did the sect get all that money?  This place is a shit hole, it doesn¡¯t look like we have that kind of cash to throw around.¡±

    ¡°The problem isn¡¯t how much money we have, it¡¯s that we¡¯re in the middle of fucking nowhere.  Kind of hard to spend money when there aren¡¯t any merchants.¡±

    ¡°I guess so...¡± Pengfei conceded the point to Shutian as the foursome made their way to the Dining Hall.

    It was a free day, the one opportunity they had every two weeks to relax.  Leftovers from the night before had been set out before the patriarch¡¯s address, and now the disciples lazily ate as they discussed their suddenly bright future.

    The raucous laughter and grand plans shouted across the room drew more and more mumbling from Shutian. Finally, Pengfei had enough.

    ¡°What¡¯s your problem?  You want to go home and take care of your mom, right?  In a few years, you¡¯ll have enough money to do it.¡±

    Neng and Xiaotong nodded their heads and looked to their local misanthrope for the reason behind his complaining.

    ¡°You guys are idiots.  They dangle a little money and you forget everything they said before that.  Training?  Working?  Think of all the shit we¡¯ve been through up until now, without any hint of reward.  And now they¡¯re offering us a small fortune.  If they¡¯re going that far just to keep us around, it means they¡¯re going to put us through absolute hell for the next few years.¡±

    As the truth of Shutian¡¯s words sunk in, the other three disciples uttered a collective, ¡°Fuck.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    After breakfast, Pengfei shuffled away from his friends with a mild sense of dread.  Their new training regimen would begin the next day, bringing with it unknown pain and suffering.

    --Now all I want to do is take a nap.  Why does the prospect of future work make me tired in the present?--

    Instead, he made his way to his appointment with Chen Lei.  When Pengfei had finally learned to sense his qi, he had begged the elder to show him the next steps in the cultivation method but the lesson had been postponed until now.

    The physician¡¯s students had already made their way to the Medicine Hall and were talking amongst themselves as the elder poured over a book at his desk.  Pengfei waited quietly until the man finally looked up and noticed him.

    ¡°Ah, Pengfei. Let¡¯s begin.  You four, quiet down.¡±

    The medical students lowered their voices and moved a distance away while Pengfei and the elder relocated to a comfortable spot in the middle of the room.  The disciple sat in front while Chen Lei placed a hand on his back to monitor the flow of qi.

    ¡°Start at the beginning.  Feel the qi in your dantian, guide its flow.¡±

    Pengfei inhaled and exhaled slowly.  He searched his body for the still unfamiliar energy within him.  His private attempts at neigong had only been occasionally fruitful but whether it was practice or luck, today he succeeded.

    He found the tiny spark in his abdomen.  As he concentrated on it, his senses burrowed inward to a dark illusory world.  Outside sounds muted and stimuli dampened.  It was like he was in a dark cavern, with only a small fleck of light visible, swirling around a center.

    He reached out the spark and felt its movements as muffled words came to him from the outside.

    ¡°Begin with the Great Circuit.¡±

    Pengfei tugged at his qi, willed it to the meridian he felt at the base of the spine.  The energy resisted his direction but slowly found its way to the vessel.  The point of light bounced and jostled as it travelled upward, careening off unseen obstacles.  Suddenly, it darted out of sight and disappeared in the darkness.

    Pengfei opened his eyes back to the real world and turned to Chen Lei.

    ¡°It¡¯s like the meridian is blocked by something.  I can¡¯t get past it.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s a common misconception that the Governing and Conception Meridians are blocked, but if they were completely clogged, I doubt you would survive for very long.  Circulating your internal energy will eventually reduce the obstructions.¡±

    ¡°How long will that take?¡±

    ¡°You may never completely clear the passages.  That is an achievement that few martial artists manage, usually only after reaching the Peak stage.¡±

    Sensing another question, Chen Lei held out a hand to silence Pengfei.  ¡°You have enough to work on for now.  Try to complete the Great Circuit at least once before you leave.  Next time, we will begin invigorating the five major organs.¡±

    ¡°Yes, Elder.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    A new day dawned, and a new era began for the disciples of Kunlun.  Even the weather was different.  A clouded sky brought with it a freezing cold and a threat of snow but the boys were not permitted to wear their coats for the morning exercise.

    Chen Rulan met the disciples as they exited their dormitories and sent them up the mountain instead of down.

    ¡°To the statue and back!  No internal energy!¡± he commanded.

    The disciples dutifully jogged upward, looking expectantly for a marker that few of them had ever seen before.  The path was longer and more difficult than what they were used to and the air thinner with every step.

    The sensation of sweating in freezing cold was unsettling but simultaneously pleasant.  On the other hand, the burning of the dry air in their lungs was unequivocal torture.

    However, Pengfei¡¯s ordeals during his punishment at the cliffs had prepared him for the hardships.  Where he had once consistently fallen far behind the pack during morning exercise, he could now barely keep up with the rearguard.  Unless they used their qinggong.  A small improvement.

    It was similar when the disciples returned to the sect¡¯s main compound.  Usually, they alternated between running and calisthenics each day but now they would do both.  Everyday.

    The pushups, squats, lunges, frog jumps, and so on, were arduous but Pengfei was nowhere near the last to complete the assigned number.

    --I may not be fast, but it feels like I¡¯m getting a bit stronger.--

    He draped his coat over his sweaty shoulders and made his way into the Dining Hall for the morning meal while two thirds of the disciples were still struggling.

    Neng was one of the few disciples who had beaten him inside.  Pengfei joined him with a bowl of gruel.

    ¡°Shutian was right.  They might kill us all off before anyone can claim their three hundred liang.¡±

    Neng just shrugged, seeming to have already made peace with the new routine.  He didn¡¯t even seem that tired by the exercise.

    Shutian joined them shortly, and the chubby Xiaotong after that.  The four of them finished their meal together as several elders escorted the Sect Leader into the Dining Hall.

    The disciples quieted as the stern Chen Hongzhang stood before them again.

    ¡°As was discussed, from now on you will take on new duties within the sect, learning the skills necessary from the elders.  Listen closely as they will now call your names.¡±

    The Sect Leader stood aside and another master stepped forward.  It was Chen Weidao, the head of the Scripture Hall and Pengfei¡¯s one-time savior.

    ¡°Jin Neng.¡±  Elder Weidao called.

    Neng gave his friends a raised eyebrow, then stood from the bench and left the hall with the elder.

    --Damn, Scripture Hall, that would have been cushy.  Lucky bastard.--

    Pengfei thought back to his few days cleaning the library under the quiet supervision of Elder Weidao, dreading everything else by comparison.

    Other masters, many of them still unknown to Pengfei, stepped forward and called their own lists of names.  Chen Rulan called disciples forward, apparently taking them off to learn the basics of smithing.

    --Huh¡­ I didn¡¯t know we had a forge.--

    Chen Lei had seemed to have no need of more students in the Medicine Hall.  He stepped forward and waved for the students already under his tutelage to follow him out.

    Elder Chen Ji was the last master to step forward.

    --Shit, not this crazy bastard.--

    ¡°Jin Fan, Shutian, Wai, Yusheng, Xiaotong, and Zaifeng, come with me.¡±

    Shutian and Xiaotong shot Pengfei confused looks, but stood to follow the elder, leaving their friend alone at the table.  The only disciple still seated as the last of the Jin generation left the building.

    The Sect Leader Chen Hongzhang looked down at him.

 Chapter 22 - Job Assigned, Deadline Established

    The sturdy frame of the Sect Leader loomed over Pengfei.  The door to the Dining Hall closed as Chen Ji and his charges exited, and with that, the last buffer between Pengfei and the sect¡¯s patriarch disappeared.  But the stern man softened slightly once they were alone.

    He sat across the table from the disciple and asked kindly, ¡°How have you been settling in?  I don¡¯t think I¡¯ve spoken to you since the day you arrived.¡±

    ¡°Thank you for your concern, Sect Leader.  It was a little rough in the beginning, but I think I¡¯m adapting.¡±

    ¡°Very good.¡±  The old man nodded ponderously.

    --Is he just checking in with me?  Am I in some kind of trouble?--

    He racked his brain.  Aside from the transgressions that had landed him in the cliffside punishment cell, he could not think of any serious infractions.

    --Poor attitude?  Lackluster martial arts?  Both victimless crimes, that can¡¯t be it.--

    ¡°You came here by horseback, I believe?¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir.¡±

    ¡°And I hear that you are the only one who has been able to ride the horse down in the valley below.  The one that the disciple from Qingcheng¡­ left behind.¡±

    Pengfei winced at the memory of his dead friend.  --Ma Feng¡­--

    After a moment collecting himself, Pengfei said to the Sect Leader ¡°No one else has been able to ride her?  I guess I¡¯m not surprised, she¡¯s a stubborn one.¡±

    He chuckled quietly, recollecting his time spent with the horse he had named¡­Horse.

    --She is a hardass.--

    ¡°It¡¯s not just the attitude of the animal.  None of the other Jin disciples have ridden before.  Even for us elders, it has been decades.  Which is why I wanted to talk to you.  You may have noticed, we didn¡¯t ask too many questions about your background.  I don¡¯t want to pry now but I would like to know, exactly how much experience do you have with horses?¡±

    Pengfei perked up, both eager to converse one of his strong suits and simultaneously nervous to be discussing something so close to his past.

    ¡°My family was ¡­ involved in the horse trade.  Peripherally.  I¡¯ve spent my entire life around them.  I may not have ridden as much as a Mongolian nomad, but close.¡±

    ¡°And caring for them?  Breeding?  Herding?¡±

    ¡°Some acquaintance with all of it.  I wasn¡¯t a herdsman or a groom, but I at least know the basics.¡±

    ¡°Excellent.¡±

    The Sect Leader smiled briefly, processed the information from the disciple, then delivered his pronouncement.

    ¡°Pengfei, in the spring, you¡¯ll go north to Xinjiang and purchase a small herd.  We¡¯re going into the horse business.¡±

    ¡°Hahaha¡­¡± Pengfei chuckled, but seeing the Chen Hongzhang¡¯s unwavering expression put an end to the humor.  ¡°Wait, are you serious?¡±

    ¡°Historically, we provided protection to merchants travelling along the Desert Road.  But that will stretch us too thin until we recover our numbers.  We need something more centralized.  And there is always a demand for quality horses.¡±

    ¡°Elder, no ¨C ¡°

    --Where do I even begin?!--

    It was disorienting, seeing such a bad idea come from the mouth of someone with such authority.

    --It can¡¯t be¡­ is he actually an idiot?  No, right?--

    Pengfei had encountered foolish adults in his life, but they were generally easy to spot.  And Patriarch Hongzhang did indeed project an air of confident intelligence.  Still, the disciple felt it necessary to point out the errors in the man¡¯s thinking.  He rattled off the most apparent obstacles while counting on his fingers.

    ¡°Sir, thank you for your confidence.  But first of all, I¡¯m unqualified.  I know a little bit about keeping horses, but not enough to run such a venture.  Second, I¡¯m just one person.  The number of animals I could manage¡­it wouldn¡¯t be enough to be worth the trouble.  Third, we don¡¯t have the land.  Fourth, we don¡¯t have the feed, Fifth ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Pengfei, that¡¯s enough.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir.¡±

    ¡°I appreciate your honesty.¡±  The Sect Leader stood and motioned for the disciple to do the same.  He spoke calmly while escorting the boy to the door of the Dining Hall.  ¡°Right now, we¡¯re just taking small steps.  You¡¯ll go and buy just enough horses to teach the other children how to ride.  Thirty or so?  You can teach them in shifts when the weather turns warm again.  When it¡¯s time to return to the Central Plains, we¡¯ll buy a bigger herd.  By then, you¡¯ll have trained a staff to help you, and we¡¯ll have all the land we need in Qinghai.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m still not the right person for ¨C ¡°

    ¡°You¡¯ll do fine.¡±

    ¡°It would take ¨C ¡°

    ¡°You have months before spring comes!  Plenty of time to figure out all the details.¡±

    Chen Hongzhang slapped Pengfei¡¯s shoulder merrily, pausing at the door of the hall.  It was a friendly but authoritative order to cease all argument.

    ¡°Start drawing up plans and keep me updated.¡±  The elder shuffled Pengfei out into the cold and closed the door behind him.  The young man gaped in residual shock.

    --There¡¯s no way this is going to work.  And when it goes to shit, I¡¯ll be the one to blame.--

    Pengfei huffed, daunted by the task before him.

    --Still, I guess it gives me a bit of freedom.  Nothing to do until spring except figure out the details.  Definitely better than working under that psy¡­--

    The door to the Dining Hall opened again and the sect leader stuck his head out.  ¡°Pengfei, I almost forgot.  While you¡¯re in the sect, you¡¯ll be under the supervision of Chen Ji in the Discipline Hall.  Wouldn¡¯t do to have a disciple just wandering the sect without a care in the world, after all.  You should hurry and join them.¡±

    The Patriarch disappeared again, as quickly as he had dashed Pengfei¡¯s little shred of consolation.

    ¡°¡­Son of a bitch.¡±

    Pengfei oriented himself.  He could only assume that Chen Ji and the others had headed to the Discipline Hall, so he made his way in that direction while pondering the immediate future.

    --I like riding well enough, but all the other work that goes into horses is just a pain in the ass¡­ I don¡¯t want to shovel shit and castrate foals¡­--

    He passed the Scripture Hall.  He couldn¡¯t see inside but imagined Chen Weidao giving meticulous instructions on the proper way to dust the bookshelves.

    --Seems like a good fit for Neng actually.  Lucky bastard.--

    To Pengfei, the library offered not only physical comfort but also intellectual stimulation.  He was still working his way through the tome that Elder Weidao had lent him, and there were dozens more to texts to captivate him once he finished ¡®The Nine Chapters of the Mathematical Art¡¯.Stolen novel; please report.

    --I wonder if I¡¯d be studying for an imperial Exam by now, if I had stayed in Sichuan?  The Confucian doctrines would have been pretty dry, but I¡¯d have enjoyed the math¡­--

    He recalled old dreams, passing the regional qualifiers, the capital and palace exams, and becoming a scholar-official.

    --Would have been nice to use my mind a bit, instead of living as a martial artist.  And a horse trainer, apparently.--

    He shuffled reluctantly onward, came around a corner, saw Chen Ji and the other disciples gathered in front of the Discipline Hall.

    ¡° ¨C and so you¡¯ll need to practice a variety of ¨C Oh, Jin Pengfei, has finally decided to join us.  You¡¯re late, boy.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, sir, I was speaking with ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Quiet.  I don¡¯t need excuses.  Run the mountain path later.  I suggest you do it at the midday meal.  It¡¯ll be too dark in the evening.¡±

    --Ahhh¡­.great.--

    ¡°You see the look on Pengfei¡¯s face?¡± Chen Ji asked the other assembled disciples.  Pengfei immediately balked, then tried to compose himself as the elder went on.  ¡°That¡¯s what we¡¯re fighting against.  The disciples of the sect get a little discipline from the elders of the sect, enforced by us.  And in their childish bitterness, they think that is all the Discipline Hall is.¡±

    Chen Ji walked around them, his short frame projecting a powerful presence.

    ¡°In good times, that misconception is not far from the truth.  But in difficult times¡­ who here knows the story of our sect¡¯s punishment?¡±

    --Oh, might finally get some details¡­--

    Pengfei looked about, but none of his fellow disciples moved to answer Chen Ji¡¯s question.  After the silence stretched for several seconds, the elder continued.

    ¡°A large group of us encountered a contingent from Kongtong as we travelled east.  The exact details¡­ well, what¡¯s important is what happened after.  The Wulin Alliance levied their punishment against us.  Close our gates for fifty years.  But the duty of enforcing the punishment was left to us, the Discipline Hall.¡±

    Chen Ji paused his circuit around them.  He got a distant look in his eyes.

    ¡°The night before the punishment came down, officially, the previous Patriarch excommunicated three quarters of the sect.  A mercy for them.  No longer welcome in the Jianghu, but they could live in the civilian world.  The rest of us¡­ it was my job to make sure those of us who remained abided by the punishment.¡±

    The elder looked out over the mountains.  ¡°Even after we secluded ourselves, it was hard to maintain discipline.  Dozens.  I brought back dozens of my brothers over the years, when they ran.  And if they wouldn¡¯t return¡­¡±

    The man gripped the sword on his hip unconsciously but said nothing else.

    --Does he mean¡­?--

    ¡°And that¡¯s what the Discipline Hall really is.¡±  Chen Ji came back to himself, spoke louder now.  ¡°Protecting the sect from itself.  When it is difficult.  When it requires fighting against your own brothers, no matter how much you might sympathize with them.  If the Sect Leader himself violated our dictates, it would be your duty to bring him to our justice.¡±

    A scandalized gasp went up from the disciples at the hypothetical.

    ¡°That¡¯s why you, more than anyone else in Kunlun, need to be strong.¡±  The elder said, with a steely gaze and a hard edge to his voice.  ¡°So, I will see that you become strong.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    The next day, Pengfei was able to sit with his three friends at lunch.  They all arrived at roughly the same time from their new jobs within the sect.  Before they could even start their food, they were joined by a few more familiar faces.

    ¡°Hey, scoot over.¡±  Nanxi said, the twins Tianwei and TIanxun following behind.  ¡°Where were you yesterday?¡±

    Pengfei nodded to his former enemy, turned occasional ally and friend, and made room on the bench for him. ¡°Chen Ji made me run the mountain.  How have you been?¡±

    ¡°These two have been chatting my ears off.¡±  Nanxi indicated the near-constantly silent twins.  ¡°How was the time at the cliffs?¡±

    ¡°Great.  Found a severed human leg.¡±  Pengfei said through a mouthful of food.

    ¡°That was you huh?  The whole landside thing is bullshit, right?¡±

    ¡°Yep.¡±

    ¡°Fantastic.¡±  Nanxi nonchalantly changed topics and addressed the rest of the table, ¡°What about the rest of you assholes?¡±

    ¡°Why is he coming in so aggressive?¡±  Shutian asked.  Xiaotong draped an arm over his friend¡¯s shoulders and jostled him kindly.

    ¡°He just doesn¡¯t get you like I do.¡±

    ¡°And his sense of humor is fucked.  I think we established that with the goat shit incident.¡±

    But the rest of the table contradicted Pengfei, chucking amongst themselves at the memory.

    ¡°That was so fucking hilarious!¡±

    ¡°I can¡¯t believe you did that!¡±

    ¡°What a dumbass.¡±

    When the laughter had died down, Nanxi nudged Pengfei with his elbow.  ¡°So, what job did you get?¡±

    ¡°Complicated.¡±

    This drew a quizzical look not just from Nanxi, but the rest of the group as well.  There hadn¡¯t been much time to explain to his dorm mates yesterday, he had been tired after his first strenuous day under Chen Ji.  Pengfei detailed the Sect Leader¡¯s proposed enterprise and his role in it.

    ¡°We¡¯re going to learn to ride!¡±

    ¡°I hate to damper your rare burst of enthusiasm Shutian but odds are, you aren¡¯t learning anything.  It¡¯s too much for me to handle, I¡¯m going to tell the Sect Leader it¡¯s not possible.¡±

    ¡°Well, shit.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll help.  Anything to get away from Chen Rulan and the forge.¡±  Nanxi volunteered his services and pointed to the twins.  ¡°They¡¯ll help too.  They¡¯re keeping the books for the Finance Hall but I¡¯m not sure they can even add.¡±

    The twins didn¡¯t dispute the statement.

    ¡°Count us in too.¡±  Xiaotong spoke for himself and Shutian.

    ¡°Hey, can you stop volunteering me for things?¡±

    ¡°Relax, you¡¯ll get to ride a horsey!¡±

    Shutian grumbled but was pacified by his friend¡¯s teasing.

    With the nearly entire table volunteering to help him, Pengfei tried to make it a clean sweep.  ¡°What about you Neng, are you going to come get your hands dirty with us?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t think Elder Weidao is going to let his only assistant leave.¡±

    Pengfei nodded.  ¡°Too bad...  It¡¯s probably pointless anyway.  No one is going anywhere if I don¡¯t figure out a way to make it all work.¡±

    With idle speculation put to the side, the table resumed their meal.  Afterwards, they walked as a group to the Veneration Hall.  Neng split off from them at some point, but the rest sat in the lotus position on the floor to circulate their internal energy.

    For the first time since joining the sect, Pengfei was able to join his fellow disciples in their neigong practice.  Previously, it had seemed to him an exercise in futility.  Just a bunch of people sitting quietly in the dark.  But now he could feel a subtle energy emanating from the others, a thrum of power.  They were there, even when he closed his eyes.

    Pengfei reached into himself to find his qi and located it quickly.  The small particle of light was where he had left it, in his dantian.  It was still rebellious and unyielding to his will, today more than usual.  He breathed deeply and tried to complete one revolution of what ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ termed the Great Circuit.  However, the qi was lost in the jagged darkness of his meridians.

    Chen Mo, the decrepit old master of the Veneration Hall, made his way up and down the rows of disciples. Pengfei heard the man¡¯s footfalls but was unperturbed by them.  Before, the elder had called out his failed attempts at neigong.  But now he was truly cultivating; he should have no need to fear that particular embarrassment.

    The footsteps stopped behind Pengfei¡¯s shoulder.

    --You¡¯ve got to be kidding me.--

    ¡°What are you doing?¡±  The elder¡¯s voice asked.

    ¡°I¡¯m ¨C ¡°

    Before Pengfei could finish, Chen Mo interrupted.  ¡°Stop mucking about.  Focus.¡±

    ¡°Yes, elder.¡±

    He had to admit, the old man was right.  There was discomfort in the background somewhere, disquiet.  There was a buzzing in his mind and a tension in his chest.  Pengfei searched for what it was, something he had thought of momentarily and half forgotten.  Not the obvious anxiety of having to buy and manage a herd of unruly animals for some half-baked business venture.

    Something else.

    Chen Mo moved on as Pengfei tried to find the source. He though back over the week again and again.   On the third or fourth lap through the events of the past few days, it popped out to him.

    In their conversation, the Sect Leader had alluded to Feng.  It had brought back a surge of memories from his time spent on the road with the Qingcheng swordsmen Zeng Zihao and Ma Feng, dead at the hands of the black-clad men.

    Pengfei was still touched by the sadness of it all but he had finished his mourning.  This wasn¡¯t about his sadness.  It wasn¡¯t guilt either.  He had come across the Qingcheng sect at a time when he needed an escape and they needed a messenger.  The two parties had used each other with no illusions about motivations.  Any sense that he had gotten his friends killed had faded with the initial sting of their deaths.  But there was something there¡­

    The message.

    The words he had been tasked with delivering to Kunlun.  The reason Qingcheng had escorted him in the first place.

    When Chen Hongzhang had brought up the memories this morning, Pengfei realized it had been months since he thought of the message.  It had taken him a minute of stumbling through his mind to recall the names.

    Luo Nianxin of Shaolin.  Liang Deliang of Kongtong.  Song Weixiong of Zhongnan.  Nangong Zhiqiang of the Nangong Clan.  Xiao Xingchen of Emei.

    He had almost forgotten some of it.

    --Is it okay to forget?  I delivered the message to the elders of Kunlun.  There was nothing else I was supposed to do.  So¡­ is it over?--

    The message had been delivered, but its meaning never revealed to Pengfei.  He had escaped the immediate threat of the thin-faced man, and the killers in black, but they still roamed the mountains.

    --I did everything I was supposed to, but I haven¡¯t decided if I want to take it farther.--

    It was a decision Pengfei felt he had to make eventually.  Leave the mysteries alone or dive deeper into them.  Seek revenge for Ma Feng and Zihao or not.

    Forgetting the message would be fine, if he decided to stay out of it all.  But he hadn¡¯t made that choice yet.

    --Seeking revenge?  I¡¯m not equipped for it.  Those bastards were strong¡­ But maybe I could get there, eventually. --

    --Eventually.--

    That word was the crux of it.  Realizing this, Pengfei knew what was next.  With a weight removed from his conscience, he closed his eyes and breathed deeply.  The spark of his internal energy leapt to his command as he focused with an easy mind.

    ******************************************************************************

    Late at night, after a grueling day of training, Pengfei walked alone through the grounds of the sect.  His body ached in new and unpleasant ways, a result of the new training regimen.  His eyes were heavy.  But he knew that this was something that could not wait another day.

    He reached the Scripture Hall and slid back the door.  Dark.  But he could find what he needed without light.  It was there, on the corner of the table where Chen Weidao worked at transcribing copies of the old and mistreated books of the library.  Pengfei grabbed it and left the way he had come.

    He hurried back towards his dormitory.  He didn¡¯t want to be seen where he was not supposed to be, didn¡¯t want to answer any questions.  He reached the bunkhouse quickly but sat against the wall outside it.

    The biting cold winds of a coming autumn in the desolate mountains stung at his face and hands.  He wanted to hurry inside for the warmth of his blanket.  But first he would do this.

    Light still spilled out of the dormitory.  The disciples had just returned from the last meal of the day, joked and caroused with each other inside.  They would not extinguish their lamps for a while yet.  Pengfei needed their cast-off glow.

    He flattened the blank paper he had taken from the Scripture Hall on one of the paving stones that surrounded the building.  He knelt atop it to keep it from blowing away, took a brush from his coat.  He mixed some ink in a little dish and wrote with a steady hand in the dim light.

    --Luo Nianxin of Shaolin.  Liang Deliang of Kongtong.  Song Weixiong of Zhongnan.  Nangong Zhiqiang of the Nangong Clan.  Xiao Xingchen of Emei.--

    The names were committed to paper, protected from the whims of human memory.  He wrote down everything he could remember about the day he had arrived at Kunlun.  The men in black.

    One man lost his arm to Zihao¡¯s sword.  A name had been shouted, Pengfei had barely heard it as he approached on the fight on horseback.  Guoyu?  A thin-faced man, their leader.    The clash thin-face had with Elder Weidao.  The things the strangers had said.

    Pengfei noted his encounters with the black clad men that had come after that day.  The men he had met in the valley after retrieving Shutian from his flight away from Kunlun.  They had called the Kunlun disciples ¡®invaders¡¯.

    The severed leg, still in its black clothing, in a cave on the mountain trail.

    With the last detail down on paper, Pengfei blew softly against the wet ink.  When he thought it was dry enough, he folded the page and held it in his palm.

    Into the dormitory, into the laughing and roughhousing boys.  He found his bedroll and his few meager possessions stuffed in a canvas sack.  He inserted the page deep into the bag with the rest of his belongings.  With that accomplished, he laid on his thin bedding.

    --That¡¯s done then.--

    He felt¡­ reassured?

    --In three years, when Kunlun returns to Qinghai.  When I¡¯ve had a bit more training.  That¡¯s when I¡¯ll make up my mind.  Whether to try and take revenge, whether I care about the message from the Qingcheng sect. Whether I stay at Kunlun at all, I guess.--

    A dirty rag landed on Pengfei¡¯s contemplative face.  Thrown by Jin Nanxi, who laughed uproariously nearby.

    ¡°You son of a bitch!¡±  Pengfei half screamed and half laughed.  He stood to chase the other disciple, leaving his worries written on paper and tucked in his bag.

 Chapter 23 - Discipline Burns

    Pengfei was holding a wooden sword when the first snowflake of the season fell.  He saw the insubstantial speck of white dissolve on the stone tile by his feet, then looked up to the sky.  Another one landed on his cheek and melted against the warmth of his skin.

    ¡°Snow¡­¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t get used to it.  It doesn¡¯t snow often.¡±  Neng held his hand to catch a few snowflakes of his own.

    ¡°Why not?  It¡¯s cold enough for it nine months out of the year.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re between the Tibetan steppe and the Taklamakan Desert.  It¡¯s fucking dry.  Now, come on.¡±

    Neng raised his own practice weapon and held it in front of himself.  Pengfei mirrored his stance and shuffled slowly around his opponent.  Dozens of other pairs faced off in their own bouts.

    Pengfei made a shallow step accompanied by a clumsy chop to his opponent¡¯s wrist but only hit air.  Neng had not even bothered to dodge the attack.  Instead, he lazily raised his sword and tapped Pengfei on top of the head.

    ¡°Shit.¡±

    ¡°Your sense of distance is ¨C ¡°

    ¡°I just said it.  Shit.¡±

    ¡°Yeah.  So, I¡¯m going to ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Go ahead.¡±  Pengfei gave his friend permission to move on to more capable sparring partners.

    Neng readily found an eager opponent, once again making something abundantly clear.  It was a phenomenon Pengfei had noticed again and again since joining the other disciples for weapon training.  While Neng was a very good fist fighter, he was even a step beyond that when it came to the sword.  The disciples who took their training seriously would clamor over each other to be paired with him.

    Pengfei was even more grateful than before for his friend¡¯s condescension but it was also a little disheartening.  Sparring with one of the most skilled opponents of his generation only battered his self-esteem even more.

    Any sense of progress that he had accumulated during bare-handed training was washed away the moment he awkwardly held a wooden practice weapon.  And though his neigong practice had borne some fruit and he was now a 3<sup>rd</sup> Rate, that advancement hadn¡¯t effected the ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯.

    He looked for a new partner but the other disciples were either occupied by ongoing matches or avoided the gaze of the hapless beginner.  Before he could approach one of them and force the issue, an adult voice called out from across the yard.

    ¡°Pengfei, go practice on the ropes.¡±

    ¡°Yes, Elder Weidao.¡±

    He bowed slightly to the head of the Scripture Hall, who now presided over the sword training in the afternoons.  The man stood at his usual place, side by side with Chen Rulan, and critiquing everyone within his view.

    Elder Weidao seemed to pay special attention to his subordinate, Neng, during the exercise.  While most of the Kunlun disciples were berated for the little mistakes, for Neng it was helpful suggestions on patterns of attack or a begrudging approval of one tactic or another.

    Pengfei¡¯s recent training had been more rudimentary.  It usually involved being sent to practice at the ropes, several small wooden balls suspended by cords from the eaves of a nearby building.  A beginner¡¯s exercise that had been seen little use until Pengfei started to practice the jian.

    --Distance, distance, distance.--  Pengfei recited to himself, taking his stance in front of dangling objects.  The wooden balls swayed gently in the breeze.

    A breath.  A swing.  A miss.

    ¡°Shit.¡±

    Again and again.  Half the time it was the wind, and half the time it was his misjudged range, but Pengfei did nothing but miss.

    The aim was to hit the wooden ball with just the tip of the sword.  According to Chen Weidao, all the lethal work should be done with the last few finger-widths of the blade.  But even making contact with the most basic strike, a straight up-and-down swing, was still beyond Pengfei¡¯s abilities.

    His feet, the angle of his body, his grip on the sword, it all felt alien and uncomfortable.  Swordsmanship was worlds apart from the bare-handed techniques he had learned thus far.  Except for a few very general commonalities, it was all new material.  And where he had some sort of instinct for fist-fighting, there was no such intuition for swordplay.

    The rest of the practice session passed slowly.  Chen Weidao eventually grew frustrated at watching the disciples¡¯ fumbling attempts at sparring and called a halt to it.  Elder Rulan ordered the boys to line up again.  The old men walked up and down the rows as the pupils thrust and slashed their weapons through the air, displaying the first form of the ¡®Swift Dragon Lighting Sword¡¯.

    Chen Rulan used his scabbard to slap arms and legs into position.  Pengfei now knew that the elder¡¯s sheath didn¡¯t hold a sword at all, but a bar mace.  A solid iron rod meant to break and bludgeon, not to cut.

    Elder Weidao¡¯s corrections were more nuanced.  A devoted practitioner of the blade, he was overflowing with adjustments and condemnations, a departure from his usually taciturn nature.

    Unfortunately, Rulan reached Pengfei first.  The mace clacked against the inside of the elder¡¯s scabbard as the man beat Pengfei¡¯s thighs and slapped the underside of his sword arm.

    ¡°Ah, damn it!¡±

    When Weidao passed a moment later, he reached out and lowered the tip of Pengfei¡¯s weapon ever so slightly, then moved on.

    The bell for dinner rang and the orderly ranks of disciples collapsed into a mob, jockeying to reach the weapon racks, replace their instruments, and rush to the Dining Hall.

    Pengfei held back as the others rushed about.  Nanxi spotted him and paused on the way to the evening meal.

    This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work.

    ¡°Aren¡¯t you coming?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll be there in a little while.¡±

    Nanxi shrugged and moved along with the rest of the Jin generation.

    Pengfei took his practice sword and walked back to the ropes.

    --Distance, distance, distance.--

    It was a concept that Chen Rulan had stressed the importance of recently, and Chen Weidao had reiterated. Knowing your range.  Your opponent¡¯s range.  The exact step needed to reach your opponent.

    Swing after swing.  His success rate was low.  Frustration reached a tipping point.

    ¡°Screw this!¡±

    He stomped off to place his wooden sword on the weapon rack with the rest and then walked towards the Dining Hall.  As he passed the hanging balls again, he took an angry swing at one with his bare fist.

    His blow made a precise and satisfying clack against the little wooden object.  Good contact, with the correct knuckles, at the very last reach of his strike.  Just as it should be.

    --Ooh.--

    Pengfei¡¯s previous consternation disappeared immediately.  He forgot the evening meal and stood in front of the crude apparatus in his proper fighting stance.

    Another strike, and it landed again.  But not to his satisfaction.

    --A little bit too close.--

    He moved back a hair and tried again.  Took a step to the right and tried again.  Lunged backward and forwards and tried again.

    The sun set as Pengfei threw the same punch over and over.  And more often than not, the wooden ball went flying with a small crack.

    ******************************************************************************

    The new schedule for the disciples had affected their free time as well.  Now they had a half day each week instead of a full day every two weeks.  Pengfei preferred it this way.  A leisurely breakfast, a couple hours of lessons, another hour of reading Taoist scriptures, then lunch.

    From there, the afternoon was usually wide open, but today Pengfei had appointments to attend.

    Once again, he found himself in the Medicine Hall.  Chen Lei had become his de facto neigong tutor, the position solidified when he had rushed to Pengfei¡¯s aid recently.  Elder Lei had made light of the incident, saying it had not been threatening at all, but the disciple still shuddered at the memory of the fire burning uncontrollably in his body the day he collapsed outside the sect grounds.

    The elder was lecturing to his handful of medical students but cut his words short when he turned and saw Pengfei enter the room.  He waved his hands and the other disciples dispersed to carry out whatever duties they had been assigned.

    ¡°Come this way, Pengfei.¡±

    Chen Lei led the way to his small private room, bare except for an unlit lamp and some cushions on the floor.  The room where all their Neigong lessons took place.  It provided the necessary quiet and seclusion.

    ¡°Where did we leave off last time?¡±

    ¡°The Five Major Organs, sir.¡±

    ¡°Yes, yes.  Let¡¯s begin.¡±

    Teacher sat behind student, placed a palm upon the boy¡¯s back.  But the man just observed as Pengfei circulated his own internal energy.

    Things were going more smoothly now.  He moved his qi along the Great Circuit formed by the Governing and Conception meridians, through the Heart Meridian and then to the Small Intestine meridian, and finally back into his dantian.

    ¡°Again.¡±

    Chen Lei¡¯s voice sounded distant as Pengfei focused on his internal world, but the instruction still reached the boy¡¯s consciousness.  He obeyed, moving the energy through dozens of cycles under the supervision of the elder.

    ¡°Now the Liver Meridian.¡±

    Pengfei searched the channels within himself.

    --It¡¯s ¡­ there.--

    He guided his qi to the appropriate vessel and felt it move along the new pathway, corresponding to another of the major organs.  Like all the other vessels he had studied so far, the Liver Meridian had a far-reaching path, running up and down both legs.  As the qi moved, Pengfei could feel the muscles on the front of his thigh tingle and burn, enervated and strengthened slightly with each revolution.

    ¡°Good.  Now follow the Liver with the Gall Bladder.¡±

    The effects were even more expansive now, running along the sides of his body from head to toe.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough for today.¡±

    Chen Lei¡¯s voice called an end to the cultivation.  Pengfei centered himself, breathing slowly and letting the qi return to a natural and stable rhythm in his core.  The internal world slowly faded away and he opened his eyes to the material plane.

    ¡°Elder, why are the meridians paired up the way they are?  Heart with small intestine, live to gall-bladder.¡±

    ¡°The organs exist in pairs of Yin and Yang.  You practice them this way in order to maintain balance.¡±

    Pengfei stood from his meditative position and offered a helping hand to the elder, but it was brushed away.

    ¡°Shouldn¡¯t I focus more on Yang for martial arts?¡±

    ¡°Maybe.  Yang is aggression, strength, fire.  Some styles focus almost exclusively on the Yang.  But most of Kunlun¡¯s arts, especially the fundamental ones, are more balanced.¡±

    ¡°I see.¡±

    After the peace and quiet of the small meditative chamber, the larger clinic seemed a bustle of activity, even with the scant few disciples present.

    ¡°Now, for your end of the bargain.¡± Chen Lei said, the called out to the other boys.  ¡°Gather around everyone!¡±

    --¡­Shit.  I was hoping he had forgotten that part.--

    Pengfei reluctantly removed his shirt and laid face down on a bed that the doctor indicated.  He could feel the students of the Medicine Hall surrounding him.

    ¡°He has just circulated energy through the Heart, Small Intestine, Liver, and Gall Bladder Meridians, so those acupoints should be especially responsive.  Does everyone have their needles?¡±

    Murmurmed assents from the others and Pengfei squeezed his eyes shut tight, and trying not to imagine the little slivers of metal that would soon be piercing his skin.

    --I hate needles!--

    Pengfei nervously squeezed the bedding underneath himself as Chen Lei spoke again.

    ¡°I¡¯ll demonstrate first, then the rest of you will replicate.¡±

    The physician was quiet adept but the little pinpricks could not be totally ignored.  To distract himself, Pengfei considered the ¡®Nine Chapters of the Mathematical Art¡¯, the formulas for summation.

    --What if I only wanted to sum the odd numbers between one and a thousand?  Even numbers, divisible by two¡­ take out the two and we¡¯re left with just one to five hundred¡­ can use the base formula¡­--

    ¡°FUCK!¡±  Pengfei yelped as one of his peers attempted to place a needle in an acupoint of the lower back.

    Chen Lei gently slapped the back of the patient¡¯s head. ¡°Hush.¡±

    --¡­--

    --¡­ So it would be five hundred times five hundred and one¡­--

    ¡°Fuck!  Watch it!¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    The morning run and calisthenics had depleted Pengfei¡¯s reserves of energy, and breakfast had done little to restore them.  So, the time spent with the Discipline Hall was especially difficult.

    ¡°You¡¯re all working so hard, my boys!  Excellent!¡± Chen Ji said merrily.  ¡°I¡¯m pleased you¡¯re all acclimating so well.¡±

    The elder¡¯s face was a smiling mask that was a stark contrast to the disciples.  There were seven of them, stretched out over the paving stones in front of the Discipline Hall.  Their shirts were cast off to the side and they propped themselves up on their hands and toes, holding at the top of a push-up.  Each boy had a bowl full of incense sticks burning underneath their torso, the smoldering points threatening to burn their flesh if their posture relaxed too much.

    ¡°Our Hall is well named.  Each one of us requires discipline.  And strength.  But don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s alright if you don¡¯t have these attributes yet my boys!  They can be learned.  We will get there together.¡±

    Chen Ji¡¯s voice was as sweet as the look on his face.

    --This guy¡¯s mood swings don¡¯t seem to affect his training assignments.  They¡¯re always sadistic!--

    A drop of sweat fell from Pengfei¡¯s brow and joined a puddle on the ground beneath his face as his entire body quivered.  His belly sank, fraction by fraction toward the glowing, smoking, incense sticks.

    --No, no, no, NO!--

    He tried to throw himself to the side as he collapsed but couldn¡¯t avoid the little spears completely.  His skin brushed the lit end of the incense, and the smell of burnt flesh joined the woody aroma already in the air.

    ¡°Fuck!¡± he cursed underneath his breath.

    Chen Ji made his way to Pengfei¡¯s side, knelt beside the disciple.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you¡¯re doing well Pengfei.  Your brothers are also struggling.  It might help to distract yourself.  Think of something else.¡±

    ¡°Ugh¡­ yes, sir.¡±

    The elder gently pushed Pengfei over on his side and guided the disciple back into position above the incense sticks.   When the boy¡¯s butt climbed too high, Chen Ji smacked the raised backside with the scabbard of the sword he wore, then circled around the other disciples and spoke to the group as a whole.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry.  Once you lot build up your bodies a bit, we¡¯ll be able to move on to more fun things.  Just a couple months.¡±

    ¡°Ahhh!¡±  The boys collectively screamed with the effort of exercise and anguish at the elder¡¯s timeline.

    --Two months of this!?  I can¡¯t ¨C no, think of something else--

    He counted the seconds in his head but found the passage of time agonizingly slow.

    --What else?  Uh¡­ the horses!  The Sect Leader¡¯s proposal¡­ it¡¯s impossible.  The old man is delusional¡­ too expensive.--

    Pengfei had drawn up some preliminary figures already.  The Scripture Hall had been surprisingly helpful.  In the selection of books, there were some that had pertained to animal husbandry.  Some passages in ¡®Essential Techniques for the Common People¡¯ had given him a better picture of the supplies necessary for the upkeep and expansion of a herd.

    It would require an exorbitant sum of money.

    Another book had mentioned the legendary Bo Le, a man of the distant past who had sought the fabled Thousand-Li Horse, a mount that could travel the eponymous distance in a single day.  He¡¯d only skimmed that text, not bothering to waste his time on such flights of fancy.

    --Guess it¡¯d be nice to be able to cross all of China in a fortnight though.--

    Pengfei¡¯s body began to quake again, and he started to dip toward the incense once more.  Before skin could touch heat, Chen Ji was there.  He unsheathed his sword and held the edge up to Pengfei¡¯s belly, threatening to cut into the boy if he dropped any lower.

    ¡°Get.  Your.  Fucking.  Stomach.  Up.¡±

    --Ah, there he is.--

    Pengfei screwed his eyes against the effort and straightened his body.

 Chapter 24 - Setting Out

    When Pengfei stood from the breakfast table, Nanxi stuck out his foot, trying to trip him. Pengfei stepped over the obstacle, looking for it after being caught for the past three days.

    ¡°Dickhead.¡± He slapped the back of Nanxi¡¯s head as he passed, and the rest of the table chuckled. He was smirking along with the rest of them, until his ankle caught on something, his weight continued forward, and he went sprawling to the ground.

    Xiaotong retracted his leg with a guilty smile.

    ¡°Seriously? Asshole¡­¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s friends erupted in true laughter now as he picked himself up from the floor and dusted off the front of his robes.

    ¡°You guys look thirsty, let me help you out.¡±

    He picked up the carafe of water from the center of the table and splashed each of the jokesters in turn, with liberal helpings for Nanxi and Xiaotong. The effect was slightly diminished since everyone was already damp with sweat from the morning¡¯s exercise.

    --Makes me feel better though.--

    Pengfei continued out of the Dining Hall with a last rude gesture toward the table of his jeering friends. He walked lazily through the sect, between the dilapidated stone buildings, making his way to the Patriarch¡¯s residence.

    It was small for such a grand position. But this compound was never meant to be more than a temporary outpost for Kunlun. Their historical seat was back east, in Qinghai.

    --I wonder what kind of home we¡¯ll be returning to when the sect¡¯s punishment ends? Sprawling grounds, ornate furniture, gardens? I¡¯d settle for a real bed¡­--

    Pengfei reached out a hand toward the frame of the weathered door in front of him but Chen Hongzhang spoke before he could knock.

    ¡°Come in.¡±

    Pengfei opened the door and stepped inside to find the patriarch sitting and drinking tea.

    ¡°Jin Pengfei greets the Sect Leader.¡± The disciple clasped his right fist in his left hand, saluting. ¡°I have come to speak with you about the task you assigned.¡±

    ¡°Excellent. Come this way.¡±

    Chen Hongzhang set his tea down and led the way to a small office. He sat at a desk cluttered with pieces of paper and ledgers overflowing with figures. When he looked out at Pengfei from behind the desk, the man appeared even more authoritative.

    ¡°So, have you drawn up some plans?¡±

    ¡°Plans¡­ yes.¡±

    Pengfei had realized that outright refusing the Sect Leader¡¯s assignment was ill advised and decided on a more subtle strategy.

    --I¡¯m going to beat you over the head with the numbers until you realize how idiotic all this is.--

    He withdrew a piece of paper from his robes and unfolded it to read off the notes and calculations he had scribbled there.

    It was the culmination of weeks of thought and study in the little free time he managed. Leaving meals early or going to bed late so he could sneak off to the Scripture Hall. He had poured over veterinary and agricultural texts for every shred of information he could find on the care, upkeep, and breeding of horses, then combined it with the copious amounts of practical experience he already had on the subject.

    ¡°Ahem - First, I think we need to move a bit sooner than you had originally planned, sir. We don¡¯t have to take delivery now, but we should at least put an offer in for that first thirty-head. If we wait until spring we¡¯ll have to pay premium. And if you want another ¨C four hundred? ¨C when we leave for Xinjiang, we¡¯ll need to start that process now. It¡¯ll probably require several vendors, half the money up front.¡±

    ¡°Good. Then ¨C ¡°

    Pengfei trampled over the Sect Leader¡¯s response.

    ¡°But the horses are just the beginning, sir. For the ones we intend to ride, we¡¯ll are also need the saddles, bridles, blankets, and bags. Wagons, if you want to use some as cart horses. There are all sorts of tools for the upkeep of the animals that we¡¯ll need to buy from several different merchants, blacksmiths, and so on. Even some medical supplies.

    I¡¯m not sure how we get the feed for the goats, sheep, and yaks down in the valley, but that first thirty-head of horses will eat more oats and hay than the rest of them combined, and it will need to be delivered regularly. We¡¯ll need a new storage building to hold it all, and it definitely needs to be finished by next fall in order to make it through the following winter.

    The land they¡¯ll be grazing¡­ normally, I¡¯d say ten mu of land per horse, but given the terrain, how dry it is, I think we need to bump that up to twenty mu each. That means expanding farther down the valley. And horses are a bit more adventurous than goats, so we might need to fence off the northern end.¡±

    ¡°So ¨C ¡°

    ¡°With the herd spreading out so far, it doesn¡¯t really make sense to have shifts every week. I¡¯d suggest whoever is working the valley stay down there a bit longer. At least two weeks at a time. Maybe a month. I¡¯d say six people total just to manage the animals, each shift, on top of whoever else you want to send down for riding lessons.

    For that many people, we¡¯d need another bunkhouse, with a kitchen, and a latrine. That would need to be done by next winter as well. Then ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Pengfei.¡±

    ¡°Yes sir?¡±

    ¡°Give me the totals.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯d say ¡­ twelve thousand liang now, another eight thousand in three years on delivery for the rest of the herd. At least fifty each month in between for feed. If you want to include the cost of transportation to Qinghai, I¡¯d call it twenty-eight in total. Thirty thousand to be safe.¡±

    ¡°Done.¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°It sounds like time is of the essence. We should get started on this before the worst of the season¡¯s weather¡­ I¡¯ll find someone to take you north to Hotan in the next few weeks.¡± Chen Hongzhang casually made a note on a page in front of him and looked back up, unperturbed, to Pengfei.

    ¡°No¡­ but sir ¡­¡±

    The complete disregard with which Master Hongzhang accepted the figures was beyond Pengfei¡¯s understanding. Thirty thousand liang. And that was on top of that forty-something thousand that the Sect Leader had earmarked for the disciples when their seclusion ended. Two fortunes, dispensed without a care. The boy from privilege was dumbfounded at the sums.You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.

    ¡°Was there anything else?¡±

    ¡°¡­ No, sir.¡±

    ¡°Then you can go.¡±

    ¡°¡­ Yes, sir.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei gathered with his friends in the open space between the dormitory buildings. The others were dressed lightly for their daily exercise but he wore his thickest coat and had a bag slung over a shoulder.

    Neng detached from his own bunkmates and walked over to join Nanxi, Shutian, Xiaotong, and the twins in wishing Pengfei goodbye.

    ¡°How long will you be gone?¡± Neng asked

    ¡°Not sure. A week or two I think.¡±

    ¡°It doesn¡¯t take that long to get to Hotan and back.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m scouting the valley for a couple days first, seeing if there will be any problems keeping the horses there.¡±

    ¡°Do you have any money?¡± Nanxi asked, excitedly. ¡°Nevermind, take this. Bring me back as many bottles of wine as you can manage.¡± He covertly stuffed several strings of coins into the folds of Pengfei¡¯s robes then hurriedly closed the boy¡¯s coat again.

    ¡°Where did you get all that money?¡±

    ¡°Gambling. You know the money we were promised? The idea of it made our sect brothers very daring with the dice. If Jin Andong hadn¡¯t shut me down, I¡¯d be able to retire to a villa by the time we return to the Central Plains.¡±

    --This son-of-a-bitch¡­--

    Pengfei shook his head, grateful that the head of the Jin disciples had caught on to Nanxi¡¯s schemes before he bankrupted the entire generation. Their senior brother was up at the front of the mob now, starting them on their morning run.

    The boys wished Pengfei well and clapped him on his padded shoulders as they fell in with the herd of disciples running uphill along the rocky trail.

    ¡°I¡¯ll see you guys in a couple weeks!¡± Pengfei shouted after them with a wave.

    He made his way through the sect to a cluster of buildings on the outskirts. Chen Rulan operated a small forge here within the sect¡¯s grounds. He could often be found there when he was not instructing the disciples in the basics of martial arts, though Pengfei never had occasion to seek him out until today.

    The forge was dark, the coals unlit, but its master stood outside, waiting.

    ¡°Good morning, Elder Rulan.¡±

    The man grunted and waved for him to follow. They stepped over to a large building, immediately adjacent to the forge. Pengfei had never been inside but knew it to be the sect¡¯s armory.

    --A bit shabby¡­--

    He had expected glinting blades and dazzling sets of armor, but the storehouse was mostly filled with wooden crates stacked on top of each other. A few weapons racks stood against the walls, holding wooden and steel swords. A spear leaned upright in one corner, its blade hidden by a leather sheath, cinched shut with a string.

    Pengfei approached one of the weapon racks and reached out for an aged saber.

    ¡°Not that one. Here.¡± Chen Rulan opened a wooden crate, appraised the contents, then opened another. He extracted a jian from the box, a straight sword in a lacquered wooden scabbard, free of dust or grime. Simple, but beautiful.

    The mesmerized disciple absent-mindedly noticed several more identical swords in the crate. Dozens more crates. Enough blades for every disciple in the sect.

    When Chen Rulan handed him the instrument of war, Pengfei immediately pulled the hilt back to free the shining steel from the sheath.

    ¡°Beautiful¡­¡± he said breathlessly, but a moment later a more pragmatic thought occurred. ¡°But sir, I¡¯m not very good with the jian yet.¡±

    ¡°Doesn¡¯t matter. It¡¯s our policy, if you go out into civilization, you go armed. Don¡¯t draw it unless you need to and don¡¯t cut your fingers off. Come on.¡±

    Chen Rulan stepped back towards the doorway and Pengfei slid the blade home, moved to follow. But he stopped short at the threshold, spying something on the wall by the door.

    He reached up and took down a quiver filled with arrows hanging from a hook, picked up the unstrung bow leaning against a nearby crate. ¡°Can I take these too?¡±

    ¡°If you want to carry it, that¡¯s fine with me.¡±

    --Much more my speed¡­ maybe I can do some hunting down in the valley.--

    Pengfei awkwardly shuffled outside, holding his bundle of weapons. Chen Rulan sighed when the boy barely stopped the sword from falling, only to dump the quiver full of arrows on the ground.

    ¡°I¡¯ll leave you to this. Meet me at the storehouse in the valley, three days from now.¡±

    ¡°Ye ¨C Yes, sir.¡±

    Pengfei managed a quick salute, between picking up his fallen items.

    ¡°Oh, and one more thing. Elder Chen Ji wanted me to remind you to keep up on your exercise. I¡¯ll be making sure of it as we travel¡­I hope you didn¡¯t think this would be a vacation.¡±

    ¡°¡­ No, sir.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Within thirty minutes of leaving the sect, Pengfei had tired of the scabbard bouncing on his thigh. It had been novel at first but the daydreams of being a chivalric warrior and master of the blade were quickly replaced with annoyance. He removed the sword from his waist and stuffed it into the bag on his shoulder.

    He stopped again not long after that to better secure the arrows and the bow in the quiver. It would have been fine if he was content to walk but Pengfei couldn¡¯t help himself.

    --A little fresh air, a little riding ¨C if Horse let¡¯s me, that is ¨C and the best part of all¡­ civilization. Stepping foot inside an actual town will almost make this fool¡¯s errand worth it.--

    He jogged downhill, more surefooted than the last time he had taken this path. His training during the punishment on the cliffs, and the equally taxing weeks that had followed, rewarded him with the stamina and the balance necessary to make quick work of the journey. He was able to stop for leisurely bites of food, sip at his waterskin, and still arrive in the valley shortly after midday. Hours ahead of his previous time.

    When the herd of animals and the little stone outbuilding came into view, Pengfei gave a playful shout to announce his presence.

    ¡°AAAAAYYYYYUUUUU!¡±

    A few animals perked their heads up then quickly went back to grazing. The grey clad disciples were more interested. They waved their arms overhead in a gesture of greeting that Pengfei returned.

    Twenty minutes later they were face to face.

    ¡°It¡¯s Qingfang, right?¡± he asked the giant disciple.

    ¡°Tis¡¯ I¡±

    The boy was hard to forget. Not just because of his size, which set him above every disciple and elder in the sect, but also because the last time they had encountered each other, Qingfang had kicked Pengfei harder than a mule. It had been a jumping, spinning, whirlwind of pain, executed with a smile. Hard to hold it against someone who never stopped grinning though.

    The other disciple, name unknown, had settled in for a nap on the grass. Pengfei let sleeping dogs lie and set down his belongings.

    ¡°What brings you to our verdant fields today?¡± Qingfang asked in his deep voice.

    ¡°I¡¯m doing some surveying down here for a few days, then going up to Hotan with Elder Rulan. Have you seen Horse?¡±

    ¡°The horse? It was just here a minute ago.¡±

    They both looked around for the animal but didn¡¯t see it in front of them. Pengfei ducked around one corner of the storehouse then the other. When he went around to the back, he found the mare standing in the slim shadow of the building.

    ¡°Hey there girl!¡±

    The animal knickered unenthusiastically, but it didn¡¯t dampen Pengfei¡¯s own happiness. ¡°You can play hard to get but I know you missed me.¡±

    He rubbed her neck hard and patted her flanks, then coaxed her around to the front of the building. He ducked inside to fetch the bridle, blanket, reins, and saddle that Pema had gifted him months ago.

    ¡°I don¡¯t think she¡¯ll let you ¨C ¡°Qingfang began, but fell silent when the mare allowed Pengfei to dress her in all the necessary equipment to support a rider. ¡°Nevermind then.¡±

    Somewhat surprised at her obedience himself, Pengfei whispered ¡°I knew you missed me.¡±

    Next, he strung the bow and hung the quiver from the saddle. He thought for a moment, then just for the fun of it, took his sword from his bag and tied it to his waist once again.

    ¡°Why do you have those?¡± Qingfang asked of the weapons. Pengfei could read the astonishment and envy in the boy¡¯s face and tried to sound casual in his response as he patted the sword.

    ¡°Policy for disciples leaving the sect, apparently.¡±

    ¡°And the bow?¡±

    ¡°Just for fun.¡±

    He reached out to grab the saddle, scared for a moment that Horse would shy away and refuse to let him ride. But to his relief, she stayed in place. He stepped up on the stirrup and threw his leg over, then took the reins.

    Pengfei looked himself over. The grey robes of Kunlun. Sword and bow by his side. A wave of satisfaction washed over him.

    ¡°I¡¯ll be back tonight!¡±

    Without any further ado, he turned Horse to the north and dug in his heels. The animal took off with such a quick start that Pengfei would have been dislodged from the saddle if he were a lesser rider. As it was, he just grinned and leaned in against the rush of wind on his face.

    ¡°AAAAAYYYYYUUUUU!¡± he screamed again.

    ******************************************************************************

    The weeks had passed and no opportunity to sneak away from the rest of the squad. Now there was only one thing left to try.

    Guoyu ran over the gambit in his mind. He awkwardly hung his sword from his right hip. Until recently, Jufend had needed to do it for him, but now he could barely manage the task with his one remaining hand.

    The others were busy breaking camp, stuffing bedrolls in to sacks and the like. The Captain stood at the periphery, the enigmatic man¡¯s few belongings hung over his shoulder.

    ¡°Don¡¯t do it.¡± Jufeng whispered.

    But Guoyu ignored his younger brother. He made his way across the camp to the Captain.

    ¡°Sir.¡± He paused nervously. ¡°¡­ Sir, I¡¯d like to try and recover Jichao¡¯s remains. I knew his family in Sichuan¡­ I¡¯d like to bring something home to them.¡±

    Guoyu steeled himself, refusing to flinch under the scrutiny of the thin-faced man. A long moment passed before the Captain spoke.

    ¡°Do you think that¡¯s wise?¡± he asked with a glance downward. Guoyu followed the man¡¯s eyes down to his own missing hand, then held the stump behind himself.

    ¡°I don¡¯t intend to fight the beast, sir. From what I¡¯ve seen recently, I think it has moved west. We should be able to search the area where Jichao died without any trouble.¡±

    ¡°We?¡±

    ¡°I¡­ was planning to take Jufeng with me to help.¡±

    The Captain didn¡¯t say anything. Didn¡¯t nod. Just pursed his lips and looked to the earth, holding his silence in the unnerving way he did.

    The man stood straight, adjusted the pack on his shoulder. Another look of consideration before he finally spoke again.

    ¡°We¡¯re meeting up with the horses in the northeast. It should take another day to break camp there. Then we¡¯re leaving. If you¡¯re not there by then, we¡¯ll leave you behind.¡± The Captain turned and shouted out to the others. ¡°Let¡¯s move!¡±

    The rest of the black robed squad fell in behind the Captain, walking nimbly through the rocky terrain. Jufeng stood by Guoyu¡¯s side as the others filtered past. When they had disappeared, the younger man turned to his brother.

    ¡°Are you sure about this?¡±

    Guoyu nodded. ¡°Yes.¡±

    ¡°What if that thing is still there? Or if it comes back while we¡¯re wandering around its den?¡±

    ¡°If it doesn¡¯t look clear, we¡¯ll leave.¡± Guoyu placed his left hand on his brother¡¯s shoulder, looked into his eyes. ¡°You¡¯re worth more than any elixir.¡±

 Chapter 25 - A Bloody Canyon

    The wooden beams that supported the second floor of the of the storehouse jutted through the stone and clay facade of the building.  The construction may appear crude to some, but right now it suited Pengfei perfectly. He suspended a small sack filled with oats from one of those struts then set it to swinging.

    He stepped back and forth, keeping the little bag at the end of his fist¡¯s range, occasionally throwing a punch to confirm his distance.  It had snowed lightly during the night and now the ground crunched and slid beneath his feet as he shuffled over the white flakes.

    Qingfang opened the door and ducked through it into the early morning sun.  He carried the straight sword, held it up for Pengfei to see.

    ¡°May I?¡±

    ¡°Sure.¡±

    The hulking disciple gripped the sheath in one hand and drew the blade with the other.  He gripped the hilt delicately in his meaty palm and moved gracefully through the forms of ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯.

    ¡°It¡¯s not fair.¡±  Pengfei lamented after watching the display.

    ¡°What¡¯s that?¡±

    ¡°You must be the strongest disciple in the sect, and on top of that you have the best swordsmanship.¡±

    Qingfang waved the compliment off, ¡°Haha¡­ there¡¯s plenty of disciples who are better.  I¡¯m sure your friend Neng will surpass me soon enough, being a disciple of Elder Weidao.¡±

    ¡°What?  His disciple?¡±

    The confusion was clear enough on Pengfei¡¯s face that the larger boy felt the need to explain.

    ¡°Yes.  I mean, we¡¯re all disciples of Kunlun, but some of the elders have begun taking direct students to pass on their martial arts.  I thought, since Neng was working for him in the library¡­ but maybe I¡¯m wrong.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s just work.  As far as I know, anyway.¡±

    ¡°Ah.¡±

    Seeing the youths cease their frenetic movements, Horse approached and bayed at Pengfei impatiently.  He rubbed the mare¡¯s neck absentmindedly, lost in a reverie.

    --Is that why Neng was assigned to the library?  It does seem like Weidao has been paying extra attention to him during the evening training¡­--

    He was snapped out of it when Horse headbutted him in the chest.

    ¡°Alright, you¡¯re ready, I get it.¡±

    Pengfei set about the process of saddling his mount.  He found a tent in the storeroom and slung it across Horse¡¯s back along with an extra blanket.

    Qingfang looked over the gear Pengfei had packed and asked, ¡°Are you going to sleep in the wilds tonight or return to our humble abode?¡±

    ¡°Ha¡­hopefully I¡¯ll make it back here.  It¡¯s spooky as hell out here at night.¡±

    ¡°That it is.¡±

    Pengfei filled his waterskin at the stream, retrieved some food, then hopped into his saddle.  Qingfang handed the sword up to him and the boy secured it to his waist with a nod.

    ¡°Maybe your friend will be awake when I get back.¡±

    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t count on it.  He prefers his dreams to our company.¡±

    Pengfei shrugged, but did not give much mind to the lazy disciple sleeping the day away in the storehouse.  Instead, he waved to Qingfang.

    ¡°See you later.¡±

    ¡°Safe travels.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    The goal of Pengfei¡¯s survey was two-fold.  First, find a chokepoint in the valley that could be blocked off with a fence to contain a herd of horses.  Second, identify any areas in the eastern and western ridges where animals might slip out.

    The western ridge was not a problem.  Its steep slope provided a natural wall to enclose the valley for all but the most adventurous of men and beasts.  And there were several candidates for the necessary chokepoint.  All that was left to check was the east.

    He dismounted occasionally to walk while Horse grazed and drank from the river running through the valley.  During one such break, he hefted bow he had found in the sect¡¯s armory and looked about for prey.  A rabbit. A mountain goat.  But there was nothing.  He aimed at the moon, pale in the daytime sky.

    ¡°Got ya.¡± He said to the celestial body.  Then he turned to Horse.  ¡°You know, it was my mother who taught me to shoot a bow.¡±

    Horse perked up her ears, looked up for a moment but went back to grazing.

    ¡°My father was usually occupied elsewhere.  Even when he wasn¡¯t, he didn¡¯t have much interest in teaching me anything.¡±

    Pengfei nocked an arrow, drew it tight against the bowstring, held it there for a second before relaxing again.  The draw weight was immense compared to the hunting bows he had used growing up.Stolen story; please report.

    ¡°She taught me to shoot, to hunt, to ride.  All so that I could fit in with the other ¡®young masters¡¯.  She taught me most everything, really.  Of course, I couldn¡¯t tell anyone that it was her who taught me¡­  she told me to keep it a secret so that the other children wouldn¡¯t ridicule me.¡±

    Horse came to nudge her head against Pengfei¡¯s back.  He turned at the mare¡¯s prodding and rubbed her neck.

    ¡°She¡¯s Mongolian, you know?  She has to hide it.  Wouldn¡¯t do for a nobleman to be married to a ¡®barbarian¡¯. As if there¡¯s anything barbaric about her¡­¡±

    He reminisced about the afternoons spent with his mother.  When they were at home, after his sister had left for Emei, they were each other¡¯s only company.  A lonely boy and a woman hidden away from polite society.  He shook his head to dispel the bittersweet memories.

    ¡°Anyway, she said the Mongols are the best riders, have the best horses.  I don¡¯t think she¡¯d like you very much.¡±

    Horse brayed, in what Pengfei decided was a laugh for his little joke.  He mounted and pulled the reins back to turn the mare¡¯s head towards the south.

    ¡°Come on.  It¡¯s getting late.¡±

    They leisurely trotted back the way they had come, but this time along the eastern ridge.  At this pace it would be dark before they returned to the storehouse and the disciples tending the herd there, but Pengfei was unconcerned.  The terrain was easy and he felt secure in the grey robes of Kunlun, even against the black-clad men who roamed the mountains.

    --It¡¯s worked so far, at least.--

    A shiver went up his spine, but Pengfei pushed recollections of previous encounters from his mind, focused on the job at hand.

    He found the situation on the return trip to be much the same as it had been on the journey out.  The ridge formed a nearly impregnable wall.  A perfect natural pasture.

    ¡°Except for that¡­¡±

    Up ahead, the earth was not just a steep grade, it was a vertical cliff.  And cut into that cliff was a narrow canyon.

    He steered Horse closer.  The grassy turf of the valley gave way to a rockier terrain.  The gravel slid and crunched beneath hooves.  It looked like a dried-up riverbed.

    ¡°Maybe the water runs through here in the spring?  Joins up with the main river down there.¡±

    Pengfei surveyed the formation.  Looked down the canyon.  It was shady, the rock walls blocked out some of the afternoon sun.  But it was still fairly bright within.

    ¡°If it¡¯s a stream, we won¡¯t be able to keep it blocked year-round.  Could be an issue.¡±

    He looked, thought, and after several moments decided.  Pengfei dismounted, considered tying Horse to a boulder, but ultimately decided against it.

    ¡°Don¡¯t wander off.  I¡¯m just going to take a quick look.¡±

    He left the bow and quiver hanging from the saddle but kept the sword on his waist.

    The narrow canyon was difficult to navigate, the main reason he had left Horse behind.  At its mouth, it was just a few arm-lengths wide, the ground all boulders and gravel.  Pengfei hopped from one rock to the next, in between rare patches of flat dirt.  When his legs were not powerful enough to make the leap, he sat on his butt and slid, or climbed hand over hand to scale some obstacle.

    Farther in, the rock walls opened up wider.  Pengfei stepped out from the shadows and into the sunlight.  It reflected off a pool of water.

    --A spring?--

    He shaded his eyes against the glare and saw that the water was shallow and still.  A leftover reservoir, lending credence to his suspicion that a stream would run through here after the first melt of spring.

    He was about to make his way around the edge of the pool and continue his exploration of the canyon when something caught his eye.  A shadow of a boulder, on the other side of the water.  But there was more to the darkness than just shadow.  Someone was sitting there.

    Someone in black robes.

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei froze.  He had not been moving quietly on his way here.  There was no way he had gone unheard. But reason didn¡¯t factor into it.  Pengfei froze on instinct.  Stood motionless and slient.

    No movement came from the figure across the water.  They were not far away from each other, the pool was not wide.  Still, the man in black did not turn to face Pengfei, did not move at all.  His head was lolled against his chest.

    --Sleeping or¡­?--

    The man¡¯s hand, palm up and out from under the shadow of the boulder, was covered in bright red blood.

    ¡°What the fuck is going on with these guys¡­?¡±  Pengfei whispered under his breath.

    He inched over to a nearby rock an took cover behind it.  From there, he surveyed the area.  The canyon walls, the rocky path in front and behind him.  He listened intently for any sound but only heard wind.

    Several minutes passed.

    It became open knowledge within the Jin disciples that Pengfei had found a human leg on the mountain path near the sect.  The elders had given a brief, and somewhat plausible explanation.  A wanderer had fallen from a cliff or caught in a rockslide, been picked apart by scavenging animals.

    Of course, it was not enough to convince Pengfei, who recognized the black clothing of the mysterious killers he had encountered before.  But he did not share his disbelief widely.  He had already been discouraged by the elders against spreading rumors about the strangers.

    But now, here, he was faced with another one of them.  Seemingly ¡­ dead?  It was hard to tell from that far away, but¡­

    --Seems pretty corpse-y to me.--

    He stood slowly.  Stepped from around his cover.  Once he was upright, he drew his sword from its sheath and crept forward.  He skirted the smooth, glassy, water to the other side of the pool.

    The black-clad man did not move.

    When Pengfei was just a few steps away, he could see that the man was ripped to shreds.  Several large gashes crossed his chest, exposing muscle and bone.  The blood that had flowed from the wounds had already soaked into the dirt and the red wetness on the clothes and body looked thick and sticky.  Mostly dried.  A few flies buzzed about.

    --How long does it take for blood to dry like that?  Hours?  A day?--

    Pengfei poked the man¡¯s shoulder with the tip of his sword.  It came away bloody but it elicited no reaction.  Only then was the Kunlun disciple comfortable enough to move closer.

    He crouched next to the corpse, inspected it.  In addition to the gashes, there were two large punctures in the abdomen, and several smaller ones in a row.

    ¡°What the hell happened to you?¡±

    The man¡¯s face was distorted in death.  Strangely slack jawed with vacant, open eyes.  It was possible this was one of the men Pengfei had encountered, spoken with.  But he couldn¡¯t recognize anything in the appearance now.  He took no pleasure in the man¡¯s demise.  In fact, he was more unsettled by the mysterious nature of it.

    ¡°What is going on here?¡±

    Pengfei had no theories about the dismembered leg he had found previously, or the manner in which its owner had perished.  A fall, an attack¡­ But he could say for certain that this body had not died in a rockslide.  Limbs, head, and back all looked intact.  It was only the flesh of the torso that had been ripped away.

    There was no weapon on the man.  Pengfei did not want to touch the body, but it did not look like the robes concealed anything large.  He stood and inspected the surrounding dirt.

    A strip of blue stood out, bright enough to be recognized even in the shadow, just a few strides away.   The boy bent down and picked up a small black satchel.  The blue ribbon tied around one strap was the only color.

    Pengfei held the bag out to the corpse. ¡°Was this yours?¡±

    Inside, there was some sort of plant.  An herb, perhaps.  Plucked from the ground recently.  Dirt still clung to the large root that had been hidden beneath the ground.  Some grain balls not unlike the ones Pengfei ate at the sect.  A few blank pages of dirty paper, ink sticks, and a brush.

    He slung the bag across his chest then slid it around to his back.  There was a blood trail leading away from the body.  Pengfei followed it further down the canyon.

    Fear and a morbid curiosity did battle in his mind.

    --Just over the next rise.--

    He climbed up the rocks but didn¡¯t have to go far.  He stepped up on top of a large flat boulder that formed a giant table stretching between the two sides of the valley.  It was covered in more of the sticky dried blood, a huge quantity of it.

    There was a single set of hand and footprints smeared in the red where the victim had scrambled through his own serum.

    The canyon continued beyond but past here there was no blood, no obvious tracks.

    --It¡¯s like he was dropped here half dead¡­--

    His curiosity was satisfied, at least to the extent where fear and good sense could prevail.

    --Time to head back.--

    Pengfei turned around, hopped down from the little mesa.  There was still blood on the tip of his sword.  He wiped it on one of the few clean patches of the dead man¡¯s clothes then slid the blade back into its scabbard.

    Pengfei took a final look at the deceased.  The man was not a friend.  He may have wanted to kill Pengfei and his fellow disciples.  But the boy still felt melancholy looking down at the corpse.  It was quiet, mundane, sad.

    He was pensive on the walk back.  The shadows were a bit longer but there was still plenty of light.  In truth, he had not been in the canyon long, but retracing his steps seemed to stretch on for some time.

    He kept his head down and watched his steps on the jagged rocks.  So he didn¡¯t see the man in black standing just a few steps in front of him.  It was the stranger¡¯s voice that alerted him.

    ¡°Who are you?¡±

    ¡°FU ¨C ¡°

    Pengfei began a curse but reached for his sword instead of finishing it.  He moved to draw his blade but stopped when the man made no aggressive movements.

    They stood inspecting each other in silence.  The man shifted uncomfortably, a large bloody wound visible on one leg.  The man¡¯s hair was tousled, his face dirty.  He looked like he had been through a battle.

    ¡°Kunlun¡­¡± The figure muttered, eyeing Pengfei¡¯s grey robes.

    But Pengfei¡¯s face also flashed with recognition.

    The man¡¯s right sleeve hung oddly.  The hand missing.  The hand that Zeng Zihao had cut off months ago.

    The black-clad man who had killed Ma Feng.  The half-remembered name one of the strangers had shouted.

    ¡°Guoyu.¡±

 Chapter 26 - Guoyu

    ¡°Guoyu.¡±

    The name slipped out of Pengfei¡¯s mouth the second he recognized the man.  The boy instantly regretted his mistake.

    --Shit!--

    Guoyu was taken aback upon hearing his own name.

    ¡°How do you ¨C  oh!  You¡¯re the one who they brought from Sichuan.  How are your friends?  The Tibetan girl and the boy from Qingcheng?  The one I ¨C¡°

    ¡°The one you killed.¡±  Despite the fear, Pengfei managed to put a little venom in his voice for Ma Feng.

    ¡°He died, did he?¡±  Guoyu asked, tiredly.  ¡°Well, it cost me my hand.  That¡¯s the Jianghu for you¡­ Are you out here alone?¡±    The man took a small limping step to the side, hobbling on a bleeding leg, peering around the boy blocking his path.

    ¡°One of the masters is around here somewhere.¡±  Pengfei bluffed, still nervously gripping the hilt of his sword.

    ¡°Sure, sure.¡±

    --What is he doing here?!  Does he know about his friend¡¯s dead body back there?  Should I tell him?--

    A thousand questions flooded his mind, but he only voiced one.

    ¡°Where are your ¨C the rest of your people?¡±

    ¡°On their way back to the Central Plains.  And once I find my brother, we¡¯ll be joining them, leaving this desolate shithole behind.  So, no need to piss yourself boy.¡±

    Guoyu moved towards him, pushing deeper into the canyon.  Pengfei moved back, drawing the jian a fraction of the way from the scabbard.  The injured man smirked at him and kept shambling forward.

    ¡°Please.  Even cut to shreds like I am, you wouldn¡¯t be a match for me, you 3<sup>rd</sup> rate child.  But I¡¯m not here for a fight.  I have no intention of violating the pact.  So just get out of ¨C ¡±

    The man froze, stood still with all his weight on one leg while the other bled onto the gravel beneath his feet.  Pengfei followed Guoyu¡¯s eyes to the bag around his shoulder, the one with the blue ribbon he had taken from the corpse.

    ¡°Where did you get that?¡±  The words were quiet but with a deadly edge to them, freezing Pengfei in place.  ¡°Where.  Did.  You.  Get.  That?!¡±

    ¡°I ¨C it wasn¡¯t me ¨C he was already ¨C¡°

    ¡°WHERE IS HE?!¡±

    Guoyu lunged in and Pengfei retreated, finally drawing the sword he had been gripping so nervously.

    --FUCK!--

    The man drew his own weapon with his left hand, but when the blade came out of the scabbard, Pengfei could see it was broken in half.  Perhaps in whatever engagement had left the villain so grievously wounded.  Guoyu had apparently forgotten the condition of his blade, cursed when he saw the damaged jian, but still held it up to threaten Pengfei.

    ¡°Do you want the bag?  You can have it!  I just found ¨C ¡°

    Guoyu stifled the words by slashing with his broken sword.  Pengfei retreated again, stumbling backwards over a stone.  His ass hit the dirt but he scrambled back to his feet instantly, dragging his sword over the earth.

    ¡°Stop, please!¡±

    But Guoyu did not listen.  He made another shuffling attack.

    ¡°Shit!¡±  Pengfei cursed.  He saw a madness in his opponent¡¯s eyes.

    --Looks like talking is pointless now¡­ Fuck!  What the hell do I do?!--

    Guoyu didn¡¯t allow any time to decide.  He took an awkward step and thrusted with the jagged blade.

    Pengfei considered running but could only imagine being stabbed in the back the moment he turned.  The Kunlun disciple reluctantly raised his sword and prepared to fight in earnest.  When Guoyu put weight on his bad leg and nearly fell, Pengfei stabbed.

    The attack was batted away, but barely.  The opponent was clearly still adjusting to wielding a sword in his weak hand.  Pengfei stabbed again, again, again, gaining momentum with each thrust.  Guoyu hobbled back and parried the blows.

    Suddenly, there was a heat in the air, a power.  It reminded Pengfei of his neigong practice and the energy he found within himself.  Guoyu gave a shout and lunged forward with a great swing of his weapon.  Brutish, unrefined, but powerful.  Pengfei blocked the attack, but it wrenched the sword from his hand and sent it scattering across the ground.

    The man-in-black threw his own damaged blade to the side and moved to take Pengfei¡¯s from where it lay.

    ¡°NO!¡± Pengfei shouted in panic and rushed him.  He barreled into Guoyu shoulder first, kicking the sword away, sent it tumbling down the floor of the canyon, bouncing off rocks with sharp unpleasant metallic sounds.

    A backfist yanked Pengfei¡¯s face to the side with a dull thud, sent him reeling backwards.

    The boy stood, wobbling and groaning.

    ¡°Ughh¡­¡±

    Guoyu was staring him down, gaze dripping with hatred.

    Pengfei¡¯s eyes darted left and right.  He searched for either of the swords but found nothing.  He reluctantly drew his fists up to take am empty-handed guard.

    Guoyu stepped in and threw a punch with his one remaining fist.  Anxiety had dulled his young opponent¡¯s reactions, and Pengfei took the blow to the face.  Unexpectedly, the punch was followed with an elbow from the man¡¯s other arm, proving that missing a hand was not so much of a detriment after all.

    The disciple¡¯s head rocked back, a deep cut from the elbow instantly started bleeding.  But the wound also spurred Pengfei to action.  He threw a flurry of punches, acting on instinct alone.

    Guoyu made to parry them, but only half succeeded.  His reflexes prompted him to block with a hand that was no longer there.  A punch darted past his stump and struck him square in the face.

    --Yes!--

    Another flurry of blows, more successful attacks.  Guoyu began to anticipate the punches aimed at his weak side, turned his body to block with the other arm.  He sent a kick toward Pengfei from his bladed stance but the boy managed to stay upright this time.  Guoyu caught himself with a grunt of pain as his wounded support leg buckled underneath him.

    Pengfei began to attack other targets, using the most basic strikes of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.  First one, then another of his straight punches came up short.The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    --Range is off!  I can see it but ¡­--

    He was scared.  The first rush frenetic energy was gone, his jittering brain now grappling truly with the situation he was in.  He wanted to sprint at full speed away from danger.  Instead, he was trapped in a no-mans-land, a deadly zone where he and Guoyu could each strike at each other with their full power.  Every time he went to attack, a part of him tugged in the other direction, pulling towards the false safety of reckless flight.

    A punch from Guoyu ¨C no, not a punch.  His hand was open, his fingers curled in a viscous claw that swiped at Pengfei¡¯s throat.  The Kunlun disciple pulled back, but fingertips grazed his neck leaving him bleeding from skin-deep gashes.  He coughed at the contact to his windpipe.

    Fingers jabbing at the eyes, scraped the side of Pengfei¡¯s face.  A punch with one knuckle extended into a short dagger, aimed for the vital points of the chest.  Each attack was a killing blow, narrowly avoided as the opponent hobbled forward on his bad leg.

    --Can¡¯t run yet¡­ can¡¯t let him rip me apart¡­need to go in!--

    A feint toward the missing hand, then a kick to the damaged leg drew a cry of pain from Guoyu.  Pengfei drove inward behind the initial attacks, closed the distance to the point that every attack would be guaranteed to reach.

    ¡°I¡¯ll tear you to pieces, you little fucker!¡± the killer hissed.

    The long attacks of Guoyu bunched up on each other.  They missed their targets and lost their power.

    Pengfei sent out another flurry of blows, looping and hooking to the body.  It was manic flailing more than technique.  But he saw an opportunity for something more.  He crunched in, coiled, then struck with his left fist.  A rising, curving, punch that had worked for him before.  It sailed past the killer¡¯s missing hand, aimed at the liver.

    ¡°Arrrgh!¡±  Guoyu winced with a step back.

    Pengfei followed, trying to stay within the shorter range but was buffeted back by something invisible.  The heat in the atmosphere was back, emanating from the panting hunched Guoyu.  The man¡¯s face drained of color, his breath came in ragged gasps, even as power wafted off him in fits and spurts.

    --Bloodlust¡­ or his qi?--

    The boy took a step back, then another.  But Guoyu jumped into the fray with renewed vigor.  Pengfei blocked the attacks, his body still shook with the shattering force.  Fist, palm, elbows and kicks.  Guoyu even stepped more firmly on his damaged leg.

    The blows came so quickly that Pengfei could no longer deflect them individually, he could only duck behind his guard and try to absorb the impacts on his forearms.

    But the avalanche began to subside.  The attacks slowed and the wounded killer breathed heavily.  The heat that had burned so intensely a moment ago faltered.  Pengfei pushed out with all his strength, and seeing Guoyu at the ideal distance, punched out at the man¡¯s torso.  It felt like the perfect attack.  Fast, good extension, punching through the target, hips turning with the strike.  The contact sent a shiver up his forearm.

    Guoyu stood unfazed.  Not even a shift of weight.

    --Not strong enough!?--

    ¡°A punch from a child, with no internal energy in it¡­ Did you think that would work?¡±  The man had read the doubt on Pengfei¡¯s face.  But Guoyu¡¯s features sagged with the words, clearly exhausted.  ¡°Enough of this¡­ stand still and die quietly.¡±

    The heat in the air rose again.  It seemed to shimmer around Guoyu¡¯s hand, once again constricting into a menacing claw.

    --I can¡¯t get hit with that!  Have to get out of here, even if running is dangerous.--

    Desperation rose in the boy¡¯s mind, and then a trick.

    ¡°You said you were looking for your brother?  His body is by the water, back there.¡±

    ¡°What?!¡±

    A childhood tactic, but Pengfei hoped the emotional bonds between siblings would be enough to bring it home.  The man turned to glance over his shoulder and in that instant of distraction, Pengfei was off.  He heard a curse, sensed a scramble of feet as the man made a lunging grab and missed.

    A few strides and the Kunlun disciple risked a glance behind, saw Guoyu turning this way and that, frantically.

    --He¡¯s looking for my sword!  If he finds it¡­--

    Engaging in a bare-handed fight against the handicapped opponent had been terrifying enough.  The thought of facing a swordsman while unarmed was something beyond fear.  He committed to the run, sprinting with all his might.  Over and around the boulders, sliding in the gravel.

    He was close to the mouth of the canyon now.  He peaked over his shoulder again but saw nothing behind him.  Around another bend, then climbing a mound of rocks taller than himself.   Horse was just up ahead.  She had wandered into the canyon a short distance, where the ground was still even and firm.  A short sprint to reach the mare.

    Pengfei made it.  He stepped in the stirrup, threw his leg over the saddle and grabbed the reins.  A last panicked look backwards to check for pursuit.  But there was nothing.

    He began to turn the steed away but paused.  Another look back at the bend in the canyon, the mound of rocks.

    ¡°Fuck it.  Might work.¡±

    Pengfei reached toward the quiver hanging off the front of his saddle.  He took the bow, nocked an arrow.  He waited, battling every instinct that told him to flee, to set Horse to gallop and not stop until he was back at Kunlun.

    Guoyu came around the bend then disappeared at the base of the rock mound.  Pengfei drew the arrow back.  Horse shuffled beneath him.

    ¡°Shhh¡­¡± he soothed the animal, in between his own ragged gasps for air, trying to project calm.  He looked down the arrow, sighting the empty air at the top of the rocks.

    Fingers appeared first, a hand grabbing the top of a boulder.  Then Guoyu¡¯s head popped up, holding the sword hilt between his teeth.

    The man¡¯s eyes went wide as he took in the scene but the arrow was already flying from the bow.  Guoyu reached up for ¡­ Pengfei wasn¡¯t sure if it was to take the sword from his teeth, or an attempt to block the arrow with his bare hand.  Either way, it was ill-advised.  With no hand on the rocks, leaning away from the incoming attack, Guoyu fell backwards.

    Silence.

    Wind blew and Horse whinnied, she nervously dug her foot into the earth.  Pengfei was frozen, his arm behind him after releasing the arrow.  Like a figure in a painting.

    --What¡­ --

    Pengfei¡¯s mind, that had been blanked momentarily, came into focus again.

    --What happened?  Did I get him?--

    ¡°Did I get you?¡± he yelled aloud, not registering the ridiculousness of it.

    No response came.  Just more wind.

    He nocked another arrow, bowstring pulled back taut.  Long seconds, time only noticed when his muscles began protesting against the tension.

    He relaxed the bow, grabbed the reins, and dug his heels into Horse¡¯s side, sending her bolting down the canyon.  A short distance and she darted out through the narrow opening at the canyon mouth, into the wider valley beyond.

    Bright sunlight hit them as they exited the shade of the rock walls.  It was still midafternoon.  Gravel turned to grass beneath Horse¡¯s hooves.

    Pengfei steered wide, still speeding away but with the canyon in view on his left flank.  He kept it in sight as they rode for a minute, maybe more.  The opening in the rock grew smaller and smaller.  Nothing came out of it.

    He pulled back on the reins and Horse obediently slowed to a stop.  They sat and stared.  Still nothing exited the canyon.

    ¡°Do we go back to the sect?¡± he asked himself and Horse.  The animal nickered.  Pengfei was tempted to interpret it as a ¡®yes¡¯ but he was at war with himself.

    ¡°I think I hit him though¡­¡±

    The split second of time replayed itself over and over in his mind.  The face, rising above the rock mound.  The surprised look on Guoyu¡¯s face.  The release of the arrow.

    A fleshy thud, a splash of red¡­ but did he imagine that?

    Pengfei couldn¡¯t remember what the truth was.

    ¡°I think I hit him.¡± He said again.  ¡°I ¡­ fuck.¡±

    He was still breathing heavy.  He waited until his lungs moved more easily.  There was not much improvement, the nerves still had him tense.  His heart beat quickly.

    ¡°I¡­ I need to check.  Let¡¯s check.¡±

    He didn¡¯t move at first.  Didn¡¯t compel Horse to move.

    --This is a bad idea¡­ but I violated the pact, whatever the pact is.  Kunlun¡­ we¡¯re not supposed to interact, to fight with anybody.  If Guoyu is alive, tells the Wulin Alliance¡­--

    Pengfei rode back toward the canyon.  Slowly.  Horse moved at a hesitant walk, ready to turn at any moment.

    The canyon bobbed up and down in the boy¡¯s vision.  He stared at it so intently that the view lost meaning in his mind.  He had to blink repeatedly to refocus his eyes, see the canyon mouth for what it was instead of a black and brown smear in the distance.

    Then he was back.

    Pengfei didn¡¯t want to dismount, but he didn¡¯t want to ride Horse right up to the edge of that drop either. Reluctantly, he stepped down.

    He removed the black bag from across his chest and hastily hung it around Horse¡¯s neck.  She tried to nip at the blue ribbon.

    He took the bow, one arrow nocked and another between his teeth.  He crept into the canyon, stepping slowly and deliberately to dampen the sounds as he moved across the gravel.

    He drew the bowstring back as he approached the drop of the rock mound.  Took a deep breath and slowly looked over the edge.

    Guoyu was lying flat on his back, staring up into the sky.  An arrow protruded from his chest below the clavicle.  Blood leaked from the wound, dripped from his mouth, and puddled beneath the man¡¯s back.  His eyes found Pengfei looking over the rock ledge.  His lips moved but only a hint of a whisper reached the boy¡¯s ears.

    Pengfei stood straight and relaxed his bow.  Took the spare arrow out from his mouth.

    ¡°What did you say?¡±

    Guoyu tried to speak again but couldn¡¯t manage any more volume.

    ¡°I can¡¯t hear you.¡±

    The disciple looked about.  Horse was shaking her head back and forth, trying to dislodge the bag he had placed around her neck.   Guoyu did not move from his spot on the ground.  The sword was several steps away from the man¡¯s grasp, safely out of reach.

    Pengfei considered drawing his bow again and firing arrows until the man stopped moving.

    ¡°You¡¯re the one who killed Ma Feng!  Do you know what they did to him?  They chopped him up and fed him the fucking birds!¡±

    The man¡¯s lips moved but Pengfei couldn¡¯t hear the rebuttal.

    ¡°And Zihao?  Did you just leave his body to rot somewhere?¡±

    Stifled emotions began to bubble up in him.  The immediate suppressed fear of combat, of course.  But the old sadness as well.

    Pengfei pulled his bowstring back again and took aim at Guoyu¡¯s chest.  But he could not ignore the man¡¯s pathetic face just visible above the tip of his arrow.

    The Kunlun disciple did not fire his bow.  He turned and walked back towards Horse, meaning to ride away.

    He paused.

    ¡°Huggh¡­¡±

    The conflicted sigh slipped out between his lips.

    He dropped the bow.  Back to the ledge.  Penfei climbed down the rock mound, keeping Guoyu in sight the whole time.  Upon reaching the bottom, he first moved to pick up his sword.  He hadn¡¯t noticed the scabbard still attached to his waist all during the fight and flight, but there it was.  The blade slid back into its home.

    Guoyu¡¯s breathing was shallow.  His eyes stared into Pengfei¡¯s when the boy squatted next to him.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know how to help you.  If you¡¯re anything like a boar, you¡¯ll bleed out when I remove the arrow.¡±

    ¡°In the bag¡­ the Thousand-Year Ginseng¡­¡±  The voice was weak.

    ¡°Ginseng?  A plant isn¡¯t going to fix this.  I can go for help, maybe ¨C ¡°

    ¡°No!¡± Guoyu croaked desperately.  ¡°The ginseng can save me.  It¡¯s an elixir¡­ but I ¡­must remain still after I eat it¡­circulate my energy.   Please ¡­¡±

    Pengfei was incredulous.  He had heard of the herb¡¯s medicinal properties, but never of it being used in a situation like this.  It sounded like the desperate fantasy of a dying man.

    ¡°Fine, I¡¯ll go get it.¡±

    He climbed back up the way he had come.

    --Even if it¡¯s just a moment of hope, I¡¯ll try to give it to the poor bastard.--

    He approached Horse to take the plant from the bag with the blue ribbon.

    --How did he know the ginseng was in the bag?  Oh, right, that was his brother¡­ did they find it together?--

    Horse had turned to face the other direction.  She bent her neck to the ground and pawed at something with her hooves.

    Pengfei stepped around the animal.  Found her snout stuffed into the bag he had hung around her neck.  The mare looked up from the bag, chewing happily.

    ¡°Are you eating¡­?¡±

    Horse cocked her head to the side.

    ¡°Huh."

 Chapter 27 - Mountain King

    Pengfei watched as Horse chewed the Thousand-Year Ginseng.

    ¡°What, are you a nervous eater?  That¡¯s¡­ we¡¯ll talk about this later.¡±

    He reached out and took the waterskin from the small bag that hung against Horse¡¯s back thigh then made his way slowly back to the mortally injured Guoyu.

    He slid down the rocks and knelt next to the man, offering him a drink.

    ¡°The ¡­ the ginseng?¡± Guoyu asked in between sputtering bloody coughs.

    ¡°My, um, my horse ate it.¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°¡­So¡­yeah¡­¡±

    ¡°Your fucking horse¡­?¡°

    Guoyu¡¯s eyes rolled back in his head and his eyelids fluttered as he skirted the edge of consciousness.  He began speaking quietly.  Not to Pengfei, and not in a language the boy had ever heard before.  Not a dialect of the Central Plains, not Mongolian, nor Tibetan.  The alien words drifted away on the wind, the speaking ceased.

    The wounded man¡¯s breath was labored and wet.  The coughs turned into a sickening rattle and gradually slowed.  Finally, the pained breathing stopped.

    Pengfei sat next to the body.  There was no guilt.  Not yet at least.  He was still breathing quickly and had begun to shiver now.  Not because of the cold, though it was creeping toward freezing.  The jittering seemed to originate in his tight chest, the lingering remnant of terror.

    An urge to move overtook him.  He stood, climbed up the rocks, picked up his bow, and looked for his mount.

    ¡°Let¡¯s get out of here, Horse.¡±

    But the mare had wandered off aways, left the canyon and laid down in the grass of the valley.

    ¡°Come on, girl.  Let¡¯s go.¡±

    But she did not stir when Pengfei approached.  Her eyes were shut as if she was sleeping, her chest rising and falling at regular intervals.

    ¡°This is not a good time for a nap.  Come on!¡±

    Pengfei tugged on the reins, tried to shake her awake, even shouted and clapped in her ear, but nothing would rouse the animal.

    ¡°What the hell is going on?!¡±  Then, remembering the Thousand-Year Ginseng, ¡°Did you poison yourself with that fucking root?¡±

    His attempts to wake the horse became more desperate, pleading, but remained ineffective.  Late afternoon slid by into evening, then late evening, and as darkness came Pengfei¡¯s concern for Horse¡¯s wellbeing was joined by other worries.

    ¡°What if more of those guys show up?  No, wait, he said the rest were heading back to the Central Plains¡­Would they come looking for him?¡±

    The anxious pacing did nothing to alleviate any of his concerns.  Eventually, Pengfei narrowed his focus to the most immediate problem facing him.

    --Do I stay or go?--

    On one hand, he wanted to be as far away from here as possible.  Put distance between himself and the blood and bodies, any companions of the deceased.

    On the other hand, Pengfei did not want to leave Horse.  Even if he did, he wouldn¡¯t make it far before dark.  If he kept walking after sundown, he might make it back to the storehouse a few hours after midnight, but didn¡¯t relish the thought of trekking though the cold.

    After a few more nervous laps, he came to his decision.  He sat against Horse¡¯s back with his sword in his lap and bow in his hand.

    ¡°The minute you wake up, we¡¯re out of here.  If you wake up.  Shit!  You better wake up!¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    The night brought freezing temperatures but no snow.  Pengfei did not want to lose sight of his surroundings but couldn¡¯t risk facing the cold without some measure of protection.

    He took the tent he had packed and pitched it, in a manner of speaking.  He did his best to cover as much of Horse as possible but her head poked out one side and her hindquarters out the other.  Under the canvas, he laid against the mare¡¯s warm midsection and covered himself with a blanket.

    The shelter was only partly effective.  The shivering that had spawned from his fear hours ago now continued due to the elements.  But it was different.  It crept in from the chilling air instead of welling up from within him.

    In the quiet stillness, all the thoughts he had pushed to the side bubbled to the surface.  He spoke them to the unconscious Horse.

    ¡°I¡¯m a killer now.  Not sure why I did it¡­ seemed necessary at the time.  But we probably could¡¯ve just galloped off.  I doubt he could have caught up to us.  I killed a guy who was already torn to bits by¡­ something.¡±

    Pengfei lifted up the canvas to look outside into the night.

    --What did happen before I showed up?  What could have done that to martial artists like that?--

    But his questions were forgotten a moment later and he continued the nervous rambling to the unconscious animal.

    ¡°Killer¡­ That¡¯s pretty weird.  Feels¡­ I don¡¯t really know.  Empty?  Surreal?  I didn¡¯t really want to kill him¡­ didn¡¯t really want to save him either.  You kind of resolved that little moral dilemma for me when you ate the ginseng.¡±

    The mare¡¯s breathing came steady beneath Pengfei, her chest lifting him up with each inhale and lowering him with every exhale. You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.

    ¡°I guess I got revenge for Ma Feng.  I wasn¡¯t sure I cared about it.  Just a while back, I told myself I would wait to decide, figure out if I really wanted that.  That¡¯s moot now.  Check that off the list.¡±

    He looked into the darkness again.  The moon and stars were the only illumination.  There was no fuel for a fire.  Still, he could see well enough by the lights from the sky.  Nothing moved except the grass in the wind.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know, the revenge¡­ I haven¡¯t been fantasizing about it or anything.  But I thought I would feel happier about it.  Maybe if I get Zihao¡¯s killer too?  I assume it was that thin-faced fucker.  But who knows.¡±

    He moved to his side, trying to find a comfortable way to lay against the horse¡¯s belly.  Pengfei¡¯s face brushed some of the hair on her flank and came away wet.

    ¡°What¡­?¡±

    Pengfei sat up and patted Horse¡¯s side, finding more dampness on her ribs.  In the dark of the tent, he could only tell that the liquid was dark and¡­

    ¡°Ugh!  That smell!¡±

    It was a putrid stench, foul enough to drive Pengfei out of the makeshift shelter and into the cold without a second thought.  He stumbled away several steps and then stood dumbstruck.

    Horse¡¯s entire body was steaming.  It billowed up from her in the crisp air.

    ¡°What the hell is going on with you?!¡±  Pengfei yelled.

    His shout drew a response from behind him.  A sound, deep, guttural, and loud.

    Pengfei turned slowly, a tingle of fear creeping up his neck.   He looked towards the source of the noise, the mouth of the canyon.  Just a stone¡¯s throw away.

    The sound came again.  It echoed out from the canyon walls, distorted but recognizable.

    A growl.

    Pengfei snatched his bow off the ground and nocked an arrow.  But when he lifted his weapon to aim towards the canyon, he immediately knew it was a useless gesture.

    Two round, yellow, irises glimmered in the moonlight.  The face that held the eyes was still obscured in darkness but the eyes themselves were enormous.  The distance between them suggested a beast of enormous size.  Its voice rumbled out like thunder from a distant storm.

    ¡°Horse!  Get up!  NOW!¡±

    Pengfei kicked backwards and caught Horse in the belly with his heel.  To his relief, she whinnied and clambered up, stripping herself of the canvas tent like a snake shedding its skin.  Pengfei was scrambling into the saddle before she had even straightened her legs fully.

    A last look at the canyon revealed the silhouette of a head.  A large rounded ear, a blunt snout gaping open to reveal fangs like knives.

    ¡°GO!¡±  Pengfei screamed and dug in his heels.

    The acceleration nearly dislodged him from Horse¡¯s back.  He slid halfway off the back of the saddle but his ass caught on the pack still tied there.  He leaned forward and pulled himself back into place even as Horse continued to race beneath him.  Faster than she had ever run before.  Faster than any mount Pengfei had ever ridden before.

    But the danger was not left behind so easily.  A roar filled his ears, drowning out everything, including the pounding of hooves.  Pengfei¡¯s ears traced the direction of the sound as it moved up the side of the valley¡¯s eastern ridge.  He looked upwards.

    The animal, demon, whatever it was, had scaled the cliff and now bounded along the top of the ridge.  Its exact form was still hidden but Pengfei could see it moving along the top of the rock.  It was impossible to judge its size accurately from this distance but it looked as if it were longer than two yaks lined end-to-end.

    ¡°What the fuck is that thing?!¡±  he screamed into the air, then urged his mount forward.  ¡°Give it all you¡¯ve got!¡±

    To Pengfei¡¯s amazement, Horse¡¯s speed increased.  They were nearing a choke point in the valley, one of the spots Pengfei had identified as a good place to fence in the pasture.  There, the ridges that formed the sides of the valley cinched together.  The beast above was on a course to intercept them there.

    Pengfei looked ahead to the narrows then to his left at the shadow on the ridgeline.  Their paths drew closer and closer.

    Horse sped through the pass as the shadow dislodged itself from the rocks above and leapt toward them.

    A gust of wind nearly knocked Pengfei to the earth as something massive passed within an arm¡¯s length of his back.  The sound of the beast hitting the ground was like boulders crashing in a landslide, accompanied by a frustrated, hissing, roar.

    Pengfei looked back.  The thing was standing there in the moonlight, apparently giving up the chase.  A leopard of some sort, black spots on dark and muted fur.  Larger than any animal skin Pengfei had seen adorning the lavish homes of Sichuan nobles.  Five times larger than such an animal had any right to be.

    He realized the truth of it when he saw the beast.

    A Mountain King.

    It stood in place nobly, ferociously, as Pengfei rode away.

    ******************************************************************************

    Morning had come before they reached Kunlun¡¯s herding grounds.  It wasn¡¯t for a lack of energy on Horse¡¯s part.  She seemed happy to tear through the valley with that newfound speed of hers, positively giddy about it, in fact.  Pengfei wondered if she had even been aware of the beast chasing them, the mortal danger.

    ¡°Didn¡¯t you notice that we almost got eaten?  Maybe that thing is what injured Guoyu and killed his brother...  could have killed us.¡±

    The mare strained at the bit and Pengfei had to pull back on the reins to stop her from bursting forward in another terrifying gallop.

    Restrained, Horse began to prance underneath him.  Prancing turned to jumping, and then she was bucking like a horse being saddled for the first time, but higher, more forceful, and at the same time smoother.

    ¡°Whoa!  Shit!¡±

    It didn¡¯t seem like she wanted to dislodge her rider, just wanted to test her own power.

    When she finally calmed, Pengfei considered his next course of action.  What to tell the elders, his sect mates.

    --Nothing.  Tell them nothing.--

    That decision had been made quickly.  He killed a man.  That was bad enough by itself.  But in doing so, he had violated Kunlun¡¯s punishment.  Or so he gathered from the snippets of conversation he had overheard from the elders.

    By closing its gates, Kunlun was forbidden from interacting with others of the Jianghu.

    --And I¡¯m pretty sure putting an arrow through someone¡¯s chest counts as an interaction.  If anyone finds out¡­ what happens?  The Wulin Alliance comes and wipes us out?  The elders destroy my dantian to appease them?--

    There were many possibilities, but in the end, it was his ignorance that kept him quiet.  He had only been at Kunlun for a few months.  He had no idea what the elders of the sect would think, what they would do.  Better to avoid it altogether.

    With that decision made, the anxiety faded.  Replaced with fatigue.  His eyes drooped as he rode but he spotted the storehouse when it came through half-shut lids.  Its two tenants standing outside.  The giant Qingfang, easy to discern next to his normal-sized companion, waved in greeting from a distance.

    He should have been nervous, pressured to keep his secret from his fellow disciples.  But he couldn¡¯t find the energy to worry.  Perhaps he had used up his week¡¯s allotment of fear in the past few hours.

    --Just need to get inside¡­ get some rest--

    Qingfang¡¯s brow creased as Horse slowed to a stop in front of him.  ¡°What did you do?¡±

    ¡°What?  Nothing, I ¨C¡°

    ¡°Your face is cut to hell.  Did you fall off your horse?¡±

    ¡°Fall?¡±  Pengfei repeated the word, sluggishly.  ¡°Yes¡­  I, uh, fell.¡±

    Qingfang¡¯s partner, who still hadn¡¯t introduced himself to Pengfei, chimed in too.  ¡°Why does your horse smell like shit?¡±

    ¡°She fell too.¡±

    ¡°That¡­ what?  That doesn¡¯t make sense.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t make sense.¡± Pengfei retorted, drawing a quizzical look from his interrogators.

    He hopped down from Horse¡¯s back and barely managed to remove the saddle and bags before she tore away, sprinting and leaping through the valley, startling the sheep, goats, and yaks.  The other boys watched, awed and confused at the mount¡¯s behavior while Pengfei carried his belongings inside.

    He dropped them just beyond the door, climbed the ladder to the second-floor landing, and laid on a bedroll for blessed sleep.

    ******************************************************************************

    Rest came quickly but didn¡¯t last long.  Pengfei had woken in a fright shortly after dozing off and spent the rest of the day in pensive silence.

    Now, Qingfang and Fei, as the third disciple turned out to be named, sat across from him.  A fire burned between the trio, made of burning dung at the end of the daylight hours.  They ripped at pieces of jerky in their hands.

    The more probing questions from earlier in the day had been satisfied with a meandering story involving a snake, a spooked horse, and a muddy puddle of snowmelt.  If the others were not convinced, they kept it to themselves.

    Pengfei was mostly silent while the other two chatted easily.  He silently relived the events that had transpired again and again in their hazy and jumbled details.

    --If Neng was here, or even Nanxi, I¡¯d probably be spilling my guts.--

    But there were still a few topics he could discuss without giving any of his secrets away.  One, in particular, that Pengfei thought would be safe to ask about.

    He interrupted the conversation between Qingfang and Fei, speaking loudly and distractedly.

    ¡°Have either of you heard of Thousand-Year Ginseng?¡±

    The two looked between each other, taken aback.  But Qingfang swallowed a bite of food and answered.

    ¡°It¡¯s a divine herb.  Cures disease, detoxifies poison, strengthens the body, and so on.  Supposedly, it can give you a decade¡¯s worth of internal energy.  Or more.¡±

    ¡°You mean, ten years-worth of qi, just from eating a plant?¡±

    ¡°Not just eating.  You would need to circulate your qi to absorb the energy into your dantian.  Let it flow through your meridians, break through blockages, and expel impurities.¡±

    ¡°I heard that when you take an elixir of high quality like that, you shit yourself.¡± Fei added.

    Qingfang tutted.  ¡°Don¡¯t be crass, Fei.¡±

    Pengfei eyed Horse, who grazed nearby and occasionally darted nimbly and playfully to some other tuft of grass.

    --Expel impurities?--  Pengfei thought back to the sweat that had come off of Horse while she laid unconscious in front of the canyon, the acrid smell of it.

    Fei interrupted the memory.  ¡°Let me know if you find one.  It could make an average fighter like me into a legend.  Third-rate to first-rate in the blink of an eye.¡±

    Qingfang tried to bolster his companion.  ¡°You don¡¯t need an elixir for that, Fei, you just need to put in the hard work.¡±

    ¡°Thanks.   It¡¯d be nice to have a shortcut though.¡±

    --Yeah, must be nice.--  Pengfei thought, looking to the mare prancing through the valley.

 Chapter 28 - Hotan

    ¡°What is that?¡± Chen Rulan asked.  He raised himself from the bench of the yak cart as the wooly beast pulled the wagon along the valley.

    ¡°Hmmm?¡±

    ¡°That.¡±  The elder squinted into the distance and pointed.  ¡°What is that?¡±

    Pengfei reluctantly took his eyes from the ridgeline and followed Elder Rulan¡¯s finger, saw something flapping in the wind ahead of them.

    ¡°Oh, that.  It¡¯s my tent, sir.¡± Pengfei recognized the canvas he had used to cover himself and his mount after the deadly encounter with Guoyu.

    ¡°Your tent?  What in blazes is it doing out here?¡±

    ¡°I camped out while surveying the valley for pastures.  I guess I forgot the tent when I went back to the bunkhouse.¡±

    ¡°You forgot the tent?¡±  The elder looked at Pengfei like he was a simpleton.  ¡°Just go and collect it, boy.¡±

    Pengfei kicked his heels gently into Horse¡¯s sides and she accelerated with a jarring burst of speed.

    ¡°Calm down!  You¡¯re being way too obvious!¡±  Pengfei shouted against the wind into the mare¡¯s ear.  He tried to rein her in, but the sheer power of the mount was overwhelming ever since she had consumed the Thousand-Year Ginseng.  The effects had become more pronounced in the days following the incident.

    He somehow pulled the mare to a halt, dismounted, and started folding up the discarded tent.  He worked slowly, struggling to gather the stiff material as it blew in the wind.  He was vaguely aware of the cart trundling up behind as he sent darting paranoid glances all around.

    ¡°They¡¯re gone.¡±  Chen Rulan said from the yak cart.

    Not understanding, Pengfei looked up as he stuffed the refuse he had collected into a saddle bag.  ¡°Who¡¯s gone, sir?¡±

    ¡°The Strangers.  The men in black robes.  They were spotted leaving the valley, back toward the Central Plains.  So, you can stop looking for them.¡±  The hulking man gazed down compassionately at Pengfei.  ¡°I shouldn¡¯t be talking about them with a disciple¡­ but you¡¯ve suffered at their hands more than the rest of us.¡±

    ¡°The Strangers¡­ right.  Thank you for telling me, Elder.¡±  Pengfei nodded.  He had heard this news from the now-dead Guoyu, but it was nice to have it confirmed.

    --That still leaves a couple dead bodies that I probably need to get rid of.  Not to mention the giant fucking leopard¡­ --

    He shot another nervous look up to the ridgeline.

    Once he was mounted again and they were moving north, Pengfei asked Chen Rulan, ¡°Do you think the Strangers will be back?¡±

    ¡°I doubt it.  I¡¯d say their main purpose was to keep an eye on us.  Block us from receiving any more disciples, perhaps.  They probably realized not much of interest will happen before our punishment ends and we return to Qinghai.¡±

    Pengfei nodded.  ¡°So¡­ we¡¯re done pretending they were just bandits?¡±

    Chen Rulan chuckled, stroking his black and grey beard.  ¡°You and I can dispense with the cover story, I think.  You¡¯ll have to forgive the Sect Leader for his secrecy.  He didn¡¯t want to frighten the other disciples.  Even though they were in no danger.  Those men would never have dared attack a member of Kunlun.¡±

    Pengfei arched his eyebrows but said nothing.

    --That man¡­ he was going to let me go, before he saw his brother¡¯s bag on my shoulder... if I hadn¡¯t picked that satchel up, Guoyu would still be alive.--

    Pengfei¡¯s mind reeled.  A tightness somewhere above his eyes.  Still no guilt or sadness, just the eeriness of happenstance, and a difficult adjustment to his new reality.

    --Killer¡­ I¡¯m a killer now¡­--

    He shook his head, as if that could clear the strangeness of it.

    ¡°Do you know much about the Strangers, sir?¡±

    ¡°Some.  As much as anyone else in the sect I suppose.¡±

    ¡°Last time I encountered one of them, I heard a strange language.  One that I had never heard before.¡± Pengfei was careful to phrase his speech so the elder would assume he referred to an earlier encounter.

    ¡°You heard their tongue?  They¡¯ve been so careful recently¡­ haven¡¯t caught any of it in quite a while.¡±

    Pengfei peered at the elder questioningly.  Chen Rulan looked to the disciple, to the valley, and back again, finally relenting.

    ¡°Those men¡­ they¡¯ve been in the valley a long time.  It¡¯s been a back and forth since they arrived.  They spy on us, we track them.  In the early days, they weren¡¯t as careful.  We could hear snippets of strange conversation when we got close.  But the past couple years¡­ just Mandarin.¡±

    ¡°Do you have any idea what language it was?¡±

    Chen Rulan shook his head.  ¡°Before Kunlun closed its gates, I traveled east to the sea and as far west as Samarkand.  I must have heard¡­ a hundred languages along the Desert Road.  And what the Strangers speak doesn¡¯t sound like any of them.¡±

    --Holy shit¡­-- Pengfei looked at the elder, seeing him in a new and unexpected light.

    ¡°What?¡±

    ¡°Sorry elder, I just never thought of you traveling like that.  I guess ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Hahaha, it¡¯s alright, it¡¯s alright.  Completely understandable.  But my brothers and I had our adventures, once upon a time.  We weren¡¯t always old men, locked up in a mountain, teaching martial arts to whelps.  Speaking of which, I think it¡¯s time you get some exercise.  Hop down from your saddle and let that horse rest.¡±

    ¡°Ugh¡­ yes, sir.¡±

    The mysteries of the Strangers and Kunlun¡¯s elders were put aside for more everyday affairs.  Pengfei untied the sword from his side and reached over to place it in the back of the cart with the food and supplies the elder had brought for their trip.  Then, the disciple slid to the ground and took up a stride that kept him in pace with the yak.

    Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Horse darted off immediately, stretching her legs and testing her speed.

    ¡°Has that mare always been so tall?¡± Rulan inquired.

    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±

    She sped by again, her hooves flicking up grass and dirt into the elder¡¯s surprised face.

    ******************************************************************************

    The pace was slower than Pengfei had expected but by the end of their first day of travel he was still further from the sect than he had been since joining.  By the third day, they left the familiar valley entirely and began a long descent from the mountain highlands into the desert basin below.

    The environment shifted rapidly.  What Kunlun called a river, flowing through their valley, was in reality not much more than a stream.  But as it flowed north it became a truly raging torrent, fed by the mountains and glaciers the travelers were leaving behind.  The yak and Horse carried them through alpine forest then grassy plain.  The air grew warmer as they neared the Taklamakan.

    --56¡­57¡­ wonder what kind of sights Hotan has to see¡­ 58¡­59¡­60--

    Pengfei stood from his push-ups, ran a hand across his sweaty brow.  The muscles of his chest spasmed slightly.

    ¡°Are you done?¡±  Chen Rulan asked from over the cooking fire.  They burned sticks and leaves instead of dried yak dung, now that the fuel was plentiful around them.

    ¡°Almost.  What¡¯s Hotan like?¡±

    ¡°Diverse.  Uyghurs, Tibetans, Mongols, Kazakhs, Han, you¡¯ll see them all there.  Trading and transporting sundries from every corner of the world.¡±  Chen Rulan spoke with more of that worldly authority that had captivated Pengfei recently.  ¡°Get back to it.¡±

    ¡°Elder, how are the other disciples managing without your kind guidance?¡±  Pengfei¡¯s sarcasm was good natured, and the elder answered with the same light heartedness as the boy bent to execute more repetitions.

    ¡°They are better served by Elder Chen Weidao¡¯s instruction now.  Our eminent swordsman.  Besides, I must tend to my remedial student.  Now, focus.¡±

    The elder set a pot on top a small fire and watched Pengfei as the water slowly crept toward a boil.  Horse and the yak milled about, free of saddle and yoke after a long day and many li traveled.  More casual spectators.

    Pengfei finished his calisthenics as the rice went in the pot.  Without prompting, he began the forms of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.

    The basic stances and strikes of the first form, then the footwork of the second.  As he had for the past several nights, he pictured Guoyu at the end of his blows.  He executed the techniques forcefully but each one felt too short, too slow.  Even when they did make contact with the imaginary opponent, the phantom refused to fall, just as it had been in real life.

    ¡°It looks disturbed.¡± Chen Rulan noted simply.

    ¡°I had a match recently¡­ it made me realize how weak I still am.¡±  Pengfei looked at his hands.  ¡°The techniques are rough and I feel like I lack power.¡±

    The elder just nodded, so the disciple asked, ¡°What can I do about it?¡±

    ¡°Use a sword instead.¡±

    The boy shook his head.

    --The sword¡­ I couldn¡¯t even keep a hold on it.  It definitely needs work.  But¡­--

    The flaws from his recent life-and-death battle ran through his thoughts.  The flailing of his fists, the impacts that had left no mark on his opponent.

    ¡°I need to improve the fist.¡±

    Chen Rulan sighed and took the pot of rice off the fire.  ¡°Some things will come with age.  You¡¯re tall, but you¡¯re still young.  You¡¯ll fill out, get stronger.  And as your technique improves, the blows will land harder.¡±

    The elder offered a bowl to Pengfei, but the boy made no move to take it.  Just stood, waiting expectantly.

    ¡°Hugggh¡­¡± Rulan sighed.  ¡°Where are you in your neigong practice now?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve begun circulating through the vessels of the major organs.¡±

    ¡°Alright.¡±  The elder set his own bowl down and stood, holding his palm up as a target.  ¡°Throw a straight punch.  Throw it hard.¡±

    Pengfei raised his fists.  Then he stepped forward and shot his right hand out as he moved, twisting his waist to put power behind his punch.  It made a loud clap against the elder¡¯s palm, but the man showed no sign of discomfort.

    ¡°Good.  Slower.¡±

    Pengfei repeated the strike, at half the speed.

    ¡°Slower.¡±

    He threw the same punch again and again, reducing the speed each time Chen Rulan commanded, until the motion proceeded at a snail¡¯s pace.  When Pengfei began another repetition, the elder spoke again.

    ¡°This time, bring your qi.  Just a drop.  Follow the path I show you.¡±

    The man placed his index finger on Pengfei¡¯s torso and moved it slowly as the boy followed.

    --I¡¯ve only done this in meditation.  How do I¡­?--

    The first time, he could not even find the small spark within himself.  His senses were occluded by reality.  But the instructor and the pupil repeated the exercise several times.  After more attempts, Pengfei could sense his internal world just beneath the external one.  The circuits within himself, as his body moved through space.

    ¡°To the Pericaridium Meridian, along the arm.¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s energy followed the elder¡¯s finger as he slowly extended the punch to complete the technique.  He felt the warmth in his wrist and hand as the qi reached the end of its journey.

    ¡°And now send it out.¡±

    Pengfei paused at the end of the strike then, then stood straight.  ¡°Send it out?¡±

    ¡°Like this.¡±

    Chen Rulan faced him, mirroring his stance.  With a deft movement, the elder raised his fist to his chest then shot it outwards at Pengfei¡¯s chest.

    <u>Thundering Sky Strike (lei tian quan ¨C </u><u>À×Ìì“ô</u><u>)</u>

    <u> </u>

    There was that heat in the air again, like standing too close to a bonfire.  Similar to the pressure exhibited by Guoyu, but more.  This was not just a sensation, there was real force exerted.  Even though the fist stopped short of actually making contact, Pengfei felt an undeniable impact slap his chest.  He stumbled backwards.

    ¡°You threw your qi at me!¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t be foolish.  It¡¯s not a ball to be tossed about.  I ¡®emitted¡¯ qi with my strike.¡±

    Pengfei nodded at the brief explanation, ¡°I read about this in the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ manual.  I didn¡¯t realize it was so ¨C ¡°

    Chen Rulan cut off the boy¡¯s awed tones.  ¡°Emitting qi, shooting it out with your attacks, is ¡­ dramatic.  But simpler than using it to reinforce or empower your own body.¡±

    ¡°Power¡­¡± Pengfei asked himself, ruminating on the nature of it.  The difference in raw strength when he had faced Guoyu.  Then to the elder, ¡°Is learning this enough to make me a 2<sup>nd</sup> rate?¡±

    ¡°Hahaha¡­no.  Heavens no.¡±

    ¡°What does it take?¡±

    ¡°If you ask different people you¡¯ll hear different answers.¡±  The elder returned to the fire and picked up his dinner again.  ¡°In general, to be considered 2<sup>nd</sup> rate you need to be able to use qi in your techniques, though what I just showed you is hardly enough to qualify.  At 1<sup>st</sup> rate, you must be able integrate the internal and external seamlessly.  Beyond that is murky.  But why do you ask?¡±

    ¡°Just curious.  And I¡¯d like to catch up to the rest of the Jin disciples at some point.¡±

    Chen Rulan shrugged.  ¡°Well, something like the ¡®Thundering Sky Strike¡¯ is a quick way to put some force in your attacks.  But don¡¯t focus on it too much.  Power should only aid your technique, never replace it.  Now, come eat before your food gets cold.¡±

    Pengfei reached for the qi in his dantian once again, saying to the elder.  ¡°Yes, sir.  I¡¯ll be right there.  Just a few more tries.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    They approached Hotan, passing through fields and farms irrigated by the river.  Copses of trees dotted their path but the more distant hills were dry and brown.  They could feel the desert closing in on them, but just out of sight.

    They reached the city early in the day, giving ample time for Pengfei to drown in culture shock.  The architecture was earthen clay and colorful tile mosaics.

    The region¡¯s Uyghurs were incredibly diverse in features.  Sometimes they appeared like they belonged to a far-flung corner of the earth; other times he recognized something in a face that he might have seen in his own hometown.

    Chen Rulan navigated the streets with practiced ease.  Pengfei could only ride behind the cart on the narrow lanes and stare at the elder¡¯s back.  So many questions popped into mind but had to go unanswered in the cacophony of the bustling oasis town.

    They arrived at an inn, or at least Pengfei took it to be an inn.  Elder Rulan dismounted the cart and entrusted it to a boy, with a few words of the local dialect.  The yak pulled the cart to a nearby barn, Horse trailing behind.  Luggage came inside and was passed off to the lady of the house, with more instructions spoken by the elder.  Seeing the man keep his weapon on his hip, the disciple did the same.

    ¡°Where to first?¡± Chen Rulan looked to Pengfei expectantly.

    ¡°What?  Why are you asking me, sir?¡±

    ¡°The Sect Leader entrusted this task to you.  I¡¯m just here to facilitate.  I know the lay of the land, but the business is up to you.¡±

    Pengfei looked up and down the street as he considered.  ¡°I have a friend in town somewhere.  I¡¯d like to reach out, get her advice about the horse market.  Do you know where to find the Tibetan community?¡±

    ¡°When big groups come through here, they usually camp outside town to the west.  It¡¯s a bit late in the day to make the trip, I¡¯d leave it until tomorrow if possible.¡±

    ¡°Okay, then...¡± Pengfei ran down the long mental list of goods and services he had constructed over the past month.  ¡°Let¡¯s go see the leatherworkers and blacksmiths.¡±

    Thirty saddles in three months, another one hundred and seventy over the following three years.  It was the type of order that would almost never be seen in the civilian community.  Those numbers were in the province of governments and militaries.

    But it was not just the tanners and leatherworkers who balked at the orders.  The blacksmiths, carpenters, and grain houses were similarly stunned.  But there was no shortage of merchants in Hotan.  Once Chen Rulan had an idea of what was required, he was able to negotiate between several shops to obtain the best prices and an early delivery date.

    No money changed hands directly.  Since the elder worked as translator, some of the details were lost to Pengfei.  He got the impression a local firm managed a portion of Kunlun¡¯s assets, that they would satisfy any obligations incurred by the sect.

    But Pengfei could not use these unknown financial brokers for his next bit of ¡®personal¡¯ business.  He accompanied the elder back to the inn after the day¡¯s haggling was concluded, then obtained permission to explore the immediate area on his own.

    He retrieved a string of coins from his personal belongings.  The funds that Jin Nanxi had entrusted to him for the illicit purchase of alcohol.

    It had taken more than an hour to find a tavern.  Apparently, the dominant religion did not make allowances for spirits, but Pengfei found some eventually.  He only dared to buy a single case since it would need to be transported back by the yak cart.  Any more than that would surely be noticed by Elder Rulan.

    Pengfei was impatient to test the product and took one of the clay jars for himself that evening.  He climbed the outside of the inn¡¯s barn and sat atop the roof.

    --Colder than I thought the desert would be.--

    He still wore his thick coat, but let it hang open in a crisp breeze.  The sun was setting and in the dim light he could see desert sands hanging in the air, over the town to the north.

    He sipped the wine lazily, with one hand on the hilt of his sword, feeling like a hero.  But when he thought of seeing Pema the next day he began to sweat against the cold.

    --I hope she¡¯s happy to see me.--

    He took another sip of wine and tried to recapture the bravado he had felt just a moment ago.

 Chapter 29 - Horses and Lamas

    Chen Rulan had procured a horse of his own.  Just a loan, for use in the city and the surrounding areas.  A Tibetan colt, grey.  The animal¡¯s youthful energy was a good match for Pengfei¡¯s recently reinvigorated mare.  The mounts nipped at each other playfully, to the consternation of their riders.

    It only took an hour to reach the outskirts of Hotan where the Tibetan¡¯s wintered.  Two young boys rode out to greet them as the Kunlun elder and disciple crossed onto their land.  Master Rulan displayed proficiency in yet another language and the boys waved for them to follow.

    They were taken to a cluster of large tents, where livestock of all types milled about.  A flap opened as they approached and Pema stepped into the midmorning sun.

    --Damn, she is beautiful!--

    Pengfei¡¯s¡­ appreciation¡­ for the girl had only deepened since the last time he had seen her.  He never even considered whether it was the prolonged isolation from the opposite gender, a natural phase for a boy his age, or a more pure and genuine affection.  He just reveled in it.

    ¡°What are you doing here!?¡± Pema yelled out happily as she recognized the guests.

    Pengfei waved back but waited until they were closer to respond.

    ¡°Hello Pema.  It¡¯s good to see you.¡±  He dismounted and greeted her with awkward politeness, restraining himself from anything less formal in front of the elder and Pema¡¯s kinsman.  ¡°We¡¯ve come to Hotan on business, and I thought your family might be able to help.  Hoping to buy some horses.¡±

    ¡°We can certainly help with that.  My father knows every seller in the region.¡±

    Pema called behind her to the tent and a middle-aged man emerged.  Pengfei recognized his face from when the Tibetan clan had passed through Kunlun¡¯s valley three months ago.  Long overdue introductions were made.

    ¡°This is my father, Dorje.¡±

    Chen Rulan was able to greet the man in his own language while Pengfei bowed silently.

    ¡°Do you know what you¡¯re looking for?¡± Pema asked.

    ¡°Kazakhs.  Thirty-head for now.  Ready to ride.  And another four hundred in three years.¡±

    The girl gaped at Pengfei¡¯s words and her father exclaimed immediately upon hearing the translation.  He spoke hurriedly, addressing the elder, while Pema translated for the disciple¡¯s benefit.

    ¡°My father wishes to know if you are aware of the cost¡­ this is not an easy thing.  The horses from the west are ¨C¡°

    ¡°The funds are not a problem.¡±  Chen Rulan reassured the parent and child.

    More words flowed between the Tibetans.  Then Dorje retrieved a saddle from his tent and made ready to ride one of the nearby mounts.

    ¡°We will take you to see a man.  If you wish my father to negotiate on your behalf, he asks for a commission on whatever money you save below market price.¡±

    Pengfei thought it was fair and was pleased to see Chen Rulan nod his assent as well.

    Dorje led them back to the road and then to the west.  The men rode side-by-side and spoke, allowing Pema and Pengfei to ride behind and carry on their own conversation.

    ¡°What is going on with her?  She¡¯s at least a hand taller than last time I saw her.¡± Pema nodded at Horse.

    He gave a look to make sure Elder Rulan was sufficiently distracted, but in the end he still didn¡¯t want to risk it.

    Pengfei whispered to Pema, ¡°I¡¯ll tell you later.¡±

    ¡°You look bigger too.  More muscular at least.  Are we allowed to talk about that?¡±

    ¡°Haha¡­ sure.  But it¡¯s less interesting.  Just exercise and a lot of goat meat.¡±

    ¡°It suits you.  You almost look like a man.  How old are you now?¡±

    He winced at the word ¡®almost¡¯ but accepted the compliment.  ¡°I guess I¡¯m fifteen now.  What month is it?¡±

    Pema shrugged.

    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.

    They talked of inconsequential things and Pengfei found himself smiling the entire time.  It was a welcome relief from the strange malaise he had been in since his encounter in the canyon.

    They came over a hill and found a herd of horses grazing around another river.  Dorje was already riding up to one of the keepers.

    ¡°Anything else new with you?¡± Pengfei asked as an awkward silence fell between the pair.

    ¡°My father is trying to marry me off again.  It¡¯s becoming quite bothersome.¡±  Pema clicked to her horse and trotted to join Dorje and Chen Rulan with the horse merchants.  She looked back at Pengfei and called out happily, ¡°Come on!¡±

    --Married?!  Shit!  I guess she is that age, but¡­ shit.--

    Pengfei tried his best to hide the shock Pema¡¯s words had given him.  He smiled through the pain and trotted after her.

    ******************************************************************************

    They spent two days on negotiations and still didn¡¯t conclude matters definitively.  But the most immediate concerns were taken care of.  Pengfei rode through the herd with Pema, Dorje, and the Kazakh merchant.  Pengfei and the Tibetans pointed out thirty mares and geldings to take back to the sect in the late spring.  As the final choices were made, the merchant set his hired hands to branding the chosen horses, marking them so they¡¯d be recognized as the property of Kunlun, then came back to the buyers.  Chen Rulan rode up to join the discussion as well.

    ¡°For the larger purchase, we want eighty geldings, eighty mares.  For the rest, I want fillies and colts.  Definitely nothing more than six years old. Ratio of 7:2, female to male, at least.¡±

    Pema translated Pengfei¡¯s words to her father, who nodded approvingly, then translated them again into Kazakh for the merchant.

    Eventually, an agreement came back down the chain.  Pema delivered the terms.

    ¡°He can guarantee two hundred at least, but he will have to meet his cousin in the summer to discuss the rest.  He will know for sure by next winter.  And you¡¯ll have to take delivery within a week of their arrival.  They don¡¯t have enough land here for that many.¡±

    Pengfei was satisfied but looked to Chen Rulan for final confirmation.  The elder nodded his assent and shook hands with the Kazakh merchant.  When the deal was concluded, the Taoist master congratulated Pengfei.

    ¡°You did well, I think the Patriarch will be happy.  We should celebrate tonight.¡±

    ¡°Thank you, Elder.  But Pema offered to show me the desert¡­Would it be alright if I went with her?¡±

    Chen Rulan gave a glance to Dorje, who was still talking animatedly with the merchant, but then nodded to Pengfei.

    ¡°Fine, as long as you can find your way back to the inn.  Don¡¯t be too late, we need to leave early in the morning.  Back to Kunlun.¡±

    ¡°Yes sir.¡±

    Pema shouted something to her father, who waved her off distractedly, then the two teenagers galloped to the north.  They followed the river through the fields until the soft earth turned to rock beneath the horse¡¯s hooves.

    They dismounted and let their animals drink.

    ¡°Does the river flow all the way through to the north side of the desert?¡±  Pengfei asked.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡±  Pema spoke candidly and smiled at him.  ¡°Maybe I¡¯ll follow it someday and find out.¡±

    Pengfei reached into one of his saddle bags and brought out a jar of the alcohol he had purchased.  He took a drink and handed it to Pema.

    ¡°Wasn¡¯t I supposed to bring you alcohol?¡±  When the Tibetan nomads had passed through the valley on the way to Hotan, Pengfei had asked her to bring back as much wine as she could manage.  He chuckled now at the memory.

    ¡°The request still stands.  By the time your family comes back through the valley, me and my friends will have drunk everything I bought.¡±

    She took a long swig and wiped her lips.  ¡°Alright.  So, are you going to tell me what happened with your horse now?¡±

    ¡°I named her Horse by the way ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Awful.¡±

    ¡° ¨C and it¡¯s a long story.  Let¡¯s get moving first.¡±

    They got back into their saddles and headed east, along the northern edge of Hotan.  The rocky earth gave way to hard packed sand as they moved farther from the river, and then to dunes.  The true Taklamakan experience.

    The horses plodded along the crests of the dunes and the winds whipped the grains of sand around their hooves in mesmerizing chaotic displays.

    Pengfei told Pema about his trip through the valley, the canyon.  Finding the dead body and the subsequent confrontation with Guoyu.  And of course, the Thousand Year Ginseng.

    She grimaced and gasped at the appropriate moments, laughed when he explained how Horse had stolen the elixir for herself, and stared in wonderment at the description of the Mountain King.

    They paused at the top of a dune and looked out over a sea of sand, passing the jar of wine back and forth between each other.

    ¡°Ma Feng can rest easy now.  I¡¯ll rest easier too, knowing those bastards have left my mountains.¡±  Pema smiled at him.  ¡°How do you feel about it all?¡±

    --Feel¡­ how do I feel?  Hell if I know.--

    For Pema, he made an effort to voice his ambivalence.  ¡°I don¡¯t think I feel the way I¡¯m supposed to feel.  I don¡¯t feel happy that I got revenge.  I don¡¯t feel angry that I was attacked, or upset that I killed someone.  Just confused.¡±

    The Tibetan girl shrugged.  ¡°I think there are some things in life that you can¡¯t figure out.  You just have to get used to them.  Let¡¯s head back.¡±

    Pema leaned in and kissed Pengfei¡¯s cheek.  Then she turned her horse back toward the town and lead the way down the sandy dune.

    ******************************************************************************

    For the first time since the canyon, Pengfei¡¯s dreams were free of Guoyu¡¯s face.  Instead, they were filled with sand and wine, and over too soon.  Chen Rulan jostled him awake before the sun rose and the pair dressed for the day¡¯s ride.

    The young boy who worked as groom at the inn was nowhere to be seen, so Pengfei saddled Horse himself as the elder checked some of the goods in the back of the yak cart.  The disciple watched closely, ready to deny any knowledge of the case of alcohol if it should be discovered, but it never came to that.

    However, Pengfei did catch sight of something interesting.  In his last checks, Elder Rulan opened a box containing a pair of weapons.  Two short sabers.  Somewhere between butcher¡¯s knives and swords, really.  Single edged, fat blades, about the length of a forearm.  One curved quillion ran along the spine of each blade, another would guard the front of the hands.

    ¡°Where did those come from?¡± Pengfei inquired.

    ¡°I requested them while we were visiting the blacksmith.  A little side project of mine.¡±

    The elder shut the box and took his place at the reins of the cart, ready to begin the journey back to the sect.

    The streets were already busy by the time they left the stables and Pengfei had to ride behind the cart again.  Most of the traffic was against them as merchants and customers made their way towards the center of town.

    On the outskirts, they met a group of young men in red robes.  About Pengfei¡¯s age, with hair even shorter, more recently shaved.  They stopped in the road to converse with Elder Rulan.  The words were obscured as other pedestrians began to shout at the obstruction on the thoroughfare, but Pengfei recognized the language to be Tibetan.

    Elder Rulan looked back to Pengfei, then turned back to the group in red, waving his hands in some sort of contradiction.  The group bowed to the elder and continued on their way, eyeing Pengfei menacingly as they passed.

    It was half an hour before the disciple could ride next to the cart instead of behind it.

    ¡°Who were those guys?¡± he asked.  ¡°They looked like monks.¡±

    ¡°Yes, lamas from a Tibetan monastery.  They¡¯ll travel into Mongol territory after the winter.¡±

    ¡°What did they want?¡±

    ¡°To fight you.¡±

    Pengfei was taken aback.  He looked over his shoulder but there was no sign of the red-robed young men.  ¡°Why would they want to fight me?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know.  But I told them we were in a hurry today.¡±

    ¡°Thanks for that.¡±

    ¡°And I told them you would be back in a few months for the first thirty horses.  That they could fight you then.¡±

    ¡°¡­ Thanks for that.¡±

 Chapter 30 - Elder Weidaos Disciple

    Nanxi attacked and Pengfei defended.  The straight punches were easy to parry.  Pengfei responded with the same tactic but when his opponent blocked, he trapped the hand and came over the top with a backfist, stopping the blow before it made contact with the nose.

    Nanxi sighed in acknowledgement of his little defeat, but continued sparring.  They went back and forth across the main courtyard of Kunlun¡¯s practice ground, each landing blows ranging in power from light taps to the face and head to gut-wrenching thumps to the body.

    The boys gritted their teeth and exhaled when absorbing the harder impacts and hissed out with each strike they threw.

    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s it for today!¡± Chen Rulan called an end to the sparring and the training session as a whole.

    Pengfei and Nanxi walked towards the Dining Hall, both breathing hard but upright after a particularly grueling training session.  The commands of Elders Rulan and Weidao had pushed all the Jin disciples, but they had also pushed each other.  As their strength and stamina improved under the increased training regimen of the recent months, they found themselves able to fight longer and harder.  Competitive spirit drove them to use their new attributes in fiercer bouts with each other.

    ¡°You¡¯re an asshole.¡±  Nanxi puffed.

    ¡°What did I do?¡±

    ¡°You got better.  Now there¡¯s one less person whose ass I can regularly beat.¡±

    Pengfei didn¡¯t credit it, and argued with Nanxi, ¡°I¡¯m just in better shape now.¡±

    ¡°No, it¡¯s more than that.  You don¡¯t retreat as much anymore.  It¡¯s harder to push you around now.¡±

    Pengfei hadn¡¯t noticed it himself but had to concede Nanxi was right.  In the past, he had struggled with range.  Either trying to dance out of every attack¡¯s reach, constantly backpedaling, or charging ahead forcefully to close the distance.  Both had disadvantages.

    But today he stood more naturally in that middle ground, trading attack and defense fluidly.

    --What¡¯s changed?  I guess standing my ground isn¡¯t as scary when it¡¯s a friend instead of someone trying to beat me to death.--

    He comforted Nanxi at his own expense, ¡°Well, at least I still suck at swordsmanship.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s true, you are reliably awful at that.¡±

    The rest of the usual group joined them for dinner.  Xiaotong tried his best to replenish the chubby cheeks he had lost by piling an enormous amount of food on his plate.  Shutian was more gaunt than ever, but seemed no more miserable than usual.  The twins, Tianwei and Tianxun, were as unchanged as they were silent, constants of nature.

    ¡°You lot aren¡¯t sneaking out again, are you?¡± Neng asked as he sat down with his own portion of dinner.

    Pengfei looked at the others.  Nanxi nodded excitedly, which meant the twins would follow as well.  Hearing no objections from Xiaotong and Shutian, he was forced to disappoint his friend.

    ¡°Yeah, I think we will.¡±

    Neng sighed with mock disappointment.  ¡°You guys need to concentrate on your training.¡±

    ¡°Tomorrow¡¯s our day off.  Besides, this will probably be the last of it.  You sure you don¡¯t want to join us?¡±

    ¡°Forget it, Pengfei.  Neng is one of our generation¡¯s geniuses, you won¡¯t be able to tempt him.¡±  Nanxi cut in, then whispered sarcastically behind the back of his hand.  ¡°I hear he sleeps with his training sword!¡±

    The entire table, even Neng, chuckled.  But there was a kernel of truth to Nanxi¡¯s joke.  Neng was clearly devoted to learning the jian.  He continued to excel at barehanded techniques as well, still Pengfei¡¯s superior there, but the gap had narrowed in recent months.  On the other hand, their differences in skill with the sword had only become more pronounced.

    Annoyingly, Pengfei couldn¡¯t attribute the change in his friend to any one fact.  Yes, Neng had been well ahead of him to start with.  And yes, Neng was talented.  And yes, he clearly worked hard.  It seemed he was even skipping the daily neigong practice to train swordsmanship on his own.  His absences in the Veneration Hall could no longer be ignored by the rest of the disciples.

    But it was more that that.  Plenty of other disciples had innate ability, and put in the hours, but few had the same noticeable rise in skill.  The change was detectable even to Pengfei¡¯s amateur eye.

    --I¡¯m losing on all fronts.¡ª

    There was a hint of jealousy, only natural when looking at greatness.

    ******************************************************************************

    Any ill feelings were forgotten by the time the boys were donning their coats, sneaking outside into the dark. The rules were laxer on the sixth night of the week, preceding the day of rest.  The elders turned a blind eye to carousing, within reason.  But the disciples still had to make some minimum effort to avoid detection, even if it was just for appearances¡¯ sake.

    Snow was falling, the heaviest so far this year.  Their breaths steamed like fire pouring out of the mouths of demons.  Pengfei faced off against Tianwei and Tianxun, while the others sat on rocks watching the mock fight.

    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

    One twin took the horse stance and the other hopped onto his brother¡¯s shoulders.  They even spoke in coordination, a departure from their usual silence.

    ¡°You cannot defeat the ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Twin ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Dragons ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Ascending to ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Heaven!¡±

    Their little tower teetered as Tianwei took two steps forward, Tianxun trying to balance on his brother¡¯s shoulders with hands out in a dramatic guard.

    Pengfei toppled them both with a weak push kick to the base.  They all laughed, made more merry by the jar of wine being passed around.

    ¡°You actually bought the horses¡­ that¡¯s great!¡±  Nanxi held the jar out to Pengfei.  ¡°I guess you officially have a new job.  Do you have a title?  Master of the Horse Hall?¡±

    Pengfei took a long drink then wiped his mouth on his sleeve.  ¡°Master sounds good.  Remember to call me that when you¡¯re working under me.  I¡¯m going to tell the Sect Leader that I¡¯ll need your help.  If you guys are still willing.¡±

    Everyone present nodded, though Shutian grumbled as he did so.

    ¡°I guess this means we¡¯ll be spending more time outside, freezing our asses off.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, probably.¡±  Pengfei conceded.  ¡°You¡¯ll need to learn to ride, but that¡¯s just for starters.  Getting the animals to move how we want will take practice.  I don¡¯t have much experience with herding, so we¡¯ll have to figure it out together over the next few years, before we make the big move to Qinghai.¡±

    ¡°What about Neng?¡± Xiaotong asked.

    ¡°I¡¯ll check again tomorrow.  But he doesn¡¯t think Chen Weidao will let him go.¡±

    Neng, the only one of their cadre who lived in a different dormitory, was also the only one absent from the drinking party.  The boy kept a strict schedule, and it had only gotten stricter since beginning to work under Elder Weidao in the Scripture Hall.

    ¡°So, if we work with you, does that mean we¡¯ll go to Hotan to pick up the first thirty horses in the spring?¡±  Nanxi¡¯s eyes flashed with unrestrained glee.

    ¡°Probably.¡±

    ¡°And while Nanxi is out drinking and whoring we¡¯ll all be getting our asses kicked by those Tibetan lamas.  What¡¯s the deal with them again?¡±

    Pengfei just shrugged at Shutian¡¯s question.  He had told them all about the events in Hotan.  Pema¡¯s kiss in the desert had prompted jealous hisses from the others, but the aggressive monks had confused them as much as Pengfei.

    The other details of his journey he had kept to himself.  The fight with Guoyu.  The man¡¯s death.  The Mountain King.

    Pengfei took a long drink from the jar of wine and passed it along to the others.  His eyes lost focus and he stared out over the mountains, in his own world.

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei directed his internal energy through the circuits of his body, through the meridians corresponding to the five major organs and their paired opposites.  The instruction had gone slowly in the beginning but as he learned to direct his qi, Elder Chen Lei coached him through larger portions of ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ each week.

    ¡°You¡¯ve completed the basics.¡±  The man pronounced, standing from the mat on the floor.  ¡°The more you practice, the more internal energy you will accumulate.  You still have quite a lot of catching up to do in that regard.  Any questions?¡±

    ¡°No, sir¡±

    Pengfei stood as well.  The disciples of the Medicine Hall worked busily on projects that Chen Lei had assigned them.  Their activity had been a distraction in previous weeks, the teacher and student had needed to seclude themselves from the little noise there was.  But as Pengfei¡¯s neigong and concentration improved, he had been able to work in the open more easily.

    ¡°Have you begun using qi in your martial arts yet?¡± the elder asked.

    ¡°A little.  Elder Chen Rulan has been helping me with the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist.¡¯¡±

    ¡°You can try experimenting a bit with your neigong.  Circulate through the Yang meridians six times, the Yin meridians four.  Try it for a month or two, but don¡¯t make it a permanent change.  It¡¯ll be educational to see the effects on the empty-hand, but it¡¯s not optimal for the sword.  Speaking of educational¡­¡±

    Chen Lei called out to his medical students.  ¡°All of you, gather round.¡±

    ¡°I won¡¯t disturb you any further, sir.  I¡¯ll just ¨C ¡° Pengfei made a quick bow and began slipping away as the doctor waved the others over, but a hand draped over his shoulder, holding him in place.

    --Shit.  What is it going to be this time?  These lessons always have a price¡­--

    Chen Lei stood at the fore, as the other disciples observed their unwilling test subject placidly.  The elder now spoke as if Pengfei weren¡¯t even alive, just a dummy for the practice of acupuncture and herbal remedies.

    ¡°As you may recall, examining someone¡¯s internal energy can lead to useful diagnoses.  For example, the turbid qi from this disciple has revealed an overindulgence in alcohol.¡±

    --Shit.--

    ¡°So, let¡¯s treat the poison for what it is.  I¡¯d like you all to prepare a draught for detoxification of the blood.  Pengfei will drink each, and we will observe the results.¡±

    --Shit!--

    Pengfei¡¯s curses turned out to be prophetic.  The different remedies concocted by the students purged the toxins from his body in various undignified ways.  A stinking, black, sweat was the least unpleasant.  He was rendered physically exhausted by the time he left the Medicine Hall in mid-afternoon, wishing that Elder Chen Lei had just reported to Discipline Hall instead.

    He made his way toward the Dining Hall in order to replenish his bodily fluids.  As he was about to enter, he saw Neng out of the corner of his eye, walking through the sect carrying a training sword.

    --Still need to ask him if he wants to join our ¡®Horse Hall¡¯.  Where¡¯s he going?--

    Pengfei followed Neng through the buildings, walking a bit quicker than usual to catch up.  But they didn¡¯t come within earshot of each other until Neng had reached his destination.

    ¡°Hey.  What are you doing at the Scripture Hall?¡±

    ¡°Ah, Pengfei, I¡¯m just ¨C ¡°

    Chen Weidao opened the door of the library and stepped out, interrupting the conversation.

    ¡°Neng, you¡¯re late.¡±

    ¡°Forgive me, elder.¡±  Pengfei saluted, speaking up for his friend.  ¡°I didn¡¯t mean to keep Neng from his duties in the Scirpture Hall.¡±

    ¡°Duties?¡±  The elder repeated.  ¡°Training under one¡¯s master is more than a duty.  It¡¯s an honor and privilege that should not suffer the discourtesy of tardiness.¡±

    Neng bowed penitently as Pengfei sputtered in surprise.  ¡°Master?  You¡¯re¡­ I¡¯m sorry, I didn¡¯t know.¡±

    He stemmed the flow of disjointed words spilling out of his lips as the realization came slowly, working its way through the surprise that clouded his mind.  The elder had taken Neng as his direct disciple.

    There had been talk that some of the boys had been assigned to their jobs in the sect because the supervisors wished pass on their martial arts.  And Elder Weidao had seemed to pay special attention to Neng¡¯s training in the evenings.

    --Being taken as a direct disciple is a big deal¡­ why didn¡¯t Neng tell me?--

    Pengfei bowed to the elder, who then turned back to the Scripture Hall.  Neng took a step to follow, but then looked back to Pengfei.

    ¡°He offered while you were gone.  I was going to tell you, I just ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it.  He¡¯s supposed to be the best swordsman in the sect, and you¡¯re one of the top disciples.  It makes sense.¡±

    ¡°I guess so.¡±

    ¡°So, you¡¯re probably not going to be able to switch jobs with the rest of us?  Your master will probably want you to stay close.¡±

    ¡°He made it pretty clear that I have to stay in the Scripture Hall.¡±

    ¡°Damn¡­ ¡°

    ¡°Yeah¡­¡±  Neng looked back at the impatient Chen Weidao who stood in the doorway. ¡°I better go.¡±  The boy nodded a goodbye and went to join his master.  They both disappeared into the library, undoubtedly to pass on the advanced and secret teachings the swordsman had accrued over a lifetime of dedication to the blade.

    --I¡¯m not jealous at all.--  Pengfei said to himself sarcastically and left the pair to their training.

    He meandered through the sect grounds.  Even though the man was his savior, even though he had seen the elder¡¯s prowess firsthand, Pengfei had never truly imagined or desired studying under Chen Weidao directly.  But there was still a tinge of jealousy there.

    --Doesn¡¯t feel good to be passed over like this.  And now it feels like the jian is farther away than ever¡­  always seemed like there was something else to do before I could commit to it fully.  Empty-hand techniques, neigong, this stupid horse project of the Patriarch¡­ I guess it¡¯s too late now.  Too late to study under Chen Weidao, anyway.  Elder Rulan said this would happen¡­--

    He thought back to his punishment at the cliffs.  Elder Rulan had come to him in the cave.  Warned him that the training at the sect would increase in intensity, that he was in danger of being left behind.

    --It¡¯s not as bad as all that.  I¡¯m doing better every day at my barehanded techniques.  My progress isn¡¯t as noticeable now that everyone is training just as hard, but the sword will probably come along eventually.  I could be average, at least.--

    He kicked at a rock on the path in front of him as he wandered without a destination.

    --Average.  Nothing wrong with average.¡ª

    --¡­--

    --So, why does it feel so crappy?--

 Chapter 31 - Qinggong

    ¡°Qinggong has many different styles, focused on several different purposes.  Speed, stealth, combat, and so on.  I don¡¯t think speed is going to be your strong point, Pengfei.¡±

    ¡°Yes¡­ sir.¡± He panted, responding politely as possible to Elder Chen Ji.  He coiled himself up and prepared for the jump to the next rock.

    The rest of the Discipline Hall had left him behind.  Only the elder stayed by his side.  The man bounded lightly along the path, leaping from one dry spot in the snow to the next.  Clean, graceful, dignified.  On the other hand, Pengfei¡¯s robes were damp and muddy as he slogged through the snow that now covered the mountain paths.

    The disciple lacked the skill in movement techniques necessary to bridge the long gaps between the uncovered rocks.  Kept finding himself sinking into puddles of snowmelt

    He leapt again, fell short again, landing ankle deep in watery slush.

    ¡°Dammit!¡±

    He climbed up to the small ledge he had been aiming for and hunched over to catch his breath.  He experienced the unpleasant sensation of simultaneously shivering and sweating.

    ¡°Not enough concentration on the meridians in your legs.¡±  Chen Ji noted.

    ¡°It¡¯s too much to keep track of.¡±  Pengfei complained.  ¡°I can¡¯t keep it straight in my head.¡±

    Chen Ji nodded with a smile.  ¡°You¡¯re doing fine for your first time.¡±

    --At least he¡¯s in one of his good moods.  For now.--

    Pengfei concentrated on his movement technique, determined to return to the sect before the elder¡¯s demeanor changed and arbitrary punishments rained down.  He ran through the steps again.

    --Breath in, circulating the energy inside the dantian with each inhale.--

    He felt the qi inside him move off its natural course under his will.  Felt as the weight pressing down on his toes seemed to lighten ever so slightly.  He took a few more breaths until he was sure of the sensation.

    --Utilize the appropriate meridians for each step¡­--

    He looked up to the next outcropping on the path, a straight shot forward.  He focused on the Yang meridians running down the backs of his legs and made ready to jump.

    --Now put it all together with the movement.--

    Pengfei released all the tension at once, springing ahead with a jumping step.  His foot just barely reached the target and he had to scramble to stay in place above the dirty snow.  But as he landed, his hamstring cramped horribly.

    ¡°You can¡¯t lose focus.  You must continue to push the energy through the meridians even after you step.¡±  Chen Ji chided.

    Pengfei accepted the correction.  ¡°I had no idea qinggong was so complicated.¡±

    ¡°Yes.  It¡¯s one of the most important skills for someone in the Discipline Hall.  Someone always tries to run from their well-deserved punishment.¡±

    --That might just be the effect you have on people.--

    But Pengfei just nodded and continued his way back up the mountain to the sect.  Each step was a struggle for him but Chen Ji just watched his trials placidly.  The disciple took deep breaths in between each lunge, manipulating the distribution of weight with the qi in his dantian.  Then he channeled energy to the appropriate vessels.  The Stomach Merdian for certain movements, Liver for others, depending on speed, distance, and direction.

    --I thought it would be simple¡­ just put qi in the legs.  Now I understand why the technique manual was so thick.--

    The elder maintained his affable patience all the way up the mountain path.  But Pengfei was still miserable by the time they reached the main compound again.  He was wet, cold, hungry, and had certainly missed lunch.  Chen Ji didn¡¯t even allow him to go searching for leftovers in the Dining Hall, just hurried him back to where the others were already waiting.

    Xiaotong was rubbing his belly contentedly, and a pang of jealousy washed over Pengfei.

    --Well-fed son-of-a-bitch.--

    As he joined the five other disciples, Jin Fan called out ¡°What took you so long?¡±

    Pengfei waved off the severe-faced disciple¡¯s question and joined the group, stumbling and huffing.  He picked up his heavy coat from where he had left it, in front of the building, and argued with himself about whether to put it on or not.  His body had still not decided what temperature it was.  Winter cold won in the end, and he donned the jacket.

    Chen Ji spoke to them all.  ¡°The Discipline Hall.  We maintain order within the sect.  Chase down those who run with our qinggong.  But once we catch them, we must subdue them.  Bring our brothers back unharmed to atone for their transgressions.  For this purpose, the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯ is ideal.  Shutian, come up here.¡±

    The disciple joined the elder in front of the rest.  Shutian seemed to be a favorite of Chen Ji, frequently chosen to help demonstrate techniques.  The clear preference might be enough to arouse jealousy in the other disciples, but not today. Suddenly, all the boys were happy to let Shutian take the honor.

    ¡°These techniques are designed to break bones and tear tendons, but if you¡¯re feeling generous you can restrict them to pain-compliance.  For example, - ¡°

    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    Elder Ji reached out to his unprepared assistant, grabbed the meat of the boy¡¯s thumb, then turned the hand against the wrist.  The disciple yelped, winced, and pedaled backward to relieve the pressure.  Then Chen Ji turned the wrist in another direction, lifting until the elbow went up at a strange angle and Shutian was hopping on his tip toes.  They moved like that through several techniques, an undignified dance of pain.

    ¡°Ow, ow, ow!¡±

    ¡°Practice the first of these techniques.¡± The head of the Discipline Hall instructed.  ¡°And try not to break each other¡¯s arms.¡±

    Jin Fan was already stretching his wrists, preparing them for the painful contortions ahead.  The boy stepped up to Pengfei and arched an eyebrow, a silent request to partner together.  Pengfei nodded.

    ******************************************************************************

    The chopsticks quaked in his hands.  Xiaotong and Shutian, across from him at the table in the Dining Hall, were in a similar state.  It was probably the same for all the disciples of the Discipline Hall, but Pengfei had lost track of the rest.

    First, the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯ and then the sword training in the evening had taxed his forearms well past the point of exhaustion.  The stretching and tweaking of the joint lock techniques had made the jian that much harder to manipulate, made the wooden sword feel that much heavier.  And Chen Weidao had been particularly sadistic that evening.

    Hundreds of cuts, delivered from every angle, until the weapon had fallen from his grip and clattered on the stone of the practice yard.  A faux pas that had not gone unnoticed.

    And now he could only attempt the agony of bringing the night¡¯s meal to his mouth.

    ¡°Nanxi¡­ feed me.  Please.¡±  Pengfei begged, half joking, half serious.

    ¡°You wouldn¡¯t like what I fed you.¡±

    ¡°Ugh.¡±

    The rest of the table laughed, Neng standing from the table as he chuckled, ¡°I¡¯ll see you guys later.  I need to go meet Elder Weidao.¡±

    Pengfei waved his friend off, watched the boy head out the door toward the Scripture Hall and whatever training Master Weidao had in store at the end of another grueling day.  Neng had been more upfront with the group about his discipleship, but the details of his training were still a tightly guarded secret.

    --Probably learning to slice mountains in half or fly on the back of his sword or some equally ridiculous feat.--

    Pengfei huffed, still mildly jealous of his friend.  Jealous of him, and the others of the Jin generation who had been taken as direct disciples.  It was most notable at meals, or when the Jin gathered together to practice their neigong in the Veneration Hall.  These were the times when masters stole their students away from the pack and passed on their private teachings.  Judging by the space at the tables, about a third of the boys had been snatched up by the elders.

    ¡°It feels pretty crappy not being chosen.¡± Pengfei voiced his inner thoughts as he looked around the sparsely populated Dining Hall.

    ¡°At least you have an excuse.  You just got here, you don¡¯t know shit.  Think how us poor bastards feel.¡±  Xiaotong¡¯s voice was light and breezy, despite his self-deprecation.  He dropped a morsel of goat meat from his trembling utensils and sighed.

    Nanxi waved off the concerns. ¡°It¡¯s not a big deal.  Most of the elders just won¡¯t bother to recruit disciples.  If there¡¯s something in particular you want to learn, you can just ask.  No need to bother with the master/disciple nonsense.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m going to just stick to the basic training.  Anything else sounds like a pain in the ass.¡±  Shutian announced amid his own struggles with the meal.  Tianwei and Tianxun nodded in agreement.

    Nanxi set his bowl down and eyed his fellows impatiently.  ¡°How long are you guys going to be?  I want to go mess around before curfew.¡±

    The twins set down their food obediently.  Shutian and Xiaotong shook their heads, still determinedly plugging away at their meals.

    ¡°Pengfei?¡±  Nanxi asked.

    ¡°I¡¯m so¡­ hungry,¡± he said weakly.

    ¡°You¡¯re exhausting.¡±

    Nanxi reached into the bowl in front of him and grabbed a fist full of meat and rice, then mashed the food into Pengfei¡¯s half open mouth.

    ¡°Mhhmm!  What the hell?!¡± he said through the unexpected mouthful, wiping away the grains that stuck to his cheeks and shirt.

    Nanxi twirled his fingers, trying to hurry his friend along.

    Pengfei sighed resignedly, and stood from the bench, still chewing.  ¡°One more bite,¡± he said, and opened his mouth again.  Nanxi shoveled another handful in.

    ¡°You¡¯re a pig.¡±  Shutian chided.

    ¡°Clean this up for me, will you?¡±  Pengfei retorted, leaving the mess behind at the table and following Nanxi and the twins.

    The four boys walked through the night in the sect compound.  Nanxi led the way but seemed to have no clear destination.  They wandered through the buildings, not encountering anyone else.  Until they passed the training ground.

    Nanxi and the brothers kept walking, but Pengfei paused to watch.  A single large figure stood in the courtyard.  Jin Qingfang, largest of the younger generation.  Pengfei could see the wooden practice sword on the ground next to him, but for now Qingfang was unarmed.  He whirled through the air, in acrobatic kicks that contradicted logic.  No one that big should be able to move that nimbly.

    Pengfei wouldn¡¯t have believed his eyes if he hadn¡¯t seen it before, experienced it firsthand.  It was still a spectacular sight, months after the sparring match where he had faced the boy.  Now, with a little more experience, it was even more incredible.

    --It doesn¡¯t seem possible¡­ he has to be using qinggong to move like that.--

    If that was true, the coordination required would be astounding.  Each step, jump, twist, would require different internal circuits.  All working in conjunction with the flesh and bone to produce an effect greater than the sum of its parts.  Pengfei imagined it could take months to hone a single movement to fluidity.  To execute such a sequence of acrobatics, so adeptly, so quickly¡­

    He closed his eyes and breathed in.  He searched the air for any sign of the heat he had felt in his encounter with Guoyu, or other similar brushes with qi.  Even if he was going about his investigation in the correct manner, he could detect nothing.  No indication that Qingfang was using anything besides the power of his own tremendous muscles.

    ¡°Don¡¯t compare yourself to him.  It¡¯ll only make you depressed.¡±  Nanxi said, drawing Pengfei¡¯s attention.  Tianwei and Tianxun stood waiting, farther down the path.

    ¡°He¡¯s incredible.  How does someone so big ¨C¡±

    ¡°Uh uh.  Don¡¯t talk about his size.¡±

    ¡°Why?¡±

    Nanxi shrugged.  ¡°You¡¯d have to ask him.  But last person to imply Qingfang¡¯s size had to anything to do with him winning matches ¡­ well, he had to be scraped off the ground with a spade.  Come on.¡±

    Pengfei was tugged along, casting a last look at the dynamic and powerful disciple practicing his martial arts.

    ¡°Was he practicing the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯?  It¡¯s didn¡¯t look like anything I¡¯ve seen before.¡±

    ¡°Uh¡­¡¯Fist of Thousand Dragons Playing in the Air¡­¡¯, I think.  Something like that.¡±

    ¡°Damn, this sect has such a hard on for dragons.¡±  Pengfei remarked.  ¡°There¡¯s ¡®Three Twists of the Dragon in the Clouds Qinggong¡¯, or ¡®Crane Releasing, Dragon Capturing Hand¡¯, the ¡®Swift Dragon Lighting Sword¡¯  - ¡°

    ¡°You have no idea! That¡¯s just the beginning.  This place is lousy with dragons.  Shaolin has their Buddhas and Arhats, Mount Hua has their flowers.  We have dragons.  I can think of a dozen styles named for them off the top of my head.¡±

    Pengfei sighed at that, drawing a sideways glance from Nanxi.

    ¡°There¡¯s just too much to learn.  I¡¯m struggling with the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and I still need to figure out the neigong and the qinggong.  There are palm styles and saber styles, and more jian and fist styles¡­ how are we supposed to find the time for all of this?¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re not.¡±

    ¡°What?¡±

    Nanxi waved dismissively.  ¡°No one learns all of it.  You know that, right?  Not to the point of mastery anyway.¡±

    ¡°Really?  But they¡¯re the styles of our sect.¡±

    ¡°Back in the day, our sect had more than a thousand members.  They didn¡¯t all fight the exact same way.  Some used the straight sword, some the saber, some the spear.  You learn some basics, then you specialize. And even when you choose a path, you might only study a fraction of the available styles.¡±

    Pengfei considered Nanxi¡¯s words and a weight suddenly lifted. ¡°That¡¯s a relief.  I thought I was always going to be struggling to catch up, learning a dozen styles at the same time."

    Nanxi clapped him on the back. ¡°Now you just need to pick a focus.  Typically, you¡¯d specialize in the same thing as your master, but since you¡¯re unlikely to be taken as anyone¡¯s disciple I guess you can do whatever the hell you want.¡±

    ¡°Thanks, asshole.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m serious!  You¡¯re thinking about things too much.  Forget about being an overachiever.  Do the group trainings that are required, focus on the jian like everyone else, and try to enjoy what little free time you¡¯re left with at the end of the day.  No need to make extra work for yourself.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, maybe.¡±

    Pengfei mulled over Nanxi¡¯s relaxed philosophy, shared by Shutian and many others.  But it didn¡¯t sit right with him.  There were a myriad of reasons he could think of to show more than the minimum required effort

    --Survival, for one.  Doesn¡¯t get much more motivating than that.  My standing within the sect, the honor of Kunlun when we reenter the Jianghu, personal glory¡­--

    All compelling but none of them quite fit the niggling feeling in the back of his mind.

    Up ahead, Tianwei wrestled with his brother, and Nanxi ran to referee the match.  Pengfei tried to find the same mirth somewhere inside him, pulled his coat a little tighter against the freezing winter night.

 Chapter 32 - Realization

    The Sect Leader stood behind his desk, reading the list of names Pengfei provided, stroking his black and grey beard as he contemplated.

    ¡°All friends of yours?¡±  Chen Hongzhang asked.

    ¡°Yes, sir.¡±

    ¡°Well, that¡¯s fine.  But what about their current jobs?  Can they be spared?¡±

    ¡°The twins are in the Finance Hall but ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Elder Shan says they can barely add.¡±

    ¡°Right.  So, no big loss there.  Elder Rulan says I can take Nanxi, free and clear.  Elder Ji has the rest of us, and he seems enthusiastic to have some skilled horsemen in the Discipline Hall.  He said something about ¡®chasing down our wayward brothers¡¯.¡±

    ¡°Then we¡¯ll rearrange things so all of you are in the Discipline Hall under Chen Ji.  I¡¯ll tell him to give you a little more leeway than normal, so you can make up for the training you miss while you¡¯re tending to the horses.  But I imagine you¡¯ll still have some work to do.¡±

    Pengfei nodded.

    --Probably more qinggong training.--

    The head of the Discipline Hall had stubbornly fixated on drilling lightness techniques and the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯ for the past several days.

    ¡°Have you decided on work shifts, for once we have taken delivery of the horses?¡±  Chen Hongzhang inquired.

    ¡°I was thinking three shifts, two people each.  That would be in addition to whoever is looking after the goat herd.  Two weeks each shift.¡±

    ¡°Fine.  We¡¯ll make the goat herding a two-week shift as well, keep it in sync.  When you¡¯re down there, you can use them as you see fit.¡±

    Pengfei nodded appreciatively before continuing, indicating the list of friends he had chosen as his coworkers.  ¡°I¡¯ll need all of them when we go to pick up the horses in the spring.  Spend a week in Hotan teaching them to ride and figuring out how to move the herd around.  I figure another week to get back to the valley, taking it slow and allowing for some mistakes on the way.  Then, we work the first shift together so everyone is on the same page.  Maybe a month, or six weeks, all told.¡±

    Chen Hongzhang raised his eyebrows but did not object.  Pengfei waited for something further, but the Sect Leader just placed the sheet of paper with the names back on his desk.

    ¡°Fine.  I¡¯ll make the necessary arrangements.  You can go now.¡±

    Pengfei clasped his fist in salute, then left the patriarch¡¯s residence.  He hugged himself tightly against the cold and made his way to the training grounds.  He came within sight of it after rounding a corner.

    The Jin generation were crowding the courtyard.  The steam from their collective breaths hung like a cloud over them.  He looked for his friends among the gathered disciples but had arrived late for afternoon practice.  Didn¡¯t have time to find them before Chen Rulan called to line up.

    ¡°Heaven Shaking Fist!  Third form!¡±

    Pengfei found a space among the throng as everyone assumed the starting stance and moved in unison.  The initial pace was slow, the last form of the style meant for practicing the utilization of qi.  Pengfei had learned to ape the external movements but the internal flow of energy was almost completely missing.

    He attempted what little he knew.  The straight punch imbued with qi, the ¡®Thundering Sky Strike¡¯, was the only attack he could use with anything close to its intended form, but even that little success provided insight into other blows.

    --Move the qi through the arm, release it with the extension of the strike, send it outward¡­--

    Simpler than the qinggong, which kept the energy contained within the body and needed continuous circulation.  He threw the punch, felt a sensation of warmth in his wrist and knuckles.  It shot forward and was lost in the sea of energy that was produced by the practice of a hundred and fifty Jin disciples.

    Swimming in that qi was heady and disorienting.  Not as instantly overwhelming as the strength he had sensed from the likes of the elders, but more pervasive, inescapable.

    Pengfei¡¯s mind wandered in the synchronized training.  He recollected the conversation with Nanxi from a few nights ago.

    --He said I could just take it easy, that this group training was enough.  Do the minimum amount and try to enjoy myself.--

    ¡°Again!¡±  Chen Rulan called out.  The disciples began working through the form from the top.  Stomps and shouts echoed through the training ground.  The heat of their breath swirled on unseen currents of energy that came from their fists.

    --But what is there to enjoy out here?  Riding Horse, drinking, spending time with my friends¡­--

    His life in the sect replayed itself.  The consistent presence of martial arts was plain to see.  It was there in every bad memory.

    --Bullied by Nanxi, then Hongyu and Daopian.  My fight to the death with Guoyu.  Constantly feeling behind the other disciples¡­--

    But the martial arts were there in every good memory too.

    --Reconciliation with Nanxi, standing up to Hongyu and Daopian, drinking wine and kicking the twins backward while we laughed, letting Horse graze while I read the sect¡¯s manuals¡­--

    The forms came to an abrupt end with no corrections offered.  ¡°Sparring!¡± Elder Rulan called.  ¡°No internal energy, we don¡¯t need you fools killing each other.¡±

    The man¡¯s words faded into the background.  Pengfei stood across from a stranger and bowed, his conscious mind still piecing through the puzzle.

    His partner threw a kick to the body.  Pengfei stepped away, just enough to let the power dissipate slightly.  It still made contact on his arms, but after it did, Pengfei threw a kick of his own, felt it land on his opponent¡¯s guard.

    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    Punch.  Parry.  Attack.  Counterattack.

    Pengfei¡¯s movements were simple, basic, but correct.

    The bout ended and Pengfei¡¯s partner offered a quick bow along with some praise. ¡°Good match.¡±

    ¡°Yeah¡­ thanks.  You too.¡±

    The next partner took the place of the previous.  Another bout began as Pengfei gradually realized the state of his own mind.

    It came to the surface when he landed a punch to his opponent¡¯s body, felt the shiver go up his forearm.

    --Landing a good strike has always been fun.  Even when I was scared and desperate to catch up, the feeling of getting it right was satisfying.  The improvements¡­--

    He winced as a blow bit into his side, but tied up with his partner to stifle the attacks.  Then disengaged again.

    --Where does it lead though?  Life as a warrior?  Killing more people like Guoyu?--

    But that seemed separate in his mind.  Another province of existence, distinct from the physical practice.

    --It¡¯s different right?  Training martial arts, it¡¯s not just for killing, is it?  Every sect of the Orthodox faction claims they fight for justice.  But that can¡¯t be all of it.  There are old men here who will never see a battlefield again, and they¡¯re still practicing.  Pursuing the Dao, maybe?--

    Kunlun and the other Taoist sects, like Mount Hua or Qingcheng, claimed to use the martial arts as a way of pursuing the Dao, seeking the effortless connection with the guiding forces of the universe.  Pengfei had heard the Buddhists of Shaolin and Emei used the martial arts as moving meditation, pursuing enlightenment by distracting the conscious mind and allowing the unconscious to roam free.

    --That¡¯s not it either.  I don¡¯t care about the religion or the philosophy.  I don¡¯t need to be a hero or a warrior.  I¡¯m fine raising horses, even though that¡¯s not how I pictured my life.  But martial arts¡­ I don¡¯t know what it is, but there¡¯s something there.--

    The second fight gave way to the third and fourth.  Pengfei pushed his thoughts to the side and focused on the bouts, letting himself enjoy the little struggles.  His pleasure did not equate to skill though.  He recognized his improvements, but Pengfei was still only average when it came to empty-hand fighting.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough!¡±  Chen Rulan stepped forward, Elder Weidao standing silently next to him.  Pengfei waited for the expected command to fetch the wooden jians.  But the masters surprised the disciples.

    ¡°You¡¯ve all been progressing well over the past several weeks.  We¡¯ve noticed your commitment.  Sometimes, especially when training so hard, a martial artist may focus too intently on what is right in front of them.  Elder Weidao and I thought you may need a reminder of what the road ahead looks like.¡±

    The elders shooed the disciples from the center of the training ground, establishing a ring around themselves.

    Neng appeared at Pengfei¡¯s side and whispered the realization that was dawning on the faces of several disciples.

    ¡°They¡¯re going to fight!¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Chen Rulan had placed his bar mace, disguised as a sword in a scabbard, off to the side.  He and Chen Weidao had likewise discarded his steel jian.  They both held wooden swords now, saluted each other as equals, standing several paces apart.  Then raised their practice blades.

    The difference between the generations was evident from the beginning of the elders¡¯ match.  There were none of the small abortive movements that the disciples made when they gauged distance and reaction.  Every step was smooth, the swords still as they waited for the precise moment to strike.

    Rulan slid inward, within range, then gave a short chop to the wrist.  Weidao simply thrusted his weapon to the throat, evading and counterattacking simultaneously.  The larger man leaned out of the way.

    There were more exchanges.  Each technique, each pass, was something Pengfei might see in a match between his peers.  But elevated, amplified.  Faster, more graceful, less hesitation.

    There was that heat in the air that had nothing to do with temperature.  The release of qi as the masters began to use their internal energy.

    The range of the combatants spread farther apart as they began to use their qinggong.  They could hit the same attacks from a greater distance in a shorter amount of time.  The cracks of the wooden swords crossing each other grew in volume, each strike more powerful than the last.

    <u>Dragon Emerges (Long Chu Xian - </u><u>ýˆ³ö¬F</u><u>)</u>

    <u> </u>

    <u> </u>

    The thrust was the combination of half a dozen arts and principles, all rolled into one of the most basic attacks of the ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯.  In a flash of insight, Pengfei pictured the qi harnessed by the sect¡¯s neigong method, flowing through the meridians of Elder Weidao¡¯s legs and allowing him to cross half a dozen paces in a single lunge.  The same energy lent strength to the man¡¯s sinewy arm as it snapped out at a terrifying speed.

    Chen Rulan chose to evade rather than facing the attack head on.  His movement was fast and forceful.  It was different than the qinggong Pengfei had been learning from Elder Ji.  More powerful.

    As if to accentuate the point, Elder Rulan bounded in again towards his opponent in the next beat with a horizontal slash.  When he landed, the stones beneath his feet cracked dramatically, throwing up a small cloud of powdered rock.  Weidao was already moving backwards and when the blades made contact, he let the force propel him backwards, floating like a leaf in the wind.

    More passes, some initiated by Weidao and others by Rulan.  The techniques used became more absurdly artful and technical.  Attacks wrapped around blocks to attack with the false edges.  Wooden sword points danced around each other in circles, constantly threatening but never touching.

    --Why has Elder Rulan always downplayed his sword skills?  He¡¯s amazing!--

    But even as Pengfei thought that, the momentum shifted.  Chen Weidao forced Rulan into a hard block.  No deflection, no softening the blow.  Weidao¡¯s weapon stuck the other just above the mock handguard. Rulan was left holding just the hilt as the rest of his weapon broke off and went skittering across the floor of the training ground.

    Weidao¡¯s weapon seemed to be surrounded by a haze.  Something felt but not really seen.  Familiar.

    --Qi?  No, more than that.  Sword qi.--

    The mark of a true master.  Someone who has reached the Peak, or beyond, by following the path of the sword.

    --I didn¡¯t know Chen Weidao was that strong.--

    The energy surrounding the man¡¯s sword faded away, even as Chen Rulan dropped the scrap of wood he was holding and made his own forceful attack.

    <u>Thundering Sky Strike (</u><u>Lei T</u><u>ian Quan ¨C </u><u>À×ÌìÈ­ ) </u>

    <u> </u>

    <u> </u>

    The elder punched at Weidao¡¯s chest but the smaller man sidestepped, dashed away.  Rulan followed, staying within a clinching range.

    Elbows, knees, punches, grappling techniques Pengfei had never seen before.  Weidao blocked or dodged, threatened close-quarter cuts with the sword that forced Rulan to abandon offense.  He stopped one such cut, grabbing Weidao¡¯s wrist and raising it high overhead, then delivered a spinning back kick to the exposed torso.

    It landed, but softly.  Chen Weidao again let his opponent¡¯s force push him backward, sliding across the ground on the lightness of his qinggong.  A success and a failure.  An attack completed, but Weidao now had the room to properly unfold his sword techniques.

    Chen Rulan could not recover.  He tried to bridge the distance, get inside the wooden sword¡¯s sphere of attack, but short fast thrusts kept him at bay.  In just a few moments, Chen Weidao was standing still, holding the point of his weapon motionless against Rulan¡¯s throat.

    The match was over.

    ******************************************************************************

    Excitement bubbled in the crowd of disciples.  Awe had kept them silent during the fight, but now the chatter boiled over with high spirited laughs and shouts.  Pengfei did not contribute and looked back to see that Neng remained silent as well, eyes beaming with pride as he gazed toward his master.

    Despite all the amazing movements that defied their advanced age, the elders remained completely composed.  Perhaps a hint of annoyance on the face of Chen Rulan.  But neither breathed hard nor had a grey hair out of place.

    Chen Weidao now deferred to his martial brother; Rulan stepped forward and raised his hands to quiet the rowdy disciples.

    ¡°What did you see?¡± Rulan asked the disciples, looking over them as if waiting for an answer.

    Finally, he continued.  ¡°Qinggong, swordsmanship, the fist.  Certainly, more internal energy than you are used to.  But guided by technique.   Many martial artists forget that point when they have their first brush with qi.  But technique is the foundation of it all.¡±

    ¡°As our training intensifies, you will begin using internal energy in your bouts as well.  Under our supervision.¡±  Elder Rulan indicated himself and Chen Weidao.  ¡°In any other sect, more senior disciples would guide you through this phase of your practice.  Spar with you.  But you only have each other.  Never violate your training partner¡¯s trust.  Always train with technique and restraint.¡±

    Elder Weidao nodded in quiet agreement then called an end to the training.  ¡°That¡¯s all for today.  Think carefully about what you¡¯ve seen.¡±

    Pengfei didn¡¯t need the instruction.  The bout had further fueled the questions he had been asking himself.  He turned to Neng.

    ¡°What do you think martial arts are for?¡±

    His friend answered as if he knew exactly what was on Pengfei¡¯s mind.  ¡°I don¡¯t know.  Maybe it can be everything at once.  Violence and enlightenment.  What about you?¡±

    ¡°I think for now¡­ it¡¯s enough that I enjoy it.  I¡¯ll be right back.¡±

    Pengfei jogged after the elders, already leaving the training ground.

    --If you like something, it¡¯s only natural to try and get good at it.--

    A crowd of disciples were pursuing the elders as they walked, peppering them with questions about their match, martial arts in general.

    --And the fastest way to improve is to have a teacher.--

    The disciples clustered around Chen Weidao in particular, the clear victor of the match.  One of the best swordsmen in the sect, as evidenced by the recent demonstration.

    --I¡¯ve learned a lot from him, already.  But that doesn¡¯t mean he wants me as a disciple.  If anyone knows how lacking I am, it¡¯s him.--

    Pengfei pushed his way through the mob that had surrounded Elder Weidao, rushing to ask the question before he lost his nerve.  He pushed through the disciples, past them, to the solitary figure who had broken off from the rest of the group.  He trotted the last few steps to catch up with old Taoist.

    --It¡¯s worth a shot.--

    ¡°Excuse me, Elder Rulan.  May I speak with you for a moment?"

 Chapter 33 - Rejected

    Elder Rulan led the way to the Veneration Hall, and they stood in the waning sunlight of the afternoon, alone except for the statues of the Three Pure Ones.

    ¡°Well?¡± Chen Rulan asked, expectantly, but not unkindly.

    --Shit, this was a stupid idea.--

    The silence stretched as Pengfei searched for, first, the right way to phrase his request, and when that failed, a plausible excuse to exit the situation. The elder seemed content to wait in silence. Time stretched on until the boy cracked.

    ¡°Please accept me as your disciple!¡± Pengfei blurted, bowing low as he spoke.

    ¡°Hughh¡­¡± Chen Rulan sighed and reached out a hand to raise Pengfei¡¯s posture. ¡°This¡­ this seems like a long conversation. Let¡¯s sit.¡±

    They crossed their legs across from each other on the wooden floor. Pengfei fidgeted nervously, now his turn to wait through an awkward silence while the other party gathered their thoughts. A group of several Jin disciples poked their heads into the Veneration Hall, perhaps hoping to practice their neigong, then read the room and departed quietly.

    ¡°Why do you want to become a direct disciple in the first place, Pengfei?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve realized recently that I really do enjoy the martial arts. And I want to be good at it, go beyond the basic training.¡±

    ¡°Uh huh¡­ and why¡­well, it was Chen Weidao who won the match. Why didn¡¯t you ask him to be your disciple?¡±

    Pengfei chuckled nervously and continued. ¡°I¡¯m not a very good swordsman. I have nothing against the jian, I still intend to practice it¡­ but I was hoping you would teach me more of the sect¡¯s fist methods. You and Elder Chen Ji are the only masters I have seen practicing unarmed techniques. And Elder Ji is ¨C¡±

    ¡°Yes, Chen Ji is Chen Ji.¡± Chen Rulan observed, preempting any indelicate remarks by the disciple. ¡°Still, it¡¯s a strange request. While we have had masters specializing in a multitude of weapons throughout our sect¡¯s history, we¡¯ve primarily been known for our prowess with the sword. The fist¡­ less so.¡±

    ¡°Yes elder. It¡¯s just, there is something powerful and fierce about fighting bare handed. Like when you fought Elder Weidao without your sword just now. It was amazing.¡±

    The elder¡¯s face softened at that. ¡°It seems you¡¯ve found your first love, hahaha¡­ Might as well be the fist, I suppose.¡±

    ¡°So, you¡¯ll take me as your disciple, sir?¡± Pengfei asked again, hesitantly.

    ¡°¡­No, Pengfei.¡± The man still wore a pleasant expression. He stroked his beard absent-mindedly as he spoke. ¡°I have my reasons, a thousand and one of them, but they mostly have nothing to do with you. I¡¯m happy to give you pointers from time to time, but I can¡¯t take you as my disciple.¡±

    ¡°Oh.¡± Pengfei¡¯s chest constricted in anxiousness and all he wanted to do was run away. He stood and bowed to the elder, saying ¡°Thank you for your time ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Wait, boy, sit and ¨C ¡°

    But Pengfei was up and moving, disregarding all notions of propriety. The elder did not call him out on his rudeness, for leaving before permission was granted. Out in the cold air once again, the young man shook. Part weather, part dread. The embarrassment of what had just transpired washed over him.

    --What was I thinking!?--

    ******************************************************************************

    ¡°What were you thinking?¡± Shutian chided.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Pengfei said glumly, looking down at the iron pot where rice was absorbing heated water.

    ¡°The whole idea is idiotic. You don¡¯t need any more ties to this place holding you down. What if he had accepted you as a direct disciple? It¡¯s not a casual thing. You would have needed his permission to leave the sect, even after the gates opened again.¡±

    ¡°I guess I hadn¡¯t thought of that part.¡± Pengfei conceded.

    ¡°Whatever.¡± Shutian grumbled. ¡°You need to stir, you¡¯re burning the rice.¡±

    Pengfei moved a wooden spoon through the pot and Shutian continued chopping meat for the evening meal. It was once again their dormitory¡¯s turn to prepare food for the week. They had come to the Dining Hall after the afternoon¡¯s training had been cut short, Pengfei late due to his discussion with the elder. Not one to hide his misfortune, Pengfei had already informed his friends of the rejection.

    Xiaotong broke the tension, speaking casually. ¡°Take the money and run. Just four more years, and you can do whatever you want.¡± He nudged Shutian in the ribs, teasing, ¡°Just don¡¯t take off before we¡¯re officially allowed to, or I¡¯ll send Pengfei after you again.¡±

    The three of them, even Shutian, laughed at the memory. Shutian¡¯s attempt to run away, and the subsequent chase, had glued them together in friendship, along with Neng and Nanxi. Reminded of the others, a thought occurred to Pengfei.

    ¡°I see the twins over there, but where¡¯s Nanxi?¡±

    The others just shrugged, offering no insight into the boy¡¯s absence. He didn¡¯t reappear until the work was over, and the rest of them had sat down at their usual table to eat.

    ¡°Someone has finally recognized my greatness.¡± Nanxi declared as he threw one leg then the other over the bench. ¡°Chen Zi has asked me to be his student.¡±

    ¡°What!?¡±

    ¡°Congratulations.¡±

    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.

    ¡°You¡¯re an idiot.¡±

    ¡°Wait, wait a second.¡± Pengfei stemmed the tide of remarks coming from the rest of the table. ¡°Who is Chen Zi?¡±

    ¡°Oh, they¡¯re all the same.¡± Nanxi waved off the question. ¡°The point is, out of all the Jin disciples, he chose me.¡±

    ¡°What is his focus? What is he going to teach you?¡±

    It was Neng who answered. ¡°The jian. ¡®The Silent and Scentless Sword Stroke¡¯. Why did he choose you of all people?¡±

    ¡°He said it was for my deep spiritual insight.¡±

    The entire table laughed out loud at this.

    ¡°You? The same guy who likes to smear goat shit on the heads of poor unsuspecting idiots?¡± Xiaotong asked in faux astonishment, drawing a muttered ¡°Screw you¡± from Pengfei.

    Nanxi waved his chopsticks at them all and said, ¡°I¡¯ll have you know that finding humor in the mundane is one of the greatest hallmarks of the wise.¡±

    ¡°I expected better of you, Nanxi.¡± Shutian rebuked.

    ¡°Yeah, I thought you didn¡¯t want a master.¡± Pengfei said, recalling their previous conversation. ¡°What happened to doing the bare minimum and enjoying life?

    ¡°Pengfei is jealous because he just got rejected by Chen Rulan.¡± Xiaotong explained.

    ¡°What can I say? Elder Zi, no, Master Zi, appealed to my vanity. Besides, he says I only need to meet him once a week. And it comes with some perks. The pros outweigh the cons¡±

    Pengfei smiled and congratulated Nanxi with the rest, but real happiness was absent from his eyes. He was jealous, just like Xiaotong had said. Another friend, chosen above him, moving ahead and leaving Pengfei behind. Catch up and fall back again.

    Neng was understandable. With or without a sword, he was one of the best martial artists in the sect. But Nanxi? He might be Pengfei¡¯s superior when it came to the jian, but the gap was much narrower when empty handed. Hadn¡¯t the elders noticed that?

    --No, the recognition isn¡¯t what¡¯s important. It¡¯s the martial arts I enjoy. Even if no one teaches me their advanced techniques, I can still learn a lot on my own. It¡¯ll just be harder...--

    Pengfei was brought out of his sullen musings by the conversation around him. Nanxi adopted an air of superiority and gave exaggerated lectures to his friends on all their shortcomings. The others laughed uproariously, even the misanthropic Shutian. Pengfei chuckled along and joined in with the rest of the group when Nanxi¡¯s antics went too far, prompting a volley of thrown food.

    --Still, a little bit of recognition would be nice.--

    ******************************************************************************

    Several days passed in normal routine. A morning run, followed by calisthenics, with the rest of the Jin generation. After breakfast, the training continued for those under Chen Ji. That number now included Nanxi, Tianwei, and Tianxun, all transferred to the Discipline Hall.

    The training in qinggong could be another run along the mountain or sometimes exercises aimed at improving the attributes needed for the movement techniques. The plum blossom poles for coordination and balance. Or like today, carrying enormous jars of water to develop raw strength.

    Pengfei attempted to use ¡®Three Twists of the Dragon in the Clouds¡¯. He circulated the qi in his lower dantian, trying to reduce the weight of his steps, but his meager reserves of energy did little to lighten his burden. When that didn¡¯t work, he focused on the meridians in his legs. The aid to the muscles was more noticeable. It reduced their full-throated shrieks of agony to muffled shouts.

    It didn¡¯t take long for the elder to reveal the reason behind the day¡¯s sadistic trials.

    ¡°Pengfei!¡± Chen Ji shouted loud enough for the disciples to hear as they bounded from rock to rock, above the snow. ¡°I hear you met with Elder Rulan recently. He found your parting to be quite insolent.¡±

    --Oh no.--

    The other disciples looked at him with fire in their eyes that burned even hotter after the elder¡¯s next words.

    ¡°I assured him I would correct your behavior. You and your friends will be very busy for the foreseeable future.¡±

    ¡°What did we do?¡± Shutian hissed under his breath to Xiaotong.

    ¡°And Elder Rulan has also requested you come to his residence to complete some chores at the end of the week. I trust you¡¯ll be more polite by then.¡±

    ¡°Yes sir!¡± Pengfei shouted his assurances, the only acceptable answer, but grimaced inwardly. Not just at the prospect of whatever tortures Chen Ji had in store, but also at the offense given to Chen Rulan. He had been avoiding the instructor all week, blending in with the crowd during the group lessons in the afternoons.

    --I was rude storming off like I did, but I didn¡¯t think Elder Rulan was the type to take offense at something like that.--

    The hike with the water jars was arduous, though fairly short. But the work was not done even at the end of the journey. The disciples found themselves in familiar territory. The top of the cliff overlooking the cells carved into the mountainside. While Pengfei had only seen Chen Rulan during his punishment here, the cells were under the purview of Elder Ji and the Discipline Hall.

    ¡°Shutian, Fan, down the side with the supplies. The rest of you, back to the sect for the dry stores.¡±

    ¡°Shit.¡± Shutian cursed, then began carefully easing himself over the edge and down the cliffside, followed by Jin Fan.

    Pengfei moved to follow the rest of his cohort, fetching the next load of goods, but Chen Ji reached a hand out to stop him.

    ¡°You¡¯ll lower the supplies down to these two.¡±

    The elder watched, standing ready to defy gravity and snatch up Shutian and Fan, mid-fall if necessary. Pengfei looked over the side as his friends descended the cliff towards the cell below. The staggering height was all he could focus on. The open air spread out behind the figures of the boys climbing down the rock face.

    --Still think I¡¯d rather be down there with them.--

    He gave a quick glance to Elder Chen Ji. The short man stood silently but seemed to bubble with a sour mania. He tapped his foot impatiently, huffing periodically.

    The disciples disappeared into the cave below. A few minutes, a rush of water went sloshing out of the cell and flowing down the cliffside, leaving the rock dark with the moisture. The large urn of stagnant water Pengfei had survived on during his isolation emptied, to be replaced with the contents of the ceramic jars they had carried from the sect.

    Pengfei tied the nearby rope around the first of the vessels and lowered it carefully over the edge and down the cliff. Jar after jar went down, refilling the stores in the cells.

    In the short breaks, while waiting for the signal to retrieve the rope, Pengfei surveyed his surroundings nervously. Curiosity and anxiety eventually got the better of him, and he ignored his good sense, choosing to address Chen Ji during one of his obvious foul moods.

    ¡°Is it safe to be out here, sir?¡±

    ¡°What are you talking about, boy?¡±

    Undaunted by the elder¡¯s curt tone, the disciple pressed on. ¡°Isn¡¯t the Mountain King still out here somewhere?¡±

    A sharp eye turned to examine Pengfei at those words. Chen Ji appraised him for a long moment, then looked back over the precipice.

    ¡°Where did you hear that name?¡± the old man finally asked.

    ¡°When we came back from the cliffs last time, I overheard the Sect Leader talking.¡±

    ¡°You little sneak¡­ You¡¯re not supposed to know about him.¡± the elder grumbled but then continued. ¡°The Mountain King isn¡¯t a danger to us.¡±

    ¡°He seemed dangerous to me.¡± Pengfei said, remembering his close encounter in the canyon. The near-miss while he fled atop Horse.

    ¡°You saw him!?¡± Chen Ji grabbed Pengfei¡¯s arm, nearly making the boy drop the rope he now pulled back upward.

    --Shit!-- Pengfei quickly groped for an explanation. Readily, the environment provided the fodder for his lies.

    ¡°It was when I was still here in the cells, sir. I saw something at night, a shape on the cliffside. I didn¡¯t say anything earlier because¡­ well, I thought I was crazy.¡±

    A tense moment passed where Pengfei worried the excuse would not pass the scrutiny of the suspicious elder. He kept his eyes down on the rope, pulled it hand-over-hand back up the cliff.

    Finally, Chen Ji spoke again. ¡°Yes, I suppose you would think that.¡±

    The danger of discovery passed, Pengfei continued his questioning. ¡°Elder, what is the Mountain King? I¡¯ve never seen anything like it before.¡±

    ¡°There is some species of leopard in these mountains. Different than what you might see in Shanxi or Gansu. It¡¯s made for the cold. I don¡¯t know what you would call it. An ice leopard. Snow leopard. The Mountain King is one of those, but larger.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s ¡­ just a leopard?¡± Pengfei recalled the enormous size of the creature that had chased him through the valley below. The way it had sprinted across the mountainous ridges ignoring all impediments with the speed to match a horse at full gallop. ¡°That thing can¡¯t be a normal animal.¡±

    ¡°When does a beast become a spirit beast?¡± The elder mused. ¡°No one has observed it closely enough to be sure. We think of it as a single creature but it could be one animal, or several. Natural or supernatural. There are stories going back generations. Whether here or at our ancestral home in Qinghai. Sometimes decades between sightings. You were very lucky to have glimpsed him.¡±

    ¡°Lucky¡­ right.¡± Pengfei shivered, still feeling the rush of wind that had passed by as the Mountain King had leapt for him, coming so close in the dead of night. ¡°Has it ever eaten any of Kunlun¡¯s disciples?¡±

    ¡°Enemies of the sect perhaps. Those damned bastards in black seem to have gone to war with him. We¡¯ll never know who started that fight but rest assured the Mountain King got the better of the exchange. But I don¡¯t recall any stories of him attacking a member of Kunlun.¡±

    Pengfei took the rope and wrapped it around the next jar of water, then proceeded to lower it to Jin Fan below. The ceramic bumped the cliff face in places, scratched against the stone, but did not break before a hand reached out from the cave opening to take the weight.

    --I almost made history. Could have been the first disciple of Kunlun to get himself eaten by a giant snow leopard.--

    He was back to that night, riding Horse, head bowed against the wind. Hooves thundering. Stealing glances back behind as he fled the impossible creature.

    Chen Ji seemed to recall something, picked up the dropped thread of conversation once again. ¡°Just never run from him. When prey flees, it is natural for a predator to chase.¡±

    ¡°Ugggh.¡± Pengfei groaned at the advice that could have served him so well if he had heard it earlier. Then, sensing the elder give him a look, he remembered his manners.

    ¡°Thank you, sir. That¡¯s¡­ that¡¯s good to know.¡±

 Chapter 34 - Making Amends

    While the Sect Leader lived in a quaint home on an isolated rise overlooking the rest of the sect, the other elders lived in every nook and cranny imaginable.  There were houses and buildings designed for the noble masters, to be sure.  But the isolated compound in the mountains had not been designed to accommodate the entirety of their population, nor was it meant for such a long occupation.

    Pengfei had been told that in the beginning, the elders had lived in their own shared spaces.  Not unlike the dormitories of the Jin disciples, though less crowded and more comfortable.  But it seemed that over the decades, the elders had grown to prefer solitude over convention.  They had spread out, looking for privacy, often taking up residence in the buildings where they spent their daylight hours.

    Chen Lei was known to live in the Medicine Hall.  Chen Mo spent the winter nights in the Veneration Hall, an iron brazier warming a small corner of the large drafty room.  No one knew where he bedded in the warmer months.  It was even rumored that Chen Ji had one of the cliffside punishment cells to himself, though Pengfei doubted the truth of it.

    But it was a known fact that Chen Rulan resided in a small wing of the sect¡¯s forge.  Pengfei limped his way there now, sore and tight after a particularly grueling week.  His friends were all around the sect compound, relaxing and amusing themselves on their half day of rest.  But Pengfei was due at Elder Rulan¡¯s abode, to make amends for the rudeness he had shown recently.

    --How many hours of punishment does it take to atone for not saying ¡®goodbye¡¯ properly?--

    It seemed a minor transgression.  Pengfei had been embarrassed and saddened by the elder¡¯s rejection of discipleship.   Stormed off in embarrassment without showing the proper respect.  A momentary lapse of judgement.  Surely, the elder knew that.

    --So why is he doing this to me?  Can¡¯t he cut me some slack for a little breach of etiquette?  Not that any grey-haired old man has ever cut me the least bit of slack¡­--

    He recalled his old life, in Sichuan.  Scholars, priests, nobles, doctors, guardians, tutors.  His life of privilege had brought him into contact with many august personages.  Some had been kind, some cruel, but all had expected a certain level of decorum.

    Pengfei mumbled similar complaints to himself all along the short walk from the Dining Hall to the forge.  But all that self-pity could not drown out the small kernel of guilt he held, for giving offense to the kind instructor.  Unlike the ever-changing cast of characters from his youth, Pengfei was actually fond of the elder.

    Chen Rulan stood outside his forge, waiting.

    ¡°Good afternoon, Elder.  I apologize for my rudeness from before.  I am here to accept whatever punishment you see fit.¡±  Pengfei made the martial bow and looked to the earth humbly.

    ¡°Hmmpf.  Come along.¡±

    Whatever lay in store would not be found in the elder¡¯s normal stomping grounds.  Chen Rulan led them through the compound to a building Pengfei had never entered before.  Beautiful, but simple, declining into disrepair.  Like all the architecture of the sect.  Stone walls and curving, tiled, eaves.  It was similar to a temple, but there was none of that iconography to be seen on the outside.

    When the doors opened, Pengfei saw it was similarly stark on the inside.  Empty, except for two lap desks in the middle of the expansive wooden floor, facing each other but separated by several paces.  One covered in papers, the other bare.

    ¡°Sit.¡±  Rulan commanded, indicating the cluttered table.

    Pengfei scooted underneath the small desk, careful not to disturb the blank paper or inkbrush atop it.

    ¡°You worked with Elder Weidao in the library, didn¡¯t you?  Saw him copy damaged texts into new ones?¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir.  Briefly.¡±

    ¡°I have a similar task for you.  How is your penmanship?¡±

    ¡°Good.  My¡­ I had teachers before I came here, sir.  They said it was classical.  Legible and clean.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll see.  This is a book from my personal collection.¡±  Elder Rulan withdrew a text from his robes but did not yet hand it to Pengfei.  ¡°It was a gift, and it has great sentimental value to me.  I will see it faithfully transcribed.  After you finish each page, bring it to me for approval.  We can bind the loose pages into a new book once you have finished.¡±

    The elder still did not pass over the volume.  He seemed to hesitate, guarding it.  Pengfei waited meekly, abashed by the man¡¯s unusually curt speech.  None of the usual warmth that he usually exuded, the occasional chuckles nor joke.

    Finally, the book was proffered and Pengfei accepted it with a slight bow.  He set it carefully on the desk, keeping it well clear of the brush and ink, and went about preparing the first sheet of paper.  He folded a margin to use for binding, arranged the page in front of him while Elder Rulan moved to sit at the other desk.

    His station prepared, Pengfei turned over the yellowed and worn text, to begin his assigned task.  The cover was slightly smudged, small nicks and tears along the edges.  Inevitable consequences of the years.

    A title was written in faded ink across the top.

    ¡®The Arhat Fist of Shaolin.¡¯

    The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    Pengfei¡¯s eyes widened at the words.  He opened the manual gingerly and leafed through the pages.  An elegant script accompanied drawings of figures in various combative postures.  He glanced over the top edge of the book to peer at the elder across from him and met Chen Rulan¡¯s eyes.  The man stared over the top of his own book.

    ¡°Get to work.¡± he said gruffly, then went back to reading.

    Pengfei swallowed and set the manual down carefully, turning to the first page.

    He must necessarily read each character before it could be transcribed.  He eagerly took in the words, the introduction to the most fundamental fist method of the most famous martial arts sect.  One known particularly for their bare-handed techniques.

    The first sentence did not disappoint.

    ¡®The Arhat Fist is the basis of all Shaolin¡¯s martial arts.  To know this, is to know all the seventy-two styles.¡¯

    Pengfei was utterly engrossed.  He riffled through the pages excitedly, examining the pictures and reading snippets when something caught his eye.

    --That looks strong!  That block is¡­  Do you kick from there?--

    He held the book open to a particular page, poured over the details until a cough from across the way broke him from his trance.

    --Right¡­ focus.--

    He bowed a silent apology to the elder and, recalling his purpose, picked up a brush and set it to paper.  He recreated the contents of the book¡¯s introduction on a new page, a preamble detailing the mythical origins and importance of the Arhat Fist.  The strokes were made with precision and an attempt at the same sophistication as the original.

    After several minutes, he set down his brush and stretched his hand, muscles aching from the forced exactitude.  The words still resounded in his mind.  Swirling images of monks in saffron robes, shaved heads tattooed with the seals of their order, performing the legendary techniques of Shaolin.  The imagined movements were hazy.

    --Will I get a better picture of it if I read further?  Can I learn this as I transcribe it?¡ª

    Pengfei cast a questioning glance to the elder across from him, wondering at the man¡¯s motives in giving him this assignment.  But he pushed the manic thoughts to the side and surveyed his work.  The result was a very good copy of the manual¡¯s first page.

    --Maybe even an improvement on the original¡¯s calligraphy, if I do say so myself.--

    Satisfied, he picked up the first sheet of paper and walked slowly to the elder.  He knelt beside the man and held out the page for inspection.

    A brief glimpse.  Chen Rulan took the page and crumpled it before throwing it over his shoulder.

    ¡°Again.¡±

    ¡°Ye¡­ Yes, sir.¡±

    Pengfei shuffled back to his desk, completely unclear on what the problem with his work had been.  But he made another attempt.

    Then a third.  Each time, rejected by the elder, never with an explanation.  Just the one word.  ¡®Again.¡¯

    By the fourth time, Pengfei was confident that the fault did not lay in his work.

    --He¡¯s doing this on purpose¡­ busting my ass.  But there¡¯s nothing I can do about it.--

    Hours stretched.  Copy after copy of the same few dozen characters.  Soon, the words had lost the initial mystique as the monotony of it all set in.  By the fifteenth transcription, Pengfei was writing solely by memory.

    ¡®¡­ a style of righteousness and empathy, robust in defending the self, shielding the weak, compassionate even when subduing demons with a single perfect blow¡­¡¯

    The strokes were effortless.  The mind wandered to the meaning of the passage as the hand moved by rote.

    ¡°Enough for today.¡±  Chen Rulan called, standing.

    Pengfei wrote the last few characters of the latest attempt, as the elder came to stand behind him, peering over his shoulder.  The man reached down and took the paper, examining it critically, only to crumple it dismissively a second later.  He held out his hand, and Pengfei placed the original manual in the man¡¯s palm.

    ¡°I thought you said you had good handwriting.  At this rate, you¡¯ll be at it for years¡­¡±  the elder looked pensively at the disciple, then stated assuredly, ¡°From now on, come here every night after your evening meal.  And at midday, on the last day of each week.  I¡¯d like to have it finished before I die.¡±

    Chen Rulan turned and left the penitent, bowing, disciple but then looked back as he stood with one foot outside.

    ¡°And Pengfei, when I received this gift,¡± he held up the manual, ¡°I gave my word it would never become some plaything, bandied about by our disciples.  If I hear you speaking a word of it to your friends, or find any sign you have done so, I¡¯ll pull your tongue out.  Now burn your failed attempts.¡±

    Pengfei gulped unconsciously and nodded his silent assent.

    ¡°Hahaha¡­¡±  Chen Rulan barked out a few short laughs, the first hint of his usually cheerful personality.

    ******************************************************************************

    It seemed Chen Ji felt obligated to keep up his own maniacal punishment as well.  The Discipline Hall¡¯s project of replenishing the supplies in the cliffside cells continued.  The disciples carried rations and equipment in overburdened hikes along the mountain path.

    Pengfei eventually had a turn descending the rock face to take in the supplies lowered by rope.  The terror gripped him as tightly as it had the first time he made the climb.  During his isolation there, months ago.

    To his credit, Chen Ji watched closely for any slip or fall.  But caution and accumulating experience kept the disciples safe.  They grew more surefooted with each lap on the cliff.

    After the water in the cells had been refreshed, they began to rotate the dry stores.  Rope and bucket were cast aside.  Now, the disciples carried the food stuffs in sacks slung across their backs, climbing down with fresh provisions, then climbing back up with the old grain balls and jerky.

    The old food would be fed to the dozen or so goats waiting for slaughter behind the Dining Hall.  Or worse, Chen Ji would make the boys eat it while they were forced to work through lunch due to some slight infraction.

    When the group made too much progress, Elder Ji found creative ways to draw out the days.  Their sacks were filled halfway with rocks.  Then three quarters.  They carried more weight and accomplished less of their task with each trip.  One day, the elder decided the disciples should have their feet lashed together.  Their toes could only perch on tiny crags to hold them in place.  All the effort of moving on the rock had to be done with the upper body.

    ¡°I¡­ I can¡¯t do it again¡­¡± Pengfei panted as he dragged himself over the top of the ledge, rolling over his side away from the drop.  He held his hands up limply, muscles quivered in exhaustion from the tips of his fingers, down his forearms, and into the meat of his back.

    ¡°Yes, yes.  Good work child.  You can all go back early today.  You¡¯ve been doing so well recently!¡±  Chen Ji said.  The scales of his emotions tipped toward the kind and pleasant today, though his disposition had not spared them from the climb.  Elder Ji strolled merrily down the path, hands clasped behind his back.

    ¡°What the fuck is going on?¡±  Shutian whimpered on the ground.

    Xiaotong was in the same position, and for once, his outlook matched his friend¡¯s.  ¡°It¡¯s barbaric¡­¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s ¡­ it¡¯s not my fault.  It can¡¯t be.¡± Pengfei slid the strap of his bag off his back, picking himself up slowly.  His legs, which had done little in the past hour, were still tired from the run along the path, carrying the weight of all the rations.  Come tomorrow, it would be a tossup which part of his body would be more sore.

    ¡°It all started with you!¡± Shutian yelled, scrambling up and kicking dirt at Pengfei.  ¡°Your insult to Elder Rulan!¡±

    ¡°No¡­it¡¯s been more than a week already....hughh¡­ there¡¯s got to be something else.¡± he spoke, massaging a stitch in his side.

    ¡°That bastard is crazy, what other reason does there need to be?  Come on.¡±

    Xiaotong plodded forward and beckoned the rest of the disciples to do the same, following the way that Chen Ji had gone and ending further argument.

    ¡°I¡¯ll make it up to you guys.¡±  Pengfei offered.  ¡°When we get to Hotan in the spring.  I still have some money from when I left home.  Whatever you want, my treat.¡±

    ¡°Is that before or after the Tibetan monks beat us to death?¡±

    ¡°Shit.  I forgot about them.¡±  Pengfei cursed, reminded of the odd encounter from his last visit to the desert city and dismissing it a moment later.  ¡°Whatever.  I doubt they¡¯ll still be there in the spring.  Even if they are, they won¡¯t run into us.  And if they find us, there will be more of us.¡±

    Shutian and Xiaotong eyed him suspiciously, but Pengfei pushed ahead, choosing optimism.  Perhaps negligence.  He jogged along the trail and came to a spot of thick snow.  He moved the qi through his meridians and used the added strength to hop towards a spot of dry earth.  But the energy was wanting, the jump short.  Pengfei landed and slipped on the dirty ice.

    The rest of the boys in the Discipline Hall pushed past, groaning or complaining in their own private conversations, ignoring their comrade soaking in the cold slurry of water and snow.

    ¡°Can I get a hand?¡±  Pengfei called out sarcastically to his peers.  But even Shutian and Xiaotong were moving away.  ¡°Okay.  That¡¯s fine then.  Don¡¯t worry about me.  Dicks.¡±

 Chapter 35 - Visiting an Old Friends Grave

    The three of them were making record time down to the valley below. It wasn¡¯t just the recent practice with their qinggong, though that was the biggest factor in Pengfei¡¯s case. They also raced the coming storm, blowing in across the Tibetan Plateau from the southwest.

    The herd and the storehouse came into view. Horse galloped through the field and kicked up clouds of old snow when she ran across the patches that still remained on the ground. There were fewer now, weeks since the last snowfall despite the ever-present bone chilling cold. But the clouds on the horizon now promised a fresh coating of white powder.

    The deepening of winter was the main reason Pengfei was making the journey. He hadn¡¯t known there would be a blizzard when he determined to go but it was just another reason to hurry on. He carried a patchwork of old coats in in his bag, stitched crudely into a horse blanket. Something to help the mare through the winter. Though, even from a distance, she seemed to be doing just fine.

    ¡°How long until the weather reaches us?¡± Pengfei inquired as the trio slowed to a walk on their final approach.

    Neng looked to the sky critically. ¡°By nightfall.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re going to have to cuddle up for warmth tonight boys.¡± Nanxi hugged an arm around each of his companions and pulled them in close, then was shoved away a second later.

    ¡°You¡¯ll have better luck with the goats.¡± Pengfei quipped.

    Rebuffed, the jokester asked, ¡°Will we be able to ride if there¡¯s heavy snow? It¡¯s the only reason I agreed to tag along.¡± He made a dramatic show of shivering in his coat.

    ¡°Depends. But we still have plenty of daylight left. I¡¯ll get you both up in the saddle at least once today.¡±

    Neng and Nanxi nodded appreciatively. They had voiced a desire to ride. And teaching them was the excuse Pengfei had used when lobbying the Sect Leader. The man had accepted the argument, shuffling names around so that Nanxi and Pengfei could join Neng¡¯s herding shift. But Chen Hongzhang didn¡¯t need to know that the lessons were just a plausible excuse. After the horse blanket was delivered, top priority would be a week of napping by a fire. There would be riding, of course, but nothing that resembled hard work.

    Horse spotted them as they reached level ground and ran to inspect. When she spotted Pengfei, she reared and neighed.

    ¡°Nice to see you too! I¡¯ve got something for you.¡±

    Pengfei stopped, withdrew the horse blanket from his bag and held it out in front if himself. The mount neighed suspiciously but allowed him to drape it over her back and slip iron toggles through loops of fabric to hold the thing in place.

    ¡°I had to guess at the measurements, butI think it fits.¡± Pengfei nodded, satisfied at his handiwork. His craftsmanship was amateurish at best, but there it was. A thick imitation of a jacket tied around the animal¡¯s midsection. Neck, legs and tail protruded through holes in the cloth.

    The mare bucked and whinnied but seemed to enjoy the clothing.

    ¡°There you go.¡± Pengfei chuckled and reached out a hand to rub her neck. But the mare gave his fingers a quick nip and pranced away.

    ¡°Fuck!¡± Pengfei screamed, clutching the abused digits to his belly, doubling over in pain.

    ¡°Women. Am I right?¡± Nanxi commented dryly.

    ¡°I have no idea actually.¡± Neng replied.

    ******************************************************************************

    The clouds had reached them, hanging ominously above but not yet releasing their torrent. Pengfei examined the sky while his unconcerned friends wielded their wooden training swords. A duel between Elder Weidao¡¯s ¡®Soaring Dragon in the Sky Swordplay¡¯ and Elder Chen Zi¡¯s ¡®Silent and Scentless Swordstroke¡¯, played out via their disciples.

    Neng¡¯s style incorporated the qinggong of the sect heavily. He bounded lightly across the ground, lunging and slashing nimbly. His opponent stood more rooted, and to his credit, defended well for a time, occasionally moving with strangely elegant steps and strikes. But it did not hold.

    Neng made short work of Nanxi. A matter of talent and practice more than the difference in styles. Neng trained with Elder Weidao every day, whereas Nanxi had only attended a handful of lessons with his new master. And unenthusiastically at that.

    ¡°Ugh, it¡¯s useless.¡± Nanxi complained as he walked toward Pengfei and the fire at the conclusion of the match. ¡°The movements are too flowery. More of a dance than a martial style. And Master Zi spends half our time together lecturing on Taoist sword rituals.¡±

    This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.

    ¡°Don¡¯t be a sore loser.¡± Neng chided.

    ¡°Is it okay for me to watch you two sparring?¡± Pengfei asked. ¡°Your masters aren¡¯t going to scoop my eyes out, are they?¡±

    Neng shook his headed. ¡°No, It¡¯s fine to look, just not recommended to imitate. But even that is not forbidden. Anyone in the sect can go to the Scripture Hall and look at the manuals. There are no secret styles in Kunlun.¡±

    ¡°That hasn¡¯t been my experience¡­¡± Pengfei murmured.

    ¡°You talking about your late night work with Elder Rulan?¡± Nanxi took a sip from a water skin and sat by the fire.

    ¡°Yeah. Although, maybe it doesn¡¯t count. It¡¯s not a style from Kunlun.¡±

    ¡°Come on, you¡¯ve got to give us more than that.¡±

    ¡°Stop prying into it.¡± Neng chastised Nanxi. ¡°Do you want Elder Rulan to cut his tongue out?¡±

    ¡°Is it fun at least? Learning anything useful?¡± Nanxi continued, unabashed.

    Pengfei threw a rock into the fire, then sat next to Nanxi, thinking of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ manual that Chen Rulan had cruelly dangled in front of him.

    ¡°I was so excited at first. I thought¡­ I hoped he was going to change his mind and take me as his disciple. Teach me something. But it¡¯s torture. A martial art I can read about but never speak of, never practice. Nowhere in the sect feels private enough to even try. Even out here,¡± Pengfei looked about the valley, ¡°I feel like he would see me. And if I get caught¡­.¡± He shuddered at the thought.

    ¡°Just remember what you read. Someday the old bastard will be dead and you can do whatever you want.¡±

    ¡°There¡¯s no way I¡¯ll remember everything. Anything. If I can¡¯t practice it, those words and pictures will just drift away, out of my head. Shit, even if I could get away with it, I¡¯d probably be doing most of it wrong. Just like when I was trying to learn neigong.¡±

    Neng nodded in agreement as the first snowflakes began to fall. Still light and wispy. He checked the pot of rice that Pengfei had set on the fire, left it to cook a while longer and sat again. The three lounged quietly until Pengfei apologized after an awkward silence stretched too long.

    ¡°Sorry for whining. We were supposed to come down here and have some fun. Now, I¡¯m complaining, there¡¯s a fucking blizzard coming in, Horse is,¡± he waved at the mare, still prancing in her new cover, not allowing anyone to approach. ¡°well, Horse is being Horse. It looks like it¡¯s going to be a bust.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. It¡¯s nice just to have a break from the elders.¡± Neng reassured him, but Pengfei was having none of it.

    ¡°Don¡¯t lie. You love training with Elder Weidao. I bet you¡¯re just itching to get back up there for you next lesson.¡±

    ¡°Not me.¡± Nanxi said. ¡°I, for one, am happy to be here. You¡¯re the most entertaining thing to happen here in years. A spoiled brat from a mysterious family, fleeing to the sect all alone. And now a little bit of inter-sect intrigue. A forbidden martial arts manual. It¡¯s like watching a play. Do you have any other secrets you can regale us with, Pengfei?¡±

    Neng chuckled, and Nanxi prodded Pengfei with his elbow jokingly, but the boy was staring into the fire. Pensive. Horse neighed in the background.

    ¡°Secrets¡­¡± he said to himself, his mind drifting away, unbidden. Back to a canyon down the valley.

    ¡°Pengfei?¡± Neng called, his voice coming muted to Pengfei¡¯s ears.

    A struggle. A death. A cold night and a flight from danger.

    ¡°I killed a guy a few months ago.¡±

    Neng and Nanxi looked at each other then to Pengfei, speaking in unison. ¡°Bullshit.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Pengfei told the tale. His trip down to the valley, scouting for horse pasture. Coming upon the canyon, finding the dead body. Encountering Guoyu. His friends took in the story with increasing disbelief.

    The Thousand Year Ginseng and the Mountain King pushed them over the edge.

    ¡°A magical elixir and a spirit beast? You¡¯re so full of it.¡±

    But Neng was not as dismissive. He looked toward Horse, who had approached the fire with the twilight, sniffing curiously at the pot. ¡°She does seem bigger.¡±

    ¡°No, that¡¯s ¨C ¡°, Nanxi began but caught sight of the mare and stopped short. Regardless of that slight evidence before him, he shook his head. ¡°¡­that¡¯s¡­ no, no. Show me a body. Show me a giant fucking leopard. Show me some proof.¡±

    They all turned to look down the valley where the proof was waiting.

    Ten minutes later, Horse was saddled. Pengfei rode while Neng and Nanxi ran beside. Fresh snow crunched beneath shoe and hoof alike.

    There was argument that it was too late in the day. That the weather could worsen at any time. Logic would have them wait at least until the morning. But Nanxi would not be dissuaded. To Pengfei¡¯s surprise, Neng was just as adamant.

    Horse nickered beneath him as the group pressed on.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re so happy about. You look ridiculous.¡± Pengfei crabbed. He was slightly offended that his friends didn¡¯t believe him. Annoyed that they had forced this nighttime expedition. Foolish for going along with it. Scared at the prospect of what they would find. He vented it all on the mare, wearing her odd little coat under her saddle.

    Still, she conveyed him faithfully to the canyon. The horse never flagged, happy to keep a lightning pace until he pulled back on the reins coming through the narrows in the valley. Where the Mountain King had made its leap for them.

    The other two noticed her stamina as well, both examining her as they caught up and walked by her side. They hypothesized as Pengfei scanned the ridgeline for mythical predators.

    ¡°Maybe she¡¯s reached the ¡®return to youth¡¯. Gone back to her days as a young filly.¡±

    ¡°No. Not even the Thousand Year Ginseng can take you that far in one shot.¡± Neng contradicted. ¡°Besides, she still has grey in her coat.¡±

    ¡°Maybe the ¡®realm beyond fire and ice¡¯. She doesn¡¯t seem to mind the cold much.¡± Nanxi leaned in and rubbed Horse¡¯s neck.

    ¡°Maybe. She¡¯s definitely taller.¡±

    ¡°Will you two shut up?¡± Pengfei hissed at them. ¡°Are you trying to get us eaten?!¡±

    They sniggered but obeyed.

    Pengfei turned his attention back to the front. The canyon was a black slice in the barren rock of the eastern ridge, growing taller with every step taken. Was there a shadow looming in the darkness, or just in his imagination?

    --I shouldn¡¯t have told them. We shouldn¡¯t be here.--

    It wasn¡¯t just the fear. It was the guilt too. He had lost some sleep over his first kill. Some, but not much. But he¡¯d also been keeping a healthy distance from the corpse.

    That distance evaporated despite his anxieties. They were there, at the mouth of the canyon. Pengfei dismounted, his cloth shoes providing little comfort from the layer of the white that now covered the earth. Snow was falling faster, even coating the canyon floor.

    ¡°Well, where is he?¡± Nanxi looked to the ground, while Neng examined the upper reaches of the rock walls, as if more appreciative of the natural formations than the intrigue they pursued.

    Pengfei didn¡¯t answer. He pushed past his friends, drawn forward and dreading it at the same time. His steps slowed as he approached the ledge of the small drop. He saw Guoyu¡¯s face, peaking just above it, as he held his bow taut. The arrow loosed. Pengfei recalled the grisly result. A man sputtering his last breath, choking up blood as he pleaded for help.

    Neng and Nanxi joined him at the ledge. They all looked downward together. Beneath, a mound of snow in the shape of a body, hiding all the morbid details of what lay just a hair¡¯s breadth beneath. The shaft of an arrow protruding upward.

    ¡°Fuck me¡­¡± Nanxi muttered.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough. Let¡¯s get out of here.¡± Pengfei spoke quietly, then turned back toward the mouth of the canyon.

 Chapter 36 - Sutra from Shaolin (Day 1 of 1000)

    The heavy snow that had come with the recent blizzard made the sect-wide exercise regimen untenable.  The mountain paths were too treacherous now, even for the those most skilled in qinggong.  Shutian claimed that some of the elders were capable of the fabled feat, treading atop the snow without sinking in or leaving prints, but no one in the Jin generation had reached that level of lightness skill.

    Instead, the boys filled the Veneration Hall and spent the early hours in extra neigong practice.  Circulating their internal energy had the benefit of protecting against the cold somewhat.  Or at least made it less noticeable.  Chen Mo made no complaint when the disciples crowded into his domain for the extra hours each day.  The decrepit master welcomed them in, protecting them from the harsh winter outside.

    But not all the elders were so merciful.  During the hours where disciples toiled at their various jobs, learning professions and duties from the older generation, Chen Ji maintained his savage schedule.  The work at refilling the stores of the cliffside cells had been completed.  That thinly veiled excuse had been discarded.

    The buckets and sacks of rocks they had carried along the mountain path were still of use though.  Instead of hauling them to the cells, half filled with water or supplies, the boys bore their burdens in the training grounds.  After shoveling and sweeping the courtyard, they lunged across the area in lines, weighted with rocks.

    The contingent of disciples suffering Chen Ji¡¯s ire had grown.  Nanxi and the twins, the newcomers, were still acclimating to the elder¡¯s peculiarities but the two identical brothers at least seemed well suited to the physical discipline.  They trudged through the exercise with their usual stoicism.

    ¡°You know, while you were gone, he didn¡¯t make us do any of this shit.¡±  Shutian said

    Xiaotong nodded, ¡°It was nice to have a week off while you were down in the valley.¡±

    ¡°Give me a break.¡±  Pengfei groaned.  He took another lunging step, bending his front leg deeply and lowering the back knee slowly down to the earth, before straightening again.  Buckets hung from a wooden dowel spread across his shoulders.  The slightly uneven loads constantly threatened his balance.

    The other boys, ten altogether, were mumbling their own displeasure as they moved across the paving stones.  Pengfei¡¯s friends had spread their belief that the recent draconian practice was the result of a certain someone¡¯s rudeness toward Elder Rulan.

    --True or not, they¡¯re going to string me up if I don¡¯t do something about this.--

    To his friends, he whispered ¡°I¡¯m going to give something a try.  Wish me luck.¡±

    Pengfei set down his burden when he came back to the starting line of their exercise.  He approached Elder Chen Ji who smiled wryly off to the side and counted the boys¡¯ laps.

    --Thank goodness he¡¯s in one of his good moods.  This might actually work.--

    Pengfei bowed low in front of the elder and stayed there as he spoke.

    ¡°Sir, please excuse my impertinence.  I have begun making amends to Elder Rulan for the rudeness I previously showed him.  I understand you wished to correct my impolite behavior as well and I thank you for your kind lesson.  However, my fellow disciples have never been foolish enough to disrespect the elders like I have.  So, I humbly request that you allow me to bear this punishment alone.¡±

    He remained bent over staring at his feet for long seconds.  Then, a gentle hand reached out and lifted Pengfei back up.  Chen Ji smiled warmly at him and spoke softly.

    ¡°Pengfei, what are you referring to?¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°¡­¡±

    ¡°Uhhh, forgive me, sir.  Several weeks ago you said that¡­well, it was something to the effect of ¡®you¡¯ll be working hard for quite a while¡¯.  Because of how I behaved with Elder Rulan.¡±

    Chen Ji shrugged his shoulders.  ¡°I¡¯m sorry, child.  I don¡¯t recall that.¡±

    ¡°Oh.¡± Pengfei was taken aback, unsure how to proceed.  ¡°So then, the recent training wasn¡¯t because of me? But my friends said that while I was gone ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Haha, I just didn¡¯t want you to miss anything my boy!¡±

    ¡°I see.  Thank you for your consideration elder but ¨C¡°

    ¡°No, no, Pengfei, it was no trouble at all.¡±  The tone of Chen Ji¡¯s voice shifted subtly as he spoke, infusing his words with a hint of malice.  ¡°You¡­ do appreciate the lengths I¡¯ve gone to in order to make you feel included here, don¡¯t you?¡±

    --Fuck.--  The hairs on the back of Pengfei¡¯s neck stood on end as the elder leaned in whispered in his ear.

    ¡°Now get your ass back to work, you little shit.¡±

    A shove sent Pengfei stumbling towards his yoke.  The boy picked it up hurriedly and hung the buckets across his shoulders again, taking a few quick steps back into line with the others.  They had all been watching surreptitiously.  They collectively braced for the coming storm.

    ¡°Listen up you little bastards!¡±  Chen Ji shouted to the group at large.  ¡°You are the future of the Discipline Hall!  When your sect brothers stray from the path, it is you who must set them right!  If the Sect Head broke our Closed Gate punishment tomorrow, it would be your duty to drag him back in chains!¡±

    That refrain was a favorite of Chen Ji.  It had been shocking at first but now they responded automatically, shouting in unision. ¡°Yes sir!¡±

    ¡°Shutian, I¡¯m sure you¡¯ve been keeping track.  How many days until we leave this mountain for our home in Qinghai?¡±

    Shutian blanched at the attention but sputtered an answer.  ¡°About¡­ a thousand.  Give or take.¡±

    If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    --A thousand days?--  Pengfei latched onto the number, a nice round figure.  --What can I get up to in a thousand days?  Hopefully figure out a way to stay on this psycho¡¯s good side.--

    Chen Ji accepted the estimate as well, nodding and giving his own image of the future.  ¡°We¡¯ll travel the Desert Road, back to our old territory.  For many of your brothers, it will be the first time they¡¯ve been outside the sect in ten years.  Uncountable temptations, innumerable dangers.  Only you to keep your fellows in line.¡±  He inspected the disciples critically.

    ¡°In the face of your responsibility, you dare bitch about a little exercise?!  You force this poor idiot,¡± Chen Ji waved toward Pengfei, who cringed at the insult and the cold stares of the others, ¡°to come up here and beg for mercy on your behalf?!¡±

    The boys waited.  Tensed for the hammer to fall.  Everyone knew it was coming.  It was just a matter of how bad it would be.

    ¡°I¡¯d keep you here all day and night if I could, but it¡¯d be an insult to the rest of your instructors.  We¡¯ll have to do what we can in the time we have.  More stones!  Double the weight you¡¯re carrying.   I don¡¯t care if you have to stuff the rocks down your pants!¡±

    The boys groaned then moved to the side of the training yard where piles of rocks waited.  On their way, several intentionally threw their shoulders into Pengfei as they passed.

    ¡°Good job, dickhead.¡±

    ¡°Asshole¡­¡±

    ¡°Dead meat.¡±

    Shutian and Xiaotong were little help.  In fact, they added their own frustrations to the muttered abuse of the others.

    ¡°No¡­¡± Pengfei whined.  ¡°I ¡­ I was trying to help!¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    ¡°Again.¡±  Chen Rulan crumpled another page and threw it over his shoulder.

    ¡°Hhhh¡­ yes, sir.¡±

    Pengfei moved back to his own desk, sitting on the cold wooden floor.  Between the time he spent under Chen Ji and the regularly scheduled afternoon training, he had spent the majority of the daylight hours outside.  The cold had seeped into his bones, which already ached from his exertions.  Each trip from his desk to Chen Rulan¡¯s was a painful expedition.

    --At least he lit a brazier today.--

    The heat was welcome.  The small lamp next to his station provided little warmth by itself but hot drafts occasionally reached him from the larger burner.  He shivered in his thickest coat, atop multiple layers of robes.  The new winter boots were stiff where they were curled beneath Pengfei.  Each breath released a cloud of fog in the dim yellow light.

    The disciple returned to his task.  Copying another page from the martial arts manual.  ¡®The Arhat Fist of Shaolin¡¯.  Progress was still painfully slow.  Nine out of ten attempts failed to meet Elder Rulan¡¯s exacting standards.   It was especially painful when Pengfei completed the front of a page, only to have the back rejected, then having to rewrite both.

    Various tactics had been attempted.  Rounds of practice before showing any attempts to the elder.  But there seemed to be little rhyme or reason to it, beyond sheer repetition.  This was a punishment.  An exercise in humility and patience.  It was not really a matter of quality but of quantity.  All Pengfei could do was move his brush until Chen Rulan nodded.

    The repetition gave him plenty of time to ponder the questions that sprang to mind.

    --Why did he refuse to take me as a disciple, refuse to teach me the fist, then dangle a Shaolin martial art in front of me?--

    That answer had come quickly to his mind.  Torture.  Punishment for Pengfei¡¯s rudeness.  A disciple who wants to learn bare-handed martial arts offends an elder.  Naturally, he should be shown the manual he can never practice, teased with something that will remain out of reach.

    It was the only thing that made sense.

    And it was an effective admonishment.  Each page was a promise broken.  A glimpse into the world Pengfei longed to explore but was barred from stepping foot in.

    But, with the mystery behind Chen Rulan¡¯s choice of punishment resolved, one question still remained.

    --What is an elder of Kunlun doing with a manual from Shaolin?  I¡¯ve heard of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯, it¡¯s supposed to be pretty fundamental.  And if they teach it to the outer disciples, there will be a lot of copies outside of Shaolin.  But it¡¯s still weird for Chen Rulan to consider the book a ¡®prized possession¡¯.--

    Pengfei turned the matter over in his mind as he examined the current page of his work.  There were few words.  The difficulty stemmed from something else.  The introduction had been finished; this was the first page of the martial techniques.  A drawing of a figure in bow-and-arrow stance with a few explanatory sentences.

    It was a simple depiction but still beyond Pengfei¡¯s abilities to freehand.  The paper was too thick to trace.  Today, he had snagged a small piece of charcoal from a cold brazier, now used it to sketch a faint outline that he could wipe away if necessary, or cover in ink if it was adequate.

    He examined his drawing closely.  Scrutinized every detail.  The attempt suited Pengfei¡¯s eye, but not the elder¡¯s.  When Pengfei brought the page forward, the man shook his head.

    ¡°It seems you¡¯re not suited for this task, Pengfei.¡±  Rulan heaved a sigh, shaking his head.  He looked to the boy with an expression of disappointment.  ¡°You may go.  I will make other arrangements for the transcription.¡±

    The elder crumpled the page, like the rest, and waved the confused disciple off.

    ¡°Is there something else I can do to make amends for my rudeness, Elder Rulan?¡±

    ¡°I have nothing else that requires assistance.  Anything I assigned to you would be mere punishment, and contrary to what you may think, that is not my intention.  Instead, just go.¡±

    The elder waved, dismissing.  Pengfei bowed and turned to leave.  There was a relief in being freed from this ordeal but a sense of regret as well for having failed to meet expectations.  And doubts nagged at the back of his mind.  He had reached the doorway, opened it to the dark and freezing night, before realizing what bothered him.  He stopped suddenly half in, half out.

    --He didn¡¯t say I was forgiven.--

    In retrospect, it was a glaring omission.  Pengfei looked back to the elder, still sitting at his own lap desk.  A sharp breeze rattled the door and made the boy brace as he vacillated on the threshold.

    He could leave.  Spare himself a little misery.  Goodness knows he had better things to do with his time.

    --Is it some sort of test?  No¡­he wouldn¡¯t be that tricky.  Would he?--

    Perhaps it was those Confucian treatises he had spent so much of his youth memorizing.  The emphasis on filial piety that extended to a blanket respect for one¡¯s elders.  Pengfei had never been a great adherent to that train of thought, but something nagged at him.

    It was more likely a genuine regard for Chen Rulan, and the strain Pengfei had put on that teacher-student relationship.  While not as precious as a master-disciple bond might be, it was still worth preserving.  Even if would take a little work.

    --I could at least show him my sincerity.--

    ¡°Shut the damn door, boy!¡±  The elder scolded as Pengfei deliberated, half-in, half-out.

    The disciple stepped back into the room with a reluctant sigh, pulling the door closed against the heavy wind.  Iron hinges groaned, mirroring the boy¡¯s attitude.

    --This is going to suck.--

    Without a word, Pengfei returned to his station.  He sat at the desk and squared another piece of paper in front of him.  With a glance at the open manual, he began sketching the familiar silhouette once again with the worn piece of charcoal.  A slight chuckle sounded from the man across from him, but Pengfei paid it no mind.

    He sketched freely now.  The charcoal on the page took shape and, meeting Pengfei¡¯s standards at least, was covered over in ink.  A few minutes to dry, then the disciple was presenting to the elder again.

    ¡°It¡¯s your worst one yet.¡±

    Pengfei was turning back to his spot, already setting his mind to the next iteration, but the elder was working his way to his feet behind the boy.

    ¡°Look at this.¡±  Chen Rulan called.  He held out Pengfei¡¯s latest drawing, pointing out some flaw instead of simply wadding the paper into a ball.  ¡°What do you see here?¡±

    Pengfei looked to his work but the elder¡¯s accusatory finger wasn¡¯t indicating anything in particular.

    ¡°It¡¯s¡­ the bow-and-arrow stance?¡±

    ¡°And you don¡¯t see anything wrong with it?¡±

    ¡°No, sir.¡±

    ¡°Then demonstrate.  Just as you¡¯ve drawn it.¡±  Chen Rulan took a step back, giving the room necessary, then waited expectantly.

    --What¡¯s ¡­--

    ¡°Hurry up!¡±

    The elder¡¯s impatience banished any questions from Pengfei¡¯s mind.  He squatted into a horse stance, opening toes, then heels, toes, and heels.  Then slid one foot back and turned his waist sharply, hands clenched to fists at his side.  A well-worn sequence of movements.  These were the basic stances after all, common among most styles with degrees of variation.

    Chen Rulan shook his head, dissatisfied with what he saw.  ¡°I was hoping it was just your poor artistic skills but perhaps the fault lies in your intellect.¡±  The words and tone were severe.  He left the disciple in place and picked up the original text from Pengfei¡¯s desk, flipping back to the introduction, then reading.

    ¡°Let¡¯s see¡­ ¡¯the basis for the powerful strikes being the deep-rooted stances¡¯¡­Does your stance feel deep-rooted?¡±

    ¡°But in Kunlun¡¯s style ¨C ¡°

    ¡°This is different!  Kunlun¡¯s martial arts keep light feet and a high stance, to be used in concert with our sword and qinggong.  But Shaolin begins and ends with the fist.¡±

    Chen Rulan kicked Pengfei¡¯s back foot, dragging it along the floor until he judged the angle it made to be correct, then pulled back on the boy¡¯s shoulders to straighten the spine.

    ¡°Feel the posture.  Maybe if you spend an hour like this you¡¯ll gain a bit of insight to help in your work.  We¡¯ll see if your next attempt at copying the page conveys the truth of it.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir!¡±

    In any other circumstance the exchange might be considered confrontational.  A chastisement of the kind so common between senior and junior.  Holding stances until the muscles and ligaments screamed was a stereotypical penance in martial sects all across the Central Plains.  And the disciple¡¯s legs were already greatly fatigued from a strenuous day.

    But Pengfei smiled.  Because this was the moment he began learning the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ in earnest, under the guidance of Chen Rulan.

    And if the elder smiled when he turned away from the disciple, it went unseen.

 Chapter 37 - Do you really know him? (Day 42 of 1000)

    (Day 42)

    ¡°Forty-two¡­¡±, Pengfei said to himself, stretching his neck as he walked. More than a month ago, Chen Ji¡¯s belligerent ranting had led to a revelation. One thousand days until the Kunlun sect leaves the isolated mountains, returns to Qinghai and the martial society of the Jianghu. And since then ¨C

    --Forty-two days have passed. And it doesn¡¯t feel like I¡¯ve gotten much accomplished. Not that I really need to.--

    The only deadline was a self-imposed one. Pengfei had set aside the mysteries that had bumped up against him. The message he had carried from the Qingcheng sect, the black-robed strangers who had killed his friends. The question of whether to pursue answers and revenge.

    Part of it was redundant now. Ma Feng¡¯s killer lay dead in a canyon not far away, rotting. That little bit of justice came as a surprise. But he still had to decide whether to pursue it further.

    --Said I would make up my mind when it was time to leave this mountain. Forty-two days closer to that decision¡­ Fuck it. That¡¯s a problem for future me.--

    He shook the worries from his mind, and the movement became a shiver against the cold. Spring was on the horizon now, but the warmth hadn¡¯t come to the mountains yet. The sky was crystal clear, not a cloud in sight. Bright sun. But the clarity of the atmosphere made the low temperature seem even sharper. It wouldn¡¯t be so jarring if he hadn¡¯t spent the last several hours indoors. One of the empty storehouses, undergoing painful instruction from Chen Ji.

    Pengfei¡¯s body ached from the grappling style the elder was passing down. ¡®The Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯. This time, it was the neck that was throbbing. Half a dozen varieties of chokes and strangles left him stiff. So, when Jin Fan clapped a hand down on Pengfei¡¯s shoulder, it sent a jolt of pain down his shoulder and up to his eyes.

    ¡°Shit! What are you doing?¡±

    ¡°I wanted to talk to you. Where are you headed?¡± The disciple had a harsh face. Sharp cheekbones, a prominent jaw. But he was easy-going beneath the angular fa?ade.

    ¡°Back to my dormitory. I want to check something before afternoon training.¡±

    ¡°Neng isn¡¯t one of your bunkmates, is he?¡±

    ¡°No.¡±

    ¡°Good.¡±

    That pricked at Pengfei¡¯s ears but he let it pass without remark. They walked in silence for a few seconds, both bundling up against a slight but painful breeze. They reached the building quickly, Pengfei held the door open for his companion then stepped inside and pulled it shut.

    ¡°What did you want to talk about?¡± Pengfei asked as he led the way to his bedroll in the back corner.

    Jin Fan seemed to be searching for a beginning. ¡°How seriously do you take your job? I know you and your friends are working on this horse thing¡­ but what about the Discipline Hall?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Pengfei shrugged and ducked down to fetch his bag. ¡°There¡¯s not really much disciplining to do. Seems kind of pointless. Maybe when a new generation of disciples join the sect we can keep them in line.¡±

    ¡°Right, right. Keep them from sneaking off to town, gambling. Bullying each other. That kind of thing?¡±

    Pengfei nodded as he searched through his personal possessions. ¡°Yeah¡­ would have been nice to have something like that a few months ago when I was getting the shit kicked out of me.¡±

    ¡°Exactly.¡± Fan agreed. ¡°That¡¯s why I wanted to talk to you. That sort of thing still happens from time to time. And since we¡¯re in the Discipline Hall now, maybe we should do something about it. I know you went through this, so I figured you might have a little perspective. And since your friend is the problem ¨C ¡°

    ¡°My friend?¡± Pengfei interjected in surprise, racking his brain and then settling on the clear suspect. ¡°Fucking Nanxi¡­ he¡¯s an idiot, but he doesn¡¯t mean anything by it. He just has a five-year-old¡¯s sense of humor. What did he do?¡±

    ¡°No, not him. I¡¯m talking about Neng.¡±

    Pengfei absent-mindedly grabbed the book he was looking for, tucked it into his robes, and stood to look at Jin Fan sternly.

    ¡°What are you talking about? Neng isn¡¯t like that.¡±

    Fan didn¡¯t falter. He met Pengfei¡¯s gaze and continued. ¡°He¡¯s been giving people a hard time recently on the practice grounds.¡±

    ¡°He just takes martial arts seriously. It¡¯s not ¨C ¡°

    ¡°It¡¯s more than that. We¡¯ve all been doing this for a long time. Longer than you. We can all handle some rough training every now and then. But he¡¯s going beyond that.¡± Pengfei started to protest, but Fan held out a hand to silence him. ¡°I¡¯m not trying to make an issue out of nothing. But people are starting to talk. Just pay attention next time there¡¯s a sparring session and let me know what you think.¡±

    With that, Jin Fan turned and walked towards the dormitory¡¯s exit but stopped at the door.

    ¡°You¡¯re going to town soon, right? With the others?¡±

    ¡°Next month.¡±

    ¡°I hope we can figure things out by then. I don¡¯t want to mess with your friend if I don¡¯t have to, but if you¡¯re not around to keep an eye on him and something happens¡­¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t think you¡¯d be a match for him.¡±

    Jin Fan sighed. ¡°Yeah, I know. But still.¡± He stepped outside and closed the door behind him, leaving Pengfei conflicted, confused, and alone.

    ******************************************************************************

    Horse stance, to bow stance. Qilin steps crossing over, slide to cat and then one-legged crane. The postures came more fluidly now.

    Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!

    The manual of Shaolin¡¯s ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ was open to another page. A footwork diagram that traced out the path of one of the style¡¯s forms. Pengfei performed the movements as Chen Rulan read by the light of his lamp, though more often than not he was observing the boy¡¯s martial arts over the top of his book.

    The process had been a strange one. Teacher and student both still conformed to the roles of their little play. Each pretended that these evening sessions were for the purpose of transcribing a new manual. Just copying the elder¡¯s treasured text to a fresh booklet. For sentimental reasons.

    So, Pengfei felt awkward breaking through that invisible barrier to ask his questions. But it was necessary. Martial arts were filled with complexities and intricacies that could only be resolved with the aid of someone more experienced. Pengfei paused to voice what weighed on his mind.

    ¡°Sir, is it alright for me to be learning another sect¡¯s martial arts? I mean, am I allowed? Are Shaolin¡¯s martial arts compatible with Kunlun¡±

    ¡°Allowed? Yes. Compatible? Yes and no.¡± Chen Rulan spoke without looking up, as if that cryptic answer should be enough. Pengfei puzzled over the words, motionless,

    until Chen Rulan picked up on the confusion. The elder held his book to his chest. A break from reading for a short aside.

    ¡°The ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ is just a small piece of their style. A piece of a piece. The physical movements by themselves will expand your striking, give you a new perspective. But there could be issues if you went any further along Shaolin¡¯s path.¡±

    Pengfei wanted to pry further into the mysterious universe of martial arts but Chen Rulan had already raised his book and gone back to reading. Instead, the disciple mused over the questions as he continued his practice.

    --What is the new perspective I¡¯m supposed to find with the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯? I don¡¯t even know what my old perspective is.--

    He went searching for it. He put aside the art from Shaolin momentarily and instead moved through the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ for a time. The choreographed movements were obviously different but that was to be expected. He looked deeper.

    --The strikes are mostly the same.-- Pengfei said to himself as he punched. The twist of the arm as he sent the hand outward, the turn of the hips. --Difference seems to be in the lower body... Kunlun is taller, the stances higher. It feels more comfortable. But maybe it¡¯s because I¡¯m more used to it.--

    He shuffled across the wooden floor in the more upright stance of Kunlun. Felt the way his weight shifted and moved.

    --The kicks feel a little easier like this¡­ but the punches a little weaker. Is that the only difference? Which way is the right way?--

    He threw a straight punch and froze at full extension. He then shifted his weight subtly, sinking deeper into the position that Shaolin¡¯s style would have dictated. A pause to adjust to the new mindset of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯. Then he continued in that vein.

    --Beyond the physical techniques, Buddhist martial arts versus Taoist¡­ I know the philosophies can be worlds apart.--

    Pengfei thought over the later portions of the manual he had glimpsed. The meridians were the same, but used differently than in Kunlun. Where he had learned to project his qi outward for a strike, Shaolin would keep it contained within the body. The terminology used indicated that the Buddhist sect¡¯s neigong could be different on an even more fundamental level.

    ¡®Qi of the Nine Yangs.¡¯

    ¡®Energy of the Golden Bell and Iron Body.¡¯

    Internal arts to complement the external, and vice versa. Neigong to waigong and back again. These were ideas that Kunlun had no equivalents for, at least none that Pengfei had seen. When he had asked, he had been waved away. Too early to worry about such things.

    --I¡¯ll just have to cross that bridge when I come to it.--

    He set aside the deeper mysteries and focused on his punch. It felt good. Strong. But the elder still had corrections.

    ¡°You¡¯re too tense. It¡¯s slowing you down. Relax more.¡±

    ¡°Won¡¯t that make me weaker?¡± Pengfei asked.

    ¡°The opposite. If you stay relaxed, you¡¯ll move faster. The speed is more important than the muscle. Only squeeze your fist at the very end of the strike. Until then, keep it loose.¡±

    --Huh.--

    Pengfei threw another punch but felt his tendons squeezing before he even extended his arm. He tried again, slower, making a deliberate effort to keep every fiber of his body relaxed as he moved.

    ¡°It¡¯s counterintuitive.¡± He remarked and the elder nodded.

    ¡°It¡¯s one of the greatest difficulties of martial arts. Fighting your body¡¯s natural instincts. Not tensing up in the face of danger.¡± Chen Rulan closed his book and set it down on his lap desk. ¡°That¡¯s enough for tonight. Do you have any new pages for me?¡±

    Pengfei wiped his hands on his robes and bent down to pick up the latest page of his transcription efforts. He walked it over to the elder and presented it with both hands. The man gave a quick glance and an accepting ¡°Humphf¡±, then laid the paper down in front of himself.

    ¡°Goodnight sir.¡±

    The disciple gave a martial bow, straightened his clothes, and left Elder Rulan to his own devices.

    The night was brisk and quiet. The only sounds and lights came from the dormitories that ringed the outskirts of the compound. One hundred and fifty disciples joking amongst each other in the last bit of day before curfew.

    At the nexus of several intersecting paths, two familiar faces stood motionless. Nanxi and Neng. They were chatting away casually.

    ¡°Hey.¡± Pengfei called out in mild surprise. ¡°What are you guys doing out here?¡±

    They paused their conversation at his approach.

    ¡°Just finished training with my master.¡± Neng said.

    ¡°Same.¡±

    Pengfei gave Nanxi an incredulous look. ¡°You? Really?¡±

    ¡°What? I¡¯ve been stepping it up a bit recently.¡± Nanxi waved dismissively, then stuck his thumb out at Neng. ¡°All the exercise has me restless. I was just trying to convince him to go for a walk.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, let¡¯s go.¡±

    Pengfei pulled the reluctant Neng along and they fell in step with Nanxi.

    They walked through the empty buildings to the path along in the northeast, the one that led to the cliffside punishment cells. They didn¡¯t go all the way there, just far enough that the mountain fell away into that stunning drop. Even at night, the view was spectacular.

    The boys picked their way along the rocks and boulders and finally took a perch on one of the smoother surfaces. Pengfei picked up some of the pebbles that covered the ground and threw them over the edge. They disappeared into the night without a sound.

    There was idle talk. About martial arts, the other disciples, the aging masters of the sect. And when the talk lulled, an awkward transition to a new topic.

    ¡°So, Pengfei¡­ how ya been?¡± Nanxi asked.

    ¡°Um¡­ fine? Why do you ask?¡±

    ¡°Just curious. No one has been giving you trouble recently?¡±

    ¡°No, I¡¯m fine.¡±

    ¡°Good.¡± Neng chimed in but fell back into silence.

    ¡°That¡¯s great. I know you had a rocky start, and I was partly to blame for that.¡± Nanxi winced and shrugged. ¡°And¡­ well, I just wanted to make sure the things that happened in the past didn¡¯t ruin your opinion of Kunlun. Of your brothers here.¡±

    ¡°Brothers¡­¡± Pengfei tested the word. ¡°I guess I¡¯m still getting used to that idea. Of being part of a sect. But I¡¯m getting there.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m glad to hear it.¡± Nanxi nodded.

    ¡°You¡¯re being weirder than usual.¡± Neng said dryly, and Pengfei couldn¡¯t help but agree.

    ¡°Yeah, is everything alright?¡±

    ¡°Is this about ¨C ¡° Neng looked up and down the path, then continued more quietly. ¡°Is this about what Pengfei showed us in the canyon? The body?¡±

    Pengfei tensed at that, the reminder of the man he had killed. The secret he was keeping from everyone except the two on either side of him now.

    ¡°No! What?! No! I mean, yeah, that probably warrants a check-in as well. But it¡¯s not like I think Pengfei is some psycho killer or something. But really, I just wanted to make sure he didn¡¯t harbor any ill will toward the people here.¡±

    ¡°No¡­I¡¯m fine. I mean, I¡¯m not going to spend a lazy afternoon with Hongyu and Daopian anytime soon, but I¡¯m not about to poison their food either.¡±

    ¡°Great! See that¡¯s great!¡± Nanxi said overenthusiastically. ¡°Because like I said, we¡¯re all brothers here. Like me for instance, I argue with people here and there. The occasional misunderstanding over a prank. But I don¡¯t have any ill will for anyone. You¡¯re the same, right Neng? No big issues?¡±

    ¡°Of course not.¡±

    Suddenly, the conversation with Jin Fan came back to mind. Pengfei glanced to the side at Nanxi, who was trying too hard to look casual. Neng didn¡¯t notice, but Pengfei could feel it.

    --Nanxi angled the conversation this way on purpose.--

    Pengfei closed his gaping mouth and looked to the ground. Neng was quiet, not one to talk much in the first place. The thread had dropped. Nanxi didn¡¯t seem to know how to continue. So, Pengfei gave it a try.

    ¡°So, Neng, is that how you think of everyone in Kunlun? Like brothers?¡±

    ¡°Yeah.¡±

    ¡°Even the assholes?¡±

    Neng gave Pengfei a serious look and reached a hand for his friend¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Pengfei, I know you still have a family out there. But for the rest of us, the sect is all we have. When we go back to the Central Plains, we need to protect each other. You might not like everyone here, but I hope you can see past that when it matters.¡± Neng stood. ¡°I¡¯m heading in. You guys should too.¡±

    He walked back the way we had come, leaving the other two alone in the dark. When Pengfei was sure Neng was out of earshot, he turned to Nanxi.

    ¡°Did Jin Fan talk to you?¡±

    ¡°He was worried you weren¡¯t taking him seriously.¡±

    ¡°And you do? You can¡¯t honestly think that Neng would hurt anybody. You heard the way he was talking just now. It was all love and brotherhood.¡±

    Nanxi threw a pebble of his own over the edge of the cliff. ¡°Did you notice that Neng was a loner before you befriended him?¡±

    That gave Pengfei pause.

    --Shutian came with Xiaotong¡­ Nanxi came with the twins¡­ Neng was¡­?--

    ¡°Alright, he¡¯s a quiet guy but ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Not just quiet. Obsessive. Uncompromising. It¡¯s been amazing to see him open up since you got here.¡± Nanxi smiled grimly at Pengfei.

    Pengfei read the implication in his friend¡¯s face. ¡°You think he¡¯s going back to the way he was?¡±

    ¡°Not exactly. I¡¯m not sure¡­ but I think we should keep an eye on him. Well, I should. Maybe you sit this one out.¡±

    ¡°Why?¡±

    ¡°Because Neng knows about¡­ ya know?¡±

    ¡°Oh, right.¡± A lump formed in Pengfei¡¯s stomach. He didn¡¯t believe for a second that Neng would tell anyone about Guoyu. The fight to the death and the body in the canyon. Not as things stood now.

    --But if we have some sort of confrontation¡­?--

    ¡°Come on, let¡¯s head back.¡± Nanxi said, standing and looking down over the cliffside. ¡°You know Pengfei, if you were some sort of psychotic killer, you could ¨C¡°

    ¡°Yeah, I already thought about it.¡± He gave his friend a slap on the shoulder, not enough to move him but enough to give the boy a start.

    ¡°Whoa! You bastard!¡± Nanxi hissed, backing away from the edge.

 Chapter 38 - One at a time (Day 60 of 1000)

    (Day 60)

    The six of them made their way through the markets.  Pengfei inspected the wares with interest.  He hadn¡¯t seen much of them on his trip with Elder Rulan at the start of winter.  But whatever eagerness the boy felt at the spectacles around him could not compare to what his companions were exhibiting.  They gaped and gasped at everything about them.

    ¡°Is this the first time you¡¯ve been to town?¡± Pengfei asked of Nanxi.

    ¡°We came through here when the caravan brought us to Kunlun as children, but we didn¡¯t get to see much of it back then.  Should I buy this?¡±

    Pengfei dragged his friend away from the poorly crafted jewelry.  There were plenty of other gaudy trinkets to distract and entice as they wound their way through the stalls of the Hotan bazaar.  The merchants called out in a variety of languages.  The language of the Uyghurs dominated, but when they saw the disciples of Kunlun they would throw out a few phrases in the dialects of the Central Plains.  The swords hanging at the sides of the teenagers did not seem to dissuade or intimidate the sellers at all.

    Shutian and Xiaotong were tight with their coin purses.  The twins, Tianwei and Tianxun, spent more freely, mostly on food.  But everyone knew better than to waste too much money here.  Pengfei had forbidden his companions from spending anything at all for the first two days, until the sense of wonder had worn off.  They were in town for a month and needed to budget accordingly.

    ¡°Take this for a minute.¡±

    Nanxi held out the heavy sack for Pengfei.  Odds and ends from the blacksmith, items that had been ordered months ago.  Pengfei shifted the canvas bag to his shoulder as the other boy searched through his robes for his coins, drawn in at last by some crafty sales pitch.

    They made it to the outskirts of the commercial district without being too horribly scalped.  Beyond the stalls and shops were the headquarters and warehouses of the major traders.

    The disciples approached one of these buildings.  Another of Kunlun¡¯s holdings.  A defunct clinic that Elder Chen Lei had operated in the past, in the days before the Jin generation had arrived.

    That much was allowed, even under the terms of the sect¡¯s decades-long punishment.

    The building had been shuttered for years.  The physician had been needed at the sect¡¯s main compound to tend to young disciples and begin training students in the basics of medicine.  So, this clinic had been loaned out to the tea merchant next door.  For storage.  But now, rumor was that Chen Lei would be returning to Hotan with his wards to further develop their skills in the healing arts.  For now, the clinic served as base of operations for the Kunlun disciples while they were in town.

    Pengfei dropped the sack of tools just inside the door, then grabbed a large bunch of grapes from a nearby table and went out the back door.  The rear area was fenced in, more to deter thieves and trespassers, but it made decent corral for Horse.  She trotted over when Pengfei appeared.

    ¡°Just one more day.¡± He assured the mare as he fed her grapes.  ¡°Tomorrow we¡¯ll go check out the herd Kunlun has bought.  Plenty of room to move, some new friends for you¡­¡±

    The mare nickered happily as she ate the small fruits from Pengfei¡¯s palm.  When they were gone, he wiped his hand on her neck, turning it into an affectionate scratch.  But once the snack disappeared, Horse had little patience for the boy.  She walked off.

    ¡°You two have a strange relationship.¡±

    Pengfei turned to see Nanxi had come to find him.  He said to his friend, ¡°She can be hot and cold.¡±

    The other boy stood silently next to Pengfei for a moment and they both watched as the black steed moved about the dry yard in front of them.

    ¡°You¡¯ve been pretty quiet since we left Kunlun.¡±

    Pengfei nodded.  ¡°Worried about Neng.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s been fine for the past few weeks.  Maybe Jin Fan had it wrong.¡±

    ¡°But you don¡¯t think so.¡±  Pengfei said knowingly.  He had seen the same concern in Nanxi¡¯s face at several points in the paster several days.  The boy was about to say something more but was preempted by the appearance of the twins.

    ¡°Visitors.  Lamas.¡±

    ¡°Pissed about something.  Like they want to fight.¡±

    ¡°No way!  Are you serious?¡±  Pengfei forgot everything else and looked toward the front of the clinic.  ¡°You guys are screwing with me, right?¡±

    --It can¡¯t be them.--

    He had told his friends about the passing encounter with the Tibetan monks last time he was in Hotan.  But he never thought he would see them again.  Yet, when Pengfei marched back inside the old and dusty building, there they were.  A gaggle of young men, seven or eight, in dark red robes stood just outside on the street.  Blocked from entering by Shutian and Xiaotong.  They seemed to be the same age as the Kunlun disciples, most of them a year or two older than Pengfei.  One of the strangers absent mindedly rubbed his shaved head.

    ¡°What do you guys want?¡±

    The question was met with silence and glares.

    ¡°Doesn¡¯t seem like they understand.¡±  Xiaotong remarked.

    Nanxi poked his head over the other¡¯s shoulder.  ¡°Thanks for the valuable insight, Xiaotong.  That was really helpful.¡±

    ¡°Screw you.¡±

    ¡°What should we do?¡±  Shutian asked.

    Pengfei thought a moment

    --They¡¯ve waited for four months and gone to the trouble of tracking me down¡­ Don¡¯t think they¡¯re going to just let this go if we slam the door in their faces.--

    ¡°Let them in, I guess.  See if we can figure something out.¡±

    ¡°Are you sure about that?¡±

    ¡°We have swords.  They¡¯re unarmed.  Stop being a pansy and let them in.¡±

    ¡°Should I make them some fucking tea while I¡¯m at it?¡±

    ¡°Good idea.¡±

    The disciples stepped back from the doorway and beckoned the lamas inside.  The guests followed, looking left and right suspiciously as they crossed the threshold, but remaining silent.

    Shutian grumbled on the way to a side room, grabbing a brick of tea that the merchants had left behind in the clinic.  Pengfei wished he had taken the task upon himself.  It would have saved him some awkwardness.  The Tibetans milled about the large clinic.  Poked through the cluttered boxes and crates of stored goods.  They chatted amongst themselves in little snippets, occasionally pointing at one of the Kunlun disciples.

    This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.

    Two of the lamas in particular were focused on Pengfei.  They eyed him malevolently and discussed between themselves.  Nodding and murmuring.

    After an interminable silence, with no help from his friends, Pengfei broke down.  ¡°I like your haircuts.  We shaved our heads a while back.  It was a whole thing¡­ but I¡¯ve been thinking about doing it again.¡±

    ¡°You should tell them about how I ¨C¡°

    ¡°Nope.¡±  Pengfei cut off Nanxi before he could broach that subject any further.

    The strangers did not acknowledge or respond to the words, or any other attempts at conversation.  Before the water could boil, one of the strangers found the back door and beckoned his companions outside with a foreign phrase.  Pengfei followed with the rest of the Kunlun disciples, except Shutian who was left behind to finish the tea.

    In the dusty courtyard, the lamas clumped together and faced the boys from Kunlun.  They spoke hurriedly now.  The two that had been glaring at Pengfei stood at the fore.  Both tall, strong.  They looked similar.  Brothers, or cousins maybe.  More muscular than Pengfei, despite his modest development during the winter.

    The two Tibetans stepped forward and introduced themselves in unambiguous language, pointing to themselves in turn.

    ¡°Jigme.¡±

    ¡°Chodak.¡±

    Jigme stepped farther and crossed the gap to Pengfei.  He spoke for several seconds, becoming more animated as he did so, his voice reaching a shout by the end of his remarks.  Pengfei listened, eyes squinted, trying to catch any hint of meaning in the few phrases he knew or the body language.  But there was nothing.  He looked back to his friends.  They just shrugged helplessly.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I don¡¯t ¨C ¡°

    A slap across the face muted the words.  Pengfei¡¯s head jerked to the side with the impact.  Shouts immediately rang out from his friends.  A push kick from Nanxi sent Jigme back a few steps but with no apparent damage.  The other Tibetans surged forward at this attack.  The Kunlun disciples drew their swords in a fearsome unison.

    Everyone froze at that.  Horse neighed, her attention drawn by the altercation.  A tension hung in the air from the escalation but was broken when Shutian appeared at the doorway behind them.

    ¡°What the fuck is happening?!¡±  He hissed, holding a tray of teacups.

    Pengfei ignored the question but addressed his friends as he touched his bleeding lip gingerly.  ¡°Put the swords away, put them away.¡±

    He waved at the weapons in his companions¡¯ hands, as if the motion itself was enough to sheathe the blades.  The other palm he held up to the Tibetans, attempting to forestall any larger conflict.  The glimmer of drawn steel was sending shivers up his spine.  The last time he had seen that¡­

    ¡°Seems like they want to fight you.¡±  Xiaotong remarked.

    ¡°You¡¯re still so helpful.  Top notch.¡±  Pengfei said sarcastically, rubbing his cheek.

    Nanxi still had his sword up in a true guard stance, and the twins flanking him on either side were the same.  He observed coolly, ¡°They don¡¯t have any weapons.¡±

    ¡°So, let¡¯s not start chopping anyone up.  Yet.¡±

    The disciples of Kunlun were somewhat mollified by Pengfei¡¯s words.  They relaxed their postures a bit, some of them returned their swords to their scabbards.  Nanxi, notably, did not.

    --Definitely seems like they want to have it out with me.  A fist fight?--

    Pengfei tried to confirm his suspicions in as simple language as possible.

    ¡°You,¡± he pointed to Jigme, ¡°Me,¡± he pointed to himself, ¡°Fight?¡±, he held up his hands and pantomimed a few punches.

    Jigme nodded in comprehension and agreement.

    ¡°Why?¡±  Pengfei made a show of raising his hands and shrugging in confusion.

    The boy didn¡¯t expect much clarification and indeed, the response from Jigme was mostly unintelligible.  But one word stood out.  A name.  Pema.

    ¡°Pema?¡±  Pengfei repeated.

    Jigme nodded, and the other one, Chodak, stepped forward and shouted some insult, presumably.

    Nanxi whistled.  ¡°It¡¯s about Pema, huh?  Well, are you going to fight him?¡±

    Confusion was quickly being replaced with other feelings in Pengfei¡¯s mind.  Darker, more violent feelings.  Anger.  Jealousy.  Even as images of the dark skin and black braids of a girl on horseback flitted about in his thoughts.

    ¡°Yep.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 60 Continued)

    --A duel to the death?  Fucking hope not¡­ he¡¯s unarmed after all.  But the language barrier makes it hard to work out the details.--

    Anxiety began to fill Pengfei while he prepared for the encounter.  His hand shakily removed the sword and scabbard from his waist and passed it to Xiaotong.  Still, he knew fists could kill as well.  Especially if a martial artist used their internal energy.

    Someone spoke next to him but he didn¡¯t hear it.  Nanxi shook his shoulder and repeated whatever it was, but the words were still just a dull drone in the background.

    ¡°Slap me.¡±  Pengfei said into the void.

    Nanxi didn¡¯t have to be told twice.  He had provided the service for Pengfei before, the encounter with Daoping.  A palm, loose enough that the impact was a sharp sting and not a dull thud, bit into his face.

    ¡°Better?¡±

    Pengfei just nodded frantically as he bounced on his toes.  The pain had brought him back to the present.  His vision widened from the tunnel it had been confined to, sound filtered back into his ears.

    A few paces away, the Tibetan lama Jigme was getting his own emphatic pep talk from his relative.  The similar looking boy, Chodak, was less violent than Nanxi but seemed just as effective at providing motivation.

    --Brother?  Or cousin?  Fuck, it doesn¡¯t matter. --

    Pengfei blinked away the distraction and stepped forward.  Jigme came to meet him with his hands raised.

    A flicked punch bit into Pengfei¡¯s lip.  It was already bleeding from Jigme¡¯s earlier slap.  The follow-up from Nanxi probably didn¡¯t help either.

    One of the disciples called something that cut through the shouts of the Tibetans.

    ¡°Get your head into it!¡±

    Pengfei shuffled away from a follow up attack.  His awareness was slowly increasing.

    --C¡¯mon, c¡¯mon¡­ just another match! --

    The nerves Pengfei had experienced in the training grounds, facing fellow disciples in sparring matches, had lessened recently.  He had reached a state of comfort with that, even when facing off against particularly aggressive opponents.  Even when blows nicked skin and bruised flesh.  But context mattered.

    --We¡¯re not in the training grounds¡­it¡¯s more like when I fought Guoyu in the canyon.--

    Memories from the fatal confrontation returned.  The sluggish movements, the fear he had felt.  It was similar to what was happening now.

    A left jab and a right straight, a palm strike to the abdomen and a kick toward the head.  Pengfei stepped back out of reach from most of them, taking the kick on a raised guard.  He stumbled back stiffly, felt the tension in his legs.

    Then he remembered the words of Chen Rulan.

    ¡®It¡¯s one of the greatest difficulties of martial arts.  Fighting your body¡¯s natural instincts.  Not tensing up in the face of danger.¡¯

    The fight in the canyon.  He had certainly been tense then.

    --But this isn¡¯t the same.  It¡¯s different.  No swords.  He¡¯s not trying to kill me.  I think.  My friends are here.  It¡¯s just a match.  Just a match.--

    His clamped fist opened ever so slightly.

    --Just a match.  Against some prick.--

    Pengfei parried a jab and came back over the top of it with one of his own, landing his first strike, squeezing the fist closed at the end of the blow.  Jigme showed no sign of pain, circled back and out of range.

    The Kunlun disciple searched for his peace of mind.  Slowly found some semblance of it.  He took the higher stance of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and skipped to the side lightly.

    Quick punches and kicks, nimble movements.  Jab, and a stronger punch to the stomach.  He ducked back from a knee strike thrown by the lama, whose toes barely touched the earth again before throwing a kick to the body.  Pengfei raised his own leg, taking the impact on his shin with a sickening ¡®clack!¡¯ of bones.  He resisted the urge to bend over and vigorously rub the skin of his lower limb.

    The jeers of both sides blended together.  Occasional phrases made it through the noise.

    ¡°Go now ¨C ¡°

    ¡° ¨C got to focus on ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Don¡¯t let him back ¨C ¡°

    Pengfei went in behind his fists.  Jigme parried each blow and grabbed for his throat with a vicious looking palm, fingers curled in like claws.  Pengfei blocked it upward and simultaneously sent his own palm into his opponent¡¯s gut.  A satisfying ¡®whoosh¡¯ of breath was forced out of the Tibetan¡¯s mouth and he stumbled backwards a few steps.

    The lamas screamed and the Taoists from Kunlun cheered.  Both reactions fed the smile on Pengfei¡¯s lips.

    Jigme brushed his midsection angrily then raised his hands again with a shout.   His forearms pulled taut, he bristled with intensity.  And then there was something in the air.

    ¡°He¡¯s going to use ¨C !¡°

    Pengfei was already moving before the warning from behind was finished.  He pulled a quick thread of qi from his dantian, down to his legs, and lunged to the side.  Multiple actions combined into a single idea, a single thought.

    --Move!--

    Jigme burst forward with a straight punch, closing a gap of half a dozen paces.  The blow moved with speed and force beyond natural.  But Pengfei was not there to receive it.  His qinggong had taken him safely to the side in a leap just as inhuman.  He landed lightly on the ground.

    ¡°Enough!  It¡¯s too much!¡°, Nanxi cried out.  His offense at the sudden use of qi was apparent.  Qingong was one thing, but using energy to attack was a taboo in friendly matches.  That additional power was what might take an honorable, though adversarial, bout like this into the realm of a true duel.

    Pengfei held up his hand as his friend stepped forward to intervene.

    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine.  It¡¯s still under control.¡±

    In the past few months, the elders of Kunlun had hinted at allowing the Jin disciples to use their qi in sparring matches.  Under supervision.  With restraint.  Better to get used to it in the training grounds than in a real fight.  But that practice had never come.

    --And here we are.--

    Pengfei took his stance again, his legs tingling from the use of qinggong.  Already prepared to move again.

    A heartbeat and the combatants were locked together in a close-quarters exchange of blows.  The qi that had powered their lunges added force to their initial attacks.  Luckily, Pengfei had blocked a sweeping forearm with his own.  Subsequent strikes were ordinary physical techniques but thrown with the vigor of fit young men.  Each fighter winced as knuckles dug into chest and flank.

    Pengfei pushed Jigme back and delivered a sidekick to the other¡¯s face when he had the room.  The lama¡¯s head jerked back then came forward again with a bleeding nose and a scream.

    Jigme charged in blind anger but was shoved back, down to the ground, with a well-timed push kick.

    A thrill ran through Pengfei.  He looked down at his opponent.  He tried to deliver a quip but the excitement jumbled his words.  He intended to say ¡®Had enough?¡¯, but what came out wasn¡¯t recognizable as such.

    ¡°Hudeuf?¡±

    Buddhists and Taoists looked at him with equal confusion.

    --Shit¡­moment ruined.--

    Jigme stood to his feet again, moving to reengage.  But a hand reached out to stop him from advancing into the fray again.  Chodak.  He said something and pushed Jigme back toward the other Tibetans.

    The new opponent skipped all preamble.  The pause in the bout had seen a lull in the ambient qi, but the concentration of energy noticeably spiked again as Chodak took Jigme¡¯s place and assumed a fighting stance.  He¡¯d clearly be using all his faculties from the first blow.

    ¡°How many of you assholes does he need to kick the shit out of?!¡±

    Pengfei wiped his nose and waved off Shutian¡¯s concerns.  Despite the nerves, the frenetic impulses of something more than a sparring match, he had been able to conserve his stamina.  He had the lungs to continue.

    ¡°I can keep going.¡±  Pengfei announced, then spit contemptuously on the ground at his new opponent¡¯s feet.

 Chapter 39 - Both of them? (Day 64 of 1000)

    (Day 60 Continued)

    Without waiting for further ado, Pengfei lunged in.  The qinggong method, ¡®Three Twists of the Dragon in the Clouds¡¯, carried him quickly across the intervening ground.  He still struggled with the ¡®lightness¡¯ in his ¡®lightness techniques¡¯.  His understanding of his weight distribution was still wanting.  But his muscles surged with power enough to carry him over the dirt to his opponent.

    When the two fighters clashed, Pengfei was pushed back.  Not by much, but noticeably.  Chodak followed with several of the palm strikes that Jingme had first displayed.  The tip of each finger seemed to trail qi through the air.  It was not visible, not really.  But whatever sixth sense had developed with his neigong practice allowed Pengfei to perceive it on some level.  Like heat haze that surrounded the orange licks of a fire, but still just outside the eye¡¯s ability to see.

    The lama did not imbue every attack with qi.  A hook caught Pengfei in the forehead as he tried to lean back out of range.  It cut the skin, though shallow.  On average, the Tibetan¡¯s blows were much more dangerous those from Kunlun¡¯s disciple.

    --Need to try something stronger.--

    There was only one possibility.  One technique in Pengfei¡¯s meager repertoire.  The ¡®Thundering Sky Strike¡¯.

    Pengfei went back and forth with his opponent several times as he prepared himself.

    --Draw the qi out, guide it down the arm.  Release it, send it outward at the moment of contact.--

    The meridians would have the best alignment with a straight punch from the right hand.  Hard to find a clean opportunity for that strike on its own.

    --Need to set it up. Jab, same-side high kick.  Throw the right as I land the foot in front¡­--

    The sequence decided, he waited for his opportunity.  But Chodak was more skilled than his friend, Jigme.  And not just in his liberal use of internal energy.  His technique was fast and varied.  Pengfei began his combination, but the Tibetan slipped around the jab and latched on to the attacking arm, sinking all his weight to the ground in an attempt at a joint lock.

    Pengfei preferred striking, but had still been attentive during Chen Ji¡¯s instruction on the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯.  He latched his hands together and bent his elbow against the pressure that Chodak was exerting on his arm.  They both fell to the dirt and tussled for a few seconds before scrambling away from each other at the first break of contact.

    Chodak spit on the ground and cursed at Pengfei.  It must have been a curse.  It had all the venom and spite you would expect in one.  But the Taoist disciple didn¡¯t project the same animosity.  There had been anger before the fight.  Anger at the mention of Pema¡¯s name.  Who were they to mention her name?  But those thoughts had gone with the first strike thrown.  There was no rage now.  Just the struggle.  And maybe some lingering fear.

    Another hook.  Pengfei tried to fade backwards again, but the result was the same as last time.  Clipped.  More of a hit than a miss.  The impact reverberated in his head but he responded immediately.

    Jab.  Kick.

    <u>Thundering Sky Strike (lei tian ji ¨C </u><u>À×Ìì“ô</u><u>)</u>

    The energy followed the path of least resistance.  From the lower dantian in the abdomen, through the meridians of the arm, to the fist.  All while Pengfei¡¯s foot planted, torso turned, hand extended.  His opponent was already bringing an arm over for a parry, but it would be too late.  The way to the target was unobstructed.  The distance narrowed in the dew drop of slowed time.

    Pengfei¡¯s blow landed in the meat of Chodak¡¯s chest.  Well away from the heart.  No matter how hot the emotions had run at the beginning of the encounter, he was still cool headed enough not to escalate the match into a life-and-death battle.  It should be enough to end the fight but not enough to do any lasting harm.

    The fist spun and bit deep into the muscled flesh below the collar bone.  Pengfei could feel the energy course down his arm and outward, like a gust of wind had taken him by surprise and tried to bowl him over from behind.  There was a rush, a sound to match.  It was the finest example of the technique that Pengfei had ever managed.

    All fell silent as Chodak stumbled back and brought his opposite hand to his chest.  The lama kneaded the flesh beneath his robes, gritting his teeth and growling who-knows-what at Pengfei.  A beat passed.  Two. More snarled curses as Pengfei stood triumphantly waiting for the concession of defeat.

    Instead, Chodak raised his hands and advanced forward.

    The Tibetans cheered and the disciples of Kunlun gaped.  Nanxi was the first to recover.

    ¡°Hit him again!¡±

    But Chodak wasn¡¯t going to let that happen.  He attacked more ferociously than before.  If there was a weakness on his right, where Pengfei had struck, it was not enough to detect.  The Buddhist monk¡¯s blows were just as swift.  His palm strikes still ripped through the air with the same energy as before.

    ¡°Don¡¯t just back straight up!  Laterally!¡±

    --One of the twins?--

    Pengfei was unsure which one, but took their advice as he was forced on to the defensive.  He used his qinggong to evade, first parrying then skirting away in the shadow of the blows.  But every time he turned to face his opponent again, Chodak was closing in on him, plodding doggedly forward.

    Qinggong to dart in.  The basic straight punches so characteristic of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist.¡¯  Fast, in short combinations, then back out of range again.  But they were ineffectual against Chodak.  There were small cuts sprouting across his face, but otherwise he was undaunted.  And each mark left the Tibetan more aggressive than before.

    The monk adjusted to Pengfei¡¯s evasions.  A faster pace left the Kunlun disciple struggling to protect himself.  A straight punch left him tasting blood.  He ran his tongue across his top teeth to ensure they were all still there.

    ¡°Protect your head!¡±

    --¡­What do they think I¡¯m trying to do?  The fucker just won¡¯t stop coming¡­ and I can¡¯t defend against his palm strikes forever.--

    Stolen story; please report.

    The thought triggered something in his mind.  A memory, hammered in by countless repetitions.

    --¡­ a style of righteousness and empathy, robust in defending the self, shielding the weak, compassionate even when subduing demons with a single perfect blow¡­--

    The Arhat Fist.  The lines from the introduction of the Shaolin manual came back to him now.

    --Robust in defense.  Single perfect blow.--

    Pengfei had used the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ in training matches.  Against his peers that used the quick and darting style of Kunlun, it had been only marginally effective.  The fist method had lost some of its initial mystique to the boy who had imagined Shaolin¡¯s techniques to stand above all others.  It hadn¡¯t worked out that way so far.

    --But now?--

    He widened his stance and took in Chodak¡¯s guard as the opponent approached.  He gritted his teeth and prepared to take the next barrage head on.

    The long distance straight punches, and a snapping front kick bridged the gap.  Instead of using his qinggong to dance away from the blows, Pengfei stayed rooted.

    Waiting.

    He blocked the punches and absorbed the impact of the kick straight-on, with a grunt.  The steadfast resolve of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯.  Many of the techniques were similar to those of Kunlun, different more in focus than in content.  A few novel movements.  Pengfei used one of the more exotic parries, coming from over the top and scooping another kick off-line.

    But it was that core philosophy that he relied on now.  Defense above all, but not flight.  Not retreat.  The evasive movements were still there, but smaller.  Stay close to the aggressor, wait for the opportunity to subdue with a single blow.

    Keeping eyes peeled for an opening.

    It wasn¡¯t coming.  The claustrophobia of the constant attacks closed in from the sides.  But Pengfei still watched.  He pivoted his whole body with another parry, turning into cat stance and flicking a front kick out.  But Chodak was already coming back in.

    --Maybe when he¡­--

    And there it was.  The lama swiped with his palm again.  Energy dragging along with his feline fingertips.  A terrifying attack, but wide.

    The difficulty was not in spotting the opening but capitalizing.  The reaction speed was there.  But the next part went against all normal instincts.  Move toward the attack, not away.  Into the inferno, not out.  Another of the counterintuitive points of martial arts that battled with the body¡¯s natural sense.

    Pengfei¡¯s lead hand went straight out as he sank deep into the stance.  Sitting into the punch.  The bottom of Chodak¡¯s palm strike passed just above his skull, fingers catching strands of short hair.

    The punch landed just beneath the border between chest and abdomen.

    --Fuck, it wasn¡¯t deep enou¡­--

    But the fears evaporated when Chodak took two steps back and fell to his knees, sputtering

    Pengfei dropped his outstretched fist and stood straight.  He looked to the groaning cluster of lamas.  Back to his fellow disciples from Kunlun who were cheering boisterously.

    --It didn¡¯t feel like I hit him that hard?--

    But the proof of it was kneeling right in front of him.

    A giddy chuckle was boiling up in Pengfei¡¯s belly.  It had to come out.  He didn¡¯t try to say anything complicated, afraid he¡¯d find himself tongue tied again.

    ¡°YYYYEEEEESSSS!¡±

    He turned back to his friends and raised his arms in victory to their screaming affirmations.  He only had a moment to bathe in the glory before another lama tackled him from behind.

    The rest of the Tibetans charged.  Kunlun¡¯s disciples rushed forward to meet them.  The ensuing brawl favored the Buddhists, at least in numbers.  Until, a moment later, when Horse joined the fight.  Biting, stomping at anything wearing a red robe.

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 64)

    The beginners had mostly taken well to riding.  The twins, Nanxi, Xiaotong.  The four of them were off on a small expedition in the surrounding area, following one of the herdsmen.  Shutian was having the most trouble.  He was sitting on a gelding now, being led around a small paddock by Pema¡¯s father, Dorje.

    Pengfei looked on from a distance, next to Pema.  They chuckled at Shutian¡¯s difficulties.  He was being treated like a child by the Tibetan clan¡¯s patriarch.

    ¡°He is a bad choice for your group.¡±

    Pengfei laughed, finding the point hard to deny, but shook his head.  ¡°No, he¡¯ll be fine.  Besides, look how happy he is?  I¡¯ve never seen him smile so much.¡±

    Pema squinted her eyes at Shutian then arched a quizzical eyebrow.  Intuiting the question, Pengfei explained.

    ¡°If he¡¯s not actively scowling, I consider that a smile.¡±

    ¡°Ah.¡±

    Horse nickered derisively beneath him, and Pengfei dug his heels inward in an attempt to silence the mare.

    ¡°So...do you want to go find the others?¡±

    A tense moment passed while he waited for Pema¡¯s answer.  He had been trying to get her alone for the past several days but there had always been something else to do.  He seized this opportunity.

    The young woman smiled and nodded. ¡°Sure.  Let¡¯s go.¡±

    They rode slowly, out past the tents and wagons that made up her family¡¯s encampment.  Through the pastures that held the goats and yaks that the clan had come to sell to the merchants of Hotan.  The numbers had been greatly reduced since last time Pengfei had visited.  The few dozen Kazakh horses that Kunlun had purchased grazed among the other animals.

    Pengfei and Pema both knew that the other disciples had gone west, but she led them north at the river.   A light giddiness rose up in his belly.  Just to be doused a second later.

    ¡°You and your friends had a fight a few days ago.¡±  Pema said.  A statement, not a question.  Seeing Pengfei¡¯s confusion, she explained.  ¡°The monks came to visit us last night, after you left.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, I¡¯ve been meaning to talk to you about that.  I could tell they were Tibetan.¡±

    ¡°Buddhists.  They will travel to Mongolia soon.  The tribesmen there respect our lamas.¡±

    ¡°They knew how to fight.¡±

    She nodded.  ¡°They teach such things in the temples.¡±

    A few minutes passed in silence as they rode.  The topic still hung in the air, awkwardly.  In the days since the brawl, Pengfei had invented all manner of scenarios and motivations for his attackers.  But there was only one plausible explanation.  They had mentioned Pema¡¯s name, come to find Pengfei.  Romantic rivals.  The only question was how Pema felt about them.

    The pair reached a little copse of trees and paused.  The weight of not knowing finally broke him down.

    ¡°One of them said your name.  It was the only thing I could understand.¡±

    ¡°Yes, we know them.¡±  Pema looked off into space for a time.  A lengthy pause but Pengfei knew it was still the girl¡¯s time to speak.  He waited, and eventually she turned to fix him with a serious gaze.  She spoke frankly, evenly.

    ¡°When they return from Mongolia, their time as monks will be over.  They will leave their temple and we will marry.¡±

    ¡°Marry?¡±  A lead ball sank to the bottom of Pengfei¡¯s gut.  ¡°What -  who?  Which one?¡±

    ¡°The ones you fought.  The brothers.  Jigme and Chodak.¡±

    Confusion and dread mixed inside him.  He focused on the unimportant details, pushing away the bigger picture for a time.  ¡°But¡­ which one will you marry?¡±

    ¡°Both.¡±

    Pengfei gaped.  ¡°That¡¯s¡­ no, that can¡¯t¡­¡±

    ¡°Where you are from, don¡¯t the men take many wives?¡±

    ¡°Some men.  But that¡¯s... no.  It¡¯s different.¡±  Pengfei struggled to reconcile the reality of his own upbringing to his current reality.  His own father had taken a second wife.  Pengfei¡¯s mother had lived in even more secrecy and seclusion afterwards.  ¡°Your father can¡¯t make you do that.  We can ¨C¡°

    ¡°Make me?¡±  Pema interrupted before Pengfei¡¯s concerned words could take him any further down the potentially offensive path.  ¡°My father does not make me do anything.  It¡¯s a good match.  Their family has large herds to the south, ties to Lhasa.  And by marrying both of them, the entire inheritance will pass to my children.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re too young!¡±

    ¡°Older than you.  And old enough.¡±

    The age gap between them was small, absolutely speaking, but where Pengfei was just coming into his manhood, Pema was well within the range of years when a young woman would find a match.  On the younger side, to be sure, but still within norms.  Especially for the nomadic tribes.

    Logistic details pushed to the side, the painful truth settled in on Pengfei.

    --Willingly.  She¡¯s willingly choosing someone else.  Two ¡®someone else¡¯-s in fact¡­  Shit.--

    The sting of rejection pricked at his eyes.  He blinked and looked away from the beautiful girl.  A gentle hand rested on his shoulder.  He expected some pitying consolation to be the final stab in his heart, but she took him by surprise again.

    ¡°We still have some time.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    ¡°They¡¯ll be in Mongolia for at least a year.  Another six months before a wedding.  We can still spend time together.  I told them to mind their own business until the marriage.  They will not bother you again, if that is what you¡¯re worried about.¡±

    ¡±Worried?  No¡­ that¡¯s¡­ it¡¯s not that.  But we can¡¯t.  It wouldn¡¯t be right.¡±

    ¡°According to who?¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s false ethics gave way to the truth soon enough under the girl¡¯s scrutiny.  Not propriety.  Jealousy.

    ¡°You¡¯re marrying them.  Choosing them over me.  And you just want me to sit back and accept it?¡±

    The horses munched at the grass below their hooves as the drama of their riders unfolded.  Pema fixed him with an eye that held a hint of scorn.

    ¡°It¡¯s not about you.  I need to plan for my future, my family¡¯s future.  Or were you planning to leave your sect when the rest of them return east?  Give up your friends and family, become a shepherd, marry me?¡±

    He had no defense to that rebuke.  He chose to lash out in his impotence.

    ¡°Do you even love them?¡±

    ¡°Oh, Pengfei.¡±  Pema spoke sadly.  She pulled her reins and turned her horse back the way they had come.  She leaned over in her saddle as she passed and kissed his cheek.  He could feel a tear running down his cheek transfer over to her lips.  ¡°I guess you¡¯re still just a boy.¡±

    She rode back toward the Tibetan camp and left Pengfei alone on Horse, standing idly by that little copse of trees.

 Chapter 40 - What was that about? (Day 105 of 1000)

    (Day 103)

    Pengfei searched for a new sparring partner among the crowd.  With Nanxi and the twins in the valley below, tending to the horses, he had fewer of his regulars to choose from.  And Chen Rulan constantly urged the disciple to choose different opponents with each match, experience their different approaches to combat.  The elder watched him from the side of the training ground even now.

    He caught the eye of Jin Andong, eldest and nominal head of the Jin disciples.  They both nodded their acknowledgement and without any further prompting, stood across from one another to wait for the next round.

    ¡°Begin!¡±  Chen Rulan shouted.

    Andong darted in lightly to deliver a few quick punches, then hopped back out of range of possible counters.  Pengfei defended successfully but did not throw any attacks of his own.  He used the deeper stances of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯, trying to confirm an insight that had grown within him during the weeks following his fight with the Tibetan lamas.

    The head of the Jin disciples came again.  He moved with the speed of one who had reached a high level of skill in the sect¡¯s qinggong.  But Pengfei could see each blow coming and parried accordingly.  Despite the skill of his defense, he could not find an opening to attack his opponent.  Or rather, could not move quickly enough to capitalize on the openings he saw.

    The match ended with an unsatisfying lack of contact but Pengfei had let that disappointment slide before he reached Chen Rulan.

    ¡°So?¡± the elder asked.

    ¡°It feels like what I said last night.  The ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ is not a good match for Kunlun¡¯s style.¡±

    ¡°More.¡±

    Pengfei tried to vocalize what he was feeling on an instinctual level.  ¡°The fight in Hotan¡­ they were aggressive, constantly coming forward.  I didn¡¯t have to pursue as much to land my own attacks.  Just wait for them to come to me.¡±

    ¡°And Kunlun¡¯s style?¡±

    ¡°In and out too fast.  The low stances of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ give more power¡­ but I can¡¯t actually land my strikes before my opponents are back out of range.¡±

    Chen Rulan bobbed his head in agreement.  ¡°Then, what¡¯s your conclusion?¡±

    ¡°Different styles for different opponents?¡±

    ¡°Too complicated.  What about people who only learn a single style?  What do they do when they meet a difficult opponent?

    Before Pengfei could find the answer, Chen Rulan shooed him away, back into the disciples searching about for their next partner.  Back into the fray.

    --Too complicated?  Then what¡¯s the simple version?--

    As the others paired off around him, an opponent presented himself via the process of elimination.  The only other unpaired disciple left nearby.  Pengfei recognized the face but struggled to recall the name.

    ¡°Greetings, brother¡­¡±

    ¡°Jin Baizu,¡± the other supplied.

    ¡°Greetings, Brother Baizu.  Please teach me.¡±

    They made their salutes and began circling when Elder Rulan shouted again.  Baizu was shorter than Pengfei, but not by much.  And faster.  Not as quick on his feet as Shutian or Andong, but still capable of hopping in and out of range of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯.

    Pengfei blocked each attack as it came, searching for his chance.  Each time, a beat too slow.  He yearned to change his approach, to use Kunlun¡¯s ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and match his opponent¡¯s speed and mobility.

    Instead, he searched for another way.  He considered Chen Rulan¡¯s question.

    --How would a disciple of Shaolin handle this?  They would know more techniques, but the base would be the same. ¡®To know the Arhat Fist is to know all the 72 martial arts of Shaolin¡¯--

    Another flurry.  Blocked, parried.  Another counterattack missed.

    --Underneath the technique¡­ how do you catch a faster opponent when you¡¯re planted like this?--

    Pengfei defended again, then attacked again.

    --How¡­?  Ah!--

    Something clicked in his mind.

    --Defend.  Attack.  Defend AND attack.--

    It was a principle present throughout all the styles Pengfei had seen thus far.  To some extent or another.  He had even used it before, under different guises.  Attack and defense in the same moment.

    At the most basic level, a block executed at the same time as a counter.  One arm defends the other attacks.

    You could even dispense with the block, using movement as defense.  Sliding beneath an opponent¡¯s blow to strike at the opening it created.  As Pengfei had done against Chodak.

    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.

    But there was yet another level, where even that little extraneous movement was stripped away.  Sensing an opponent¡¯s assault as it formed, throwing an attack of one¡¯s own in anticipation, to stem that violent tide.  The interrupting blow prevented and inflicted damage at the same time.  Simultaneous attack and defense at its most elegant.  And its most difficult.

    Pengfei knew intellectually he had stumbled upon the answer, but there was still a gap between that knowledge and its application.  He examined Baizu¡¯s movements and watched for the moment the next strike would come.  The moment he could meet his incoming opponent with a strike of his own.

    The moment came and went.  Pengfei didn¡¯t perceive any telltale signs, didn¡¯t register any motion until Baizu was already upon him.  He managed to defend but not to respond.

    It took a few more passes for Pengfei to begin picking up on the subtle clues that preceded Baizu¡¯s attacks.  A squeeze of the fist, a twitch in the shoulder.  When he saw the tensing in the legs that hinted at the use of qinggong, Pengfei struck.

    A single step forward with a straight punch.  Baizu¡¯s eyes went wide in surprise as his target approached faster than expected, distance and timing thrown off.

    Pengfei¡¯s attack missed in the end, but so did Baizu¡¯s, as the disciple threw himself awkwardly to the side to avoid the unexpected blow.  Before the two could contest each other again, the match was over.

    ¡°They¡¯re all yours, Elder Weidao!¡± Chen Rulan called, turning over command of the group to the swordsman.  When Pengfei approached, Rulan said more quietly, ¡°Good.¡±

    Pengfei accepted the elder¡¯s acknowledgement of the match.  ¡°So, that was the answer?  Attacking when the opponent comes in?¡±

    ¡°I suppose.¡±  The elder spoke vaguely and escorted Pengfei as the disciple made his way with the others to the weapon racks.  The students made room for the pair or glanced at them as they walked by.

    ¡°So, if I was a Shaolin disciple, confined to using their martial arts¡­ I would aim for the simultaneous strike.¡±

    ¡°More general than that.  Not the specific tactic or technique.¡±

    Pengfei stopped in place and thought as the others flowed around them, looking for the right words.

    ¡°I was always half a beat behind ¡­ until I attacked on the same beat with¡­ no, that¡¯s it!  The timing!¡±

    Chen Rulan smiled at the disciple.  ¡°Timing, distance, tempo.  These are some of the broader ideas in martial arts.  Behind the techniques.  They¡¯re present in every style, in different proportions.  If you could master these three concepts, you could rule the world with just the straight punch.¡±

    The disciple swept over what he considered hyperbole and tested his understanding.  ¡°So, in Kunlun we use our qinggong to manage the distance and control the fight.  And in Shaolin they use their defense and timing, wait for the opportunity to land a blow¡­right?¡±

    Pengfei tittered with self-satisfaction.  He felt he had discovered the ¡®perspectives¡¯ that Chen Rulan had mentioned months ago, when they first began the transcription of the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯.  The elder¡¯s response deflated him.

    ¡°Sometimes.¡±

    ¡°Sometimes!?  What do you mean?¡±

    The other disciples had grabbed the wooden swords off the racks and made their ways back to the training area.  Chen Rulan and Pengfei chatted in their own world as clacks and shouts filled the air.

    The old man chided his over-eager pupil.

    ¡°Did you think you had figured out all the hidden truths of martial arts?¡±

    ¡°Well ¨C ¡° Pengfei began sheepishly, only to be silenced by a raised hand.

    ¡°What you said was more right than wrong.  But it¡¯s never that simple.¡±

    ¡°Ughh.¡±

    Pengfei picked up the training weapon in front of him and turned to join the rest of the Jin generation, still turning over the small insight he had gained into the methods of the fist.  Just one of many that would inevitably spring up in a lifetime pursuing the martial arts.  He paused when another question worked its way to the forefront.

    ¡°But those are just the physical concepts.  What about the differences between Kunlun and Shaolin¡¯s qi?¡±

    Elder Rulan was already walking away.  He waved over his shoulder.  ¡°Later.  Go practice your sword!¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s our cue.¡±  Neng said from Pengfei¡¯s side.  He was the only other boy not already occupied with the jian.

    ¡°Hey!  Didn¡¯t see you there.¡±

    ¡°Want to practice?¡±

    ¡°Sure.  Let¡¯s do it.¡±

    The two of them found a bit of open space on the paving stones of the training yard and stood across from each other with their practice weapons raised.

    Chen Weidao called out the next drill just in time.  ¡°Thrust and parry!¡±

    Pengfei lunged, the most basic stroke of the ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯.  Neng received the attack, reset his feet, then made a lunge of his own.  They circled each other, going back and forth with the same attack each time.  An attempt at conversation between the repetitions.

    ¡°Anything ¨C hah!  Anything interesting happen while I was gone?¡±

    Neng shook his head.  ¡°Nothing compared to what you guys got up to in town.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, had a great time.¡±  Pengfei said sarcastically, then thrust again. ¡°Hah!  So¡­ no trouble with anyone?¡±

    ¡°Not that I remember.¡±

    ¡°Are you sure?  You know, you can tell me if there¡¯s anything ¨C¡°

    Neng paused, straightened up, and gave his partner a serious stare.  ¡°What are you doing?¡±

    ¡°Nothing, I just ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Will you cut it out?  You¡¯ve been playing around too much lately.  You need to take your training seriously.¡±

    Pengfei balked at that.  He forgot the concern for Neng, the rumors he had heard.  It slipped out of his mind at the sudden slight.

    ¡°What are you talking about?  I AM taking my training seriously.¡±

    ¡°No, you¡¯ve just been wasting your time with Elder Rulan.  He¡¯s obviously just been showing you barehanded techniques, your jian has barely improved at all.  And even if he was teaching you the sword, he¡¯d be about the worst teacher you could find for it.¡±

    ¡°Whoa, man.  Where is this coming from?¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re a sect of swordsmen.  Soon, our lives will depend on how well we wield it.  You of all people should know that.¡±

    ¡°What¡¯s that supposed to mean?¡±

    ¡°You know what it means.¡±

    Pengfei stiffened, dumbstruck.  Before he could think of what to say, Chen Weidao was calling for a change of partners.  Neng moved first, lost in the crowd without another word.

    --What the fuck just happened?--

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 105)

    ¡°I don¡¯t understand it.¡±  Chen Ji spoke as he leapt nimbly from one boulder to the next.  ¡°You¡¯ve been practicing, haven¡¯t you?¡±

    ¡°Yes¡­ sir.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re not just saying that?¡±

    ¡°Huhh¡­. Huhh¡­ no, sir.¡±

    ¡°Then I don¡¯t understand it.¡±

    The rest of the Discipline Hall had left them behind long ago.  Another mountain path.  More qinggong training.  The elder had remained at the rear to encourage the last disciple.  Or beat him.  Depending on the mood.  But today, the man¡¯s demeanor was more quizzical than punitive.

    ¡°How is your progress with the sect¡¯s neigong method?¡±

    Pengfei could no longer talk and run at the same time.  He took the elder¡¯s question as an opportunity to stop for a breath and hunched over, panting heavily.  After a second, he composed himself enough to look up and answer.

    ¡°Elder Chen Lei says I¡¯ve learned the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ to the fourth star.  Whatever that means.¡±

    Chen Ji gave a ¡®harrumph¡¯, then stepped closer, placing a hand on Pengfei¡¯s back.  There was a jolt as the head of the Discipline Hall sent a flow of energy coursing through the boy, inspecting the state of his meridians and lower dantian.  The man stepped away a moment later, more confused than before.

    ¡°It¡¯s not the amount of internal energy.  Your technique is adequate.  It seems like you¡¯re just¡­ slow.¡±

    Pengfei nodded, still leaning over and breathing hard.  ¡°I can do all the movements¡­ leap as far as anyone else.  And if I take my time¡­ my stamina is fine.  The problem is trying to keep up with their pace.¡±

    ¡°What about in sparring?  Your punches, kicks?¡±

    ¡°They¡¯re normal.  Maybe a bit faster than average even.¡±

    ¡°Huh.  Well, some people just run slow.  I guess you won¡¯t be chasing down any fugitives in the near future.¡±

    --That¡¯s what Horse is for.--

    Pengfei recalled jumping from his mare¡¯s back to tackle the fleeing Shutian, on the night the boy had fled from the sect.

    ¡°Time should solve the issue.  Cultivate enough energy and even you will be able to keep a respectable pace. But in the short term, you could try another qinggong method.  Find a better fit.  Has Chen Rulan mentioned anything about teaching you the ¡®Mountain King Step¡¯?¡±

    ¡°Other than the ¡®Mountain King¡¯ part, it doesn¡¯t sound familiar.¡±

    ¡°Yes¡­ named after the beast.  Used to be more popular in the sect.  Now, only a few elders remember it.  Chen Rulan, obviously.  Though, he¡¯s been strange about passing on his martial arts ever since the Jin generation arrived here.  Ah, I¡¯m sure your master has his reasons.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s not ¨C ¡° the boy began.  He was about to say ¡®he¡¯s not my master¡¯.  It was the truth.  Chen Rulan had made it clear he was not accepting Pengfei as a true disciple.  It wouldn¡¯t be rude to correct Elder Ji on that point.  But for some reason he couldn¡¯t bring himself to do it.  ¡°¡­ Anyway, does this mean I can be excused from the regular qinggong training?¡±

    Chen Ji turned sharp, suddenly glaring.  ¡°I can¡¯t believe you would even dare to ask that.¡±

    --There he is.--

    Pengfei began sprinting up the path, dredging his already-depleted stores of energy to power his steps.  The elder took the scabbard from his waist and gave chase.

 Chapter 41 - Long Time No See (Day 138 of 1000)

    (Day 138)

    The valley below the sect was awash in activity. The last of the snow was a thing of the past and the fields were green again. Laborers from Hotan toiled in the spring sun, constructing another storehouse needed for the additional feed. Something that could be used as a temporary stable if need be. The tents and wagons of the workers had formed a small village.

    One of the dormitories of Jin disciples had come down the mountain for riding lessons. In their spare time they socialized with the townsfolk, as best they could with the language barrier. Luckily, the builders knew what they were about, so Pengfei did not need to worry about finding a translator. The construction continued apace, without any need for management.

    So, Pengfei had nothing to distract him as the Tibetan tribesmen came passing through. The clan kept at a distance with their own herds. The trading in Hotan was done and they were headed back south to graze for the season. Maybe longer.

    Pema rode within a stone¡¯s throw of him, but neither made a move toward the other. She didn¡¯t even look in his direction. They hadn¡¯t spoken since Pengfei learned of her engagement to the brothers, Chodak and Jigme. The days in Hotan had been awkward. Skirting around each other silently as the clan facilitated Kunlun¡¯s purchase and transfer of horses.

    --I wonder if I¡¯ll ever get to talk to her again. I wonder if I¡¯ll ever get to see her again.--

    There was a constriction in his chest as he watched her across the field. The long braids mixed in with the rest of her flowing black hair. Her tanned skin more lovely than any of the vaunted ¡®jade beauties¡¯ he had seen in the Central Plains. She whooped and shouted, caring only for the animals. Urging sheep along, keeping the goats from mixing with those belonging to Kunlun.

    ¡°This is probably the most crowded this place has been¡­ ever.¡± Nanxi observed as he rode up.

    ¡°I guess.¡±

    ¡°Come on. Stop thinking about how badly you screwed things up with her. We¡¯ve got some work to do.¡±

    Nanxi grabbed Pengfei¡¯s reins and set off toward Kunlun¡¯s encampment.

    ¡°Hey!¡± Pengfei protested, trying to pull away, but Horse seemed to agree with his friend. She neighed and continued on her path, not taking heed of any of her rider¡¯s exhortations. Apparently, she also thought he needed to stop moping. ¡°Traitor.¡±

    He gave one last look back to Pema. In an hour, the Tibetan clan would be out of sight around the next bend in the valley. By the end of the day, they¡¯d be in southern plateau.

    The disciples who had come down the mountain were living out of tents. The workers from Hotan would begin erecting a bunkhouse for them after their current project was finished. The boys all complained about their temporary accommodations, but none did so in front of Chen Mo. The decrepit head of the Veneration Hall was taking his turn to supervise the disciples, seeing that some semblance of order was kept. As loudly as the elder complained about the duty, he would tolerate no whining from the Jin generation.

    Nanxi took the initiative at the camp. He whistled and shouted as he rode his tawny brown mount between the tents.

    ¡°Come on you lazy bastards, come and learn a thing or two!¡±

    The disciples jeered and hissed at Nanxi but made their way over to the paddock. A fenced enclosure containing several of the new horses. The boys turned expectantly to Pengfei once they had gathered around.

    --This ¡­ this is weird.--

    They looked at him as if he carried some kind of authority. And he did, at least for now. As if to confirm it, he was sitting above them all, high in the saddle as they milled about on the ground.

    --Don¡¯t want to lay it on too thick. Don¡¯t want to be a limp noodle either. --

    Pengfei tried to measure his tone before he spoke, sounding it out in his head. He thought it went alright when the words finally left his mouth.

    ¡°Ahem¡­I¡¯ve been working on these ten horses for the past week. Broken them in a bit. They only threw me off¡­ two, maybe three, dozen times.¡± He gave his ass an exaggerated rub and flashed a self-deprecating smile, drawing a chuckle from the others. ¡°They¡¯re still skittish, so try to keep them calm as you put the saddles on them. Work in groups of three, take turns riding around the paddock. Let me or Nanxi know if you need help.¡±

    The crowd split into smaller groups and set to their task. Pengfei watched absent-mindedly, shooting glances over his shoulder to the Tibetan clan still passing through the valley. But he could not find Pema again.

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 138 Continued)

    The training for those camping in the valley did not cease just because they were away from the sect proper, though it did look different. It could vary wildly from month to month, depending on which reluctant elder was sent down with them. Under Chen Mo, the majority of the free hours were spent on neigong training.

    After another bland meal of dry rations, the thirty-odd disciples sat with crossed legs on the grass, or on small mats they had brought with them. Elder Mo wandered through their ranks as they circulated, meditated. It was like the Veneration Hall had come down the mountain with them.

    Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.

    --¡­So¡­boring¡­.--

    It was a struggle to stay awake, but Chen Mo was always there to kick the sides of a dozing disciple. Pengfei pinched himself as needed, preferring his own care to the elder¡¯s. And he was somewhat motivated, trying to make up for his deficiency of internal energy compared to his peers. All the same, he was grateful when the session ended.

    ¡°Enough. To bed with you.¡± The old Taoist called. He turned and shuffled off into the darkness, going who-knows-where, not bothering to ensure the disciples made it to their tents. Which suited Pengfei perfectly.

    The boy walked slowly with the tired but chattering crowd, slipping between and around the rows of tents that looked like they belonged in a military compound. He meandered through the little canvas village, waving and calling ¡®good night¡¯ as friends and acquaintances crawled into their own little huts. When he reached the back, he crouched low and waddled as quickly as he could away from the Kunlun encampment.

    He straightened up when he felt like he¡¯d be unnoticed. Didn¡¯t bother hiding himself as he passed the workers from Hotan and their campfire. Some called out to him in foreign words as he passed and Pengfei responded casually, not worried about being reported.

    Once he was out of earshot of the builders, Pengfei put his fingers to his lips and whistled. Waited a minute, then whistled again.

    --Where is sh- oh shit!--

    Horse startled him with a sudden approach out of the darkness, going from a full gallop to a dead-stop in a body-length, throwing up dirt and stones with a whinny.

    ¡°You scared the shit out of me!¡±

    She was devoid of saddle, but Pengfei pulled out a bridle and reins he had awkwardly stuffed into his robes, the most he could carry without drawing attention. The mare nipped at her ungrateful rider as he fitted them, but Pengfei pulled his fingers back just in time, then reached again for a shoulder. He pushed himself up onto the mount¡¯s back and they were off in the next moment.

    The first several minutes were frantic. Even after a full day of riding, the mare still wanted to run at top speed. Pengfei doubted he could stay astride without a saddle, even with his consummate skill, if Horse took off as she liked. But within a few minutes she stopped chomping at her bit. And in an hour she was keeping a gentle rhythm at a walk.

    Pengfei felt comfortable enough to circulate his internal energy. Not the neigong he had been practicing just a while ago with the others. Instead, he focused on his qinggong skills. It was a recent idea.

    He couldn¡¯t hope to match the rest of the Jin generation on foot. It was probably the same for most of his peers in the Wulin. But after her lucky encounter with the Thousand-Year Ginseng, Horse was faster than just about anything that trod the land. Only a true master would be able to outpace her.

    Of course, carrying a rider would slow her down. But Pengfei had a plan for that.

    He moved the qi inside his lower dantian, in the pattern that Chen Ji had shown him. The pattern detailed in the manual for ¡®Three Twists of the Dragon in the Clouds¡¯. It was what gave the lightness technique its lightness. He felt his balance and weight shift inside himself until it seemed like he¡¯d be able to stand on a blade of grass without bending it. In reality, he was not that skillful but the sensation was nonetheless heady.

    --I hope it¡¯s enough for Horse to notice a difference. If we ride like this maybe she¡¯ll have a little more speed, a little more stamina.--

    He focused on the skill, and the night faded into the background. The li passed by. And soon their destination was in view.

    They passed through the narrows in the valley where the Mountain King had leapt for them. Pengfei gave a quick, nervous, glance upward but saw nothing. Heard nothing. So he looked ahead to a black slit in the ridge. The canyon where he had fought the man-in-black. Guoyu.

    They naturally came to a stop. Horse neighed sedately and Pengfei rubbed her neck, lost in thought.

    A whistle from behind took both mount and rider by surprise. Horse wheeled around and Pengfei raised his hands reflexively, still holding the reins.

    Nanxi held up his own hands in faux surrender. He approached on his usual horse, fully saddled.

    ¡°What are you doing here! I nearly pissed myself.¡± Pengfei complained, but relaxed and dropped his fists.

    ¡°If you¡¯re that skittish, maybe you should pay more attention.¡±

    ¡°Yeah¡­fair enough. Where did you come from?¡±

    ¡°Same as you. I followed when I saw you sneak off. Took me a while to get my kit together though. I just caught up. What are you doing out here?¡±

    Pengfei turned to look back toward the canyon. The snow that had fallen in the winter and the white caps of the mountains had begun to thaw. Now, the icy waters were trickling through the high rock walls and what had been a dry streambed only a month ago was coming to life. Soon, a real torrent would be coursing through the canyon and joining the river that flowed in the valley.

    ¡°I took care of them already.¡± Nanxi declared.

    ¡°What?¡±

    ¡°The bodies. That¡¯s why you came out here, right?¡±

    Pengfei nodded solemnly. ¡°Yeah¡­ Soon, more people will be riding around the valley. Exploring. Not to mention Neng.¡±

    The relationship with the other disciple had been strained for the past month, since their brief exchange on the practice ground in the sect above. No further arguments, but no reconciliation either. Pengfei had come down to the valley shortly after the incident, but now he was due to return.

    --If we have another spat, maybe Neng would¡­--

    Pengfei shook his head and returned to the more immediate issue. ¡°What did you do with them?¡±

    ¡°Moved them deeper into the canyon. Out of the streambed and into a little nook. Piled some rocks on top. No one will find them unless they know where to look.¡±

    Pengfei sighed deeply. ¡°Nanxi, I owe you so ¨C¡°

    ¡°Please.¡± Nanxi waved off the gratitude. ¡°They were just bones at that point. Like moving rocks around. But I still burned some Joss paper, did a sword ritual. It was an opportunity to use some of the things Elder Zhi taught me.¡±

    ¡°Hah.¡± Pengfei laughed weakly. ¡°Your master is making a proper Taoist out of you.¡±

    They chuckled, the gravity of the place slowly fading.

    ¡°Come on. I¡¯ve wasted enough of your night.¡± Pengfei announced than urged Horse south, back towards the camp.

    ¡°It¡¯s fine. You know, half the reason I came was to try and see ¨C ¡°

    A roar sounded from above them on the ridgeline. Deep and thunderous. Nanxi¡¯s horse startled, whipping left and right for the origin of the sound, but not looking up to the true source, high above. Pengfei grabbed the bridle of the spooked animal and held tight to keep his friend from being thrown. Thankfully, Horse was more composed. She bayed once, loudly, but then held her ground and shivered quietly.

    ¡°Don¡¯t. Move.¡± Pengfei urgently whispered to everything with ears. ¡°Don¡¯t. Run.¡±

    He looked up slowly, not wanting to see what he knew was there.

    ¡°I thought you were full of shit. It¡¯s even bigger than you described!¡± Nanxi hissed at him, following his gaze.

    An enormous beast was standing on top of the ridge, lit from behind by the moon. A shape against the sky, at first indiscernible from the rock except for its movement. It descended the cliff, moving in great leaps and long strides, practically running straight down the rock.

    ¡°Satisfied?!¡± Pengfei asked sarcastically.

    ¡°Yep. We should go now!¡± Nanxi pleaded.

    ¡°No! Chen Ji said not ¨C¡°

    ¡°Who cares what the old bat said!¡±

    ¡°Running almost got me eaten last time! Just stay still!¡±

    Pengfei rubbed Horse¡¯s neck soothingly, whispering to her like a restless child. The animal¡¯s trembling matched his own but she held her place. Through some miracle, Nanxi¡¯s mount remained motionless as well, even as the Mountain King bounded across the valley towards them at an incredible clip.

    A cloud passed in front of the moon and the world went black. They lost all trace of the approaching leopard as its mottled form was consumed by the night. A predator, made to disappear into the dull grey tones of the mountains, given even more cover than it needed.

    Seconds passed where the two young men could hear nothing except their own breathing and the wind.

    --I should just close my eyes and wait for this to be over¡­ one way or the other.--

    He knew there was nothing to be done against the beast. If he looked, he would only see death coming with a gaping jaw and sharp teeth. But his eyes searched the darkness nonetheless.

    Seconds became a minute and then two.

    ¡°There!¡± Nanxi whispered, without daring to point. But Pengfei still found the bright eyes. They glinted against what little light was left to them.

    The cloud cover passed, the moon returned, and suddenly there he was. The head that held those gleaming eyes was low to the ground, suspended by a powerful neck. Muscles rippled beneath black and grey fur.

    Silent since that first roar, but now another growl came. So low that it was imperceptible at first, but soon the air vibrated with it.

    Pengfei swallowed dryly and darted a quick glance to Nanxi, whose chin was receding backwards into his neck and squinting his eyes against what he was seeing.

    Horse took one shaking step backwards, then Pengfei grabbed a handful of mane and pulled against her motion.

    ¡°Hold. Still.¡± he forced through his teeth.

    Time crept slowly on. So long, that a curious desperation overrode Nanxi¡¯s common sense.

    ¡°How ¡­long¡­ do we¡­ do this?¡±

    Pengfei took in the snow leopard. Larger than any of its kind had a right to be. There was only one logical answer to Nanxi¡¯s question.

    ¡°As long as he wants¡±

 Chapter 42 - I Was Afraid of That (Day 140 of 1000)

    (Day 139)

    Pengfei knocked at the door of the forge slightly after midday.  It only took a few moments before Chen Rulan came to the door.  His powerful frame filled the doorway, looked down kindly on the teenager in front of him.

    ¡°I¡¯ve returned to the sect, sir.¡±  Pengfei bowed to the instructor who refused to be called ¡®master¡¯.

    ¡°Good.  You can resume your transcription work tomorrow.  Rest this evening.¡±  Elder Rulan glanced over his student¡¯s shoulder.  ¡°But what is he doing here?  I thought he had another few weeks in the valley?¡±

    Pengfei looked back to Nanxi, who was pulling his coat tight around himself and shivering, despite the relatively warm day.  It was fear, and not the weather, that had him in this state.

    ¡°Teeth¡­ claws¡­ as big as a house¡­¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s¡­sick.¡±  Pengfei said lamely, not wanting to divulge the encounter with the Mountain King.  ¡°The twins are down there.  They¡¯ll be fine without him.¡±

    ¡°Huh.¡±  Chen Rulan sounded doubtful, but didn¡¯t press the issue.  ¡°Better get him to bed.  Take him to Chen Lei if he gets any worse.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir.¡±  The disciple made his martial bow, and turned away, but turned back when the elder called his name.

    ¡°Pengfei, how long have you been back?  Have you seen your friends yet?¡±

    ¡°No, we just arrived.  Why?¡±

    ¡°Nothing, nothing.  Just¡­ on second thought, meet me in the Elder¡¯s Practice Hall once you drop him off.  We may as well get some work done tonight.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir.¡±  He bowed again, eager to resume his study of Shaolin¡¯s ¡®Arhat Fist.¡¯

    Pengfei picked up his satchel and put it back over his shoulder, then shoved Nanxi in the direction of their dormitory, jovially teasing.  ¡°Will you give it a rest?  One glimpse of a housecat and you go to pieces.  It¡¯s ridiculous.¡±

    Nanxi spoke through chattering teeth, ¡°How¡­ how can you say that?!  That ¨C thing ¨C could have eaten us!¡±

    ¡°Yeah, I know.  I was scared too.  I guess I¡¯m just over it now.¡±

    ¡°Over it!?  Over seeing a spirit beast!?  A divine creature?!¡±

    ¡°It was big, I¡¯ll give you that.  But I don¡¯t know about spirit beast.¡±

    They crossed through the sect.  Other disciples were out and about, spending their free afternoon however they pleased.  But the pair didn¡¯t encounter anyone that warranted a stop or a wave.  They soon arrived at their bunkhouse.

    Pengfei ushered Nanxi inside, then pointed at a bedroll.  ¡°Go get some sleep.  You¡¯ll feel better after a little rest.¡±

    The frightened victim shuffled over to his usual spot and curled up into a fetal position on his bedding.  Pengfei shook his head, sympathetic but amused, and dropped his bag near his own little corner of the room.  He was shedding his coat when Shutian approached.

    ¡°Hey.¡±

    ¡°Hey.  How are ¨C whoa!¡±  Pengfei pulled back in surprise at the thin boy¡¯s face.  An old bruise was under one eye, turning from dark purple to a sickly yellow.  ¡°What happened to you?¡±

    ¡°Neng.¡±  Shutian said simply.

    ¡°Fuck!  I was afraid of that.¡± They fell silent for a beat as the implication settled in.  ¡°Any chance it was an accident?¡±

    Shutian took Pengfei¡¯s sleeve and pulled him through the room to another bedroll.  One of the boys was laying there on his side, back to his visitors.

    ¡°Xiaotong, let Pengfei look at you.¡±

    Shutian¡¯s constant companion turned over slowly and sat up so his face was in the light.  Pengfei beheld the visage of his friend.  Two black eyes.  Numerous deep cuts that had been stitched closed, covered in some medicative salve but still red and inflamed.  And a look of pain and dejection.

    ¡°Two broken ribs too.  He¡¯ll be bedridden for weeks.¡±  Shutian announced angrily.

    ¡°Xiaotong, I¡¯m¡­ I¡¯m so sorry.¡±

    Pengfei held out a hand but the boy was already laying back down to the ground with a wince.

    ¡°How did this happen!?  Why didn¡¯t anyone stop it!?¡±

    ¡°Happened in sparring.  Neng worked me over a bit.  Xiaotong got in his face in the next round and this is the result.  Chen Weidao held us all back, kept the match going until Xiaotong couldn¡¯t even stand.¡±  Then Shutian spoke to his injured friend.  ¡°You should have given up long before that.¡±

    Xiaotong said nothing, and Shutian led Pengfei away.

    ¡°It was during the sword training.  Elder Rulan had already left.  He nearly had a stroke when he found out about it the next day.  You could hear him screaming at Chen Weidao from across the sect.  Not that it did any good.¡±

    ¡°Was Neng punished at all?¡±

    ¡°Not yet.  He¡¯s walking around, living life as usual.¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s mind reeled.  ¡°What is going on with him?!  I¡¯ve got to talk to him.  No more dancing around things, I¡¯ll be direct.¡±

    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

    He stepped toward the door but Shutian grabbed his sleeve.  ¡°Hey,   THAT¡± he pointed to Xiaotong, ¡°is where talking got us!¡±

    ¡°He¡¯ll listen to me.¡±

    ¡°I know he¡¯s closer to you.  But it¡¯s not like we¡¯re strangers to him.  If he did this to us, you think he¡¯ll listen to you?¡±

    --Shit¡­ maybe Shutian is right.--

    ¡°When did all this happen?¡±

    ¡°A week ago.  Haven¡¯t seen much of Neng since then.  Just at afternoon sessions.

    And Elder Rulan watches everything like a hawk now.  Won¡¯t leave us alone with Chen Weidao during training anymore.¡±

    A swelling of regard rose up in his chest for the man who was guarding the Jin generation from the confusing abuse of Neng, the complacent neglect of Elder Weidao.  And suddenly Pengfei realized why Chen Rulan had asked to meet him tonight.

    --Probably wants to make sure I don¡¯t do anything stupid.--

    And there were indeed a lot of idiotic things going through his mind.  They bubbled to the surface through pain and conflicted emotions.

    --What the hell is Neng doing?!  What the hell am I going to do?--

    He didn¡¯t understand.  His friend, the one who had helped him navigate the rough early days of his time in the sect, had changed.  Or revealed himself to be something different than what Pengfei had supposed.  But the wounds inflicted were something beyond excuse or rationale.  And while the friendly boy had not been as dear a friend as Neng, Xiaotong was still part of their group.

    --What if he goes at Shutian again?  Or Nanxi?  If I step in for them, is Neng going to fight me?  Tell the elders about the man I killed?--

    ¡°Fuck!¡± Pengfei cursed in impotent fury.

    ¡°Yep.¡±

    Just as deeply rooted as Pengfei¡¯s fear of discovery, there was another simple fact.  He didn¡¯t want to come to anymore conflict with Neng.  The first friend he had made at Kuniun.

    --Can¡¯t someone do something about all this?--

    The two stood silently, in the dormitory.  Other disciples moved around them, chatting and living their own lives.  The concern over the incidents was confined to a relatively small group.  The recipients of Neng¡¯s abuse, and their friends.  The rest of the Jin generation was apparently unperturbed.

    ¡°Let¡¯s go talk to Chen Ji.¡± He said to Shutian. ¡°Maybe there has been some development.  Nanxi, get up.  Nanxi!¡±

    But the other disciple was still curled up in the fetal position.  He¡¯d now added some gentle rocking to his existential episode.

    ¡°What the hell is wrong with him?!¡±  Shutian demanded, noticing the display for the first time.

    ¡°He¡¯s fine but¡­ just leave him.¡±

    They pair left the dormitory and walked toward the Discipline Hall, hoping to find Chen Ji there.  More of the story unfolded on the walk.

    ¡°Elder Ji caught me talking to Jin Fan and some of the others a few days ago about what happened.  Scared the ever-loving shit out of us.  Told us that if anyone brawled, he would throw them in one of the cliff cells and leave them there until the sect moves back to the Central Plains.  Still, I was going to give it a try, but that one,¡± he stuck his thumb back towards the dormitory where Xiaotong was still resting, ¡°begged me not to.  Says I need to take care of him.¡±

    Pengfei nodded.  ¡°He¡¯s right.  If he needs help wiping his ass, I¡¯m sure as hell not going to do it.¡±

    ¡°Whatever.¡±

    Their guess was correct.  The small man was sweeping the stones in front of his domain.  The broom paused its rhythmic motion when the elder saw them.

    ¡°I can guess why you¡¯re here.¡±

    But Pengfei still asked the question.  ¡°I heard about what happened.  Is anything going to be done?¡±

    ¡°No.¡±

    Shutian was furious.  ¡°That¡¯s it?  It¡¯s over?  Just like that?¡±

    ¡°Not ¡®just like that¡¯.  The elders discussed the matter at great length.¡±

    ¡°This is such ¨C !¡°

    ¡°Don¡¯t start!¡±  Elder Ji shouted and held up a hand to stifle anything improper from Shutian.  ¡°You¡¯re to leave that boy alone.  Both of you.  And you can tell your friends the same.¡±

    Pengfei spoke up to try and smooth things over.  ¡°Sir, Neng is my friend too.  Believe me, I don¡¯t want to fight him ¨C ¡°

    ¡°I do.¡±  Shutian interjected.

    ¡°- but there has to be something we can do.  Are you just going to let him beat up half the Jin generation?¡±

    Chen Ji sighed.  ¡°We told you all that the training intensity was going to increase.  To prepare you for the sect¡¯s return to the Jianghu.  Things got out of hand, but there were bound to be accidents as you all figured out where the line was.¡±

    ¡°Is that what you think happened?!¡±  Shutian shouted rudely.  Pengfei elbowed his friend in the gut to silence him.  The blow didn¡¯t seem to cause any pain, barely registered, but it had the desired effect.

    The elder thankfully didn¡¯t rise to the fervor in the boy¡¯s voice.  He just said tiredly, ¡°I¡¯m not litigating this again with children.  I was saying the same things as you a few hours ago, and I was overruled.  So, listen to me very carefully.  Whether you like it or not, that boy did not break any of our rules.  I¡¯m warning you, do NOT overstep.  Now go on, leave me be.¡±

    The elder turned away from them and went back to his sweeping.

    ¡°Dammit.  You got my hopes up, but they¡¯re still spouting the same bullshit.¡±  Shutian hissed as they walked away.  Pengfei gave a nervous glance over his shoulder, but Chen Ji was still moving his broom back and forth, giving no indication he had heard.

    ¡°Alright, calm down.  I need to go see Elder Rulan.  When I get back to the dormitory, we¡¯ll figure something out.¡±

    They bid each other curt goodbyes and Pengfei walked alone, crisscrossing the paths he had already covered throughout the busy afternoon.

    --Fuck, fuck, fuck! --

    He looked left and right as he went, on edge, keeping an eye out for Neng.  Elder Weidao.  Anyone involved in the debacle.  He could feel a conflict on the horizon, no matter how desperately he wanted to avoid it.  It was on its way.  He was determined not to let it take him by surprise.

    He came to the Elder¡¯s Practice Hall, where his private training under the guise of punishment took place.  Chen Rulan wasn¡¯t seated at his usual place.  He still held a book in his hands, but it was clasped behind his back as he paced the wooden floorboards.

    ¡°Elder.¡±  Pengfei bowed shallowly then quickly approached.

    ¡°I take it you¡¯ve talked to your friends.¡±

    ¡°Yes sir.  And I¡¯ve just seen Elder Chen Ji as well.¡±

    ¡°Then, you¡¯re all caught up.  Let me hear your position on it all.  I know you¡¯re friends with the boys involved, but I wasn¡¯t sure where you would stand.¡±

    ¡°From what I¡¯ve heard, Neng was completely in the wrong.  I don¡¯t know what¡¯s going on with him, but it seems like it¡¯s been building up for a while now.¡±

    ¡°That part isn¡¯t much of a mystery.¡±  Chen Rulan said flatly.

    ¡°What do you ¨C¡°

    ¡°What I really wanted to know,¡± the elder continued, ¡°is whether you¡¯re going to get yourself into any trouble by following Neng¡¯s example.¡±

    ¡°I would never ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Good.  Because I won¡¯t tolerate any more of this shit on my training grounds.¡±  Chen Rulan was talking animatedly, angrily.  But it didn¡¯t seem directed at Pengfei.  ¡°Teaching the disciples was my responsibility before Weidao condescended to leave his library and I won¡¯t have him¡­¡±

    The elder trailed off, looked to the confused disciple.  ¡°Just¡­ stay away from Neng for the time being.  If I hear about any violence between you two, or anyone else for that matter, your ¡®work¡¯ for me will be at an end.  Understand?¡±

    Pengfei nervously glanced to where the martial arts manual was waiting for him on the lap desk.

    ¡°I understand sir.¡±

    ¡°Shit¡­hahaha¡­.ahhhh¡±  Elder Rulan¡¯s usual laughter turned to an exasperated sigh.  ¡°Dramas like these are what you can look forward to as an elder.  If you remain with the sect, that is.  Enough of that now.  Go¡­ go and see to your task.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 140)

    Their numbers were greatly reduced.  The twins were in the valley, tending the herd and trying to instruct another dormitory of disciples in the basics of horsemanship.  Xiaotong was confined to his bedroll by his injuries, and Neng, the assailant, was nowhere to be seen.

    Only three of them were left at the usual table.  Nanxi, Shutian, and Pengfei.  They ate their simple breakfast slowly.

    ¡°How are you feeling this morning?  Not going to go catatonic again on us, are you?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m fine.¡± Nanxi said dully.

    ¡°Fine enough to head back down to the valley for the rest of your herding shift?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m never going down there again.¡±

    Pengfei leaned over and ¡°Meowed¡± in Nanxi¡¯s ear.

    ¡°Hey!  NO!  Stop that!¡±

    The empty seats at the table were soon filled when the other boys from the Discipline Hall joined them, bringing conversation if not happiness.  Jin Fan led the way, followed by Wai, Yusheng, and Zaifeng.  But only the one with the severe face spoke.

    ¡°Talk to your friend lately?¡± Fan asked.

    Pengfei shook his head.

    Everyone knew who they were referring to.  And against all advice, Pengfei had tried to find Neng.  Gone looking for him the night before, after leaving Chen Rulan.  But he¡¯d been stonewalled at the door to the other¡¯s dormitory.  The disciples there had barred the way with a lot of shouting and pushing.  It had almost turned violent.

    ¡°I¡¯ll find him at training this afternoon.¡±  Pengfei said.

    ¡°He needs to be taught a lesson before he hurts someone else.¡±  Shutian insisted.

    ¡°Leave him alone.  I think we can still bring Neng out of this.  I just need a few minutes with him.¡±

    Nanxi immediately contradicted him. ¡°You stay out of it, Pengfei.  The rest of us will handle it.¡±

    Fan looked from one member of the trio to the next, then shrugged.  Pengfei didn¡¯t bother arguing with his friends anymore.  They had covered all the same ground earlier that morning.  Instead, he questioned the boy across the table.

    ¡°You¡¯ve been keeping an eye on Neng, right?  Any idea what¡¯s going on with him.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know what he¡¯s thinking.¡±  Fan said, shaking his head.  ¡°But the pattern is clear.  He¡¯s been rough with everyone during sparring bouts, and he seems to be going after the weakest disciples in particular.¡±

    Pengfei turned to Shutian and his black eye.  The thin boy had excellent qinggong and was a decent sword user.   Xiaotong was below average on both counts.

    --It doesn¡¯t sound like Neng at all.  If anything, he likes opponents who are a challenge.--

    ¡°What is he getting out of it?¡±  Pengfei asked aloud.

    ¡°No idea.  But it¡¯s time we do something.¡±

    ¡°Chen Ji made it pretty clear Neng hasn¡¯t broken any rules.  Officially.¡±  Shutian spat out that last word.  ¡°So, if you¡¯re thinking about acting as a member of the Discipline Hall, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s going to work.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not talking about restraining him and dragging him off to a cell.  I had something else in mind.  A stalling tactic.  Keep everyone healthy for another day.  Maybe it¡¯ll buy us enough time to find a peaceful resolution to the whole situation.¡±

    ¡°Sounds good.¡±  Pengfei approved of anything that would deescalate matters.

    ¡°Maybe too good to be true.¡±  Nanxi said warily, more suspicious than his friend.

    ¡°I won¡¯t lie, I¡¯m not sure how it will go.  Someone could get hurt.  And it will only work if everyone keeps their cool.  So Shutian, I think you¡¯re disqualified.¡±

    ¡°Fair enough.¡± The boy grumbled. ¡°So, let¡¯s hear this great plan of yours.¡±

    Fan scratched his cheek.  ¡°It¡¯s a tactic you guys are already familiar with.¡±

 Chapter 43 - Its a Good Plan (Day 140 of 1000 - Continued)

    (Day 140 Continued)

    Jin Fan relayed his plan over breakfast in the Dining Hall.

    ¡°Chen Rulan has been vigilant about the afternoon training since the incident.  Before this, he was happy to leave us alone with Chen Weidao for sword practice.  Not anymore.  And he hasn¡¯t been giving Neng any opportunities to beat on people.  So, that¡¯s half the session we don¡¯t need to worry about.¡±

    ¡°Why can¡¯t we get rid of Weidao?¡±  Shutian complained.  ¡°If that asshole was out of the picture, none of this would be a problem.  Elder Rulan¡¯s always been in charge of our martial arts instruction.  He was good enough to handle our sword training for the past five years and then, all of a sudden, he¡¯s letting Elder Weidao butt in.¡±

    ¡°Master Zhi says this is the way it was always supposed to be.  But Weidao didn¡¯t want to

    waste his time teaching us the basics.¡±  Nanxi clarified.

    Jin Fan put an end to the speculation and returned to the plan.  ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter.  Chen Weidao will be in charge for at least an hour, and you can bet he¡¯ll give us several rounds of sparring.  He seems to love the situation.¡±

    ¡°Asshole.¡±  Shutian whispered.

    ¡°When the sparring begins, we get close to Neng.  Surround him.  Every time he looks for a new partner, there we are.  Pass him back and forth between us.  Keep him away from the vulnerable people.¡±

    Suddenly, Pengfei had a flash of insight.  He looked to Nanxi and Shutian. ¡°It¡¯s just like when you guys were protecting me from Hongyu and Daoping!¡±

    ¡°Yeah, but the opposite.  Keeping him penned up instead of protecting him.¡±  Nanxi observed.  ¡°So, your big plan is to fight him?  Why don¡¯t we just tie him up in the middle of the night and knock some sense into him?¡±

    ¡°If we play it right, he won¡¯t even realize what we¡¯re doing.  He¡¯ll think they¡¯re normal matches.  I figure we can just present ourselves as willing opponents.  We can challenge him formally if we need to, but then it will be obvious what we¡¯re up to.¡±

    ¡°Formal or not, you don¡¯t think he¡¯s going to try and beat the crap out of you guys?  You might have misjudged things.¡± Shutian grumbled.

    ¡°He¡¯s been going hardest on the weakest swordsmen.  No offense.¡±  Fan nodded in concession to Shutian¡¯s injuries, and the injured Xiaotong who was absent.  ¡°He¡¯s been treating the higher-level people like normal training partners.  So, I think we¡¯ll be okay.  Except for you, Pengfei.  You should stay out of it.¡±

    He winced at the frank appraisal of his swordsmanship, but Pengfei couldn¡¯t deny it.

    --I¡¯ve come a long way, but I¡¯m still lagging when it comes to the jian¡­ the argument I got into with Neng last time we trained makes more sense now.  It was part of the same pattern.--

    Pengfei recalled the strange confrontation when his friend had snapped at him, judged him a slacker.  The conflict had started with Pengfei¡¯s lackluster sword skills.  But he voiced his determination to be involved regardless.

    ¡°No, I want in.  I don¡¯t think he¡¯ll go after me.  And I want the chance to talk to him.¡±

    Fan looked to Nanxi, who grudgingly nodded his approval.

    ¡°Fine.  But don¡¯t give the rest of us away.  If he figures out what we¡¯re doing, it could turn ugly.¡±

    With their strategy decided, the boys finished up their breakfast and headed together to the Discipline Hall.  Chen Ji must have sensed something.  Maybe it was because of the interaction with Pengfei and Shutian from the previous day, or perhaps it was because the different cliques arrived as one cohesive group for a change, but the old man seemed to discern something in their attitudes.

    Instead of drilling them in qinggong or twisting their bodies in painful grappling techniques, the elder spent his time with the seven disciples lecturing on the responsibilities of the Discipline Hall.  He focused on the example that they must set for the other members of the sect.  Instructed them to be beyond reproach in all things.

    That dominated the entire morning.  Pengfei¡¯s thoughts on his obligations didn¡¯t quite line up with the ideas Chen Ji was extolling.

    --Just, forthright, merciful¡­ it all sounds like a pain.  Like it would just get in the way.  Isn¡¯t it enough to make sure we don¡¯t kill each other?  That seems to be hard enough.--

    Once again he struggled with the difficulty of his situation.  The angst he felt at what his friend Neng was doing to the most vulnerable members of the sect.  A desire to see the abuse end competed with a reluctance to confront a friend.  And the fear of his secrets being divulged if he made a misstep.

    His eyes glassed over and his subconscious roamed as the elder spoke.  The next meal provided a short reprieve from the diatribes and moral conflict.  The disciples drifted apart again during lunch, and Chen Ji seemed less paranoid in the afternoon, but still ordered the boys to meditate on the need for compassion and forgiveness in the pursuit of justice.

    But soon they were due to head towards the training grounds.  The elder had to release his charges.  He sent them off with another reminder.

    ¡°All of you¡­ I want you to remember something.  The Discipline Hall is not about revenge.  We must be¡­¡±  Chen Ji rubbed his temple tiredly, struggling for the words.  His eloquence ran dry.  ¡°Just don¡¯t fuck things up.¡±

    They gave the man a respectful bow as they left.

    Disciples from all across the sect were converging on the courtyard in the center of the compound, leaving their various jobs under the elders who supervised them.  Coming to practice their martial arts with their peers.  The boys from the Discipline Hall pulled tighter to each other, not allowing themselves to be separated as they marched to action.

    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.

    Jin Fan reiterated their plan.

    ¡°Stay close during the hand-to-hand training.  Once Chen Weidao takes over and we start with the jian, surround him.  Keep him away from the easy targets.  And don¡¯t be obvious about it.¡±

    They all nodded along and Nanxi gave some additional instructions to Pengfei.

    ¡°If things start getting heated, fall back and help Shutian keep the weaklings away.¡±

    ¡°I will.¡±

    He appreciated his friend¡¯s concern.  Clearly, Nanxi was worried the elders would find out about Pengfei¡¯s fight to the death with Guoyu.

    --He probably sounds like a mother hen to the others.  I guess I could tell them I shot some guy in the chest and watched him bleed to death.  Then everything would make sense.--

    He chuckled nervously at the thought and stepped onto the raised stones of the practice yard.  One hundred and fifty-one teenagers assembled, and Chen Rulan was there, ready to take charge.  Pengfei caught his instructor¡¯s eye for a brief moment as the man noticed the group from the Discipline Hall.  He squinted suspiciously at them but said nothing, and continued surveying the crowd.

    Pengfei and his comrades did the same, searching for Neng.

    ¡°He¡¯s over that way.¡±  Zaifeng said, discreetly pointing towards one of the corners of the yard.

    They took turns checking, peering through the throng of bodies.  Neng was limbering up, pulling an arm across his chest like it was just another training session.

    ¡°Alright.  Spread out a bit.  But stay in earshot.¡±  Jin Fan directed.

    They dispersed and organized themselves into neat rows with the rest of the disciples when Chen Rulan began practice.

    ¡°Forms today!¡±  The master called.

    They began the choreography of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯.  The first form, basic stances and strikes.  The second, with its more practical combat applications and footwork.  Sweat was rolling down their faces in sheets be the time they began the third form, which taught the style¡¯s methods of utilizing the qi.

    For a few minutes, Pengfei could forget his worries and take pleasure in the martial arts.  He had not neglected the styles of Kunlun, even after he had begun learning Shaolin¡¯s methods from Chen Rulan.  Perhaps he hadn¡¯t given the jian the time it deserved, but he had no problem finding time to practice the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ or the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand.¡¯

    ¡°Haah!¡± Pengfei shouted, sending a punch forward, the energy flowing down his arm.  It moved swiftly, fiercely.  He sensed the same from every direction as the Jin disciples executed the strike in unison.

    The afternoon was creeping on, but Elder Rulan did not relinquish his command of the students.  He moved from forms, to solo drills, then partner drills as the sun fell lower in the sky.  Eventually, Chen Weidao stepped forward and spoke into the man¡¯s ear.  Rulan said nothing but eventually stepped aside with a reluctant look.

    ¡°Take up your jians and find a partner.¡±  Weidao announced.  ¡°Sparring.¡±

    Pengfei and the others moved to pick up their wooden swords from the weapon racks.  With their tools in hand, they made their way through the masses, following hot on the heels of Neng.  They discreetly fanned out, trying to be as inconspicuous as possible when they surrounded the boy.

    Neng was looking about for a training partner when he saw Pengfei.  The two nodded awkwardly at each other.

    ¡°Hi.¡±

    ¡°Hey.  How have you been?¡±  Pengfei asked, making stiff conversation.

    ¡°Fine.  You?¡±

    ¡°Good.   I haven¡¯t seen you since I got back from the valley.  Even went by your dorm last night but your bunkmates sent me off.¡±

    ¡°Yeah¡­ I¡¯ve needed some time to myself lately.¡±

    ¡°BEGIN!¡±  Chen Weidao shouted.

    Neng¡¯s demeanor changed when he raised his guard.  The abashed look on his face disappeared and there was only the steady gaze of a swordsman left behind.

    Pengfei gave a few probing thrusts, recovered quickly after each failed lunge.  He managed to avoid the counterattacks that came or deflected them with the flat of the blade.  The exchanges were quick and technical, but not overly violent.

    --No time to be subtle.--

    Pengfei spoke in short words between heavy breaths and sword strokes. ¡°I saw what you did to Shutian.  To Xiaotong.¡±

    Neng paused for a moment, began to speak, but then closed his mouth and continued the fight with a short slash.

    Pengfei pulled back.  ¡°What are you doing Neng?¡±

    ¡°Training.¡±

    Neng gave a quick step, ducked back from Pengfei¡¯s reactionary slash, and came in with a hard thump to the upper arm.

    ¡°You¡¯re torturing our brothers.¡±  Pengfei accused.

    ¡°They¡¯ve been my brothers a lot longer than they¡¯ve been yours.¡±

    ¡°Then why are you ¨C!?¡°

    ¡°I¡¯m helping them!¡±

    The point of the jian found Pengfei¡¯s gut, biting deeply into the flesh.  He winced at the pain and backed away while rubbing his skin.  Neng continued to speak.

    ¡°You think a few bumps and bruises are torture?  What happens in a few years when we leave these mountains and meet the killers from the Unorthodox sects?  Our rivals from Kongtong?  Were the black-robed men who came for you so kind?!¡±

    Pengfei¡¯s took a sharp, nervous breath.  He had to stop himself from begging Neng to keep quiet.  Around the pair, the other boys from the Discipline Hall were watching.  Nanxi was motioning at Pengfei, depressing his hands in a silent plea to calm things down.

    ¡°You¡¯re beating up your friends over a hypothetical danger?¡±

    ¡°Master Weidao says it¡¯s only a matter of time.¡±

    Neng feinted for the wrist then went for the face with short chopping strikes, but Pengfei slipped by them, collided with his opponent, and pushed him away forcefully.

    ¡°Weidao?  Is he putting you up to this?  Did he tell you to hurt your training partners?¡±

    ¡°He says the only training that matters is the training that hurts.¡±

    ¡°And how much training is Xiaotong getting done now?  He can¡¯t even get out of bed!¡±

    Pengfei slashed now, not out of anger but in a play for time.  Being passive would only give Neng more opportunity to attack, and as the boy argued he was becoming more and more forceful with his blows.

    Neng fended of Pengfe¡¯s sword strokes, then responded with his own.  He ended on a flurry that made contact several times, slapping forearm and torso in vital places.  Painful, but not injurious.

    ¡°Time!  Find a new partner!¡±  Chen Weidao called, ending the match.

    The two disciples glared at each other angrily.  Pengfei could feel the watchful eyes of his friends, ready to move in if necessary and spoil all attempts at subterfuge.  Neng turned away first and found an eager partner.

    ¡°Brother, please train with me.¡± Jin Fan said with a quick martial salute.

    --He¡¯s a good actor.-- Pengfei thought as he drifted away.

    He breathed quickly, tense.  Made his way to Shutian on the outskirts of the little formation that surrounded Neng.

    ¡°Did you hear all that about Weidao?¡±  Pengfei asked quietly.

    ¡°Yeah, I heard it.  We¡¯ll have to deal with it later though.  Now, stay on the outside and keep an eye out for possible targets.¡±

    Shutian moved back into the crowd, choosing a partner carefully and Pengfei did the same.   He gave the minimum of attention to his next opponent when the next round began.   The majority of his focus was devoted elsewhere.

    To his credit, Neng did not take any anger out on Fan.  They went back and forth in swift exchanges, their swords clattered against each other in rapid attack and defense.  Pengfei knew that Neng was skillful fighter but was surprised to see that Fan was a worthy opponent.  Or nearly.

    The subsequent rounds against Zaifeng, Yusheng, and Wai, were more one-sided.  Pengfei circled around the bouts, anxiously watching each from the corner of his eye.  But none of the boys from the Discipline Hall were injured.

    Nanxi was the last of their cohort to ask for a match.  Pengfei was unsure whether their encounter would go smoothly.

    --He has to know Nanxi is angry¡­--

    When Nanxi had come out of his stupor in the bunkhouse and seen Xiaotong, his face had taken on a stony resolve that was so unlike his normally cheerful countenance.  But to all appearances, the opponent in front of Neng now was that same merry prankster.

    The illusion didn¡¯t last long though.

    ¡°Begin!¡±  Weidao shouted for all to hear.

    Nanxi moved while the elder¡¯s voice was still ringing in their ears, and then it was the shouts of the two combatants that were echoing off the nearby buildings.

    They were so quick that Pengfei would have thought they were using qinggong, but Elder Weidao had not given permission to use internal energy.  It was just the mundane power of the bodies.

    The wooden jians curved and shuttled through air at a speed that tested the eye¡¯s ability to see.  Neng¡¯s straightforward style, the ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯, chased the evasive and acrobatic ¡®Silent and Scentless Sword Stroke¡¯ employed by Nanxi.

    Pengfei had given up any pretense of training with his partner and co-conspirator, Jin Wai.  They both watched with growing apprehension as the intensity of the bout increased.

    --Calm down Nanxi!--

    Soon, other pairs paused their matches to watch the dramatic confrontation.

    In the last few seconds, the swordfight devolved into something more brutal.   The swords came together in a bind.  Nanxi slipped his foot behind Neng¡¯s ankle, shoved him backward and sent him stumbling.   A kick whizzed by Neng¡¯s nose, missing, but infuriating the boy.

    More forceful slashes.  Neng came forward in full force, swinging his blade frantically back and forth and putting the other on the defensive.

    There was a loud snapping sound, like a dry branch, as Nanxi¡¯s training sword broke in the middle.  He ducked underneath another attack, rolling through in an undignified by pragmatic evasion.  He stood to face his opponent again just as Chen Weidao called an end to the match.

    Nanxi threw the scrap of wood in his hand at Neng¡¯s feet with a smile and said something that got lost in the murmur of the spectators.

    Neng glowered, then looked abruptly somewhere else, like he had heard someone call his name.  Pengfei followed his gaze and found Chen Weidao.

    --Are the elder¡¯s lips moving?--

    There was no way that the master and student could be having a conversation over such a distance, but Neng nodded curtly as if he had taken an order.  He spun slowly, stopping to fix each of the boys from the Discipline Hall with an unmistakable recognition.

    --Shit.  Looks like the game is up.¡ª

    Neng turned to Pengfei last.  An icy stare, unburdened by any sentiment or friendship, sent a chill down his spine.  But the gaze passed over him a moment later to look behind.

    Pengfei turned and found himself backed into a corner with only one other disciple.

    Neng was staring directly at Jin Daoping.  One of the boys who had presented Pengfei with one of the vultures that had feasted on his friend Ma Feng¡¯s corpse.

 Chapter 44 - Everybody Saw This Coming (Day 140 of 1000 Continued - 2)

    (Day 140 Continued)

    The young men of the Discipline Hall converged on Neng.  Even Nanxi, swordless after the bout that had just ended, made a lunge for him.  But Elder Weidao¡¯s disciple bounded through the gap faster than the others could match.

    Using qinggong in between bouts was odd but violated no rules.  It gave Neng the speed he needed to avoid the direct challenges that would keep him from his target.  If anyone was able to lay a hand on him, their challenge would supersede anything else.  And Neng clearly had his mind set on a particular adversary.

    Daoping fit the mold of the other victims.  Pengfei had overcome the boy within a few months of joining Kunlun, at least when they faced each other bare-handed.  Rumor was that his swordsmanship was not much more impressive.

    There was fear on the disciple¡¯s face now.  Daoping realized he was the next target of the violent abuse that had recently fallen upon the less gifted.  He backpedaled even as Neng charged forward.

    Pengfei had a moment of indecision.

    --Really?  Daoping?  Fuck.--

    But he was moving a split second later.  He was slower than Neng.  Than everyone.  But he didn¡¯t have as far to go.  Qi coursed through the Yin meridians that ran down the backs of his legs.

    Paths converged and Neng was just behind, gaining ground.  A last desperate move.

    Pengfei jumped and sent both his feet forward into a ridiculous and theatrical drop kick.  He took Daoping in the chest, propelling him backwards and several paces away, narrowly avoiding a grasping hand.

    Neng and Pengfei collapsed to the ground in a tangle.

    ¡°What the fuck are you doing!¡±  Neng hissed as he attempted to disentangle himself.

    ¡°You know I hate that guy.  Couldn¡¯t help myself.¡±

    ¡°WHAT IS GOING ON HERE!¡±  The booming voice put any argument to rest, and not just between the two fallen disciples.  The entire courtyard went quiet and looked to Chen Rulan.  The elder had taken several steps from his proper place next to Chen Weidao, forgetting the stoic dignity that he was expected to show while supervising the young men at practice.

    The elder was standing over them a moment later, furious, and joined a beat later by a placid Elder Weidao.

    Pengfei stood and pulled up Neng by the arm, having his grip ripped away almost immediately.

    ¡°We just bumped into each other.¡± He said coolly but Elder Rulan wasn¡¯t buying it.

    ¡°This has gone far enough.  Practice is over ¨C ¡°

    ¡°No.¡±  Weidao stated flatly.  ¡°There is still enough time for one more round of sparring.¡±  He shooed away his student with a flick of his rolled-up sleeve, sending him forward to find his intended target.

    Neng took a predatory stride toward Daoping, who was still a heap on the ground, clutching his chest.  Pengfei reached out and grabbed a handful of robe, his quiet words drowned out as the elders argued amongst themselves.

    ¡°Weidao, you¡¯re going too ¨C¡°

    ¡°It¡¯s fine.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not fine!  It¡¯s ¨C Pengfei, what did you say?¡±

    The masters turned to look at the boys.  Neng was frozen, his face transitioning from annoyance to rage.  Pengfei still held the fistful of sleeve he had grabbed.  He repeated himself.

    ¡°I challenge Jin Neng.¡±

    For the second time, Neng snatched his hand away.  ¡°We¡¯ve already had a match today.¡±

    ¡°Does it matter?¡±

    ¡°No, it doesn¡¯t.¡±  Elder Weidao answered.  Then to Neng, ¡°Do it.  And don¡¯t hold back this time.¡±

    ¡°Stop this!¡±  Rulan shouted, but his martial brother ignored him.

    ¡°Everyone!  Gather around to watch the challenge between Jin Pengfei and my disciple, Jin Neng!¡±  He spoke with his usual monotone.  But his words elicited excitement in the crowd nonetheless.  ¡°They¡¯ve already used their qinggong, so for this match they¡¯ll be allowed to use the full range of their techniques and internal energy.¡±

    Pengfei suddenly found himself alone with Neng and Chen Rulan, penned in by a wide ring of the Jin generation.  The elder stubbornly refused to move until confronted by Weidao.

    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.

    ¡°Do I need to remind you what Hongzhang said?  This time is mine.¡±

    Rulan sighed and cast Pengfei a reluctant look but said nothing further as he stepped away.

    Neng picked up his wooden sword from the paving stones at his feet, and Pengfei realized he was unarmed.  His own weapon had gotten lost somewhere in the shuffle.  A tap on the shoulder, and there was Shutian offering a replacement jian.

    ¡°Give him hell.¡±  The boy whispered.  Nanxi was behind him, at the edge of the crowd, looking worried.

    ¡°Thanks.¡± Pengfei said as Shutian retreated.

    He raised his wooden sword to mirror Neng.  Right foot forward, opposite of what he preferred when bare-handed.  A more bladed stance as well.  Sword hand extended forward to keep the opponent at bay, but enough bend in the elbow to allow for a strong thrust.

    The difference in the comfort level was obvious.  Neng held his sword level without even a sliver of a tremor while Pengfei adjusted his stance anxiously.

    --How much was he holding back before?  No, don¡¯t think about that.  Let¡¯s just see how this goes.  Can always kneel down and give up if I need to¡­ Would talking do any good at this point?--

    He shook his head to try and dislodge the anxiety from his mind.

    Chen Weidao spoke from behind.

    ¡°Begin!¡±

    Neng lunged forward behind his sword and Pengfei leapt to the right.  The fighting ring was small, not much space to run.  But large enough to use a bit of qinggong.  He called on his energy to move swiftly out of danger.  The darts and hops came quicker than they would otherwise.  Neng¡¯s slashes pursued him.

    Pengfei knew he could not hope to survive just by dodging.  After another evasion, he pressed hard with his back leg and came forward with a diagonal strike.  But Neng stepped just behind the line of attack, came up with his own blow that glanced Pengfei¡¯s and skipped painfully off the meat of his back.  He had to jump forward and duck to avoid a chop that came back down towards his skull.

    The attack missed, but it was just the preamble.   Neng brought his hand back in and shot it forward again.

    <u>Dragon Emerges (long chuxian ¨C </u><u>ýˆ³ö¬F</u><u>)</u>

    Pengfei felt the power, the qi, in the thrust an instant before it struck out.  He leaned precariously to the side and brought his weapon up in a parry that took Neng¡¯s sword just far enough off the line.  Still, the intensity of the exchange pushed the off-balanced boy to the ground.

    He scrambled backwards, tripping over his feet as Neng thrust at his bobbing head, directly at the eyes.

    --Shit!  Not even letting me stand back up?--

    Pengfei managed to gain his footing again.  He had to throw out some sword strokes of his own just to keep his attacker from overwhelming him, but none of the blows were successful.  Neng pushed forward, driving Pengfei toward the boundary of spectators.

    The tips of the blades met between them.  Neng batted Pengfei¡¯s sword around, making just enough contact to constantly throw the weapon off the center line, open up avenues of attack.

    Pengfei attempted the same but hit nothing as his adversary circled and dipped away from the pawing attempts.

    Neng found a path wide enough to attack and lunged in.  Pengfei parried high, guiding the thrust overhead, forming a ceiling with his own sword that protected the head.

    A palm pushed Pengfei¡¯s blocking hand to the side.  Neng threw out a backfist with his sword arm, and the butt of the wooden hilt busted open Pengfei¡¯s ear, sending him stumbling

    ¡°Fuck!¡±  Pengfei yelled.  He held a hand up to the side of his head.  It came away bloody.  He felt the pain acutely but there was no anger there.  Until he looked up and saw the satisfied smile on Neng¡¯s face.

    ¡°What the hell man?¡±

    The other disciple did not answer.  He just took his stance again and raised his jian.  Pengfei lifted his own sword to meet the other, looked at the implement in his hand.

    --If we were sparring bare-handed I could at least rough him up a little¡­ I guess I should just be happy these aren¡¯t real swords¡­ wait¡­!--

    Pengfei attacked.  Anger with just a hint of technique, urged forward by a realization.  He used his weapon to slap at the flat of Neng¡¯s sword, pushing it across the body.  A deep step and a straight punch to the face with his free hand.

    But Neng sidestepped, moving around the attack, then brought the edge of his weapon back up.  Pengfei¡¯s fist only hit air, he felt a slap in his opposite shoulder and neck as Neng¡¯s sword found his side.  Lucky that the collar bone wasn¡¯t broken.  A strike to end any real sword fight.

    Pengfei knew the reality of it.

    ¡°The winner is ¨C ¡° Chen Rulan attempted, but Elder Weidao cut him off.

    ¡°Continue!¡±

    Neng was attacking again.  Pengfei ducked under a slash and brought his wooden jian back to the front in a guard.  But then in the next moment, he relaxed his stance.  Squared up a bit.  A noticeable shift in posture to everyone who was observing.

    Neng frowned and adjusted his sword.

    --But it¡¯s not a sword.--

    Pengfei¡¯s shoulders relaxed and the thought almost brought laughter to his lips.  And suddenly the fear that had been conditioned into him by the sect elders, the sparring sessions, and cold hard reality, dropped away.  He tossed aside the jian and raised his fists.

    Neng scowled. ¡°What are you doing?  Giving up already?  I thought you¡¯d take this match seriously.¡±

    ¡°And I thought we were friends.¡±

    No one tried to stop the farce.  The next thrust went all the way to the torso, jabbed painfully into the belly.  Pengfei winced but immediately responded with a jab.  Out of range.

    He reached out and slapped the sword away with his palm, just enough to step in past the point.  Didn¡¯t attempt to use qi in his attack.  He didn¡¯t trust it yet, couldn¡¯t afford the failure.  He relied on the strength of his muscles and his physical technique.

    But his qinggong pushed him forward.  Not to run away now.  To close the gap, cover the distance of the sword before its wielder could retreat.

    Pengfei ignored the facsimile of a blade sliding along his flesh.  Didn¡¯t give any worry to the grievous wounds he would be inflicting on himself if it were a real jian.

    Instead, he punched.  A hard straight to the body.  It landed, and Neng took a large step back with a loud grunting exhale.

    But the attack wasn¡¯t over yet.  Pengfei followed his retreating opponent, threw a hooking punch toward the head and a leg kick.  Neng ducked back from the first blow but a loud smack signaled the success of the second.

    Neng thrusted with full force now.  The attacks bit into Pengfei cruelly.  The contusions were immediately evident on exposed skin, quickly deepening in color.  The first of them already purple.  He dodged most of the attacks aimed at his face, but one pushed his head back sharply and broke the skin above the eye.  Blood trickled down and obscured his vision on one side.

    He slapped the sword away again, took a large stride and threw a head kick with as much power as he could muster.  It clipped Neng¡¯s hairline, made a satisfying thud. The sword attacks halted for a moment.  It was one of the stronger blows Pengfei had landed on a sparring partner.  He reset his posture, paused his assault as Neng took a few wobbly steps toward the perimeter of the ring.

    ¡°You done?¡±  Pengfei called over.

    Neng didn¡¯t respond but turned back to face him.  He straightened his back, used a hand to stretch his neck to one side, and shook off the latest blow.  Then he raised his weapon with a new intensity.  Pain and disorientation were replaced with seething anger.

    <u>Autumn Wind¡¯s Gust ( qiutian zhenfeng- </u><u>ÇïÌìê‡ïL</u><u>)</u>

    It came like a sudden breeze kicking up from the west.  Hot and forceful.  A diagonal slash rising from the ground.  Pengfei lifted his arm to protect his face, but the wooden sword just beat his own fist against his head, nearly a self-inflicted knockout blow.

    And the technique wasn¡¯t finished.  A combination thrumming with the power of internal energy.  The next attack came up under his elbows and found the ribs beneath.  A crack.

    Another slash nicked the top of Pengfei¡¯s pelvis.  He looked up to see the sword loop gracefully around, coming back for his torso again.  He stepped in the direction it was travelling, trying to bleed off some of the impact, but it was still a heavy blow.  Neng¡¯s natural strength and qi amplified by the lever arm formed by the weapon.  Another crack.  But Pengfei grabbed at the wood when he felt the contact.

    He held firm, his battered body clinging to the sword for support as well as safety.  And for a split second Neng was stuck, refusing to let go of the hilt.

    Chen Rulan was already coming forward to intercede.  Pengfei saw him step into the ring out of the corner of his eye.   But before a command could be given, Neng spiraled his weapon over Pengfei¡¯s thumb and around the back of his hand, finding the weak point in the grip.

    A flick of Neng¡¯s wrist, accompanied by a shout and a rush of qi.  The quick motion would have been enough for a surprisingly deep chopping cut if a real blade had been used.

    Instead, it broke Pengfei¡¯s arm.  The jian landed hard on the wrist with a sickening snap.

    ¡°Ahhhh!¡±  the injured disciple screamed.  He fell to ground clutching his forearm as the Kunlun elder jumped between the combatants.

 Chapter 45 - My Face Feels Funny (Day 141 of 1000)

    (Day 140 Continued)

    The trouble didn¡¯t come from the match.  It came afterward.  Chen Rulan had gingerly helped Pengfei stand as the boy cradled his injured arm, nearly blind with pain.

    But not blind enough to miss the interaction between Chen Weidao and his disciple.  Neng was looking horrified, seemed suddenly guilty about the wounds he had inflicted.  But his master was congratulating him, patting his shoulder in a fatherly manner.

    ¡°Excellent work.  You did well not to forget your technique, even when faced with such brutish tactics.¡±

    Neng gulped down the emotions on his face, nodding along, and Pengfei saw the boy trying hard to believe the words.  Beginning to smile.

    --That bastard!--  Pengfei thought as he was shepherded past the pair, looking up at Elder Weidao.  --It¡¯s all his fault Neng is acting like this!--

    There was saliva filling Pengfei¡¯s mouth.  He forgot that Chen Weidao had saved his life on the day he arrived at Kunlun.  He forgot the respect that was due to an elder of the sect.  He forgot the Confucian principles that had shaped his education.  And in a delirious lapse of judgement, Pengfei spit onto Chen Weidao¡¯s foot.

    Everyone saw it.  Elder Weidao looked down, Chen Rulan stopped in his tracks, and since Pengfei leaned against the man for support, he had to stop as well.  Neng looked between his master¡¯s foot and reddening face.

    Then, Neng was swinging his training sword down at Pengfei¡¯s head.  Chen Rulan caught the weapon in his bare hand, dropped Pengfei, and all hell broke loose.

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 141)

    Pengfei laid on the bed in the main room of the Medicine Hall, one dim lamp still burning in the late night.  The very early hours of the morning.  Each breath was painful.  His arm swelled in a dull ache now.  Nothing compared to the sharp crack of the initial injury, or the snap that had set the bone back in place.  But this throbbing was ever-present, keeping sleep at bay.

    Not that sleep was a real possibility.  The shouts and anger that had followed him to the sect¡¯s clinic had disappeared for a while.  Chen Lei had taken in the patient and banished the other elders.  Chen Rulan¡¯s argument with Weidao had lingered outside long enough for Pengfei to hear words like ¡®blatant disrespect¡¯, ¡®grave offense¡¯, ¡®punishment¡¯ and ¡®excommunication¡¯.

    Enough to put him in a panic all through his treatment and the hours since.

    Voices returned now.  Chen Lei had disappeared earlier in the evening but now the doctor came striding through the clinic to find the source of the noise.  A door opened and closed, momentarily revealing Elders Chen Weidao, Chen Rulan and Chen Ji, as well as Patriarch Hongzhang.  The doctor joined them and dispensed with their attempts at discretion.

    ¡°Another one!  This is getting out of hand, Weidao.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re not here to discuss that.  This is ¨C ¡°

    ¡°I don¡¯t care what you¡¯re here for!  I¡¯m not going to stand by while your ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Enough.¡±  Chen Hongzhang¡¯s voice silenced the squabbling.  ¡°There is something we need to clarify.¡±

    The door opened and the patriarch led everyone inside.

    --Shit, here they come.--

    ¡°Good, you¡¯re awake.¡± The Sect Head said.

    Pengfei struggled to sit upright, tried to stand, but Chen Lei pushed past the others and kept the disciple on the bed.  Deprived of that, the boy made a weak attempt at a martial salute.  It was pathetic to behold with a splinted wrist.

    The elders surrounded his bedside.  They eyed him and each other.

    --Did... did Neng tell them that ¡­--

    ¡°Pengfei, did you intentionally spit on Elder Weidao?¡±

    --Thank the fucking heavens.--

    But the men standing around his bedside still seemed as if they were judging a capital crime.  Pengfei gulped and cast his eyes to the floor.

    ¡°Yes, Sect Leader.  Elder Weidao, please forgive me.¡±

    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.

    Chen Rulan shook his head, the patriarch sighed.

    ¡°You ungrateful little dog.¡±  Chen Weidao spat.  ¡°I want him excommunicated!¡±

    ¡°Elders, please, I¡¯m sorry I ¨C¡°

    Hongzhang immediately waved away Pengfei¡¯s pleas and simultaneously dismissed the angry elder¡¯s demands. ¡°No one is getting excommunicated.¡±

    ¡°Some time in the cliffs will set him straight.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s your answer for everything, you old fool.¡±  Weidao barked at the head of the Discipline Hall.

    ¡°Half a year?¡±  Chen Ji asked the patriarch.

    ¡°We need him for the horses.  At least every other month.¡±

    ¡°So, he alternates.  One month in the caves, one month in the valley.  For a full year.¡±

    Chen Weidao snorted at the head of the Discipline Hall.  ¡°Puh!  Only a mind as broken as yours could propose something so asinine.¡±

    ¡°I think it sounds perfectly reasonable.¡±  Chen Hongzhang contradicted.

    --A year!?  No, no, no that¡¯s¡­ I can¡¯t do that!--

    Elder Weidao seemed equally unpleased, though it was perhaps for different reasons.

    ¡°Bah!¡± the man said and stormed out of the clinic.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough for the night.¡±  The Sect Head said tiredly.  Chen Ji nodded and both men departed together.

    ¡°You too.  He needs sleep.¡±  Chen Lei ordered.  But Chen Rulan shook his head.

    ¡°Just a few minutes.¡±

    The doctor sighed.  He extracted small bag from one of his sleeves, took a pill from it, and gave it to his patient.

    ¡°Take this, it will help you sleep.  Pain is always worst at night.¡±

    Pengfei examined the medicine he had been given.  It looked like one of the grain balls that had kept him fed during the period of confinement in the cliffs.  A reminder of the punishment he was seeing back to.  Lumpy, unappetizing.  He put it in his mouth, chewed with a grimace.

    ¡°You have until I get back with the tea.¡±

    Chen Lei set the little bag of pills down on one of the nearby beds and left the teacher and student to themselves.

    ¡°A hard day.¡±  Rulan observed evenly.

    ¡°I¡¯m ¡­ I¡¯m sorry if I embarrassed you, master.¡±  Pengfei lowered his gaze, ashamed, floundering in an emotional low.

    ¡°I¡¯m not your master.¡±  The words sounded harsh to the disciple¡¯s ears, but the elder softened the delivery by placing a hand on the young man¡¯s shoulder.

    That gesture of kindness had a strange effect on Pengfei.  The reservoir of his sadness overflowed, the dam burst.  Tears flowed freely and he could not help but sob.  It was like that little warmth the elder had shown was the permission needed to release everything that had been pent up.

    Chen Rulan didn¡¯t say anything, just left his hand resting on Pengfei¡¯s shoulder.  The disciple tried to rein himself in.

    ¡°So¡­ silly¡­¡± Pengfei eventually said over a sniffle, as he slowly regained his composure.

    ¡°Don¡¯t pay it any mind.¡± Chen Rulan assured.  ¡°Do you know how many of the boys here have bawled their eyes out to me, or one of the other elders?  All of them.  Most of them more than once.  And emotions run wild after a hard fight.  Everyone knows it.¡±

    Pengfei accepted the consolation, giving a faint smile.  They sat for a time in the silence, until the elder spoke again.

    ¡°Are you alright?  Besides the obvious injuries.¡±

    Pengfei hesitated but spoke truthfully.  ¡°It¡¯s a lot¡­ I feel weak.  And angry maybe?  Neng was my friend¡­ he went out of his way to hurt me.  Not to mention the others he went after.  But¡­ sir, I don¡¯t want to disrespect the elder again but¡­ did Chen Weidao make Neng do those things?¡±

    Rulan fidgeted with the pommel of the weapon he wore about his waist.  The sword-breaker.  The iron bar-mace.  He flicked a piece of dirt to the side.  He sighed, raised his eyebrows.  The mannerisms of someone considering a hard truth, remembering an old wound.

    ¡°Chen Weidao went through something similar as your friend.  His master had very strong views about how best to prepare the disciples for the real world.  Motivate them.  Don¡¯t be too angry at Neng.  The teacher is always a strong influence on the student¡­ sometimes too strong.¡±

    Rulan¡¯s words did to reassure Pengfei.

    --The distraught look on his face after the fight, or the smile after his master congratulated him, which one was the real Neng?  Maybe I¡¯ll find out when I see him again¡­ in a year.--

    And at that though, Pengfei couldn¡¯t contain himself.

    ¡°Ugh, what the hell have I gotten myself into?¡±

    He reached out his good hand and retrieved another of the pills that Chen Lei had left, chewed the bitter medicine.

    ¡°It¡¯s not that bad.  You¡¯ll see some of your friends every other month.  You shouldn¡¯t go completely mad.  And you¡¯ll have plenty of time to practice your martial arts.  Weidao and his disciple given you a lot to thing about in that area.¡±

    ¡°Like what, sir?¡±

    ¡°The strength of weapons.¡°  Chen Rulan looked at him seriously now.  ¡°You¡¯ve catching up with the jian, slowly.  But now you¡¯ve seen how much better some of your peers really are.  Unless you devote yourself to the sword, that gap is only going to get wider. ¡° The elder pointed to the bruises on Pengfei¡¯s side and his broken arm.  ¡°In the real world, against real steel ¨C ¡°

    ¡°I know.  I would have been dead twenty times over.  Even when I began to treat his sword like a stick, I was overwhelmed.¡±

    ¡°Maybe you should consider changing up your training.  You¡¯ve been focusing on the fist so much.  You could put it aside for a while.¡±

    The elder¡¯s face was impassive, showing no indication of his true thoughts.  His mouth was a thin line behind his black and grey beard.  His tone was neutral.  ¡°I may be teaching you the empty hand, but it¡¯s not my path.  You won¡¯t offend me if you choose to make things easier on yourself.¡±

    Pengfei sunk low at the suggestion.

    --It¡¯s just not¡­ I don¡¯t want to leave the fist behind.--

    There was something unreasonable in the enjoyment he felt, moving and striking with his body.  The contests with his fellow disciples as arms and legs clashed.  The jian was fun as well, in its own way.  But Pengfei had never found the same satisfaction with his wooden training sword that he felt run up his forearm when he landed a powerful bare-handed blow.

    ¡°Is it really that bad?  Aren¡¯t there people who use their fists in the Jianghu?¡±

    ¡°Some, but it¡¯s not very common.  More people die that way than make a name for themselves.¡±

    There was a long silence as Pengfei considered the words.  He could feel his conflicting emotions playing out across his face.  His personal preferences at war with the pragmatism of sword and spear.

    Pengfei looked to the elder.  ¡°I should train the jian¡­  its¡¯s so fierce.  This fight with Neng proved that to me.  And if the skill gap between me and the rest of the disciples¡­ the rest of the world¡­keeps getting wider, things are only going to get worse.¡±  Chen Rulan nodded along as Pengfei spoke.  ¡°But I want to continue the fist and see where it takes me.¡±

    The elder¡¯s head stopped bobbing.  A look of surprise turned into a subtle smile.  He asked, ¡°You¡¯re prepared to accept that?  It could be a short life.  Or just mediocre.  It¡¯ll be hard to make your way in a world full of weapons.  To make a mark.¡±

    ¡°Yeah.  I think I¡¯m fine with that.¡±

    Chen Rulan sat for a moment, lost in contemplation.  Pengfei watched the elder, growing more curious about what the man could be thinking as the seconds slid by.  Finally, the Taoist master turned to the disciple with a question.

    ¡°You enjoy the fist, but would you still use a weapon if needed?¡±

    ¡°Sure.  I have no problem using a weapon, just don¡¯t enjoy it as much.  I guess I¡¯ll continue with the jian.  I¡¯m sure I¡¯ll find a few spare minutes here and there while I¡¯m sitting in my cell.¡±

    ¡°You won¡¯t have good results splitting your training time between such disparate styles.  Maybe if you had started younger.  But perhaps I can give you another option.¡±

    Pengfei perked up, but the elder didn¡¯t explain himself.  He stood, indicating the conversation was nearing its end.

    ¡°How¡¯s the arm feel?  Can I get you anything?¡±

    ¡°Thank you for your consideration, sir.  If you could hand me another of those pills?  My wrist is still throbbing.¡±

    Rulan gave the boy another of the medicine balls just as Chen Lei came back in the room carrying a tray.

    ¡°Medicinal tea to help strengthen the bones.  If you spend a little extra time practicing your neigong every day, you should be back to normal in four or five  - Pengfei, what are you eating?¡±

    The disciple swallowed the last of the pill and hesitantly pointed to the bag still laying open on the nearby bed.

    ¡°How many did you eat?!¡±

    ¡°Three¡­ I¡¯m sorry, sir, my arm was still hurting.  I ¨C¡°

    ¡°You need to let it digest to feel the effects, you foolish boy!  It takes time!  And you!¡±  Chen Lei turned to look for his martial brother, but Chen Rulan was already making for the exit, scurrying away from the angry physician.  ¡°Never dare to touch anything in my clinic again!¡±

    Chen Lei turned his attention back to Pengfei ¡°Do you have any idea how much opium you just took!?¡±

    ¡°Opium!?¡± Pengfei blanched.  He¡¯d heard the name before.  A drug from the west.  Powerful.  Dangerous.  ¡°Should I try to vomit it out?¡±

    The doctor restrained the boy as he attempted to rise, then took a slightly less alarmist tone.  ¡°No.  In fact, you should try everything in your power NOT to vomit.  No sense in letting three pills go to waste.¡±

    ¡°But what¡¯s going to¡­ happen¡­ to me?¡±

    His words trailed off as a strange sensation overtook him.   A warm tingle ran up his spine.  A sense of euphoria filled him.  A pleasant tickle just under the skin.  He was teetering where he sat.  In what would be the last sober thought of the next day-and-a-half, he laid back before he could fall to the floor.  The room spun as the first of the three pills began to take effect.

 Chapter 46 - Outline of the Path Ahead (Day 215 of 1000)

    (Day 215)

    Five weeks for his ribs and wrist to heal, confined to the dormitory building. Much of his time there had overlapped with Xiaotong, convalescing from very similar injuries. The elders had made it clear that this time did not count toward Pengfei¡¯s sentence, so he didn¡¯t feel guilty socializing with his peers when they came back each evening. He¡¯d even joined them for meals in the Dining Hall, once he felt well enough, and walked around the sect when he needed to stretch his legs.

    The splint came off but Pengfei¡¯s punishment in the cliffs still did not begin. His expertise was needed in the valley beneath the sect. Another four weeks tending to the horses and teaching more of his brothers to ride. Shutian and Nanxi did most of the heavy lifting. Chen Lei had forbidden him from any activities that might aggravate his freshly healed injuries. No breaking in new mounts, no sparring with the other disciples.

    The stay in the valley was more comfortable this time. The new bunkhouse had been completed by the workers from Hotan, so the disciples had packed up their tents and moved indoors. The nights were quiet since the builders had broken down their temporary village and returned to town.

    Gentle rides on Horse. He continued to circulate his internal energy as dictated by the sect¡¯s qinggong method, attempting to lighten the burden for the mare as he perched on his saddle. There was still no discernible effect.

    Pengfei gave firm instructions to the other disciples as they learned to ride. Even issued stern orders if necessary, to curb any rough-housing or inattention that might lead to injury. He exercised his little authority judiciously, not wanting to come off as a puffed up tyrant, and his peers accepted it with minimal complaint.

    Chen Shan supervised the boys when they weren¡¯t riding. The man didn¡¯t seem to take any position on Pengfei¡¯s disrespect toward Elder Weidao. There was no persecution from the Taoist master, nor any special treatment. It was the same even-handed firmness that was shown to all the other young men.

    The training was more well-rounded than under Chen Mo. Neigong, calisthenics, qinggong, and swordsmanship. Pengfei did what he was physically able to, most everything that the others did. He earnestly practiced the ¡®Swift Dragon Lightning Sword¡¯ when that part of the day came but was limited to controlled drills. No contact that might put his body at risk.

    Despite the dedication Pengfei showed, he looked forward to setting down the jian for good. Chen Rulan had hinted at another option, something that would allow him to dedicate himself to the fist and still survive in a world of weapons. But Pengfei had not seen the man for weeks, except fleeting encounters in the sect¡¯s compound.

    So, Pengfei was glad to find the elder waiting for him at the gates on the day he hiked up from the valley. Chen Ji was there too, in one of his manic phases, talking excitedly to the other elder. They both carried bags and crates, and Pengfei¡¯s heart sank a bit when he realized what this meant. Straight into confinement. He would not set foot inside the sect today.

    --Not today, and not for the next year. From now on, it¡¯s either the cliffs or the valley.--

    ¡°Come along, come along.¡± Chen Ji said and led them along the path to the northeast, toward the cells.

    Rulan walked ahead with his martial brother. Pengfei stared silently at his instructor¡¯s broad shoulders, as the older men discussed innocuous matters amongst themselves.

    --Wonder how the others are doing? Has Neng caused any more trouble? Nothing happened for the five weeks I was recovering in the dormitory¡­ maybe he and his master got the message. Had a change of heart.--

    The path narrowed. The mountainside fell away and they came to the cliff that was home to the punishment cells. The trio passed one of the caves, then another and another. To the very end of the long row. The elders set down their burdens when they were above the final alcove and turned to Pengfei.

    ¡°You¡¯ll be staying here.¡± Chen Ji announced.

    The pair of elders looked expectantly at Pengfei, who gave a reluctant glance over the edge.

    --I already know the answer but¡­--

    ¡°Is there a ladder? Or a rope maybe?¡±

    ¡°Just go.¡± Chen Rulan commanded.

    Pengfei took another look over the side, adjusted the bag on his back, and hesitantly eased a foot down the rockface. The mountain was steeper here but there were still plenty of places to plant his feet, hand holds to ease himself down.

    Up above, the elders were still discussing whatever had occupied them on the walk.

    ¡°Are you paying attention?!¡± The disciple shouted up at them.

    Chen Rulan shooed him along without actually checking on his progress.

    --Shit, shit, shit¡­--

    He scraped his stomach along the stone and worked his way toward the opening below. In a few more minutes he was level with the cave opening and could reach out a shaking foot to step onto a prominent ledge.

    ¡°Okay! I made it!¡± Pengfei yelled up to the elders then stumbled deeper inside on wobbling legs.

    He sat himself down on the solid rock, breathed deep, and wiped his sweaty palms on his pants. First Chen Ji, then a moment later Chen Rulan, came bounding into the cave carrying their bags and boxes. They placed the items down just back from the ledge.

    Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there.

    When he had reined himself in a bit Pengfei made to stand, out of respect for the elders. But they sat across from him instead. Settled in for a conversation.

    ¡°You can¡¯t afford to stay idle while you¡¯re confined here.¡± Rulan began.

    ¡°Yes, sir. I know I¡¯ll have to be diligent since I¡¯ll be away from the main sect for so long.¡±

    ¡°I hope that¡¯s not a complaint.¡± Chen Ji inserted defensively. ¡°I was as lenient as I could be. Maybe I should have proposed a few whippings as well¡­¡±

    ¡°No, Elder Ji, I didn¡¯t mean to sound ungrateful! Just ¨C¡°

    Chen Rulan waved off the rest and continued. ¡°I thought we should discuss the martial arts a bit before you start your seclusion. The path you¡¯ve chosen. You¡¯re still intent on pursuing the bare-handed styles?¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir. The fist, in particular.¡±

    ¡°You can¡¯t be so narrow minded. Someone who studies the sword doesn¡¯t focus solely on the thrust. They learn a variety of techniques. And you¡¯ve already set yourself enough of a challenge without limiting the options further. You¡¯ll naturally have your preferences, your strengths, but you should study broadly.¡±

    Pengfei pursed his lips, thinking off all the myriad unarmed styles. His focus had been on Kunlun¡¯s ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and Shaolin¡¯s ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯. The training in the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯ was engaging, but he¡¯d only done so because it was forced on the Discipline Hall by Chen Ji.

    Chen Rulan cast an even wider net now. ¡°If you want to pursue the empty-hand you¡¯ll need to acquaint yourself with several styles. The fist, obviously. You have a good start there, but you need to go deeper. Something that focuses on kicks. The palm. Perhaps, a finger style, though that is fairly specialized. Grappling. The ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯ is ¨C ¡°

    ¡°It¡¯s not meant to stand alone.¡± Chen Ji said. ¡°You¡¯ll have to integrate it with something else.¡±

    Chen Rulan agreed, ¡°Yes. You¡¯ll also need to discard and replace your current qinggong and neigong ¨C ¡±

    Pengfei started to protest, but a raised palm silenced him.

    ¡° ¨C and you¡¯ll need to develop some level of waigong. And finally, find some way to deal with weapons-users.¡±

    The elder at last came to the end of his litany and paused for the boy to digest the information.

    --Fist, leg, palm, finger, grappling, qinggong, neigong, waigong, weapons¡­--

    Pengfei sighed, slightly discouraged. ¡°That¡¯s¡­ that¡¯s a lot.¡±

    ¡°Yes. And as you know, our sect is focused on the jian. You¡¯ll have to try and supplement your education once we rejoin the Wulin because most of that material can¡¯t be found in Kunlun.¡±

    ¡°You said ¡®most¡¯. Does that mean¡­¡±

    ¡°That brings us to your training menu.¡± Chen Rulan withdrew a book from his robes. ¡°I¡¯ve packed you some more texts in one of those bags, but this one warrants special attention.¡±

    Pengfei could immediately tell it was another martial arts manual. He reached out with both hands to receive the text from Chen Rulan, turned it round and read the cover.

    ¡®The Mountain King Step¡¯.

    He immediately began flipping through the pages as the elder continued speaking.

    ¡°It sounds impressive, but it¡¯s just a combination of our Kunlun methods with a common variant of the ¡®Gecko Climbing Arts¡¯. It¡¯s well suited for hand-to-hand combat, and you¡¯ll find it useful in terrain like this.¡± Chen Rulan gestured to the cave entrance and the mountain beyond.

    ¡°Climbing Arts... I hesitate to ask, but does that mean I¡¯ll be ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Yes.¡±

    ¡°Shit.¡± Pengfei cursed, already scared of venturing out onto the cliff face again. ¡°But sir, I don¡¯t think I¡¯m capable of learning something like that on my own. I certainly wouldn¡¯t want to attempt it alone.¡±

    Chen Ji spoke up again, with a sly smile. ¡°You''re technically not allowed visitors once your punishment begins, even from the elders. But these cells require a lot of maintenance. I may need to stop by, now and then.¡±

    --I¡¯m not sure if that¡¯s a good or bad thing.--

    But Pengfei only said, diplomatically, ¡°I see.¡±

    With that, the head of the Discipline Hall stood and made to leave. ¡°I¡¯ll be seeing your soon, so no need for a tearful goodbye.¡±

    But Pengfei hopped to his feet and gave the man a sincere bow anyway.

    ¡°Elder Ji, I¡¯m sorry I¡¯ve caused you so much trouble.¡±

    The short man rested a hand kindly on the disciple¡¯s shoulder and spoke warmly. ¡°You did splendidly, up until that bit with Chen Weidao.¡±

    Chen Ji disappeared into the light of the cave entrance and Pengfei rejoined Elder Rulan.

    ¡°Speaking of that, have you been reflecting on your bout with Jin Neng?¡±

    ¡°Yes sir. Maybe too much.¡± Pengfei stated with a morose half-smile. He¡¯d relived the match a thousand times in the months and weeks since, while his body slowly healed. The shame at the loss had been compounded by his inability to practice. He nearly went mad at the thought of the widening gap in skill between himself and Neng. And the obstruction that blocked his path of advancement.

    That obstruction weighed on him now. He had to know. Rulan had alluded to something in the sect¡¯s clinic. A way forward. But no mention of it since then. So, Pengfei went fishing.

    ¡°Elder, how can a fist-fighter ever hope to counter the sword?¡±

    Rulan stroked his black and grey beard pensively for a moment, the very image of a contemplative Taoist priest.

    ¡°There are a couple possibilities. One way would be waigong. External training methods, body cultivation. At the highest levels, a person can become impervious to blades. But reaching those heights is very uncommon. Even at Shaolin, famous for the ¡®Golden Bell Shield¡¯, most of their monks choose a different path. Do you know what it is?¡±

    ¡°No.¡±

    ¡°Weapons. Weapons to counter weapons. The adepts there take vows against killing, so they wield staffs instead of swords. But most of them do not go unarmed into battle against blades.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t understand¡­¡± Pengfei¡¯s voice lowered in disappointment. ¡°Do you mean I should keep using the jian? Didn¡¯t you say it would hold back my progress with the empty-hand?¡±

    ¡°Maybe there is another option. The jian is almost antithetical to the fist, at least in the early stages. Different stances, different ranges. So, training the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ does little to prepare you for wielding a sword. Six hours spent practicing one art is six hours wasted for the other.¡±

    Chen Rulan leaned over from where he sat, grabbed one of the bags he had carried down to the cell and tugged at the drawstring.

    ¡°But what if there was something more similar to the empty-hand? Perhaps then, training with the fist would actually benefit the weapon and vice-versa. You could follow the path you¡¯ve chosen and still stand a chance of surviving when blades are drawn.¡±

    Pengfei looked between the elder and the sack at the man¡¯s side with increasing surprise and excitement. ¡°Sir¡­is there such a weapon?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not sure myself.¡± Chen Rulan spoke frankly and reached into the bag. ¡°But maybe these are worth a try?¡±

    He extracted a pair of leather sheaths that contained two short swords and handed the weapons to Pengfei. The boy slid one of the swords free and inspected the blade. It was about the length of his forearm, measured from elbow to wrist. A wide distance from the edge to the spine.

    It could be considered a distant cousin to a meat cleaver, but Pengfei instantly found them more elegant than some crude kitchen tool. The curve of the blade near the tip, the knuckle guard and the prong that ran up the back of the blade. It all looked very ¡®martial¡¯.

    ¡°These¡­ these are for me?¡± Pengfei asked, unsheathing the other blade and holding up the pair. The elder just nodded.

    A memory came to mind, of a box in the back of a yak cart. ¡°I¡¯ve seen these swords before. You bought these in Hotan, on our first trip there. That was before I even began to learn the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯. How did you know I would need these?¡±

    ¡°You were already neglecting the jian in favor of the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist.¡¯ I came to a similar crossroads when I was about your age. I took a different path. I wasn¡¯t sure which direction you¡¯d go¡­ but I had a feeling. I had these made just in case.¡±

    ¡°What kind of swords are these? What are they called?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not sure you could even call them swords. Knives maybe. I met a southerner who used a pair like these when I was young, before Kunlun closed its gates. His technique made an impression, but I never caught the name of the weapon. You can call them whatever you want.¡±

    Pengfei smiled. ¡°Whatever they are, I¡¯m excited to learn how to use them.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m glad you like them. But I don¡¯t want you to have any illusions. They¡¯re not a battlefield weapon. And it won¡¯t do much better in a duel. The range is poor and there won¡¯t be much leverage on the cuts. The only advantage they will provide is the similarity to the fist.¡±

    ¡°Two blades means simultaneous attack and defense. More flexibility in footwork. Changing the lead side fluidly.¡± Pengfei observed, already seeing some overlap with the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and Shaolin¡¯s ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯.

    ¡°Good. You¡¯ll need those kinds of insights. No one here uses a weapon like this, so you¡¯ll have to figure it out for yourself. It¡¯s a bit of a gamble. You¡¯ll certainly fall behind in the short term. But if you can figure these out, your training will be much more efficient in the future.¡±

    ¡°If I can figure it out? That¡¯s a bit intimidating.¡±

    Rulan shrugged. ¡°You may find a real teacher someday. But no one becomes a master by rote memorization. You¡¯ll have to innovate eventually or be relegated to mediocrity. You¡¯re just facing that problem a bit sooner than your peers.¡±

    The elder stood and Pengfei joined him on his feet.

    ¡°You¡¯ve given me a lot to think about, master.¡±

    ¡°Haha¡­ I¡¯m still not your master, boy.¡±

    ¡°It was worth a shot.¡±

    The man walked to the ledge as the disciple bowed.

    ¡°Don¡¯t neglect the rest of your training just because you have a couple new toys.¡±

    ¡°I won¡¯t.¡±

    The broad shoulders vanished into the sunlight. Pengfei turned back toward the darkness of the cave¡¯s interior and gave swords a first exploratory spin. He immediately dropped the blades and they clattered on the stone beneath his feet, but he picked the weapons up and tried again.

 Chapter 47 - Days Flying By (Day 271 of 1000)

    (Day 220)

    Entering seclusion in the cave was without a doubt a punishment. Pengfei would have preferred to be in his dormitory, in the sect¡¯s main compound, eating hot meals and practicing with his friends. The isolation and boredom weighed heavily on the mind within just a few hours of entering the cell.

    But he had been buoyed by the prospect of learning new martial arts. Only to be stymied.

    The first third of the manual for ¡®Mountain King Step¡¯ was nearly identical to the qinggong he had already studied. The same footwork, the same meridians, the same circulation method. He could, and did, practice the techniques but it was nothing new to him.

    On the other hand, the latter pages were completely different to anything Pengfei had seen before. They dealt with agility and surefootedness, especially in the ascent and descent of mountainous terrain. Clearly inspired, or entirely cribbed, from the ¡®Gecko Climbing Arts'' that the elder had mentioned.

    While he desired to assimilate the material, the method described in the book for developing the necessary sensitivity was out of the question.

    Pengfei was getting dizzy just looking out over the edge of his cell. Up, down, and to the sides. The cliff was a terrifying prospect. A fall of half a li or more. But climbing out there was a requirement to progress.

    --No fucking way.--

    He recalled the words from the book.

    ¡®Climb until you can feel the grasping yang in your fingers and toes, the nimbleness of yin, and let the interplay between the energies give rise to true balance.¡¯

    Everything else in the manual was closed off to him until he could accomplish this hazily described awareness.

    A bird screeched below him as it coasted on the air along the cliff face. The sound was barely perceptible by the time it reached him.

    --Nope. Not going to try that on my own.--

    He stepped back from the cliff and retreated further inside.

    The cell was like the other¡¯s Pengfei had seen. Mostly consisted of a smooth practice floor, cut from the rock, with a ceiling high enough to swing even the longest sword. A weapons rack held several wooden options. Large ceramic jars filled with stagnant water or unpalatable rations.

    He stood in front of a basin he had already filled with water from one of the urns. He splashed his face as the morning light made its way into the cell. He left his chest bare, though the air was chilly.

    He dried his hands on his pants and made his way to a small nook in the rock. Fashioned into a bookshelf for the small library he had been provided. Pengfei¡¯s fingers first ran over the short swords placed next to the texts.

    Another sore spot. The weapons were a tantalizing glimpse into the world of blades. A glimpse compatible with the way of the fist that he had decided to pursue. The sabers should be easily more easily adaptable to his style than the jian. In theory.

    --But no teacher. Just fumbling around in the dark. I¡¯m lucky the blades aren¡¯t sharpened or I would have lost a finger already.--

    He brushed past the short swords and picked out a few of the manuals from the makeshift bookshelf. Not the ¡®Kunlun Wishful Hand¡¯. The grappling style that Chen Ji had been teaching to the boys of the Discipline Hall was nearly impossible to practice without a partner. Nothing could truly replicate the complicated machinery of a human wrist, elbow, or shoulder. He tried occasionally to find the pressure points on his own body, but doubted the practice would carry over to an opponent.

    That left only two arts to him. The ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯.

    --The old reliable ones.--

    He took those texts, set them on top of a folded pile of clothes next to the squared stone floor that formed the cell¡¯s training area.

    The style of Kunlun was first. Forms were no longer necessary. Not every day. Pengfei practiced them once or twice a week to keep them fresh. Most of the time he focused on specific techniques or drills. Or engaged in bouts with imaginary opponents.

    This is what he did now. Blocking punches and kicks that weren¡¯t really there, striking out at nothing.

    Neng was the adversary he challenged most often. He could almost see the boy¡¯s face at the end of his punch. There was anger but not real rage. Confusion. There had been a betrayal, that much was undeniable. But judging by the fact that none of the elders had interrogated Pengfei about a murder, Neng hadn¡¯t told anyone about Guoyu.

    Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.

    Still, beyond the hurt and confusion there was hunger. Drive.

    --I¡¯m not going to lose like that again.--

    Pengfei imagined grabbing his phantom adversary by the wrist. It slipped his grasp, just as Neng had done during their real fight. Instead of freezing in disbelief, waiting for his arm to be broken again, Pengfei circled and pushed into the ghost¡¯s shoulder creating enough distance for a high kick.

    ¡°Knock out¡­¡± he huffed aloud, panting with the exertion of a protracted battle, then asked himself sarcastically, ¡°Why didn¡¯t I do that last time?¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 240)

    --Fist, leg, palm, finger, grappling, qinggong, neigong, waigong, and a way to deal with weapons¡­ what have I gotten myself into?--

    Pengfei was laying on his back, staring up at the ceiling. He recited the components that Chen Rulan had outlined for him, the skills he would need to acquire to be a successful martial artist in the Jinaghu.

    --And I¡¯ve learned a bit of the fist. Barely picked up the short swords. Everything else is totally lacking, or needs to be replaced.--

    The sweat on his body had turned cold and dried. The sabers he had been practicing with were now balanced casually on his stomach. Still no insight there. But he could practice basic cuts and thrusts with them. That much, at least, he was able to adapt from his brief time practicing Kunlun¡¯s sword style.

    --So much to learn but only so much time in a day. Only so much energy one man exert. Even someone as magnificent as myself.--

    His head lolled, fell to one side, until he was staring out the cave opening into the sky. Another sun set, only evidenced by the orange rays creeping along the stone wall. The days and weeks passed in an agonizingly slow crawl. Tally marks scratched into a wall kept track of his time in the cell.

    --Any day now. They¡¯ll take me out of here any day now. They need me, for the herd. Can¡¯t just forget about me.--

    He stood, walked to the ledge and looked out. His eyes sought out signs of life and quickly found them, despite their natural camouflage. The pack of Ibex was there again, a hundred paces away and maybe another twenty paces farther down the cliff side. The mountain goats picked their way along the crags. Their hooves found purchase on the smallest protrusions and the most unlikely angles.

    Pengfei had encountered the animals months ago, during his first punishment at the cliffs. And it hadn¡¯t taken long for him to spot them again this time, now that he knew what to look for. He spotted them most days, though their dark coats blended in perfectly with the mountain.

    ¡°Can one of you guys give me a ride out of here?!¡±

    The beasts kept grazing at whatever sprigs of vegetation they could find on the rock, paying him no mind.

    ¡°Yeah¡­ I probably wouldn¡¯t trust you anyway.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 245)

    ¡°Whooooooooooo!¡± he screamed into the wind, arms spread wide, as Horse galloped across the valley. Pengfei had grown accustomed to the mare¡¯s stunning power. He kept his seat in the saddle now on pure balance. His feet barely touched the stirrups.

    His friends were ahead. They waited with amused faces, riding on their own mounts. Horse skidded to a halt just in front of them.

    ¡°You alright there?¡± Tianwei asked.

    ¡°Looking a little wild.¡± Tianxun said.

    ¡°Just clearing my head boys.¡± Pengfei responded with a smile.

    ¡°You sure you haven¡¯t gone crazy in that cell of yours?¡±

    ¡°Please. It¡¯s nothing.¡± He said with bravado.

    Pengfei pulled Horse¡¯s reins and she circled the twins, hopped up on to a rock, balanced comically with her four hooves bunched together.

    ¡°So, you won¡¯t have any problem going back into seclusion when your shift in the valley ends?¡±

    That question gave him pause, but he forced a voice of nonchalance. ¡°No problem at all.¡±

    He kicked Horse¡¯s flanks and she jumped from her perch. He sent her walking back toward the bunkhouse. With the twins behind him, he lost track of which was which. They spoke in their strange alternating rhythm.

    ¡°One of the colts has an abscess.¡±

    ¡°You going to take a look or you want us to handle it?¡±

    ¡°What did you two have in mind?¡± Pengfei asked, testing the brothers.

    ¡°Lance it.¡±

    ¡°Flush it with cold water, then boiling tea.¡±

    He nodded approvingly. ¡°You two have been doing your reading. Let¡¯s go. I¡¯ll supervise.¡±

    Pengfei led the way to the paddock. Most of the horses were grazing further downstream after a day of riding instruction but one was limping pathetically around the small, fenced, enclosure. Some of the other disciples were leaning against the rails, inspecting the injured colt and conversing amongst themselves.

    Tianwei broke off for a moment, then quickly returned with a leather satchel of tools. His brother busied himself building a fire near the paddock and Pengfei fetched a couple pots of water.

    Soon, the twins had roped the horse and forced it down onto its side. No easy task. The beast bayed in pain as Tianxun scraped at the flesh underneath the hoof with a hot blade. It writhed against restraints and flung its head back and forth, but soon the little surgery was completed.

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 271)

    He blocked Jin Baizu¡¯s overhead slash by lifting both his arms, catching the stroke with his short swords. The dull blades bit into the wooden practice jian, but none of the other disciples had complained yet about the damage to their training weapons.

    Pengfei gave a swipe at his opponent but hit nothing.

    The next attack looked the same, and Pengfei brought up the same defense. But this time Baizu adjusted the path slightly, and the jian thumped against Pengfei¡¯s wrist instead of bouncing off the crossed sabers.

    --Fuck.--

    He nodded in acknowledgement of his little defeat and reset to start a new engagement with his partner. But before they could make another pass at each other, Elder Zhi called out to him.

    ¡°Pengfei! Come here!¡±

    Pengfei saluted Baizu, stuffed his sabers into his belt, and jogged through the group of duelists until he was clear of the swinging swords and lunging bodies.

    The boys had spread out quite a bit. While in the sect, they were restricted by the confines of the training yard but here in the valley they could disperse over a wide swath of grassy terrain. It took Pengfei a couple minutes to loop back toward where Elder Zhi was standing.

    --Oh fuck¡­ I thought I had another day at least.--

    Chen Ji was standing there with the other old Taoist. The head of the Discipline Hall was clasping his arms behind his back, looking expectantly to Pengfei.

    ¡°Time to head back up, boy.¡± He said kindly.

    ¡°Sir, isn¡¯t it¡­ it¡¯s awfully late.¡±

    ¡°You may be slow, but even you can get back up the path before nightfall.¡±

    Pengfei stiffened and looked up the mountain. He couldn¡¯t see the cliff. It was on the northeastern face. But he traced the route up to the sect with his eyes as far as he could see.

    ¡°Can¡¯t I just stay one more night?¡± he asked plaintively.

    Chen Ji smiled awkwardly and shook his head. ¡°Go gather your things.¡±

    Pengfei couldn¡¯t even say goodbye to the twins or any of his other acquaintances among the disciples. He looked over at the pairs of boys as they continued their practice, walked slowly back to the bunkhouse.

    His things were gathered up soon. There wasn¡¯t much to pack. He threw his bag over his shoulder and reluctantly returned to the waiting elder.

    Chen Ji wordlessly turned around and led the way back uphill.

 Chapter 48 - Premature Departure (Day 330 of 1000)

    (Day 290)

    Chen Hongzhang and Chen Zhi walked slowly, talking quietly to each other as Jin Nanxi led them through the narrow fissure. The boy was quite a distance ahead. Well out of earshot. He gave darting looks upward, as if he expected an enemy to attack from above at any moment. And when he wasn¡¯t searching the canyon walls he was shooting furtive glances back at the elders.

    ¡°What will happen?¡±, Zhi asked the Sect Head.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know. It¡¯s a mess.¡±

    ¡°No one has come looking yet. Maybe nothing will come of it.¡±

    ¡°Maybe.¡±

    ¡°But you don¡¯t think so?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know. The future has always been a mystery to me.¡± Chen Hongzhang sighed. ¡°I wish Master Enlai was here to guide me.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ve done well on your own.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s different now. We¡¯re so close to rejoining the world. And the closer that day comes, the less equipped I feel for my position.¡± The man¡¯s frame was sturdy despite his age, but his shoulders sagged under the weight of responsibility.

    They walked silence for a while. The stream that had coursed through the canyon at the height of summer had receded. The cold of autumn had put an end to the snowmelt. The rock beneath their feet was littered with the detritus that had been left by the receding waters.

    Nanxi stopped at a natural alcove in the rock wall. Too small and shallow to call a cave.

    ¡°Here.¡± The boy said simply.

    The elders dusted off boulders and swept up their robes to sit comfortably. The Sect Leader fixed the disciple with a glare.

    ¡°Well? Get on with it.¡±

    ¡°Ugh¡­¡±

    Nanxi crawled into the nook on all fours. Only his hindquarters stuck out of the opening. Small and large rocks began to roll out between his legs as he uncovered what he had buried there months before. After several minutes, he backed out of the crevice dragging a large worn out sack.

    ¡°Show me.¡± Chen Hongzhang commanded.

    Nanxi reluctantly pulled open the bag.

    The empty eye sockets of a human skull stared upward, and more bones were just visible beneath.

    ******************************************************************************

    (Day 330)

    Breath in. Breath out. The inner sea of his dantian churned and he contemplated the ¡®Mystical Heaven Infinite Skill¡¯ method. According to Chen Rulan, it was a dead-end for Pengfei. Something he would need to replace on his journey through the martial arts. But for now, it was the best he could do.

    There was fog with each exhale. The short season of warmth was already over. Long gone. Wasted in the work of the valley and the isolation of the cell. It was true winter now. Snow occasionally fell despite the generally dry climate of the region.

    Not even the neigong Pengfei practiced could completely protect him against the cold. He meditated with his heavy coat on, and a blanket wrapped over his shoulders.

    The Great Circuit of the Governing and Conception meridians. Then circulating to the major organs and their paired opposites. The pathways of his energy maintained the balance of Yin and Yang in his body.

    Pengfei couldn¡¯t feel that balance. The subtleties of qi were still lost on him. Equilibrium wasn¡¯t something he was striving for. But until he found a more suitable style, he wouldn¡¯t venture one way or the other toward the extremes.

    He could feel the increase in his reserves of energy. It wasn¡¯t much, not enough to bring him into range of his peers who had practiced longer. But he was gaining. The isolation, the boredom, had seen to that.

    The neigong helped Pengfei maintain his sanity as the lonely days stretched into weeks. He had begun this period of confinement like the previous. Focused on his martial arts, especially the ¡®Heaven Shaking Fist¡¯ and the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯. But his taste of freedom in the valley had made this stint even more unbearable; made worse by the knowledge it would not be the last.

    Still, he had dutifully wiled away his time in a silent repetition, carried on from one day to the next.

    Wake. Practice. Eat. Practice. Read the provided texts of mathematics and astronomy, just to give his mind some stimulation. Then more practice.

    The meditation, the cultivation of energy, was something he did in the evenings. Once the cave was dark and his body was tired.

    This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.

    But then, what should have been the last day of a month-long imprisonment came and went.

    Pengfei counted and recounted the little marks he had made on the stone wall. Twenty-eight days. He was due to be released again, so he could tend to the horses in the valley and instruct his fellow disciples in riding. That was the schedule the elders had agreed upon in the clinic, on the night that Chen Weidao had stormed in and demanded Pengfei¡¯s expulsion.

    But the sun rose and set, again and again, with no sign of reprieve.

    Pengfei tried to keep to his routine. Focus on the martial arts and put all other concerns to the side. However, with every punch and kick, his focus drifted. His eyes kept wandering to the mouth of the cave, looking expectantly for the arrival of Chen Ji. Or Chen Rulan. Or one of the other elders. Anyone who could take him away.

    Footwork became anxious pacing. His training was hampered by the anxiety of simply not knowing. The only freedom he found was in his neigong. In the quiet concentration he could forget the external world. His conscious thoughts faded into background noise.

    More and more of his waking hours were spent in the self-imposed catatonia. Pengfei would slip inside himself while the sun was just appearing, watch as the cycles of his energy flowed through their mesmerizing revolutions, then open his eyes in the night.

    One week passed like this, then two. Soon, and agonizingly slowly, another month had elapsed.

    And here he was again, breathing in and out, huddled under a mass of fabric that insulated him from the temperature. The sun was setting. Pengfei slowly opened his eyes to see a sky purple in the twilight.

    --They¡¯ve forgotten me.--

    It was the first thought he could articulate as his conscious mind returned to the forefront.

    He stood and walked stiffly, only to lay back down a few paces away and traded one kind of unconsciousness for another. He slipped into an apathetic slumber as soon as he was flat on his bedroll.

    The wind howling across the cave opening was deafening at times. As loud as the fiercest storms he had seen growing up in Sichuan. But he could sleep through the sound easily now.

    It was a candle that woke him. A spark, when his dozing mind knew there should be only darkness. Pengfei sat bolt upright and instinctively crawled backwards away from the light.

    A short figure was there. Only the face was illuminated, but the identity was hard to read in the strange interplay of shadows. Only recognizable when the candle was put down on a nearby crate.

    ¡°Elder Ji!¡± Pengfei shouted and sprang to his feet. He rushed to the man and hugged him. In that moment, he felt genuine affection for the strange little man. ¡°I thought you would leave me here forever!¡±

    ¡°Alright, alright.¡± Chen Ji huffed kindly, patting the boy¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Pack your things.¡±

    ¡°Of course!¡± Pengfei grabbed a canvas satchel and began to fill it, faster than he needed to, eager to be gone. ¡°You know, I¡¯ve packed and unpacked this a dozen times. Hahaha, you really made me wait this time.¡±

    ¡°Yes¡­ sorry about the delay child.¡±

    One bag was filled with the small library he had accumulated. He stuffed his short swords into the other bag, with clothes and small personal items.

    The sky was just beginning to lighten with a hint of dawn when Pengfei finished. Chen Ji carried the candle as he walked through the cell for a final time. He seemed satisfied that everything had been collected and led the way to the ledge.

    ¡°Give me those. Focus on the climb.¡±

    The elder took the bags from Pengfei, freeing the boy to make the nerve-racking climb unencumbered. It was the most eager the disciple had ever been to take that first terrifying step onto the cliff face.

    A smooth ascent, even in the dim light. Just a few minutes to reach the mountain path above the cells and then they were headed back toward the sect. Pengfei expected Chen Ji to lead him past the main gate and down into the valley, but the elder actually ushered him into the main compound. The boy didn¡¯t say anything. He was simply happy to be in the grounds after nearly five months. He looked this way and that for any sign of his friends but he knew it was too early for them to be about.

    --Wonder if he¡¯ll let me grab a hot meal while we¡¯re here?--

    Instead, Elder Ji brought them to the Medicine Hall where Chen Lei and Chen Rulan were waiting. Pengfei didn¡¯t impulsively embrace the men like he had just a few minutes ago, but couldn¡¯t keep a smile from his face when he saluted.

    ¡°Elders! It¡¯s good to see you.¡±

    ¡°Pengfei. You look like you¡¯ve lost weight.¡± Chen Lei observed, with a warm pat on the shoulder.

    ¡°Probably. It was hard to force down the grain balls in the cell.¡±

    ¡°Haha¡­This one has been feeding me worse than that.¡± Chen Rulan chuckled with a nod of his head toward the doctors.

    ¡°Oh, are you feeling alright, sir?¡±

    ¡°Fine, fine.¡±

    Pengfei looked his teacher up and down, but was distracted a moment later when Chen Ji took one of the bags from his shoulder and started emptying its contents onto one of the clinic¡¯s beds.

    ¡°Weidao wants this back¡­ and this one.¡± The elder picked out several of the books and set them aside in a neat stack.

    Chen Rulan stepped forward to protect the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ manual. ¡°This one is mine. And the sect has plenty of copies of theses¡­ and he doesn¡¯t even know I borrowed this.¡±

    The collection was divided up between the men, one pile destined for return to the Scripture Hall, and one pile saved from confiscation by Rulan. The approved texts went back into Pengfei¡¯s bag.

    ¡°Did you leave anything in your cell? Or in the dormitory? Any personal items?¡± Elder Rulan asked.

    ¡°No¡­ I didn¡¯t come to Kunlun with much. This is everything I own, sir.¡±

    A seed of doubt was taking root in Pengfei¡¯s mind. Confusion.

    --This isn¡¯t like the last time I went down to the valley. What¡¯s going on?--

    Before he could ask, Chen Rulan was handing back the belongings and making ready to leave.

    ¡°Come along boy. I want to be in the valley before breakfast.¡±

    ¡°No need to rush! Take it easy, you old fool.¡± Chen Lei chided his martial brother. And to the disciple, the doctor gave more than his usual parting nod. ¡°Stay safe, boy.¡±

    ¡°Take care of yourself out there.¡± Chen Ji added.

    Pengfei bowed deeply to them, and then quickly ducked out the door behind Chen Rulan.

    They were back outside the sect¡¯s gate a minute later. The elder carried nothing and kept a brisk walking pace. Pengfei adjusted his luggage awkwardly but kept up with ease. He tried to strike up conversation with his teacher.

    ¡°You¡¯re coming to the valley with me, Elder Rulan?¡±

    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sure the other disciples will be glad to have your instruction this month. I know I¡¯m happy for it. Do you think we could review the ¡®Arhat Fist¡¯ tonight?¡±

    ¡°If you like.¡±

    ¡°Unfortunately, I haven¡¯t made much progress with the other martial ¨C ¡°

    ¡°Child, I¡¯m still waking up from a poor night¡¯s sleep. Let¡¯s walk in silence for a while.¡± Rulan said curtly, but not with any venom. Pengfei took the comment at face value and fell silent with an obedient nod.

    Rulan led the pair down the mountain path. Pengfei didn¡¯t say another word, deciding to let the elder initiate any further conversation. None came. The man never stopped for rest or water, but didn¡¯t use his qinggong either. They barely made it down the mountain by midday, let alone breakfast.

    Pengfei noticed Horse when they came within view of the sect¡¯s herding grounds. She wasn¡¯t particularly distinct in appearance, but the way she sprinted at ridiculous speed for no apparent reason was unmistakable. She had recently kept to the north, near the bunkhouse and paddock that had been built recently. But here she was, in what was still the domain of the goats, sheep, and yaks. And there was another mount tethered to the old outbuilding.

    A couple disciples stood to greet the elder, nodded amicably at Pengfei, when the pair approached.

    ¡°Ready the horses,¡± Chen Rulan said after waving off the other boys. He wiped sweat from his brow despite the cold air.

    ¡°Yes, sir.¡± Pengfei responded with an arched eyebrow but did as he was told. He was confused but pleasantly surprised that someone had transported his personal saddle here from the bunkhouse.

    First, the colt out front. Then a whistle brought Horse charging in. A quick rub of the neck was their greeting. She accepted her harness without complaint and even nipped at him to hurry the process along.

    There were saddle bags as well, brought out by the other boys. Pengfei didn¡¯t inquire about their contents, though they were heavy. He just lashed them to Chen Rulan¡¯s mount. Pengfei secured his own belongings to Horse, then stepped up in his stirrup and threw his leg over her back.

    ¡°Ready, Elder Rulan.¡±

    The man steadied himself at his animal¡¯s side and with great care climbed into his saddle with a huff. He took an oddly long look back at Kunlun¡¯s mountain.

    ¡°Let¡¯s go then. We have quite a way to travel still.¡±

    The elder dug his heels in and his colt trotted forward.

    ¡°The bunkhouse isn¡¯t that far, sir. It¡¯s just around the next bend in the valley.¡±

    Elder Rulan pursed his lips strangely. Took a deep breath. ¡°You and I¡­ we¡¯re heading farther north.¡±

 Chapter 49 - See You in a Couple Years (Day 331 of 1000)

    (Day 331 ¨C end of count)

    ¡°We¡¯re going farther north?  You mean to Hotan?¡±, Pengfei asked Chen Rulan¡¯s back.

    ¡°Farther.¡±

    ¡°There isn¡¯t anything past that except desert.¡±  Pengfei said in confusion.

    Chen Rulan shrugged.

    ¡°Okay¡­ when are we coming back?¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re not.¡±

    Pengfei urged Horse forward, came alongside the elder to look into the man¡¯s face.  ¡°What do you mean ¡®we¡¯re not¡¯?  When are we coming back to the sect?¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll be gone a long time.  The sect will have returned to Qinghai by the time ¨C ¡°

    ¡°We weren¡¯t supposed to leave for Qinghai for another two years.  Are you telling that¡¯s how long we¡¯re going to be away?¡±

    ¡°Probably.  Yes.¡±

    ¡°But ¨C ¡° Pengfei looked back to the mountain, toward the compound hidden somewhere on its slopes.  ¡°I didn¡¯t say goodbye to anyone.  Some of my friends are right up there, and I just walked past them without saying anything!¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re not to say anything to the ones down here either.¡±  The elder pronounced.

    ¡°What the hell is happening!?¡±

    ¡°Just¡­ be quiet.  Let¡¯s get through the day.¡±

    Pengfei started to protest but fell silent when he noticed how flushed and clammy Elder Rulan¡¯s face was.  His concern for the man warred with his outrage and confusion.  In the end, he let the man pull ahead on his mount and lead the way.

    Horse was reluctant to reduce her pace and took to zigzagging and bucking in order to entertain herself.  The animal¡¯s exuberance conflicted with Pengfei¡¯s dour mood.  He sulkily endured the gyrations for a time but eventually dismounted and let her run wild on her own while he walked behind.

    The elder looked back but gave no rebuke when he saw the disciple still trudging along behind him.

    The boy contemplated the news, reviewed the timeline he had been tracking in his mind.

    --It was supposed to be 1000 days until we left these mountains.  But it¡¯s been what¡­ 350?  A year?  And now I¡¯m off to who-knows-where.--

    There was no snow on the ground, despite the season.  Pengfei¡¯s boots stayed dry as he marched along.  He had just begun to plumb the deep implications of the elder¡¯s announcement, when they reached the larger encampment.   And another twist of the knife was waiting for him there.

    A small tent village had been erected near the bunkhouse.  Not unlike the one that the builders from Hotan had occupied when constructing the new buildings.  And the valley was crowded with animals.  Horses, and not just the ones that the sect had purchased.  Dozens more than there should be.  A gaggle of unfamiliar children were playing near the paddock.

    The Kunlun disciples were milling about as well, but the strangers stood out in their more colorful clothing.  And soon Pengfei realized these people weren¡¯t strangers at all.  They were a subset of the Tibetans who had been friends and trading partners to Kunlun.

    Pengfei and Chen Rulan were still a distance away, but the boy could recognize one of the figures as Dorje, talking with some of his clansmen outside a large and luxurious tent.

    --If he¡¯s here, then that means¡­--

    Pengfei whistled again, and Horse came galloping back to him.  He was in the saddle and speeding off before the elder realized what was happening.

    ¡°Pengfei!  Come back here!¡±, Rulan screamed

    He was scanning all the faces he could see, looking for a particular head of braided hair.  He rode straight through the camp.  The other disciples parted in shock as Horse ran between them and kicked up clouds of dust.  He pulled back on the reins to keep from barreling straight through the tent and tearing it up by the stakes..

    ¡°Is Pema here?¡±  Pengfei asked the startled Dorje.

    The man responded in the Tibetan language.  Incomprehensible.  If he said anything about his daughter, it was lost on Pengfei.

    ¡°Where¡¯s Pema?¡±, he tried again.

    ¡°She¡¯s not here.¡±  It was Xiaotong, walking up from the bunkhouse.  ¡°She came through the valley when the clan arrived, but she didn¡¯t stay.¡±

    ¡°Shit.¡±  Pengfei cursed and looked over his shoulder.  Chen Rulan was approaching the camp, clearly angry but taking his time.  A minute or so until he arrived, at most.

    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    The frantic disciple hopped down from his saddle and stood face-to-face with his friend.  They¡¯d grown closer as they convalesced together from the injuries Neng had inflicted on them.  Shared pain, shared betrayal.

    ¡°Who else is down here with you?¡±

    ¡°Me.¡±  Shutian said dryly from behind.

    ¡°What¡¯s going on?  Why is Chen Rulan riding with you?¡±

    ¡°I have no idea.  He¡¯s taking me somewhere, said we won¡¯t be back for two fucking years ¨C ¡°

    Shutian scowled and interjected.  ¡°We won¡¯t even be here in two years.¡±

    ¡°I know, I meant ¨C shut up a second ¨C he¡¯s taking me somewhere and we¡¯re not coming back.  He said, by the time we¡¯re done the sect will be back in Qinghai.¡±

    ¡°Shit.¡±  Xiaotong said.

    Pengfei nodded solemnly.  ¡°I didn¡¯t even get to say goodbye to anyone.  When I saw Pema¡¯s dad¡­ I guess I¡¯m never going to see her again.¡±

    ¡°Nice to know where we rank on your list of priorities.¡±  Shutian grumbled.

    ¡°I¡¯ll miss you guys, too.¡±  he said to the pair and clapped Shutian on the shoulder.  ¡°Even a miserable fuck like you.¡±

    ¡°Pengfei!¡±, Elder Rulan shouted as his colt walked into the camp.

    But the disciple ignored the man and drew his two friends into an embrace.

    ¡°We were just starting to get used to you, young master.¡±

    ¡°I know, Xiaotong.¡±

    The trio straightened up and looked at each other.

    ¡°It¡¯s not the end of the world.  We¡¯ll see you in Qinghai.¡±

    ¡°I know.  But¡­ I¡¯ve barely been here a year and half, now I¡¯ll be gone for two.  Just don¡¯t forget me while I¡¯m gone.¡±

    Chen Rulan had reached them.  His face was exasperated but his words understanding.   ¡°Come on boy.  We need to go.¡±

    Pengfei took another moment to be with his friends.  Two of them anyway.  There were others he was leaving behind without without so much as a word.  Nanxi.  The twins.  Jin Fan and the rest of the Discipline Hall.  Not to mention the elders who had shown him kindness.

    --I guess Chen Ji and Chen Lei were saying goodbye to me back in the Medicine Hall.--

    He reluctantly climbed up on Horse¡¯s back again.

    Other disciples were gathering, taking in the scene.  Elder Mo, apparently the chaperone for the month, was approaching.  But Rulan gave a parting wave to them all and parted the crowd, urging his colt forward.

    ¡°Tell the others¡­ I don¡¯t know what you should tell them.  That I didn¡¯t just fall off a cliff, I guess.¡±  Pengfei said.

    He fell in behind his escort and they made their way out of the camp.  But Shutian had one last point to make.

    ¡°I can¡¯t believe you¡¯re leaving us to take care of the herd by ourselves!  How are we going to make the move to Qinghai without you?!¡±

    Pengfei shrugged and gave a last wave to his friends.

    A few minutes later the elder supplied a belated answer.

    ¡°That¡¯s why we brought the Tibetans in.¡±

    ¡°Huh?¡±

    ¡°To help with the horses.  Teach the disciples to ride, get the herd to Qinghai.  It took a while to arrange.  That¡¯s why you were left alone in the cliffs for so long.¡±

    ¡°Why go to all that effort?  I could have managed things with the herd.  Wouldn¡¯t it have been easier to take a different disciple?¡±

    Chen Rulan checked how far the pair of them had gotten from the camp.  The horses were keeping a leisurely pace, but they had already carried their riders well out of earshot of the others.

    ¡°Pengfei, we know what you did.¡±

    ******************************************************************************

    Hotan was still cold despite being at the edge of the desert.  Better than the mountain highlands they had descended from, but Pengfei still wore his coat whenever he stepped outside.

    Now he walked toward the local blacksmith.  The same man who had made the short swords Chen Rulan had commissioned.  The Kunlun elder was no stranger to the forge but had still given the task to the Uyghur man instead of completing it himself.  Pengfei didn¡¯t know if it was a matter of convenience or expertise.  Regardless, he made his way there now.

    The clanging hammer was audible from down the street.  The heat of the flames buffeted him in the doorway.  But Pengfei pushed his way inside and nodded to the smith.

    The physical appearance of Hotan¡¯s natives could vary so wildly.  Some looked like they belonged in Shanxi province.  Others looked like the hailed from unknown lands never heard of in the Central Plains.  The smith was somewhere in between.  Thin, wiry.  Light colored hair, tinged with grey.  The hammer swung a few more times, then iron tongs and hot steel plunged into cold water, releasing a hiss of steam.  With his work quenched, the tools were set aside and the man walked to a worktable covered in a variety of projects.

    A moment later, he stepped forward and held out a sheath to Pengfei.  A single sheath.

    --Where¡¯s the other¡­--

    But when the Kunlun disciple claimed his property, he realized the truth.  He slid the blades free.  Both of them.

    --He changed hilts so the swords could sit on top of each other, blade to blade.  Fit inside a single scabbard.  Much more convenient--

    Pengfei held the swords up to the light from a window, inspected their edges.

    --Razon keen.--

    The dull practice blades had been sharpened into true weapons.

    He slid the knives back into their sheath, then stuffed that into front of his robes.  Money was produced from a sleeve, the last of the currency he had escaped Sichuan with.  The transaction was completed without words.  The language barrier prevented any more than a basic understanding.  But the smith still said something cheerful when Pengfei nodded in thanks and turned for the door.

    He wandered the streets slowly.  Inspected the merchants¡¯ stalls and storefronts.  It was a circuitous route back through the commercial district.  Back towards the tea vendor, and Kunlun¡¯s property next door.

    Pengfei was in no hurry to return.  And his lackadaisical stroll suited Elder Rulan¡¯s purposes as well.  The disciple recalled the awkward conversation on horseback as they came north through the valley.

    ¡®We know it was self-defense.  The cover-up was the problem.  Not that I can really blame you¡­ but you can¡¯t stay in Kunlun.  If the Strangers suspect what happened, if they wanted retribution, it could threaten everyone.  You need to leave.  You need to be seen leaving.¡¯

    So Elder Rulan had not restricted Pengfei¡¯s movements in town.  He¡¯d even encouraged the boy to go out and show his face around town.

    --Banished but free to roam.--

    He adjusted the short swords at his waist.

    --Ugh¡­I¡¯ll need to figure out how to wear these.  They¡¯re digging into my nuts.--

    Some passers-by glanced at him, at the blades he carried.  They were less noticeable than the jian he had worn on previous occasions but gave him a similar feeling of comfort.

    --Would probably do better with a jian though, if it actually came to a fight.  Have barely started to figure these out.--

    Pengfei turned down a familiar street, stepped through the front door of a rarely trafficked building.  No signboard hung above the frame, but it was only a matter of time.

    The interior had been greatly renovated recently.  Kunlun¡¯s former clinic had been leased to the next-door tea merchant for extra storage over the past decade.  But Chen Lei had plans to bring his medical students here soon.  Further their education by ministering to the local populace.

    Collections of medicinal herbs had been delivered and were now stored in jars and cabinets.  New beds filled the space but the clinic was currently vacant except for the pair from Kunlun making a short stop on their journey.

    Pengfei kept his eyes straight ahead as he moved from front door straight to the back.  He wanted to avoid Chen Rulan as much as he could.  And the man tended to stay inside.  Perhaps he would have gotten some warning if he had stopped to pay his respects to the Elder.

    ¡°What the hell is that?!¡±

    Pengfei froze in his tracks.  In the back courtyard of the property, where he kept Horse, was another beast.  Tall and strange looking.  Tan, shaggy fur, flapping gums on an ugly face, and two large humps on its back.

    ¡°It¡¯s called a camel.¡±  Chen Rulan said from somewhere inside.  ¡°Apparently, they¡¯re well suited to where we are going.  I told you I was going to find a more appropriate mount.¡±

    ¡°I thought you meant a different horse!¡±

    The man appeared at Pengfei¡¯s side. ¡°No, no¡­  what about you?  Are you sure you don¡¯t want me to get one for you?  The merchant said he¡¯d return our horses to Chen Lei when he comes to town.  You¡¯d have her back when we meet the others in Qinghai.¡±

    ¡°There¡¯s no way I¡¯m going to ride one of those¡­things.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s on your head then.  We¡¯ve dallied here long enough.  Be ready to leave tomorrow.¡±

    Elder Rulan went back into the clinic, leaving Pengfei standing and staring at the camel.  The animal seemed to be chewing something it never swallowed.  It maintained a perpetually surly look.   Horse was in a corner of the courtyard, eyeing the beast warily.

    ¡°I¡¯m glad we¡¯re of the same opinion on this creature!¡±, Pengfei shouted to the mare.  He skirted wide around the thing, made his way to Horse, and rubbed her neck reassuringly, spoke to her calmingly.  ¡°We¡¯re leaving tomorrow.  Heading north, according to the elder.¡±

    He looked in that direction.  The buildings blocked the view, but he could still see the desert sand in the air, where the wind was sweeping across the Taklamakan.